I ?r.- 



■ r 




Glass ) L -THVjn * 

Book A/ -5" 

I <J 1 7 






PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR: 

WITH 

THE PORTUGUESE WORDS PROPERLY ACCENTED 

ACCORDING TO THE LATEST AND BEST AUTHORITIES. 



By ANTHONY VIEYRA. 



THE TENTH EDITION, 
REVISED AND IMPROVED. 



" Necesse est enim inter quos mercaturte et contractuum sint, inter eos 
quoque sermonis esse commercial— Ubertus Folieta. 



LONDON: 
PRINTED FOR J. COLLINGWOOD, IN THE STRAND. 




19«7« 






^PC So & (* 



T. C. HANSARD, Patferno*ter-rovv Press. 



THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE, 



j4.S the usefulness of the Portuguese Language is so well 
known to all English merchants who carry on a general trade 
ivith the different Parts of the known world, it will be need- 
less to use any arguments here to prove it ; and I shall refer 
tvhat I have to say on the copiousness and energy of this 
language, to the Preface to my English and Portuguese 
Dictionary. # 

The reader will find in the FIRST PART of this Gram- 
mar, what is material as a foundation of the whole. 

At the end of the SECOND PART is a full explanation 
of' the Particles, on which I have bestowed more time and 
labour, because this subject has been hitherto much neglected, 
although the principal ornament and elegance not only of 
the Portuguese, but of every other language, chiefly consist 
in the proper arrangement and judicious interspersion of 
the words. 

* '" I m - i i i n r I ■ ■ ii ii i 11 i i n ■ i. i ii i n 1 — — wm» 

* A New Edition of which is now in the Press.— Jan. 1827. 



IV 

In the THIRD PART is a larger collection than hitherto 
published of the termsof T rave, War, Navigation, &c. 
which the present intercourse between the nations renders 
•particularly useful. 

Having found a great difficulty in procuring Portuguese 
books in this Country, I have been commonly obliged to 
furnish with part of my private collection those Gentlemen 
whom I have had the honour of assisting in the study of this 
language, during my residence here; therefore, in the 
FOURTH PART I have given some passages selected 
from the best Portuguese Authors, and which will, at the 
same time, facilitate the reading of their most eminent 
writers. 



ADVERTISEMENT 



TO 



THE NINTH EDITION. 



1 HIS new Edition of Mr. Vieyra's Grammar has been 
not only accurately marked with the proper accents, to 
facilitate the Pronunciation and the Intelligence of the 
Language, but even materially altered in the body of the 
Work. The accentuation is a matter of so much conse- 
quence in the Portuguese Language, that one accent used 
in the room of another often changes entirely the signifi- 
cation of the word ; as for instance in the words Avo and 
Av6 ; the former, when marked with an acute, meaning 
grand-mother, the latter with a circumflex, meaning grand- 
father. This interesting part, in which all the former 
Editions have been so deficient (using only the acute) 
has been scrupulously corrected in the present one. In 
that part which treats of the Pronunciation, some very 
necessary corrections have been introduced. The pro- 
nunciation of the ch, wrongly explained in the other 
Editions, is in. this brought to its real sound. 



VI 

New passages from the best Modern Writers have been 
substituted for some of the Ancient ones, to enable the 
learners to form a proper idea of the variations and progress 
of the Language, down to the present time. A new Vo- 
cabulary of the Military Words of Command and a fresh 
Translation of the Commercial Letters have also been 
inserted in this Edition. # 

Such are the principal alterations made in this Work, 
which, it is hoped, will meet with the approbation of the 
public. 

London , May 1813. 



* Various Improvements have been made in the present Edition, 
(Jan. 1827) particularly in a general correction of the Phraseology 
of the English part of the Grammar. 



CONTENTS. 



PART I. 

Page 
OF the Portuguese Alphabet, and the manner of pronouncing 

each separate Letter ------ 1 

Of the manner of pronouncing the Portuguese Letters as 

combined in Syllables - - - - » - .3 
Of the Articles - - ' - - - -*.-8 

Of the Nouns - - - 11 

Of the Pronouns - - - - - - -25 

Of Verbs - 44 

Of the Participles - - - - - - -113 

Of the Adverbs 114 

Of the Prepositions - - • - - - - -117 

Of the Conjunctions - - - - - - -118 

Interjective Particles - - - - - -120 

Some Abbreviations used in the Portuguese Language -121 



PART II. 

Of the Division of Syntax - - - - - - 122 

Of the Syntax of Articles - 126 

Of the Syntax of Nouns, and first, of the Substantives - 131 

Of the Syntax of Adjectives - - 132 

Of the Syntax of the Comparatives and Superlatives - 135 

Of the Syntax of Pronouns - - - - --13(5 

Of the Syntax of Verbs -139 

Of the Syntax of Participles and Gerunds - - » 1 52 

Of Prepositions -. - - - - - « - 154 



vm 

Of the Portuguese Orthography « - - « *. 191 

Of the Quantity of Syllables, and their Sound - - 209 

Etymology of the Portuguese Tongue from the Latin - 215 

PART III. 

The most elegant Phrases of the Portuguese Language -218 

A Vocabulary of Words most used in Discourse - - 249 

Of the Portuguese Coin • • ' « - - - - 306 

A Collection of Portuguese Proverbs - - 307 

Familiar Dialogues -----'« - 3l6 

Letters on Mercantile Affairs, &c, » « « - 331 

PART IV. 

Several useful and entertaining Passages, collected from the 

best Portuguese Writers ----- 356 



A NEW 



A NEW 

PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR, 



PART I. 



CHAP. I. 

OF THE PORTUGUESE ALPHABET, AND THE 
MANNER OF PRONOUNCING EACH SEPARATE 
LETTER. 

^HE Portuguese alphabet contains twenty-four 
letters, viz. 

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M, N, O, P, 
Q, R, S, T 5 U, V, X, Y, Z. 

The A is expressed by a sound like that of a in 
the English words at, rat, fat, &c. 

B is expressed by a sound like that of the be, in 
the first syllable of the English word Betty. 

C is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word celebrated. 

D is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of the English word declare. 

E is expressed by a sound like that which we give 
to the English a when we pronounce the word care. 

B 



2 PO RTUGUE&E 

F is expressed by the same sound as in English. 

G is expressed by a sound like that of the first 
syllable of s £l^p .English word generation. 

H is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- 
lish woi d /tohas't, if you cut off the two last letters 
st, and ksgpFthe accent on the second a, 

I is expressed by the sound of ce. 

J is gdR&wkjonsodnte, it is expressed by the sound 
of ee, and hasjj&e same power as the g before e or i. 

L, as in English. 

M, as in English. 

N, as in English. 

O ha* nearly the same sound as in the English 
worijj&re. 

P is expressed by a sound like that of pe in the 
English word penny. 

Q is expressed by a sound like that of the Eng- 
lish k. 

R is expressed by a sound like that of the English . 
participle erred, if you cut off the last letter d. 

S, "ns in English. 

T is expressed by a sound like that of tha in the 
English word Thames. 

U is expressed by a sound like that of oo in the 
English word poop. 

V is expressed by a sound like that of oo ; they 
call it also oo consoante, i. e. the v consonant. 

X is expressed by a sound like that of our pro- 
noun personal she, if you add an s to it, or as shees. 

Y is expressed by a sound like that of an tin the 
English word visible, and is called ypsiion. 

Z is expressed by the sound of our English zed, 
leaving out the d, or zea. 



GRAMMAR. 3 

Of the manner of Pronouncing the Portuguese Letters 
as combined in Syllables ; and first 

OF THE VOWELS. 

A, 

In Portuguese, is commonly pronounced like a 
in the following English words adapted, castle, &c. 
It is sometimes pronounced with less strength, and 
closely, as in dmbos, where the a is pronounced like 
a in the English word ambition. 

E. 

The letter e has two different sounds ; the one 
open like ai in daily : the other close, like that in 
the English word mellow. Examples of the former, 
fe, faith, pe, foot, &c. Examples of the latter, rede, 
a net, parede, a wall, &c. In this consists a great 
part of the beauty of the Portuguese pronunciation, 
which, however, cannot be learned but by long use, 
notwithstanding all the rules that can be^given. 



Is pronounced like ee in the English word steel, 
aco ; or like i in the English words still, afnda ; 
visible, visivel. 

O. 

This vowel has two sounds ; one open, as in the 
word do, pity, where the o is pronounced like our 
o in the word store ; the other close, as in the Por- 
tuguese article do, of, and the word redondo, round, 
where the o is pronounced like our u in turret or 
stumble. It is likewise in the different pronuncia- 
tion of this vowel that the greatest part of the beauty 
of the Portuguese pronunciation consists ; but it 
can be learned only by long use. 

b 2 



P ORTUGUESE 

U. 

The vowel n is pronounced like oo in English. 

Y 

Has the same sound as the Portuguese vowel i. 



OF CONSONANTS. 

B 

Keeps always the same sound as in English. 

C 

Before a, o, w, and the consonants /, r, is properly 
pronounced as k; but before e and i it takes the 
hissing sound of s : it takes also the sound of s before 
a, o, it, when there is a clash under it thus c. 

I could wish the learned in Portugal would follow 
the resolution of "the Royal Academy of Madrid, by 
expunging such dash, and placing the sin its stead, 
since they have in both languages the same hissing 
sound, which frequently occasions great confusion 
in the proper use of them. 

C before h is pronounced like sh in the English 
words shine, shape, &c. 

Double c is sounded only before e and i, the first 
with the sound of k, and the other with the hissing 
sound of s; as in accidente, accident, pronounce 
aksidente. 

D 

Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English. 

F 

Is pronounced always as in English. 

G 

Before the vowels a, o, u, and before consonants, 
is pronounced as in English : example, gosto, taste ; 
gaiola, cage ; grito, a cry. 



GRAMMAR. 5 

G. before e and i denotes the sound of J conso- 
nant. 

Gua sounds almost like the English wa : ex- 
ample, guarda, pronounce gwarda. 

Gue, gui, are pronounced as gue in the word 
guest, and gui in the word gift ; but in the verbs 
arguir and redarguir, it is pronounced as if it were 
written argueer, &c. 

H. 

The letter h is never aspirated nor pronounced 
at the beginning of words, as libra, an hour ; homem, 
a man : according to the modern orthography, all 
those words are written without an h. 

H, when preceded by a c, makes a sound with it 
like our sh. See the letter C, and also the letters 
L and N. 



Is pronounced like ourj consonant. 

K. 

The Portuguese have no k. 

L 

Is pronounced in Portuguese as in English, 
- Lh, is pronounced like g before an / in the Italian 
words figlio,foglio, &c. 

M 

Is pronounced as in English, when placed before 
a vowel with which it forms a syllable ; but, when 
it is at the end of words, and preceded by the letter 
e, it forms in Portuguese a nasal sound like that of 
the French words vin 9 wine ; pain, bread ; except 
soem, idem, from the verbs soar, toar, and some 
others. 

M at the end of words preceded by an a, o, or 
i, has a nasal obtuse sound, which can only be 
earned from the mouth of a mas r* 



6 PORTUGUESE 

N 

Before a vowel with which it forms a syllable, 
is pronounced as in English ; otherwise, it only 
gives a nasal sound to the vowel that precedes it. 

N before h has the same sound as gn in Italian, 
or in the French words Espagne, Allemagne. 

P 

And ph are pronounced as in English. 

Q 

Is pronounced like k: example, quero I am wil 
ling, pronounce hero. 

The vowel u after q in the word qua I, which 
must be uttered so smoothly as to render it almost 
imperceptible to the ear, is pronounced as in the 
English word quantity, in order to distinguish it 
from the substantive cal, lime. 

R 

And double r are pronounced as in English. 

S ♦ 

And ss are pronounced as in English. 

S between two vowels is pronounced like a z ; 
particularly in the words ending in oso, and esa, as 
amordso, cuidaddso, mesa, defesa, &. 

T 

Is pronounced as in English. 

y 

Is pronounced as in English. 

X 

Is pronounced as ah in English ; except in the 
word axioma, in which, according to Feyjo, the x is 
to be pronounced like c. 



GRAMMAR. 7 

X after the vowel e is pronounced like es, in the 
words, extencam, extenuddo, expulso> excellent e, and 
some other words. 

X between two vowels is pronounced like gz in 
the words exact aniente, exorndr ; except Alexandre, 
Paixdm, Puxo, bdxo, and some other words, that 
maybe learned by use. Care must be taken to pro- 
nounce the g so smoothly as to render it almost im- 
perceptible to the ear. 

Z 

Is pronounced as in English, but at the end of 
words it is pronounced like s, asrapdz, boy ; Fran- 
cez, French ; perdiz, partridge ; voz, voice ; luz, 
light, &c. 

The little dash which the Portuguese call til, is 
set by them over some letters instead of m; as be 
instead of bem ; conve instead of convent; hua instead 
of huma; and as it is then to be considered as an m, 
see what we have said about the pronunciation of 
that letter. 

The til," is also placed over the vowels, ao, aa, 
in the end of words, thus ao ad. See what we have 
said above of m at the end of words preceded by 
an a. 

It may be here observed that the curved mark," 
is the most perfect, though it is often found neces- 
sary, in English types, to substitute the plain in- 
stead of the curved. 



OF DIPHTHONGS. 

The meeting of two vowels in one syllable con- 
stitute what is called a Diphthong. The following 
are the Diphthongs of the Portuguese language. 

Aa, as in macda, an apple. 

Ae, as in caes, dogs. 

Ay, as in pay, father. 

Ai, as in mdis, more. 

Ao, as in pao, wood. 

Au, as in causa, a cause. 



8 PORTUGUESE 

Eo, as in do, heaven. 

Ey, as in ret/, king. 

Ei, as in amei, I loved. 

Eu, as en, I. 

Jo, as wo, he saw. 

Oe, as in poem, they put ; compoem, they com- 
pose ; meloes, melons, &c. 

Oj/, as in buy, an ox : /(1y, he was. 

On, as cMm, I give ; sou, I am. 

Ue, as aziies, blue : 

The two vowels in the following words must be 
plainly and distinctly pronounced : 

Ai, as in paiz, a country, pronounce pa-'iz. 

Ea, as mlamprea, a lamprey, pronounce lampre-a. 

la, as dementia, clemency, pronounce demenci-a. 

lo, as in navio, a ship, pronounce navi-o. 

Iu, as viuva, a widow, pronounce vi-uva. 

Oa, as Lisbon, Lisbon, jt?r<fa, a prow, pronounce 
Lisbo-a, &c. 

Oe, as J&tw, $<fe7W, from the verbs, toar and wir, 
pronounce tu-em, &c. 

Of, as roim, bad, pronounce ro-zw. 

O0, as cooperacdm, co-operation, pronounce, co- 
oper a cao. 

Ui, as ruina, ruin, pronounce ru-ina. 



CHAP. II. 

OF THE ARTICLES. 

THOSE particles called Articles, are properly 
prepositions, commonly put before nouns, to shew 
their gender, number, and case. 

These articles are definite or indefinite. 

Of the Definite Article. 

The definite article marks the gender, number,, 
and case, of the nouns which it precedes^ 



GRAMMAR. 9 

The English tongue has but one definitive article, 
namely the, which serves for both numbers. 

The Portuguese has two, viz. for the masculine 
and a for the feminine. 

The definite article has five cases, the nominative, 
genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative ; because 
the vocative in the nouns is designed and preceded 
merely by the particle 0. 

The Declension of the Masculine Article o. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nominative, o, the Nominative, os, the 

Genitive, do, of the Genitive, dos, of the 

Dative, ao, or o, to the Dative, aos, or os, to the 

Accusative, ao, or d, the Accusative, aos, or os, the 

Ablative, do. from or by the Ablative, dos, from or by the 

The Declension of the Feminine Article a. 

Singular. Plural. 

Nominative, a, the Nominative, as, the 

Genitive, da, of the Genitive, das, of the 

Dative, a to the Dative, as, to the 

Accusative, a, the Accusative, as, the 

Ablative, da, from the Ablative, das, from or by the 

Observe, that the Portuguese have an article for 
each gender, both in the singular and the plural. 

Of the Indefinite Article. 

The indefinite article may be put before the mas- 
culine as well as the feminine gender, before the 
plural as well as the singular number. 

The indefinite article has but four cases, the 
genitive, dative, accusative, and ablative. 

De may be put before a noun masculine as well 
as feminine, as huma cor 6a de rey, a king's crown ; 
the word rey is masculine ; hum chapeo de pdlha, a 
hat of straw ; the word pdlha is of the feminine 
gender. 

The indefinite article de is also put before the 
plural as well as the singular number ; example. 



10 PORTUGUESE 

huma corda de flu res, a crown of flowers ; hum prcito 
de arrdz, a plate of rice. 

Declension of the Indefinite Article. 

Genitive, de, of Accusative, a 

Dative, a, to, Ablative, de from 

The accusative of tb's article is not expressed in 
English : example, Eu conheci a she pay, I knew his 
father, eu conheci a sua may, I knew his mother. 

The indefinite article may also be put before infi- 
nitives, and then it signifies to ; as he tempo defalldr, 
dedormir, de ler, &c. it is time to speak, to sleep, 
to read, &c. eu vou a ver, a foliar, I am going to 
see, to speak. 

N. B. Whenever we meet with of and to in Eng- 
lish, followed by the, remember they are the indefi- 
nite articles, and then we must use the indefinite 
article de, or a, in Portuguese. 

When the verb is in the infinitive mood, and 
serves as nominative to the following verb, put the 
article o before it ; as o comer e o dormir sao as 
cousas mais necessarias nesta vida, eating and sleep- 
ing are the greatest necessaries of life. 

When the preposition in is followed by the article 
the, or by a pronoun possessive, as in the, in my, in 
thy, in his, we must render it in Portuguese by em 
o or no, em, os, or nos for the masculine ; and by em 
a or na, em as or nas, for the feminine : example, in 
the garden, em o jar dim, or no jar dim; in the street, 
em a rua or na rua ; in thy book, em o teu or no teu 
livro ; in his bed, em a sua, or na sua cdma, &c. 

When after the preposition with, which in Portu- 
guese is expressed by com, we find the article the, 
or a pronoun possessive, as with the, with my, &c. 
we may say, com o, or co, com a or coa, com os or 
cos com as or coas: example, with the prince, com 
o or co principe ; with the sword, com a or coa espdda ; 
with the eyes, com os or cos olhos ; with my books, 
com os or cos me us livros, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 11 

When the preposition with is followed by a pro- 
noun possessive, and this by a noun of quality or 
kindred, as with your majesty ', with your highness, 
with your excellency, with his brother, &c. with must 
then be rendered by the Portuguese word com, as 
com vossa, majestade com vossa alteza, com seu irmao, 
without using the article. 

Observe, that sometimes the dative and accusative 
of the indefinite article are not expressed in English, 
particularly before pronouns ^personal and proper 
names ; example, convem a nbs, it behoves us ; 
Antonio matou a Pedro, Anthony killed Peter. 



CHAP. III. 

OF THE NOUNS. 

THE Portuguese nouns have various termina- 
tions, as will appear hereafter. 

They have but two genders, the masculine and 
feminine. 

The Portuguese nouns have no variation of cases, 
like the Latin, the article only distinguishes the 
case. 

Of Nouns ending in a ; and of their Declension, 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. a rainha, the -* Norn, as rainhas, the 

Gen. da rainha, of the J Gen. das rainhas, of the 

Dat. a rainha, to theF ^ Dat. as rainhas, to thej 

Ace. a rainha, the \ 8 Ace. as rainhas, the 

Voc. 6 rainha, Oi g- Voc. 6 rainhas, O 

Abl. da ou pella rainha, \ Abl. das ou pellas rainhas 
from or by the J from or by the 

We have already observed that the Portuguese 
nouns have no variation of cases ; therefore there is 



12 PORT UGUESE 

no occasion to display more examples of their 
declensions, as it is only necessary to change the 
article according to their gender. 

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in a. 

Nouns ending in a are generally of the feminine 
gender ; as rosa, a rose ; janella, a window, &c. 
Except dia, a day, planeta a planet ; and other 
nouns ending in a, belonging to a man ; as mariola, 
a porter ; jesuita, a Jesuit : those derived from the 
Greek are likewise masculine ; as dogma, epigrdmma, 
clima ; except scientific names, as mathematica, 
theologia, Sec. 

Except also from this general rule some nouns 
that have the accent upon the last syllable ; as alva- 
ra, a charter, or a prince's letters patent ; Para, one 
of the captainships of the Portuguese America, &c. 

Observe, that the plural of nouns ending in a is 
formed by adding the letter s to the singular; as 
likewise the plural of all nouns that terminate in 
vowels. 

Observe also, that nouns ending in aa are of the 
feminine gender, and form their plural as those 
ending in a. 

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in e. 

Nouns ending in e are generally of the masculine 
gender ; as dente, a tooth ; valle, a valley ; ventre 
the womb, &c. 

The exceptions are ft, faith ; fonte, a fountain ; 
chdve, a key ; torre, a tower ; ewe, a fowl ; came, 
flesh or meat ; gente, people ; mbrte, death ; neve 
snow ; noite, night ; po?ite 9 a bridge; piste, plague ; 
parte, part ; serpente, a serpent ; lebre a hare. 

Except also ail names of virtues, vices, faculties, 
and those expressive of the passions of the mind ; as 
virtude, virtue ; santidade, holiness ; bojidade, good- 
ness; vaidade > vanity ; ocksidade y idleness* &c* 



GRAMMAR. 13 

Thirdly, iddde, age ; velhice, old age ; rusticiddde, 
rusticity ; capaciddde, capacity ; feliciddde, happi- 
ness ; sbrte, fortune ; arte, art ; drvore, a tree ; 
fertiliddde, fertility ; side, thirst ; sibe, a hedge ; couve, 
cabbage ; herddde, a farm or manor ; diamine, a 
chimney ; parede, a wall ; saude, health ; rede, a net ; 
mare, the tide ; fibre, fever ; gale, a gallery, &c. 

Of the Gender of Nouns ending in i. 

Nouns ending in i are masculine; as Lvtasi, a 
rapture ; nebri, a hawk, &c. 

Of Nouns ending in o. 

Nouns ending in o are of the masculine gender ; 
as livro, a book ; filho, a son ; brdco, an arm ; vestido, 
a garment ; espelho, 2l looking glass, &c. Except 
ndo, a ship ; jilho, a fritter or pancake ; eiro, an 
eel. 

Of Nouns ending in u. 

All nouns ending in u are masculine ; as peril, a 
turkey ; grou, a crane. 

Of Nouns ending in y. 

Nouns ending in y are of the masculine gender ; 
as rey, king ; pay, father ; boy, ox, &c. except ley, 
a law ; may, a mother. 

Of the other Terminations of Nouns, or of those ter- 
minating in Consonants. 

1. All nouns ending in at are masculine; as 
sindl; a sign or token ; sal, salt. Except cal, lime, 
which is feminine, and has no plural. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the letter / of the singular into es ; as sindes from 
sindl ; animdes from animal. 

2. Nouns ending in ar are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as ar air. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as ares from ar. 



14 PORTUGUESE 

Some nouns ending in as in the plural are femi 
nine, and have no singular ; as migas, excquias, 
&c. 

3. Nouns ending in az are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as rapaz, a boy ; except paz, peace. The 
plural is formed by the addition of es to the singular. 

4. Nouns ending in el are masculine; as annel ; 
a ring ; papel, paper, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into is; a?ineis, from anntl: 
papas, from papel. 

5. Nouns ending in em are of the masculine 
gender ; as ho?ne??i, a man ; hem, benefit, &c. 
Except ordem, order ; viagem, a voyage ; vir- 
ge??i, a virgin, &c. but salvage??!, a savage, is com- 
mon. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the m of the singular into ?is ; as homens from ho- 
mem, Sec. 

6. Nouns ending in er are of the masculine 
gender ; as pode?\ power ; prazer, pleasure, &c. 
Except colher, a spoon ; mulher, a woman. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as colheres, from colher. 

7. Nouns ending in ez are of the masculine 
gender ; as freguez, a parishioner or a customer ; 
mez, month ; arnez, levez, revez, &c. Except 
surdez, deafness ; torquez, vez, Sec. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as freguezes, from f?*eguez ; but 
tez has no plural. 

8. Nouns ending in il are of the masculine gen- 
der ; asfunil, a funnel ; barril, a barrel. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into s, as funis, from fimil, &c. 
Except acjuatil, fatil, pe?tsil, &c. which change the 
il into eis in the plural, asfacies, fromfacil. 

9. Nouns ending in i?n are of the masculine gen- 
der, as espadim, a little sword. 



GRAMMAR. 15 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the m of the singular into ns, as espadins from es~ 
padim. 

10. Nouns ending in ir or yr are of the mas- 
culine gender ; but mdrtir or martyr, a martyr, is 
common. * 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 

11. All nouns ending in iz are of the mascu- 
line gender ; as apprendiz, an apprentice ; nariz, 
uose ; verniz, varnish ; matiz, a shadowing in paint- 
ing ; chafariz, chamariz, &c. Except abo'iz, perdiz, 
raiz, codornix, matriz, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as perdizes from perdiz. 

12. Nouns ending in ol are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as anzbl, a hook ; sdl, the sun, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the / of the singular into es, as anzbes from anzol, 
&c. 

13. Nouns ending in om are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as soin, sound ; dom, gift, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the m of the singular into ns, as sons from som, &c. 

14. Nouns ending in or are of the masculine gen- 
der ; as amor ; love, temor, fear, &c. Except dor, 
pain ; cor, colour, &c. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular, as amores from amor. 

Nouns ending in os are of the masculine gender ; 
as Decs, God. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by changing 
the s into zes, as De'ozes, from Deos. 

15. Nouns ending in oz are of the masculine gen- 
der : as albernoz, a Moorish coat ; arroz, rice ; algoz, 
hangman, &c. Except noz, a walnut ; voz, voice ; 
fbz the mouth of a river. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 



16 PORTUGUESE 

16. Nouns ending in id or um are of the mascu- 
line gender; as sul, the south ; Saul, Saul, a proper 
name of a man ; atum, tunny-fish. 

The plural of those ending in ul, according to the 
learned Bluteau, is formed by changing the /of the 
singular into es, as sues from sul ; azues, from azul, 
blue, &c. Except consules from consul, a consul. 

The plural of those ending in um, is formed by 
changing the m of the singular into ns, as atuns 
from at urn. 

17. Nouns ending in uz are of the masculine 
gender ; as arcabuz, an arquebuss. 

The plural of these nouns is formed by adding es 
to the singular. 

18. Nouns ending in ao are of the feminine gen- 
der ; as mad, hand ; composigad, composition, ora- 
cao, oration, &c. Except pad, bread ; anao, a 
dwarf; ougad, a hand-worm ; trovao, thunder ; es- 
quadrad, a squadron ; piao, a child's top ; borrad, 
a blot with Ink ; papelao, paste-board ; chad, the 
ground, quinhao, a share. 

There is no certain rule for the formation of the 
plural of the nouns ending in ao ; because some 
change the ao, of the singular into aes, as Alemdes, 
from Alemao, a German ; capitdes, from capitad, a 
captain ; cues, from cad, a dog ; paes, from pad, a 
loaf, &c. Some change the ad of the singular into 
aos ; as cidadaos, from cidadad, a citizen ; chris- 
taos, from christao, a christian ; cortezdos from cor- 
tezad a courtier ; villdos, from villad, a villain, &c. 
Some change the ad of the singular into des ; as es- 
quadrdes, from esquadrad, a squadron ; trovdes, from 
trovao, thunder ; conclusdes, from conclusao, a con- 
clusion ; oragdes, from oracad, an oration ; and 
generally all the Portuguese nouns may be easily 
made English, by changing their termination gad 
into the English termination tlon, as declinagad, 
declension or declination, consider agad, considera- 
tion, &c. and these are of the feminine gender. 



GRAMMAR. 17 

19 All nouns signifying a male must be of the 
masculine gender ; as duque, duke ; marquez, a 
marquis ; conde, count ; and those denoting a female 
are always feminine. 

Two general rules may be formed from what has 
been said concerning the formation of the plural of 
nouns, viz. 

I. That all nouns ending in any of the vowels 
have their plural formed by adding the letter s to 
the singular. 

II. That the plural of nouns ending in az, ez, iz, 
oz, nz, is formed by adding es to the singular. 

Of A ugmentatives. 

The Portuguese have their augmentatives formed 
by the increase of one or two syllables, which 
they add to the end of their nouns, and which serve 
either to augment the signification of nouns, or to 
declare a thing contemptible ; thus, from homem, 
a man, they form, homemzarro, a great strong 
man ; tolo, a fool, toleirao, a great fool, &c. and 
some others that may be learned by use. They have 
also their augmentatives for the feminine; as 
molherona, a great stout woman ; toleirona, &c. 

There are a great many nouns that appear, by 
their termination, to be augmentatives, though they 
are not ; as, forao, a ferret ; atafona, an ass or a 
horse-mill, &c. 

Of Diminutives. 

The diminutives lessen the' signification of their 
primitives. 

The diminutives in the Portuguese language are 
always formed by changing the last vowel of the 
primitives into mho ; but they denote either small- 
ness of things, or kindness and flattery ; as bichinho, 
a little worm, from b/cho, a worm ; coitadmho, from 
coitddo, a poor little man ; bonitinho, a little pretty 

c 



18 PORTUGUESE 

person or thing-, from bonito, pretty. Sometimes 
they are tor in eel by adding zinho to the primitives ; 
as cad zinho, a little dog, from can, a dog, irmaoz'inho, 
dear little brother, from innao, &c. 

The diminutives that serve for the feminine have 
their termination in inha, or zinha ; as mabzinha, 
a little hand, from mad, a hand ; cabecinka, a little 
head, from cabeca, a head. It may be seen from the 
last example, that the diminutives serving for the 
feminine and ending in inha, are formed by chang- 
ing the last syllable a of the primitive into inha. 

Observe that many nouns appear to be diminu- 
tives without being so ; as moinho, a mill ; espinha, 
a fish bone. 

Note, the diminutives in Portuguese convey some- 
times a bad meaning, and denote contempt. 

Of Nouns Adjective. 

All adjectives ending in o make their feminine by 
changing o into a; as douta, from douto, learned ; 
but mdo, bad, makes ma in the feminine. 

Those which end in ao have their feminine in aa ; 
as, saa, from sao, healthy ; loucaa, from loucao, brisk, 
gay, beautiful ; meaa, from meao } middling, ordi- 
nary. 

Those ending in e are common to both genders ; 
2^,f6rte ) strong, &c. 

Those which end in m make their feminine by 
adding an a to the masculine ; as, huma, from hum, 
one ; alguma, from alg/cm, some, &c. and sometimes 
by changing the m into a ; as, commua, from corn- 
mum, common ; boa, from bom, good. 

Those ending in u make their feminine by adding 
an a to the masculine, as nua, from nu, naked ; 
crua, from cru, raw. 

Those ending in ez are common to both genders ; 
as cortez, civil, kind ; capaz, capable, &c. except 
some which make the feminine, by adding a to the 



GRAMMAR. 19 

masculine; as, Franceza, from Francez, French; 
Portugueza, from Portuguez, Portuguese. 

Espanhol, Spanish, makes Espanhola in the femi- 
nine: but generally those which end in / are com* 
mon to both genders; as affdvel, affable; cruel, 
cruel, &c. 

Of the Comparison of Adjectives. 

The comparison of adjectives is the way of in- 
creasing their signification by certain degrees, which 
are three, viz. the positive, comparative and super- 
lative. 

The positive lays down the natural signification 
of the adjective ; as, nobre, noble ; grande, great* 

The comparative raises it to a higher degree, by 
comparing it with the positive, which in Portuguese 
is performed by the adverbs mdis, more ; menos, less ; 
as, mdis nbbre, more noble ; menos bella, less hand- 
some. 

There are some adjectives which do not admit of 
ma is or menos before them ; as celeste, nascido, com- 
prddo, desterrddo, &c. 

There are four Portuguese comparatives which 
end in or : they may also be expressed by mdis> 
more, before their positive ; as, 

Mayor, greater, mdis grande. 
Menor, less, mdis pequeno. 
Peor, worse, mdis roim. 
Melhbr, better, mdis bom. 

To which may be added superior, superior ; in- 
ferior, inferior ; deterior ; and some others. 

Observe, that there can be no comparison made 
without the word than ; and that this word is ex- 
pressed in Portuguese by que. Ex. Mdis cldro que 
o sol, clearer than the sun ; mdis brdnco que a neve, 
more white than the snow. The particle que is 
sometimes preceded by the word do. Ex. isto he 
mdis do que eu Ihe disse, this is more than I told him ; 

c 2 



20 PORTUGUESE 

he mdis prudent e do que par See, he is more wise than 
it appears. 

N. B. The comparatives superior, inferidr, and 
some others, do not require que before the second 
term but the dative of the articles, viz. i, as, do ; 
aos: Exam p. O dutro he superior a este, the other 
is superior to this. 

When the Portuguese have a mind to heighten 
their comparisons, they make use of, mwto mais, a 
great deal or much more ; as also of, muito menos, a 
great deal or much less. Ex. Cccsar he muito mdis 
estimddo que Po??ipeo, Caesar is much more esteemed 
than Pompey : Pompeo fci muito menos feliz que 
Ccesar, Pompey was much less happy than Caesar. 

Of the Superlative. 

The Portuguese superlative is formed from the 
noun adjective, by changing the last letter into 
issimo for the masculine, and into issima for the 
feminine : thus, from bello is formed bellissimo and 
bellissima, most handsome. But sometimes the 
superlative is formed by adding muito, very, to the 
positive ; as, mutto alto, very tall. 

Observe that some superlatives are differently 
formed ; as frigidissimo, from frio, cold ; amicissimo, 
from amigo, friend ; antiquissimo, from antigo, an- 
cient : capacissimo, from capdz, capable ; nobilissimo, 
from nobre, noble ; acerrimo, from here, sharp, or 
acerb ; riquissimo, from rico, rich ; fertilissimo, from 
fertil, fruitful ; bonissimo, from bom, good ; jidelis- 
simo, from jiel, faithful ; sacratissimo, from sagrado, 
sacred, &c. 

The most is expressed also in Portuguese by o 
mais and a metis ; as the most fair, or fairest, o mais 
bello, a mdis bella. But there are some adjectives 
which do not admit of mwto, very, o mais, or a 
mais; as mdrto, desterrado, &c. 

Observe, that by changing the last letter of the 
superlatives into amente, superlative adverbs are 



GRAMMAR. 21 

composed ; as, from doutissimo, learned ; doutissima- 
mente, most learnedly, &c. But the positive adverbs 
are formed by adding mente to the feminine of the 
positive ; as doutamente, learnedly, from dduta, the 
feminine of douto ; prudentemente, prudently, from 
prudente, prudent. 

Of Numeral Nouns ; and first, of Cardinal. 

The cardinal nouns are such as express the num- 
ber of things ; as, 

twenty-two 
twenty- 
three &c. 
... thirty 
. . . forty 
... fifty 
. . . sixty 
seventy 
... eighty 
... ninety 
a hundred 
two hundred 
three thousand 
a thousand 
two thousand 
a million 
half a score 
... a dozen 
a score 
... two score 
three score 

Observe, that all the cardinals that are adjective 
nouns are not declined, being of the common 
gender, except hum huma, one ; doas duas, two ; 
and those composed of cento, a hundred ; as duzentos, 
two hundred ; quatro centos, quatro centas, four 
hundred, &c. and when the feminine huma is 
preceded by a, and followed by a outra, then huma 
signifies first, and a outra, secondly. 

The plural, huns, humas, is taken sometimes 
instead of alguns, algumas, signifying some ; as huns 
reys, some kings ; humas rainhas, some queens. 



Hum 


. . 


one 


Vinte e dous ... 


Dous 


... 


two 


Vinte e tres, #c. 


Trte 


... 


three 




Quatro 


... 


four 


Trinta 


Cinco 


.. . 


five 


Quarenta . . . 


Seis 


.... 


sixty 


Cincoenta ... 


Sete 


... 


seven 


Sessenta 


O&to or oito 


eight 


Setenta 


Nove 


... 


nine 


Oitenta 


Dh 


... 


ten 


Noventa 


O'nze 


... 


, ... eleven 


Cem 


Doze 


... 


... twelve 


Duzentos 


Treze 


... 


... thirteen 


Trezentos ... th 


Quatorze 




... fourten 


Mil 


Quinza 


... 


. . . fifteen 


Dous mil ... i 


Dezaseis 


... 


... sixteen 


Milhao or conto 


Dezasele 


... 


seventeen 


Huma dezena 


Dezouto 


... 


...eighteen 


Huma duzia 


Dezanovc 


... 


...nineteen 


Huma vintena 


Vinte 


... 


. . . twenty 


Duas vintenas 


V*inte e hum 


twenty- one 


Trte vintenas 



22 PORTUGUESE 

N. B. Cento loses to before a noun, either mascu- 
line or feminine, and the n is changed into m ; 
therefore you must say, cent soldddos, not cento 
soldddos. It only retains to and n when it is followed 
by another number, as cento e hum, &c. a hundred 
and one, &c. and when it is substantive. 

N. B. Sometimes cento is made a substantive ; as 
hum cento de castdnhas, one hundred of chesnuts ; 
likewise all the cardinal numbers, when preceded 
by an article, or by another noun of number, as o 
cinco de pdos, the five of clubs ; hum sete, a seven. 

The cardinal number is rendered into English 
by the ordinal, when it expresses the day of the 
month, or the date of any act ; as, chegdu a quatro 
de Mayo, he arrived the fourth day of May. 

Ordinal Nouns, 

Ordinal nouns are such as express the order of 
things ; as, 



Primeiro 


first 


Decimo-oitavo eighteenth 


Segundo 


... second 


Decimo -nono 


nineteenth 


Terceiro 


... third 


Vigesimo, or 


ventesimo twen- 


Quarto 


. . . fourth 




tieth 


Qumto 


... fifth 


Vigesimo-primeiro one and 


Sexto 


... sixth 




[twentieth 


Setimo 


... seventh 


Trigesimo 


thirtieth 


Oitavo 


... eighth 


Quadragesimo, or quarante- 


Nono 


ninth 


simo 


fortieth 


Dicimo 


. . . tenth 


Quinquagesimo fiftieth 


Undecimo, or onzeno, eleventh 


Sexagesimo 


sixtieth 


Duodecimo 


twelfth 


Septuagesimo 


seventieth 


Decimo-tercio 


... thirteenth 


Octagesimo 


eightieth 


Decimo- quarto 


... fourteenth 


Nonagesimo 


ninetieth 


Decimo-quinto 


fifteenth 


Centesimo 


the hundredth 


Decimo-sexto 


... sixteenth 


Millesimo 


the thousandth 


Decimo-septimo 


seventeenth 


U'ltimo 


the las^ 



The proportionable numbers are, simplez, dupli- 
cddo or dobrado, triplicado or triplice or tresdohrado, 
quadruplicado or quddruplo, centupio; a single, 
double, threefold, fourfold, a hundredfold. 



GRAMMAR. 23 

The distributive nouns are, hum a hum, one by 
one ; dous d dous, two by two. 

In English all ordinal numbers may be formed 
into adverbs : but in Portuguese they have only 
primeiramente, and secundariamenie, or segunddria- 
mente, first, secondly ; and to express thirdly, 
fourthly, &c. they say, em terceiro lugar, em quhrto 
lugar, in the third place, in the fourth place. 



A Method (for those who understand French) to learn 
a great many Portuguese words in a short time. 



We must observe, that the French syllable cha is generally 
expressed in Portuguese by ca, rejecting the h. Examp. 
Charbon, charite chastete, chapon, chapelle, chapitre, &c. 
the Portuguese say, carvao cariddde castiddde, capao, 
capella cap'ttulo, &c. Observe also the following rules. 

French words ending in ance, or ence ; as, Constance, 
vigilance, clemence, prudence, &c. in Portuguese end in 
ancia, or incia ; as constancies vigildncia, clemencia, pru- 
dencia, &c. 

Agne makes anha ; montagne, montdnha ; campagne, 



Ie makes ia; corned ie, comedia. Here the accent is 
upon the e, and not upon the i, as in French; poesie, 
poesia. 

Otre makes 6ria; gloire, gloria ; victoire, victSria. 
Ure makes ura ; imposture, impostura ; figure, figkra* 
Ison makes zao ; raison, razao ; prison, prizao 
On makes ao ; charbon, carvao ; baron, barao. 
Ulier makes uldr : regulier, regular; particulier, par- 
ticular. 



French Terminations ending in Portuguese in e 



Ant , ante ; vigilant, vigilante ; amant, amdnte. 
Ent, adjective, ente ; prudent, prudente ; diligent, dili- 
gente. 



24 PORTUGUESE 

T6 makes ddde; purete, puridddc; liberality, libcrali- 
dcide. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguese in vel. 
Able, vel ; louable, louvdvel ; aimable, amdvel. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguese in ez. 

Ois, names of nations, ez , Francis, France's ; Anglois, 
Inglez. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguese in o 

Ain, and ten, names of nations, dno ; Romain, Romdno • 
Italien, Italidno ; Napolitain, Napolitdno. 

Aire, drio : salaire, saldrio ; temeraire, temerdrio. 

Eau, eo, chapeau ; chapeo. 

Ent, substantive, ento ; sacrement, sacram$nto. 

JEux, oso; genereux ; generoso ; gracieux, gracioso. 

If, ivo ; actif, activo, passif, passivo. 

C, co ; pore, porco ; Turc, Turco. 

French Terminations ending in Portuguese in or. 
Eur, or ; terreur, terror ; bumeur, humor ; chaleur, color : 



Change of Terminations of the Verbs and Participles. 



Er, in the infinitive mood of the first conjugation, makes 
dr ; aimer ; amdr ; chanter, canldr. 

Ir makes ir 9 in the infinitive mood ; as, partir, partir -, 
sentir, sentir. 

Oir makes er in the infinitive mood; as, concevoir 
conceber. 

The participles in e make ado ; aime, amddo ; parle 
fallddo. 

The participles in t make ido : dormi, dormido ; menti, 
mentido. 

The participles in u make do; as, concu, concebido, entendu 
entendido. 

There are a great many Portuguese words that have no 
manner of analogy with the French, which prevent these 
rules from being general. 



GRAMMAR. 25 

CHAP. IV. 

OF PRONOUNS. 

THE pronouns are personal, conjunctive, mixed, 
positive, demonstrative, interrogative, relative, or 
improper. 

Of Personal Pronouns. 

The pronouns personal are eu and nos for the first 
person ; they serve for the masculine and the femi- 
nine. 

Tu and vos for the second : these serve also for 
the masculine and feminine. 

Mile, for the third person of the masculine gen- 
der ; and Hies in the plural. 

E'lla, for the third person of the feminine gender, 
makes in the plural Mas. 

The pronouns personal are declined with the ar- 
ticle indefinite, de, a., a, da. 

The Declensiom of Personal Pronouns. 

FIRST PERSON. 
Singular Number. Plural Number. 



Nom. Eu, I 
Gen. de mini, of me 
Dat. a mim, to me 
Ace. a mim, me 
Abl. de mim, or por mim 
from or by me 



Nom. n6s, we 
Gen. de nos, of us 
Dat. a n6s, or nos, us 
Ace. a n6s, us 

Abl. de n6s, or por n6s, from 
or by us 



With me is rendered by comigo ; and sometimes 
they add the pronoun mesmo to it ; me \s expressed 
by me in the Portuguese ; as speak to me, fallai-me ; 
tell me, dizei-me : send me, mandai-me ; write to me, 
escrevei-me ; elle disse-me, he told me, &c. 

With us is rendered in Portuguese by com nosco. 



26 PORTUGUESE 

Us is rendered by ?ws. Examp. tell us, dizei-nos ; 
give us, ddi-nos ; show us, mostrdi-nos : elle disse-nos 
he told us, &c. In these examples us is not a pro- 
noun personal, but conjunctive, as you will see 
hereafter. 

SECOND PERSON. 



Singular. 

Nom. tu 9 thou 
Gen. de ti, of thee 
Dat. a ti, or te, to thee 
Ace. a ti, or te, thee 
Abl. de ti, or por ti, from or 
by thee 



Plural. 

Nom. v6s, ye or you 
Gen. de v6s, or v6s, you 
Dat. a v6s, or wfe, you 
Ace. a vos t or do's, you 
Abl. de vos, or por vos, from 
or by you 

With thee is rendered by comtigo ; and sometimes 
they add to it the pronoun mesmo. You, ox yourself, 
after imperatives are rendered by vos, and not vos ; 
as, be you contented, contentdi vos ; show yourself, 
mostrdi-vos : hide yourself, escondei-vos. 

Thee, or thyself, are expressed after imperatives by 
te; as mostrate, show yourself. 

With you is rendered in Portuguese by com vosco. 

third person. (For the Masculine). 



Singular. 

Nom. elle, he or it 
Gen. delle, of him or of it. 
Dat. a elle, to him, or to it 
Ace. a tile, him, or it 
Abl. dklle, or por elle, from 
or by him, or it 



Plural. 

Nom. #/es, they 
Gen. delles, of them 
Dat. a elles, to them 
Ace. a elles, them 
Abl. delles, or por #/es, from 
or by them 

The Portuguese have no particular pronoun, as 
the English it, for things that are inanimate. 

The pronoun him, or to him, when joined to a 
verb, is always rendered in Portuguese, by Ihe, and 
them, or to them, by Ihes. 

With him is rendered in Portuguese sometimes by 
com elle, and sometimes by comsigo, to which they 
add the pronoun mesmo. 



GRAMMAR. 



27 



third person, (Feminine). 



Singular. 

Nora, ilia, she or it 
Gen. delta, of her or of it 
Dat. a ella, to her or to it 
Ace. a ilia, her or it 
Abl. delta, or por ella, from 
or by her or it 



Plural. 

Nom. ellas, they 
Gen. deltas, of them 
Dat. a e//as, to them 
Ace. a ellas, them 
Abl. deltas, or por e7/as, from 
or by them 



The pronoun herov to her, when joined to a verb, 
is always rendered in Portuguese by Ihe, and them, 
qr to them, by Ihes; as will be seen in the pronouns 
conjunctive. 

With her is rendered in Portuguese by com ilia 
or comsigo. 

Of the Pronoun si, himself, or one's self. 

There is another pronoun personal that serves 
indifferently for the masculine and feminine : this 
is si, one's self. It has no nominative. 

Gen. de si, of one's self, himself, or herself. 

Dat. a si, to one's self, Sfc. 

Ace. a si, one's self, tyc. 

Abl. de si, por si, from or by one's self. 

It is joined with the pronoun mismo or mesma; 
as de or por si mesmo, by himself; por si mesma, or 
de si mesma, by herself; o homem nao dma senao a 
si mesmo, man loves himself only ; quern nao hS bom 
senao para si, nao he hem que viva, who cares for no- 
body but himself, does not deserve to live ; o vicio 
he ahomindvel de si mesmo, vice is in itself hateful ; 
a terra de si, or de si mesma he fertil, the earth is 
fruitful of itself. 

Observe that they join also the pronoun mesmo to 
pronouns personal, as the French do with their pro- 
noun mime, viz. 



28 PORTUGUESE 

Eu mhmo, myself n6s mesmos, ourselves 

Tu mismo, thyself v6s mesmos, yourselves 

Eflle mSsmo, himself elks mesmos \ i . 

E'lla mtema, herself tllasmtsmas ' / themselves 

o h6mem mesmo, man himself; a misma virtude, virtue itself. 

1st. Observe, that mesmo with the article is also 
an adjective, signifying the same; thus o mesmo, a 
mesma, os mesmos, as mesmas, the same, relating to 
some nouns expressed or understood, 

2dly. Note, Also that the adjective outro, other, 
is joined to the plural of the pronouns personal, / 
and thou ; thus, nbs outros, we ; vos outros, you. 

3dly. Comsigo may be rendered in English (as we 
have said above) by with him and with her ; and it 
may be rendered also by with them in the plural ; 
and sometimes by about him, about her or about 
them. Exam p. Elle or el la, nunca traz dinhtiro 
comsigo, he, or she, never has money about him, or 
about her. 

Of Conjunctive Pronouns. 

The pronouns conjunctive are so called, because 
they always come immediately before or after the 
verb that governs them. 

The pronouns conjunctive bear a great resem- 
blance to the pronouns personal ; the pronouns per- 
sonal are, 
Eu, I ; tu, thou ; elle, he ; n6s, we ; v6s, ye ; elks, they. 

There are seven pronouns conjunctive, viz. me, 
to me, or me : te, to thee, or thee : se, to himself, 
or himself, to herself, or herself; Ihe to him, or him, 
to her, or her ; nos, to us, or us ; vos, to you, or you, 
Ihes, to them, or them. 

EXAMPLE. 

Isto me agrdda, this pleases me ; Ae-me necessdrio, I want. 

Dios te v$, God sees thee. 

Ella se louva, she praises herself. 



GRAMMAR. 29 

Eu lhe direi, I will tell him, or I will tell her. 
Eu Ihes prometti, I promised them : as well for the mas- 
culine as the feminine. 

The pronoun conjunctive, lhe, is always put after 
the verb, when it is in the imperative mood ; as 
dizei-lhe tell him ; cort di-lhe as azas, cut his wings ; 
but when the verb is in some other mood, it may 
be put either before or after it ; as elk lhe cortou, or 
elk cortou-lhe a cabega, he has cut off his head. The 
same observation applies to the other pronouns con- 
junctive. 

The pronoun conjunctive, se, is sometimes fol- 
lowed by me, Ihe, &c. as offerSce-se me, it is offered 
to me ; representou-se Ihe, it was represented to him, 
&c. 

1st Note, that the pronouns conjunctive are 
very often joined to a verb, preceded or followed 
by the verb havir. Examp. Dar-lhe hei tdnta pan- 
cada, or eu Ihe hei de dar tdnta pancada, que, &c. I 
will cudgel him so much, that, &c. 

2dly. Lhe is sometimes rendered in English by 
you. Examp. Que lhe parece aquillo ? What do you 
think of that ? assenta no que lhe d'tgo, be persuaded, 
or believe what I tell you. 

Of Mixed Pronouns, 

There are some pronouns in Portuguese which 
are composed of the pronouns personal and con- 
junctive, and which therefore are called mixed. 

These pronouns are formed by changing the letter 
e of the pronoun conjunctive into o for the mascu- 
line, and a for the feminine ; thus, to me of it, in- 
stead of me o, or me a, you must say, mo or ma. In 
like manner, instead of lhe o or lhe a you must say, 
Iho or lha, Sec. as you may observe in the following 
pronouns mixed, or rather contracted, 



30 PORTUGUESE 

thee of it 
mo, m. -^ or -^ or 

or him to thee. 



mos, 
mas 



{me of it ftr 

or to < 

it or him to me. Lit 

f me of it r tb 

, f. < or ta < 

Lit or her to me. ^it 

{me of them j 

or tos, ra. < 

them to me. tas f. L 



na, t. < or «< or 

or her to thee. 



of it f thee of it 

or ta < or 

r her to me. ^it or her 

me of them f thee of them 

or 
them to thee. 
selo, m. "Tit to himself, to herself, or to themselves. 
sela, f. / it to herself, to himself, or to themselves. 
selos, m. 1 them to himself, to herself, or to themselves, 
se/as, f. J them to herself, to himself or to themselves. 
fto him, or to her of it. 
Iho, m.< or 

Lto him, or to her 
fto him, or to her of it 
Ma, f. < or 

I. it to him, or to her. 
Mos, m."l to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 
lhas, f. j to them of it, to him of them, or to her of them. 
nolo m. 1 us of it, or it to us. 

nola f. j us of it, or it to us. 

nolos, m. p. \ them to us. 
nolas, f. p. j them to us. 

I ' f >you of it, or it of you. 

s, . p. ly 0U f th em? or them to you. 



aofos, f. p. 



EXAMPLES, 



Para dar-lho, to give it to him or to her. 

Dai-mo, give it to me. 

Eu to darei, I'll give it you. 

Entrego-to, I deliver it to you. 

Dize-lho, you tell it him, or her. 

Entrega-lhos, deliver them to him, or to her. 

La selo haja, leave that to himself. " 

Elk nolo disse, he told us of it. 

Eu volos mandarei, I'll send to you. 

If the verbs are in the infinitive, the pronouns 
mixed may be put either before or after the verbs : 
as, para dizermo, or para mo dizer, to tell me it ; 
but if the verbs are in the gerund, the pronouns 



GRAMMAR. 31 

mixed must be transposed ; as, dizindowo, and 
not mo dizendo, in telling me it. 

You mnst make use of these pronouns, both mas- 
culine and feminine, according to the gender of the 
thing named, sent or delivered, and not of the per- 
son to whom the thing is said, sent, given, &c. 

Of Possessive Pronouns. 

Pronouns possessive, so called, because they de- 
note that the thing spoken of belongs to the person 
or thing they are connected with, are of two sorts, 
absolute and relative. See the remarks hereafter. 

The English have no article in the nominative 
before the pronouns possessive ; but the Portuguese 
have, as, my, o meu, a minha, fem. Plur. os meus, 
as minhas, fem. 

The pronouns possessive in Portuguese are the 
following : 

Sing, meu, m. minha f. ") 
Plur. mens, ra. minhas, f. J ' 
Sing, teu, m. tua, f. 1 , 
Plur. tins, m. tuas. £.J tla *' 

Sing, seu, m. "I,. 

■di ° a > his or its. 

Jrlur. seus, m. J 

Sing, sua, f. *[, 

Plur. s6as,t.J hel0rltS - 

Sing. n6sso, m. nossa, f. 1 

' * >our. 
5 f-J 



Plur. nossos, m. nossas, 
Sing. vSsso, m. vossa, f 
Plur. vossos, m. vossas, f. fy onr ' 

The pronouns possessive are declined with the 
definite article o for the masculine, and a for the 
feminine. 

EXAMPLE. 
Singular. 
Nora, o meu livro, my book. 
Gen. do meu livro, of my book. 
Dat. ao meu livro, to my book. 
Ace. meu livro, my book. 
Abl. do ou pello mH livro, from or by my book. 



1 



32 PORTUGUESE 

Plural. 
Nom. os mSus livros, my books. 
Gen. dos mens livros, of my books. 
Dat. aos mens livros, to my books. 
Abl. dos ou pellos mens livros, from or by my books. 

Decline all the other masculines after the same 
manner, and their femi nines by the article a; as 
my house ; a minha casa ; of my house, da minha 
casa, &c. 

Note, you must not use the definite article when 
the pronouns possessive precede nouns of quality, 
as well as those of kindred, but the indefinite arti- 
cle de, a, &c. 

EXAMPLE. 

Vossa magestade, your majesty. 

De vossa magestdde, of your majesty, &c. 

M£u pay, my father. 

De men pay, of my father, &c. 

From the above examples it appears that nouns 
declined by the definite article have no article in 
the nominative. 

Though the definite article is sometimes used be- 
fore nouns of kindred, yet we ought not to use it, 
according to the old proverb : tu vivendo bonos, scri- 
bendo sequare peritos. 

Seu is sometimes used instead of vosso and vossa, 
in the polite way of speaking : thus, tenho o seu 
livro, I have your book ifaliei ao seu criddo, I spoke 
to your servant ; os seus olhos sao formosos, your 
eyes are handsome. 

Remarks upon the Possessives. 

The pronouns possessive absolute always come 
before the noun they belong to. We have ex- 
pressed them above. 



GRAMMAR. 33 

Pronouns possessive relative are so called because 
they not being joined to their substantive, suppose 
it either expressed before, or understood, and are 
related to it. They are the following: 

Maso. Fem. 

Sing. MSu mmha \ m hie 

Plur. Meus minhas J 

piuf: tZ» £L } thine 

Sing. S$u sua, hers 

Plur. Sens suas, theirs 

Sing. NSsso nossa 1 

Plur. Nossos n6ssas J 

Sing. VSsso vossa *5 

Plur. V6ssos vSssas J ? 

To express in Portuguese it is mine, it is thine, 
&c. we must say he meu, he teu, &c. 

The pronouns possessive absolute do not agree 
in gender with the noun of the possessor, as in 
English, but with that of the thing possessed ; as, 
a may dma a seu filho, the mother loves her son ; 
o pai dma a sua filha the father loves his daughter. 
Thus the pronoun masculine seu, in Portuguese, is 
sometimes rendered by her in English, and the 
feminine sua by his. 

The same observation is to be made upon the 
possessives relative, according to the gender of the 
noun that is understood ; we say of a hat (for in- 
stancej belonging to a lady, he o seu, it is hers; 
because the noun understood, viz. chapeo, hat, is of 
the masculine gender. 

We have already said, that seu and sua, are some- 
times rendered into English by your, when they 
are absolute : they are also sometimes rendered into 
English by yours, .when they are pronouns relative, 
speaking politely of any thing belonging to a gen- 
tleman or lady, he o seu, or he a sua, it is yours ; 



34 PORTUGUESE 

but if the gentleman or lady is not present, or if 
they are not directly spoken to, though present, 
then the pronouns seu and sua must be rendered 
into English by his or hers. 

Note, That the pronouns possessive absolute, in 
Portuguese, agree also in number with the noun of 
the thing possessed ; hence we say a sua histbria, 
its history, speaking of a kingdom, province, &c. or, 
his history, speaking of any history composed by a 
man; or her history, speaking of that written by 
a woman ; or, their history, speaking of that written 
by several hands, or of several people. From this 
example it will be seen, that the Portuguese have 
no particular pronoun possessive for things that are 
inanimate, corresponding with the English pronoun 
its. Hence, finally, it follows, that when the Portu- 
guese possessives seu and sua are relative, they are 
rendered into English by his, or hers, or theirs, ac- 
cording to the gender and number of the noun of 
the possessor that is understood. 

The third pronoun personal, dtlle, of him, delles 
of them, delta, of her, deltas, of them are sometimes 
added, to denote more plainly whose thing it is 
they speak of; as o seu llvro, delles, their book ; as 
suas paldvras delta, her words, &c. 

The possessives absolute are left out when they 
are preceded by a verb, or by a pronoun conjunc- 
tive, which sufficiently denote whose thing it is 
they speak of; the article alone being sufficient; 
as devo-lhe a vida, I owe my life to him, or to it; 
dbe-me a barriga, my belly aches. 

When the pronouns possessive absolute are before 
nouns of different genders in the same sentence, and 
with which they are grammatically construed, they 
ought to be repeated ; as, seu pai e sua may, his fa- 
ther and mother : not seu pai e may. 

The pronoun possessive absolute is also used 
as in the following case, when we use the pos- 



GRAMMAR. 35 

sessive relative ; a friend of mine, hum dos meus 
amigos. 

The possessives minha, tua, sua, nossa, vossa, may 
be also relative, but with a different meaning. Ex- 
amples ; LevarSi a minha avdnte, I will insist upon 
it, I will obtain it ; elle levara a sua avdnte, he will 
insist upon it, he will do it ; ievdi a vossa avdnte, 
go on with your resolution ; fazer das stias, to play 
tricks, to dodge. 

Os meus, os sens, &c. signify my relations, or 
my friends, thy relations, or thy friends ; as, os seus 
nao o querent his parents or relations do not like 
him ; deixa-o hir com os seus, let him go with his 
people, his countrymen, &c. 

When the pronoun possessive is accompanied 
by a pronoun demonstrative, we do not put the 
article in the nominative ; we do not say o este meu 
livro, but este meu livro, this book of mine. But 
in all 'other cases the indefinite article is used ; as 
d'este or deste vosso livro, &c. 

Of the Pronouns Demonstrative. 

They are called pronouns demonstrative, because 
they serve to point out or demonstrate any thing 
or person ; as, this book, este livro; that man, aquelle 
homem. 

There are three principal demonstratives, viz. 
este, this ; esse, that ; aquelle, that ; este shews the 
thing or person that is just near or by us ; esse 
shews the thing that is a little farther, or near the 
person ; and aquelle shews what is very distant 
from the person who speaks, or is spoken of, and 
is expressed in English by that there, or yonder. 
Esse, essa, are used in writing to any person to ex- 
press the place or town wherein he dwells ; as tenho 
fallado nessa cidade com muitosia migos, I have spoken 
in your city with many friends. 

d2 



36 



PORTUGUESE 



These Pronouns are declined thus 
Masc. Fern. Neut. 



Singular - 



Plural 



Singular 



Plural 



Singular 



Plural 



'Nom. iste 


esta 


isto 


this 


Gen. desta 


desta 


disto 


of this 


Dat. a este 


a Ssta 


a isto 


to this 


Ace. este 


esta 


isto 


this 


. Abl. deste 


desta 


disto 


from this 


' Nom. estes 


estas 




these 


Gen. destes 


destas 


-«-> 
3 


of these 


Dat. a estes 


a estas 




to these 


Ace. estes 


estas 


o 


these 


l Abl. destes 


destas 


fc 


from these 


Masc. 


Fem. 


Neut. 




r Nom. esse 


essa 


£sso 


that or it 


Gen. Jesse 


dessa 


disso 


of that, &c. 


Dat. a esse 


a essa 


a isso 


to that 


Ace. &se 


essa 


isso 


that 


.Abl. rfessc 


dessa 


disso 


from that 


'Nom. esses 


essas 


u 


those 


Gen. desses 


dessas 


•4J 

3 


of those 


Dat. a esses 


a essas 




to those 


Ace. esse* 


essas 


o 


those 


,Abl. desse* 


dessas 


fc 


from those 


Masc. 


Fem. 


Neut. 




'Nom. aquelle 


aquella 


aquillo 


that 


Gen. daquelle 


daquella 


daquillo 


of that 


i Dat. a aquelle 


a aquella 


a aquillo 


to that 


Ace. aquelle 


aquella 


aquillo 
daquillo 


that 


. Abl. daquelle 


daquella 


from that 


' Nom. aquelles 


aquf.llas 


% 


those 


Gen. daqutlles 


daquellas 


■«-» 


of those 


h Dat. a aquelles a aqutllas £ 


to those 


Ace. aquelles 


aquellas 


o 


those 


.Abl. daquelles 


daquellas 


A 


from those 



GRAM M A R. 37 

There is an elision of the vowel of the indefinite 
article in the genitive and ablative of the pronouns 
este and esse both in the singular and plural ; as 
deste, destas, &c. instead of de este, de estas ; so also 
in the neuter as disso f disto, instead of de isso, de 
isto. The same observation applies to the pronoun 
aquelle, wherein you will see another elision besides, 
in the dative case. 

Both Portuguese and Spaniards have demon- 
stratives of the neuter gender ; though they do not 
agree with the substantives, as in Latin ; they do 
not say isto homem, but este homem, this man. But 
the word causa, thing, is always understood, though 
the neuter demonstrative does not agree with it ; 
so that it is indifferently said isto, or esta causa, 
this thing ; isso, or essa cdusa, that thing, &c. 
Example, isso he or essa he a causa de que nos 
estdmos falldndo, that is the thing we are speaking 
of; aquillo he or aquella he a cdusa que vbs deveis 
fazer, that is the thing you must do, &c. 

When the preposition em, in, comes before the 
pronouns demonstrative, the vowel is cut off, and 
the consonant m is changed into n; thus, instead 
of em este, em esta, em, tsto em isso, em aquillo, they 
write and pronounce neste, nesta, nisto, riisso, &c. 
in this, in that, &c. 

The words atro, Sutra, are often joined to the 
pronouns demonstrative, cutting off the final e; as 
estautro, essoutro, aquellautro. Example ; Estoutro 
homeyn, this other man ; estoutra mother, this other 
woman ; essautro homem, that other man. 

The pronoun mesmo, the same, is also frequently 
joined to the demonstrative ; as este mesmo homem, 
this very same man ; aquillo mesmo, that very same 
thing. 

Aqui, alt, and la are sometimes added to the de- 
monstrative, or to the noun that comes after it, in 
order to specify and particularize it still more ; as 



38 PORTUGUESE 

est& hbmem aqui, this man ; aquella molher la, that 
woman : aqui, denoting a near, or present object ; 
and la, a distant and absent one. 

The pronouns aquelle, aquella, aquelles, aqu6llas, 
when they relate to persons, and are followed by the 
relative que, are rendered into English by he who, or 
he that, sheivho, or that, theyivho, or that ; as aquelle 
que dma a virtude he feliz, he who loves virtue is 
happy ; jaquelle que desprezao a sciencia nao conhecem 
o valor della y they who despise learning know not 
the value of it. Observe, that when aquelle, aquella^ 
&c. are preceded by este, esta, &c. then este signi- 
fies the last thing or person spoken of, and aquelle, 
&c. the first ; as Carlos foi griinde, Frederko ambi- 
cioso, este valente, aquelle poderoso, Charles was 
great, Frederic ambitious, the first powerful, the last 
courageous. 

The pronoun possessive absolute his, her, their, 
construed in English with a noun followed by the 
pronoun relative who or that before a verb, is ren- 
dered in Portuguese by the genitive of the pronouns 
aquelle, aquella, aquelles, followed by que, and the 
possessive is left out ; as, all men blame his manners 
who often says that, which himself does not think, 
tudo o mundo censura o procedimento daquelle que tern 
por costume dizSr o que nao tern no pensamento ; Pro- 
vidence does not prosper their labours that slight 
their best friends, a Providencia nao abencda o tra- 
balho daquelles que desprezao os seus melhores amigos. 

The English pronoun such followed by as or that 
(but not governed of the verb substantive to be), is 
also rendered into Portuguese by aquelles que, or 
aquelles taes que, or aquelle que ; as, such as do not 
love virtue do not know it, aquelles or aquelles taes 
que nao amao a virtude, nao a conhtcem. 

The pronouns isso, isto, aquillo, before que, are 
Englished by what ; as elle diz aquillo que sabe^ he 
says what he knows. 



GRAMMAR. 39 

Aquelle is also used to shew contempt ; as que 
quer aquelle homem ? What does that man desire ? 

Of the Pronouns Interrogative. 

The pronouns interrogative serve to ask ques- 
tions, and are as follows ; who, what, which, quern, 
que, quaL 



EXAMPLE. 



Quem he ? 

Quem vos disse tsso ? 

Que quereis ? 

Com que se sustenta ? 

Que estais fazindo V 

De que sefaz isto ? 

Que Iwro he este f 

Que negScios tindes ? 

Que cdsa he ? 

De qualfallais vos 9 

Qual dttles f 

Quem or qual dos dous f 



him- 



who is it ? 
who told you so ? 
what will you have ? 
what does he maintain 

self with ? 
what are you doing ? 
from what is this done ? 
what book is this ? 
what affairs have you ? * 
what house is it ? 
which do you speak of? 
which of them ? 
which or whether of the two ? 



These pronouns are thus declined 



Singular and Plural. 
Masculine and Feminine. 
Nom, quem who 
Gen. de quem of whom 
Dat. a quem to whom 
Ace. quem whom 
Abl. de quem from whom. 



Singular and Plural. 
Masculine and Feminine. 



Nom. que 


what 


Gen. de que 


of what 


Dat. a que 


to what 


Ace. que 


what 


Abl. de que 


from what 



Qual is used in speaking both of persons and 
things, and is declined thus : 



Singular. 
Nom. qual 
Gen. de qual 
Dat. a qual 
Ace. qual 
Abl. da qual 



Masculine and Feminine, 
which or what 
of which or what 
to which or what 
which or what 
from which or what 



40 PORTUGUESE 

Plural. Masculine and Feminine. 

Nom. quaes which or what 

Gen. de quaes of which or what 

Dat. a quaes to which or what 

Ace. quaes which or what 

Abl. de quaes from which or what 

Observe, that when the word quer is added to 
quern, or qual, it quite alters the meaning ; quemquer 
signifying whoever, or any person, and qualquer 
any one, whether man, woman, or thing; and 
sometimes they add the participle que to them, as 
quemquer, que, &c. 

Of the Pronouns Relative. 

Pronouns relative are those which shew the rela- 
tion, or reference, which a noun has to what follows 
it. They are the following ; qual, which, que, that 
or which ; cujo, whose ; quern, who. 

Qual, in a sense of comparison, is followed by tal, 
and then qual is Englished by as, and tal by of 

N. B. When qual is only a relative, it is declined 
with the definite articles o or a. 

The pronoun que may be relative both to persons 
and things, and is common to all numbers, gen- 
ders, and cases ; as o livro que, the book which ; os 
livros que, the books which ; a carta que, the letter 
which ; as cartas que, the letters which ; o mestre 
que ensina, the master who teacheth ; a molher que 
tenhoy the wife that I have ; o homem queeu dmo, the 
man whom 1 love ; it is thus declined : 

Singular and Plural. 

Nom. que which or who 

Gen. de que of which or of whom 

Dat. a que to which or to whom 

Ace. que which or whom 

Abl. de qui from which or from whom 



GRAMMAR. 41 

Que is sometimes a conjunction ; as crtyo que 
hirfi, I believe that I shall go. See the Syntax. 

The relative quern, who, is only relative to per- 
sons ; but in the nominative case of the singular is 
rendered into English by he who y or who; as, quern 
falla deve consider ar, &c. he who speaks ought to 
consider, &c. eu nab sei quern, I know not who. 

Observe, that quern is common to all numbers, 
genders, and cases ; but it has no nominative in the 
plural. 

Quern is declined thus : 

Singular and Plural. 
Norn, quern he who, or she who, or whoerer. 

Gen. de quern of whom. 
Dat. a quern to whom. 
Ace. quern whom. 

Abl. de quern from whom. 

Quern is sometimes a particle disjunctive, and then 
it signifies some; as, quern canta,e quern ri, some sing, 
and some laugh ; and sometimes it serves for excla- 
mation ; as quern me dera estar em casa! how fain 
would I be at home ! 

Cujo Ctija, is declined thus : 

Masc. Fem. 

/-Norn, cujo cuja whose. 

\ Gen. de cujo de cuja of whose. 

Sing.< Dat. a cujo a cuja to whose. 

I Ace. cujo cuja whose. 

vAbl. de cujo de cuja from whose. 

The plural is formed by adding s to the singular ; 
as, cujos, cujas, whose, &c. 

Note, that cujo must be followed by the noun or 
term which it refers to, and with which it agrees in 
gender, number and case ; as, a pessoa cuja reputa- 
gao vos admirals, the person whose reputation you 
wonder at ; o ceo cujo soccorro nunca falta, heaven, 
whose assistance never fails ; cuja bella cara, whose 
fair visage : cujas bellezas, whose beauties ; a cujo 



42 PORTUGUESE 

phi, to whose father ; de cfgos irmaos tenho recebido, 
from whose brothers I have received. Observe also 
that cujo is not to be repeated, though the terms 
which it refers to be of different number ; as, cuja 
valia e Sbras, whose value and deeds. 

Note, that, o, a, os, as, lo, la, 8$c. are also pro- 
nouns relative, when joined to verbs. See the 
Syntax, chap. iv. 

Of the Improper Pronouns. 

These pronouns are called improper, because in- 
deed they are not properly pronouns, although they 
bear a great resemblance to pronouns, as well as to 
adjectives. . They are the following : 

Hum one. 

Alguem somebody. 

Algum some. 

Ninguem nobody. 

Nenhum none. 

CadaMm every one, each. 

Cdda every. 

Outro, outra other. 

Outrem another, 

Qualquh, any one ; whether man, or woman, or thing. 
Qualquer dos d6us, either of the two, or whethersoever of 

the two. 
Quemquer, whoever, or any person. 
Todo, all, or every. Tal, such &c. 

Hum has two terminations, viz. hum, huma; and 
in the plural it makes hurts, and hbmas. It is de- 
clinable with the indefinite article. 

Alguem has only one termination, and is only 
declinable in the singular with the indefinite article. 

Algum, has two terminations, viz. algum, alguma; 
and in the plural, alguns, algumas. It is declinable 
with the indefinite article. 

Ninguem, has only one termination, and is only 
declinable in the singular with the indefinite article ; 
ninguem o ere, nobody believes it. 



GRAMMAR. 43 

Nenhum has two terminations, viz. nenhumas, nen- 
humci) and in the plural nenhuns, nenhumas ; and is 
only declinable with the indefinite article ; nenhum 
homem, no man ; de nenhum effeito, of no effect. 

Cadahum has two terminations, viz. cadahum, ca- 
dahuma; but it has no plural, and is only declinable 
with the indefinite article. 

Cdda has but one termination. It has no plural, 
and is only declinable with the indefinite article : 
cdda dia, every day ; cdda mez, every month. 

Outro has two terminations, viz. Sutro, outra; and 
in the plural, outros, Sutras. It is declinable both 
with the definite and indefinite articles. 

Outrem has only one termination. It has no 
plural, and takes the indefinite article. 

Qualquer has but one termination. It makes 
quaesquer in the plural, and is declined with the 
indefinite article. Qualquer is said both of persons 
and things. 

Quemquer has but one termination. It has no 
plural, and is declined with the indefinite article. 
It is rendered in English by any body : quemquer vos 
dird any body will tell you. Quemquer is used in 
speaking of a person. 

Todo has two terminations, viz. todo, toda ; and 
in the plural, todos, todas. It is declinable with 
the indefinite article. It is sometimes taken sub- 
stantively, and then it signifies the whole ; as o 
tddo he mayor que a sun. parte, the whole is bigger 
than its part. 

Tal has only one termination. It makes tdes in 
the plural, and it is declined with the indefinite 
article. It is common to the masculine and to the 
feminine genders ; and sometimes it is joined to 
qual ; as, tal qual elle he, such as it is. 

Tal supplies sometimes the place of the person 
whose name is not specified ; as, hum tal velhdco deve 
sir castigddo, such a rogue ought to be punished. 



44 PORTUGUESE 



CHAP. V. 



OF VERBS. 



THE verb is a part of speech which serves to 
express that which is attributed to the subject in 
denoting the being or condition of the things and 
persons spoken of, the actions which they do, or 
the impressions they receive. 

The first and the most general division of Verbs 
is into personal and impersonal. 

A verb personal is conjugated by three persons. 



Sing. 
Plur. 



A verb impersonal is conjugated by the third 
person of the singular number only ; as chove, it 
rains, convem, it behoves. 

A verb, considered in regard to syntax, is of four 
sorts, viz. active, passive, neuter, and reciprocal. 

Some of the verbs are regular, and others irre- 
gular. 

Some are also called auxiliary verbs. We shall 
give their definitions in their proper places. 

Before you begin to learn the conjugations, it 
will be proper to observe, that all the verbs may be 
conjugated with the pronouns personal, e?/, tu, elie, 
&c. or without them. 



I 


IXAMPLE. 


Su dmo 


I love 


tu dmas 


thou lovest 


elps. dtfia 


he loves 


nos amdmos 


we love 


v6s amdis 


ye love 


elles dmao 


they love 



GRAMMAR. 45 

Of tht Auxiliary Verbs. 

The auxiliary verbs are so called, because they 
aid the conjugation of other verbs. They are 
four in Portuguese, viz haver, th\ to have; ser, 
estar, to be. The auxiliary verb ser, to be, is also 
called the verb substantive, because it affirms what 
the subject is, and is always followed by a noun 
that particularizes what that subject is ; as sir rico, 
prudente, dduto, to be rich, wise, learned, &c. 



Colligation of the Auxiliary Verb, 
ter, or haver, to have. 

THE INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 



( eu Unho, ou hey 
Sing.< tu tens, ou has 
C ille t6m, ou hd 


I have 




thou hast 




he has or hath 




C nos tSmos, ou havimos, ou himos 


we have 




Plur.< vos Undes, ou haviis, ou hiis 


you have 




I Hies tern, ou had 


they have 




Preterimperfect 






feu tinha, ou hav'ta, ou Ma 


I had 




Sing.< tu tinhas, ou havias, ou hias 


thou hadst 




[elle tinha, ou havia, ou hia 


he had 




Cn6s t'mhamos, ou haviamos, ou hiamoi 


i we had 




Plur.< v6s tinhieis, ou havieis, ou hieis 


you had 




Relies , tmhad, ou haviao, ou Jiiao 


they had 




Preterperfect definite. 






Ceu tive ou houve 


I had 




Sing.< tu tiveste } ou houv&ste 


thou hadst 




[ille tSve, ou houve 


he had 




Cnos tivemos, ou houvemos, 


we had 




Plur.< v6s tivestes, ou houvestes 


you had 




littles tiverao ou houverao 


they had 





46 PORTUGUESE 



{i 



Preterperfect. 

lu tenho tido I have had 

Sing. -} tu tens tido thou hast had 

elle Um tido he has had 

nos temos tido we have had 

Plur.-^ v6s tendes tido you have had 

elles tern tido they have had 

Preterpluperfect. 

he tinha tido I had had 

Sing.^ tu tinhas tido thou had had 

elle tinha tido he had had 

C nos tinhamos tido we had had 

Plur.< vos tinhieis tido you had had 

y^elles tinhao tido they had had 

This tense may also be conjugated thus ; tivera, 
tiveras, tivera, tiveramos, tivereis, tiverao. 

First Future. 

feu terei, ou haver ei I shall or will have 

Sing.< tu terds, ou haverds thou shait or wilt have 

y.elle terd, ou haverd he shall or wilt have 

f nos teremos, ou haver emos we shall or will have 
Plur.< vos tereis, ou havereis ye shall or will have 

X^eLles ter do, ou haver do they shall or will have 

Second Future. 
Sing, eu hei de ter, ou haver, <fec. I must have, fyc. 

Third Future. 

Sing, eu haverii de ter, ou haver, fyc, I shall be obliged 
to have, <^c. 

Fourth Future. 
Sing, eu havia de ter, ou haver, fyc. I was to have, 6fc. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Sino- / ^ m tu \ ou hqf as tu have thou 

°'\tenha elle, ou hdja elle let him have 

i tenhdmos, ou hajdmos nos let us have 

Plur.-< ttnde, ou havei, vos have ye 

t t&nhao, ou /w/ao e#es, let them have 



GRAMMAR. 47 

The imperative has no first person, because it is 
impossible to command one's self. 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS, 

I join them together because their tenses are similar. 

Present. 

Cque eu tinha, ou hdja that I have, or that I may have 
Sing.< que tu tenhas, ou hdjas thou hast, or may est have 

\que elle tenha, ou hdja he has or -may have 

f que nos tenhdmos, ou hajdmos we have, or may have 
Plur. < que vds tenhdis, ou hajdis ye have, or may have 

(. que illes te'nhad, ou hdjao they have, or may have 



Sing. 



Plur. 



First Preterim perfect. 

[que eu tivira ou tive'sse 

houvera, ou houvesse 
que tu tiveras ou tivesses 

houveras ou houvesses 
que elle tivira ou tive'sse 

houvera ou houvesse 
que nos tivtramos ou tiv6ssemos 

houveramos ou houvessemos 
que v6s tivereis ou tivisseis 

houvireis on houvesseis 
que illes tiverao ou tivissem 

houverao ou houvissem 

Second Preterimperfect. 



that I had, or I 
should, would, 
c^c. have, fyc. 



that we had, or 
we should, 
would, (Sfc. 
have, fyc. 



I should, would, or 
could have, (f*c. 



{ew term ou haveria 1 

fe* terms ou haverias > 

e£Ze £eWa ou haveria J 

C nos teriamosow. haver iamos^ i ,1 ,i 

Plur. -j vfe ferfeu ou Wnm I we sho "l d ? wou ?' 
Ifc^aSoute^o J or could have ' &c - 

Preterperfect. 

f #we ew £e^a i?$Gfo ou havido that I have had 
Sing, -J ywe £w tenhas tido ou havido thou hast had 

(^we e^e tinha tido ou havido he has had 

T^z/e ftos tenhdmos tido ou havido we have had 
Plur. -< <7?/e v<5s tenhdis tido ou havido you have had 

( ?we ^#e$ Unhao tido ou havido they have had 



48 PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfect. 
It is compounded of the first preterim perfect 
subjunctive and the participle. 

{se iu tivfra ou tivesse 
se tu tiver as ou tivSsses 
se elle tivera ou tivesse 
se n6s tiver amos ou tive'ssemos 
Plur. 4 se vos tivereis ou tivesseis 

se Mies tiver ad ou tivessem . 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is compounded of the second preterim perfect 
subjunctive and the participle. 



{ ; 



tido { if I had had, 



Sing. 



Plur. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



eu teria 
tu terms 
elle teria 
nos teriamos 
vos terieis 
Ules teriad 

' se eu tiver 
tu tiveres 
ille tiver 

se nos tiver mos 
v6s tiverdes 



1 



\-tido* 



I should have had, 6fc. 



First Future. 

if I shall have 
thou shalt have 
he shall have 
f we shall have 
you shall have 



I tslle tiverem they shall have 

This tense may be conjugated also thus : kouver, 
houveres, houver ; houvermos, houverdes, houvirem. 
See Syntax of the auxiliary Verbs. 
Second Future. 
It is composed of the first future and the 
participle. 



Sing. 



Plur. 



se eu tiver 






' 


tiveres 








tiver 
tivermos 




- tido « 


if I si 


tiverdes 








tivirem 


J 




INFINITIVE MOOD. 




Present. 




tfr 


to he 


ive. 



if I shall have had, tyc* 



GRAMMAR. 49 

Preterperfect. 
tir iido > to have had. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Preterit. Sing. tido> tida. Plur. tidos tidas, had. 

Future. 
que hd de ter, that is to have. 

GERUNDS. 

tendo 9 having or in having, tendo, tido 9 having had. 

SUPINE. 

The supine is supplied by the prepositions a or 
para, and the verb in the infinitive ; as, 
para ter, to have. 

"In like manner are conjugated its compounds 
contenho, detenho, mantenho, &c. 

Remarks upon the auxiliary verb, ter, to have. 

The verb ter, to have, is an auxiliary or helping 
verb, which serves to conjugate other verbs : exam- 
ple, ter lido, to have read; nos temos,feito, we have 
done ; elles tern visto, they have seen, &c. 

When ? the verb ter is followed by the particle 
que, before an infinitive mood, it denotes the duty, 
inclination, &c. of doing any thing ; as, que tendes 
quefazer 1 what have you to do ? tenho que fazer 
huma visita, I must pay a visit ; elle tern muito que 
dizervos, he has a great many things to tell you. 

Of the auxiliary verb haver. 
This is one of the most useful verbs in Portuguese, 
since it is not only auxiliary to itself, as eu hei de 
havir } I must have ; eu haviade haver, I was to have 
&c. but also to all sorts of verbs ; as eu hei de can- 
tar, I will sing, or I must sing, or I am to sing; 
eu hei de hir, I must go ; eu havta de fallar, I was 
to speak ; eu hei de escrever, I must write, &c. In 
which examples you may see that the verb haver, 
when auxiliary, has generally the particle de and 
the verb of the infinitive mood after it ; and 

E 



50 PORTUGUESE 

that then it denotes a firm resolution, possibility, or 
necessity of doing any thing, therefore it is noi to 
be rendered into English by the verb to have ; as 
you may see by the second, third, and fourth future 
of the indicative mood. 

The verb haver, with the particle de, and the verb 
ser, to be, after it, is an auxiliary both to the passive 
verbs, and sometimes to the verb ser itself; as, hei 
de ser feliz, I shall be happy ; O principe ha de ser 
respeitddo, the prince ought to be, or must be, re- 
spected. 

The same verb haver is also auxiliary without the 
particle de ; but then it is put after the verb to 
which it is auxiliary ; thus, ddrvos-hei I will give 
you ; darlhe-hei, I will give to him, &c. In which 
examples you may observe, that the auxiliary verb 
havSr is put after the verb and the pronouns con- 
junctive, te, the, &c. and sometimes.it is put after 
the verbs and the pronoun mixed ; as, mandar volo- 
hei I'll send it to you. In the foregoing examples 
the verb haver may be put before the other verb ; 
but then it requires the particle de, and has a dif- 
ferent meaning ; as, in the first example, you may 
say, hei de darvos, I must give to you. Observe, 
also, that when the indicative present of the auxiliary 
verb haver is auxiliary to other verbs, as in the 
foregoing examples, you must cut off the last letters 
ei from the future of the verbs ; and say darlhe-hei, 
ov-hei de dar-lhe ; but not darei Ihe-Mi, nor hei de 
darei Ihe. When the preterimperfect havia is to be 
auxiliary to any verb, and it is to be placed after it, 
you must make use of hia, hias, hia, hiamos, hieis y 
luao ; and say, dar-lhe-h/a, hias, &c. but not dar- 
Ihe-havia, havtas, &c. I should give to him, thou 
shouldst, &c. 

To express interrogation put the pronoun personal 
after the verb, as in English thus terei eu? shall I 
have ? timos ?ws ? have we ? tens tu P hast thou ? 



GRAMMAR. 51 

tern elle ? has he ? sometimes the pronouns are 
omitted ; as, que faremos P what shall we do ? can- 
taremos? shall we sing ? 

Haver is sometimes Englished by to be ; as que 
ha de sir de mim ? what is to become of me ? 

When we speak by negation, we must use the 
word nao before the verb ; as, nao tenho, I have not ; 
vos nao conheceis, you do not know, &c. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb s6r, or estar, 
to be. 





INDICATIVE MOOD 




Present. 




feu sou or estou 


I am 


Sing.« 


I tu es or estds 


thou art 




[elle he or esld 


he is 




rnos somos or estdmos 


we are 


Plur.< 


1 vos sols or estdis 


you are 




[elks sa5 or estdo 


they are 




Preterpluperfect. 




feu era or estdva 


I was 


« 


! eras or estdvas 


thou wast 


Sing. 


I. ira or estdva 


he was 




j" noser amos ovestdvamos 


we were 


Plur.< 


1 ereis or estdveis 


you were 




L erao or estdvao 


they were 



Preterperfeet definite. 

fiufui or estive I was 

Sing.< foste or estiveste thou wast 

L foi or esteve he was 

f fomos or estivtmos we were 

Plur.< fostes or estivestes you were 

L forao or cstiverao they were 



52 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfect. 

The preterperfect is composed of the present in- 
dicative of the auxiliary verb th\ to have, and its 
own participle, sido, or estado. 

Preterplu per feet. 

This tense is compounded of the preterimperfect 
indicative, and the participle sido or estado, 

{eu tinha sido or estado I had been 

tinhas sido or estado thou hadst been 

tinha sido or estado be had been 

£ tinhamos sido or estado we had been 

Plur. -< tinheis sido or estado you bad been 

t tinhao sido or estado they had been 

It may also be conjugated thus ; fdra, or estivera ; 
foras, or estiveras ; fora, or estivera ; foramos, or 
estiveramos ; foreis, or estivereis ; forao, or estiverao. 



Future. 

eu serei or estarei I shall or will be 

Sing.-^ seras or estards thou shalt be 

sera or estara he shall be 

seremos or estaremos we shall be 

Plur.^ serm or estareis you shall be 

semo or estardo they shall be 



{ 
{ 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
~. J setu or esfcz be thou 

^ \ s y a or esteja elle let him be 

C sejdmos or estejdmosnos let us be 
Plur.< s&/e or es£ai i;os be you 

^se/ao or estejao elles let them be 



OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

Present. 

(que eu seja or esteja that I may be, or that I be 
sejas or este*'as thou mayst be, or be 



1 



se/a or esteja he may be, &c. 



Plur 



{ 



GRAMMAR 



53 



que pros sejdmos or estejdmos 
sefdis, or estejdis 
sejao or estejao 



that we may be 
you may be 
they may be 



First Preterimperfect. 
that 



Cque eufora or fosse 
j estivera or estwesse 

Q* 3 foras ox fosses 

& j estiveras or estivesses 

for a or fosse 



i 



I were or might 
be 



thou wert 



estivera or estivesse 
(que nos foramos or fossemos 

estweramos or estivessemos 



I 
I 



foreis or fosseis 

estivereis or estivesseis 
fordo orfossem 

estiverao or estivessem 



he were 

> that we were 

> you were 

> they 



were 



Sing 



Plur, 



{ 



Second Preterimperfect. 



hi seria or estaria 
serias or estarias 
seria or estaria 
seriamos or estariamos 
serieis or estarieis 
seriao or estariao 



I should or would be 
thou shouldest be 
he should be 
we should be 
you should be 
they should be 



Preterperfect. 



It is compounded of the present conjunctive of 
the auxiliary verb te?\ and its own participle sfdo, 
or est ado. 



{ 
{ 



que eu tenha sido or estddo 
tenhas sido or estddo 
tenha sido, &c. 
tenhdmos sido, &c. 
tenhdis sido, &c. 
tenhao sido &c. 



that I have been 
thou hast been 
he has been 
we have been 
you have been 
they have been 



Preterpluperfect. 

It is compounded of the first preterimperfect sub- 
junctive of the verb ter 9 and its own participle. 



51 PORTUGUESE 



{ 



' se eu tivera or tivesse i T , , , 

I had been 



j sido or estddo J 

* tiveras, &c. thou hadst been 

tivera, Sec. he had been 

tiveratnos, &c. we had been 

Plur.^ tivereis, &c you had been 

tiverao, &c. they had been 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
Compounded of the second preterimperfect sub- 
junctive of the verb ter, and its own participle sido 
or est ado. 



eu term sido or estddo I should or would have been 

Sing.-^ terms, &c. thou shouldst have been 

term, &c. he should have been 

teriamos, &c. we should have been 

Plur.^ terieis, &c. you should have been 

tertao, &c. they should have been 

First Future. 
qudndo iufor or estiver when I shall be 

•^ n &X fores or estiveres thou shalt be 

for or estiver he shall be 

fonnos or estivermos we shall be 

fordes or estiverdes you shall be 

forem or estiverem they shall he 



4' 
{ 

PlurJ 

Second Future. 
Compounded of the future subjunctive of the 
verb tei\ and its own participle. 

C qudndo eu tiver sido or estddo when I shall have been 
Sing. < tiveres sido, &c. thou shalt have been 

( tivfa sido, &c. he shall have been 

i thermos sido, &c. we shall have been 

Plur. J tiverdes sido, &c. you shall have been 

f tivbrem sido, &c. they shall have been 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

ser or estdr to be 

Preterperfect. 

tir sido or estddo to have been 



GRAMMAR. 55 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pret. 

sido or estddo, been 

Future. 

que hd de ser, or estdr, that is to be 

GERUNDS. 

sendo or estdndo being 
fewdo sido or esJado having been 

SUPINE. 

para ser or esfar to be 

Remarks upon the verb ser and est dr. 

There is a considerable difference between these 
verbs, sir and estdr, both in Portuguese and Spanish. 
In English there is no word to distinguish them, 
being both rendered into English by to be. Ser 
signifies the proper and inseparable essence of a 
thing, its quality or quantity ; ser homem, to be a 
man ; ser bom, to be good ; ser alto, to be tall ; ser 
largo, to be wide ; ser branco, to be white, &c. 
But estdr denotes a place, or any adventitious 
quality ; as, estdr em Lund-res, to be in London ; 
estdr de saude, to be in health ; estdr frio, to be 
cold ; estdr quente, to be warm ; estdr doente, to be 
sick ; estdr infadddo, to be angry ; estdr allegre, to 
be merry, &c. • 

Estdr may be used before the gerunds, but not 
ser; therefore you may say, estou falldndo, lendo, &c, 
I am speaking, reading, &c. but not sdu falldndo, 
&c. 

The three Conjugations of regular Active Verbs. 

A regular verb is such as is confined to general 
rules in its conjugation. 



56 PORTUGUESE 

A verb active denotes the action or impression of 
the subject, and governs a noun which is the object 
of that action or impression ; as, amar a virtude, to 
love virtue ; receber cartas, to receive letters. 

The regular Portuguese verbs have three different 
terminations in the infinitive ; viz. in ar, er, ir ; 
as, amar, to love ; temer, to fear ; admittir, to admit. 

An easy Method of learning to conjugate the 
Portuguese Verbs. 

I have reduced all the tenses of the Portuguese 
verbs to eight ; four of which are general, and 
have the same terminations in all the verbs ; and 
the other four may be likewise made general by 
changing some letters, and all the conjugations 
reduced to one. 

The general tenses are, the future indicative, 
the first and second preter imperfect subjunctive, 
and the first future subjunctive. 

The future indicative is terminated in all the 
verbs, in 

rii, rds, rd ; remos, reis, rao. 

The imperfect subjunctive, in 

ra or sse, ras or sses, ra or sse ; ramos, or ssemos, 
reis or sse is, rao or ssem. 

The second imperfect, in 
ria, rias, rut; riamos, rieis, rtao 

The first future subjunctive, in 
es, ?nos, des, em. 

I have only given the termination of the second 
person singular of the future subjunctive, because 
the first and third of the same number are like 
their respective infinitives of the three conjugations, 
which, however, keep both their last consonant 



GRAMMAR. 57 

and vowel before the terminations I have marked 
for the second person singular, and for the whole 
plural. As to the future indicative, you have only 
to add ei to the respective present infinitive of the 
three conjugations, in order to form the first person 
singular ; and if you add to the same infinitive 
present as, you will form the second person singu- 
lar of it, and so of all the rest, by adding to the 
infinitive present, a, emos, eis, ad. 

The imperfect subjunctive has two terminations 
for every person, both in the singular and plural ; 
but if you cut off the last consonant r of the 
infinitive, and then add to it the terminations 
above mentioned, you form the imperfect sub- 
junctive, according to its two different termi- 
nations. Lastly, if you cut off the last consonant 
of the infinitive, and add to it the terminations 
above-mentioned, you will form the second imper- 
fect subjunctive. 

The present indicative of the three conjugations 
is formed by changing the last letters of the infini- 
tive, viz. ar, er, ir, intoo; as, dmo, entendo, admitto, 
from amar, etitender, admittir. 

The preterim perfect indicative is formed in the 
first conjugation, by changing the last consonant of 
the infinitive, viz. r, into va, vas, va, vdmos, veis, 
vao ; but in the second conjugation it is formed by 
changing the termination er of the infinitive into ia, 
ias, ia, iamos,kis, iao ; and in the third by changing 
the last consonant r of the infinitive into a, as, a; 
hnos, eis, ad. 

The perfect definite in the first conjugation is 
formed by changing the termination ar of the infi- 
nitive into ti, aste 6u, dmos, dstes, drab; and in the 
second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
termination er of the infinitive into t, este, eo, emos, 
fates y trad. In the third conjugation, the same tense 



58 PORTUGUESE 

is formed by changing the termination ir of the in- 
finitive into /, iste, \o, imos, istes, irao. 

The present subjunctive in the first conjugation 
is formed by changing the termination ar of the 
infinitive into e, es, e, emos, eis, em; and in the 
second conjugation, it is formed by changing the 
termination er of the infinitive into a, as, a, amos, 
ais, ao. In the third conjugation, the same tense is 
formed by changing the termination ir of the infi- 
nitive into the same terminations, a, as, a, &c. 

As to the imperative mood, you have only to ob- 
serve, that the second person singular is always the 
same as the third person singular of the present in- 
dicative, in all the conjugations. 

The participles of the preterperfect tense in the 
first conjugation are formed by changing the last 
consonant r of the infinitive into do for the mascu- 
line, and da for the feminine; and into dos, das, 
for the plural ; but when you come to verbs of the 
second conjugation, you change the termination r 
of the infinitive into fdo, ida, &c. 

In the third conjugation, the last consonant r of 
the infinitive must be changed into do for the mas- 
culine, da for the feminine, &c. 

First Conjugation of the verbs in ar. 

INDICATIVE MOOD, 

I shall add the pronouns personal, iu, tu, elk, 
&c. no more. 

Present. 



dmo 


I love 


dmas 


thou lovest 


dma 


he loves 


amdmos 


we love 


amdis 


ye love 


dmad 


they love 



GRAMMAR. 

Preterimperfect. 



69 



amava 

amdvas 

amava 

amdcamos 

amdveis 

amdvao 



amei 

amdste 

amou 

amdmos 

amdstes 

amdrao 



I did love 
thou didst love 
he did love 
we did love 
you did love 
they did love 

Preterperfeet definite. 

I loved 
thou lovedst 
he loved 
we loved 
you loved 
they loved 

Preterperfeet. 
This tense is composed of the participle amado, 
and the present indicative auxiliary verb ter. 

tinho amddo I have loved 

tens amddo thou hast loved 

tern amddo he has loved 

timos amddo we have loved 

tfndes amddo you have loved 

tSm amddo they have loved 

Preterpluperfect. 
This tense is composed of the participle amado 
and the imperfect of the auxiliary verb tir. 

N. B. It may be conjugated thus, amhra, amhras, 
amara, amaramos, amareis, amdrao, or, 



t'znha amddo, 
tinhas amddo 
tinha amddo 
tinhamos amddo 
tinheis amddo 
tinhao amddo 



amarei 
amards 
amard 



I had loved 
thou hadst loved 
he had loved 
we had loved 
you had loved 
they had loved 



Future. 



I shall or will love 
thou shalt love 
he shall love 



60 PORTUGUESE 

amarSmos we shall love 

amariis you shall love 

amardo they shall love 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

dmu tu love thou 

dme ille let him love 

amimos nos let us love 

amai vos love you 

dmem tiles • let them love 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

que iu dme that I may love 

dmes thou mayest love 

dme he may love 

amemos we may love 

ameis you may love 

dmem they may love 

First Preterimperfect. 

que eu amdra, or amdsse that I might or could love 
amdras, or amasses thou mightest love 

amdra, or amdsse he might love 

amdramos, or amdssemos we might love 

amdreis, or amdsseis you might love 

amdrao or amdssem they might love 

When we find the conjunction z/ before the in- 
dicative imperfect, we must use the imperfect of the 
subjunctive or optative, when we speak by way of 
wish or desire; as, If I did love, se $u amasse, or 
amara, and not se eu amava, if I had loved ; if I 
had, se eu liver a, tlvesse, and not se eu tin ha ; and 
so in all the verbs. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

amaria I should love 

amarias thou shouldst love 

amaria he should love 

amariamos we should love 

amarieis you should love 

amariao they should love 



GRAMMAR. 61 

Preterperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amddo and the 
present subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

que Su tenha amddo that I have loved. 

tenhas amddo thou hast loved. 

tenha amddo he has loved 

tenhdmos amddo we have loved 

tenhdis amddo you have loved 

tenhao amddo they have loved 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amado and the 
first preterim perfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
verb ter. 

se eu tivera or tivesse amddo if I had loved 

tiveras or tivesses amddo thou hadst loved 

tiv&ra or tivesse amddo he had loved 

tiveramos or tivessemos amddo we had loved 
tivereis or tivesseis amddo you had loved 

tiverao or tivessem amddo they had loved 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle amddo and the 
second preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary 
verb ter. 

teria amddo I should have loved 

terias amddo thou shouldst have loved 

term amddo he should have loved 

teriamos amddo we should have loved 

terms amddo ye should have loved 

teriao amddo they should have loved 

Future. 

qudndo iv, amdr when I shall love 

amdres thou shalt love 

amdr he shall love 

amdrmos we shall love 

amdrdes you shall love 

amdrem they shall love 






fit PORTUGUESE 

Second Future. 

It is composed of the participle amddo, and the 
future subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

qudndo in tiver amddo when I shall have loved 

tiveres amddo thou shalt have loved 

tiver amddo he shall have loved 

tivirmos amddo we shall have loved 

tivirdes amddo you shall have loved 

tiverem amddo they shall have loved 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

amdr to love 

Preterperfect. 

tSr amddo to have loved 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present. 

que dma, or amdnte that loves 

Pret. 

amddo, masc. amdda, fern. loved 

Future. 
que hd de amdr, that is to love 

GERUNDS. 

amdndo loving 
tendo amddo having loved 

SUPINE. 
para amdr to love 
Note, the verbs terminating in the infinitive in 
car take qu in those tenses, where the c would other- 
wise meet with the vowel e ; and those terminating 
in the infinitive in gar take an win those tenses, 
where the g would otherwise meet with the same 
vowel e; that is to say, in the first person singular 
of the preterperfect definite, in the third person 



GRAMMAR. 63 

singular, in the first and third plural of the impera- 
tive, and in the whole present subjunctive, which 
are the tenses I shall give by way of example in the 
verbs peccdr and pagar. 

Peccdr, to sin. 

Preterperfect definite. 

eu pequii I sinned — instead ofpeccii 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

pique elle, let him sin : pequimos nos, let us sin ; pequem 
elks, let them sin— and not piece elle, &c. 

Present subjunctive. 

que eu pique, tu piques, that I may sin — 
and not que eu piece , ptcces, &c. 

Pagar, to pay. 

Preterperfect definite. 

paguei I paid 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

pdgue elle, paguemos nos, pdguem elles, let him pay, &c. 

Present subjunctive. 

que eu pdgue, pdgues, pdgue paguemos, pagueis, pdguem, 

that I may pay, fyc. — and not page, pages, &c. 

The other tenses are conjugated like amdr. 

Regular verbs in ar. 

Abafdr to choke, or to smo- Agarrdr to lay hold of 

ther Alagdr to overflow 

Abaldr to shake Amaldicodr to curse. 

Abandr to fan Annuldr to annul, or to make 
Abastdr to satiate void. 

Abaxdr to bring or let down Apressdr to press or hasten 

Abencodr to bless. Aquentdr to warm 

Abocanhdr to carp Argumentdr to argue 

Abomindr to abominate Assoprdr to blow 

Abotodr to button Atdr to tie 

Acabdr to finish Avassaldr to subdue, to con- 
Admoestdr to admonish quer. 

Affrontdr to abuse Azeddr to sour 



64 PORTUGUESE 

Of the Verbs Passive. 

Before we proceed to the second conjugation, it 
is necessary to know that the Verbs passive, which 
express the suffering of an action, are nothing more 
than the participles of verbs active, conjugated with 
the verb ser y to be. 

EXAMPLE. 
Present tense. 

Su sou amado I am loved 

tu is amado thou art loved 

Slle he amado he is loved 

nos somos amddos we are loved 

vos sois amddos you are loved 

elks sao amddos they are loved 

and so throughout the other moods and tenses. 
Second Conjugation of the verbs in er. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 





Present. 


vendo 


I sell 


vendes 


thou sellest 


vende 


he sells 


vendemos 


we sell 


vendeis 


you sell 


vendem 


they sell 




Preterimperfect. 


vendia 


I did sell 


vendias 


thou didst sell 


vendia 


he did sell 


vendiamos 


we did sell 


vendteis 


you did sell 


vendiao 


they did sell 




Preterperfect definite. 


vendi 


Isold 


vendeste 


thou soldest 


vendeo 


he sold 



GRAMMAR. 



65 



vendemos 
vendestes 
venderao 



we sold 
you sold 
they sold 



tenho 

tens 

tern 

temos 

tendes 

tern 



Preterperfect. 

r 



»vendido i I have sold, fyc. 



1 



Preterpluperfect. 

f 



■vendido 



tinha 

tinhas 

tinha 

ttnharhos j 

tinheis 

tinhao ,j ^ 

This tense may also be conjugated thus : vendera, venderas, 
vendera, venderamos, vendereis, venderao. 



-( I have sold, fyc. 



venderei 

venderds 

venderd 

venderemos 

vendereis 

venderao 



Future. 



■I shall or will sell, #c. 



J 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

vende tu sell thou 

venda elle let him sell 

venddmos nos let us sell 

vendei vos sell ye 



vendao elles 



let them sell 



OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

1 



que &u venda 
vendas 
venda 
venddmos 
venddis 
vtndao 



that I may sell, fyc. 



F 



66 



' PORTUGUESE 



Preterimperfect. 



que eu vendera or vendesse 

venderas or vendesses, 
vendera or vendesse 
vendtramos or vendessemos 
vendereis, or vendesseis 
venderao or vcndessem 



that I might or could sell, 

<Sfc. 



Second Preterimperfect. 



vender m 

venderias 

vendcria 

vender'iamos 

venderieis 

venderiao 



I should sell, fyc. 



que eu tenha 
tenhas 



Preterperfect. 
f 



lentdmos Y ™ M °> \ that l have sold > **> 

tenhdis 

tenhao 

Preterpluperfect. 

se eu tivtra or tivesse 
tiveras or tivesses 
tivera or tivesse 
tiveramos or tivessemos 
tivereis or tivesseis 
tivSrao or tivessem 



- vendido - 



if I had sold, #< 



Second Preterpluperfect. 



term 1 

term 

teriamos t 
terieis 
teriao 



vendido, 



I should have sold, $c. 



GRAMMAR. 67 

Future. 

quando iu vender when I shall sell, §c. 

venderes 
vender 
vendermos 
venderdes 
venderem 



Second Future. 



quando <!u tiver ~\ 
tiver es 

i l . ver y vendido -\ when I shall have sold, cjc. 

tivermos 

tiver des 

tivirem 

INFINITIVE MOOT). 

Present. 

vender to sell 

Preterperfect. 

ter vendido to have sold 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present. 

que vende that sell, that sells 

Preterite. 

vendido, masc. vendida, fem. Plur. vendidos, vendidas, sold. 

Future. 
que ha de vender that is to sell 

GERUNDS. 

vendendo selling 
tindo vendido having sold 

SUPINE. 

«. para vender to sell 

After the same manner as the verb vender, are 
conjugated all the other regular verbs of the second 
conjugation ending in er : as the following : 

f2 



GS 



PORTUGUESE 



yJcomctcr, to attack 
Bcber, to drink 
Comer, to cat 
Comprehender, to perceive, or 

apprehend 
Cometer, to commit 
Conceder, to grant 
Correr, to run 
Dever, to owe 



Esconder, to hide 
Emprender, to undertake 
Meter, to put in 
Offender, to offend 
Provider, to promise 
Responder, to answer 
Reprehender, to reprove 
Temer, to fear 
Varrer, to sweep, &c. 



Third Conjugation, of the Verbs e?7ding in ir. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 



admitto 

adnuttes 
admitte 



admittia 

admittias 

admittia 



admitti 

admittiste 

admittio 



I admit, &c. 



admit ttmos 
admit tis 
admit tern 



Preterimperfect. 

I did admit, &c. admittiamos 
admittieis 
admittido 

Preterperfect definite. 

I admitted. admittimos 

admittistes 
admittirao 



Preterperfect. 
This tense is composed of the participle admittido, 
and the present indicative of the auxiliary verb, ter. 

terho admittido, I have admitted. 

tens admittido, &c. thou hast, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 
Composed of the participle admittido, and the 
imperfect of the auxiliary verb ter. 



tinha admittido, &c. 
tinhas admittido, &c. 



I had admitted 
thou hadst, &c. 



It may also be conjugated thus ; admittira, admittiras, 
admittira, admittiramos, admittireis, admittirao. 



GRAMMAR. 69 

Future. 

admittirei I shall or will admit 

admittiras 

admittira 

admittiremos 

admittireis 

admittirdo 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
admitte tu admit thou 

admitta elle let him admit 

admittdmos nos let us admit 

admitti vos admit ye 

admittao elks let them admit 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

Present. 

que eu admitta that I may admit, &c. 
admittas 
admitta 
admittdmos 
admittdis 
admittao 

First Preterimperfect. 

que eu admittira or admittisse that I might admit, &c. 

admittiras or admitiisses 
admittira or admittisse 
admittiramos or admittissemos 
admittireis or admittisseis 
admittirao or admittissem 

Second Preterimperfect. 
admittiria I should or would admit, &c. 
admittirias 
admittira 
admittiriamos 
admititrieis 
admit tiriao 

Preterperfect. 
Composed of the participle, admittzdo, and the 
present subjunctive of the verb ter. 

que eu tenha admittido that I have admitted 

tenhas admittido, &c. thou hast admitted, &c. 






70 PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the first preterim perfect sub- 
junctive of the verb ter and the participle admit Odd. 

se eu tivera admittido If I had admitted 

tiveras, &c. thou hadst admitted, &c. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the second pre terim perfect sub- 
junctive of the verb ter and the participle admittido. 

eu teria admittido I should have admitted 

terias, &c. thou shouldst, &c. 

First Future. 

se eu admittir If I shall admit, &c. 

admittir es 
admittir 
admittirmos 
admittirdes 
admittirem 

Second Future. 
It is composed of the first future subjunctive of 
the verb ter and the participle admittido. 

se eu tiver admittido If I shall have admitted 

tiveres, &c. thou shalt, <&c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
admittir to admit 

Preterperfect. 
ter admittido to have admitted 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. 
admittido, for the masc. admittida, for the fern, admitted 

Future. 
que ha de admittir that is to admit 

GERUNDS. 

admittindo admitting 
teuho admittido having admitted 

SUPINES. 

para admittir to admit 



GRAMMAR. 71 

Conjugate after the same manner the following 
verbs : 



Abrir, to open 
Conduzir, to conduce 
Introduzir, to introduce 
Induzir, to induce 
Produzir, to produce 



Luzir, to shine 
Nutrir, to nourish 
Reduzir, to reduce, to bring to 
Traduzir, to translate 
JJeduzir, to deduct, &c. 



we give 
you give 
they give 



Of the Irregular Verbs in ar. 

There are in each conjugation some verbs which 
do not conform to the common rule, and on that 
account are called irregulars. 

There are but two of the first conjugation, which 
in some of their tenses depart from the rule of the 
verb amdr, viz. estar and dar* We have already 
conjugated the first, and the second is conjugated 
in the following manner. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

dou I give ddmos 

das thou givest dais 

da he gives dao 

Preterimperfect. 
I did give, &c. (as in regular verbs of the first 

conjugation) 
Preterperfect definite. 
I gave demos we gave 

thou gavest destes you gave 

he gave derao they gave 

Preterperfect. 
This tense is composed of the participle dado and 
the present indicative of the auxiliary verb ter; as 
tenho dado, &c. I have given, &c. 
Preterpluperfect . 
Composed of the participle dado and the imperfect 
of the auxiliary verb ter ; as eu tinha dado> &c. I 
had given, &c. 



ddva 
ddvas, &c. 



dei 

deste 

deu 



72 PORTUGUESE 

Future. 

darii I shall or will give, &c. (as in the verb amdr) 

dards, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

demos nos, let us give 
da tu, give thou dai vos, give thou 

di ilk, let him give dim elks, let them give 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
Present. 
que iu de that I may give, &c. 
des 
de 

demos 
deis 
dim 

Preterimperfect. 

que eu dira or desse that I might give, &c. 

deras, or desses 
dira or desse 
dtiramos or dessemos 
dereis or desseis 
derao or dessem 

Second Imperfect. 

daria I should give, &c. dariamos 

darias darieis 

daria dariao 

The preterperfect, preterpluperfect, and the se- 
cond preterplu perfect, are composed of the participle 
dado, and the auxiliary verb tSr, as in the regular 
verbs. 

Future. 
quando eu der when I shall give, &c. 
deres 
der 

dirmos 
derdes 
derem 

Second Future. 
Is composed of the participle dado, &c. as the 
regular verbs. 



GRAMMA R. 73 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
ddr, to give, &c. as in the regular verbs. 

Of the Irregular Verbs in er. 

I begin with fazer, poder, and saber, because they 
occur oftenest in discourse. 

Fazer to do or make. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

fdc o I do fazemos we do 

fazes thou dost fazeis you do 

fdz he does fdzem they do 

Imperfect. 

fazia, I did or did make, &c. faziamos 

fazias fazieis 

fazm faztao 
Preterperfeet definite. 

fiz I made, &c. fizemos 

fizeste fizestes 

fez fizerao 

Preterperfeet. 

tenhofeito I had done. &c. 
tensfeito, &c. 

Preterpluperfect. 

tinhafeito I had done, &c. 
tinhasfeito, &c. 

Future. 

farti I shall do, &c. (according to the regular verb.) 
far as , &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

facdmos nos let us do 
faze tu do thou • fazei vos ' do you 

fdea elk let him do fdcao elles let them do 



74 PORTUGUESE 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

que eu fata that I may do, &e. (according to the regu- 

facas lar verhs.) 

fdea, &c. 

Preterimperfect. 

que eufizera or fizesse that I might do, &c. 
fizer as or fizesses 
fizer a or Jizesse 
fixer amos or fiiessemos 
fizereis or fizesseis 
fizer ao or fizesscm 

Second Imperfect. 

farm I should do, &c. farmmos 
farms farms 

farm far'iao 

Future. 
qudndo eu fizer when T shall do, &c. 
fizeres 
fizer 
fizermos 
fizerdes 
fizer em 

Second Future. 

qudndo eu tiver feito when I shall have done 
tiveres feilo, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
fazer, to do. 

GERUNDS. 

fazendo doing or in doing. 

PARTICIPLE. 

feito made or done. 

After the same manner are conjugated desfazer* 
to undo ; contrafazer, to counterfeit ; nfazei\ to 
make again. 



GRAM M A R. 75 

Poder to be able. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

posso I can or am able podemos we can 

podes thou canst podeis you can 

/?de/e he can podem they can 

Imperfect. 

£>oc?«a I could or was able, &c. 
podias, &c. 

Preterperfect definite. 

ptw/e I could pudemos we could 

pudeste thcu couldst pudestes you could 

/jorfe, he could puderao they could 

Preterperfect. 

£e?iAo podido, &c. I have been able, &c. 

Future. 

poder ei I shall be able, &c. 
poderds, &c. 

There is no Imperative. 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

Present. 

que eu possa that I may be able 

possas thou mayest be able, &c. 

possa 

possdmos 

possdis 

jjossao 

Imperfect. 

que eu pudera or pudesse that I might be able 

puderas or pudesses thou mightest be able, &c. 

pudera or pudesse 
puderamos or pudessemos 
pudereis or pudesseis 
puderao or pudessem 



76 PORTUGUESE 

Second Imperfect. 

poder i a I should be able, &c. 

podcrias, &c. 

Future. 
qudndo eu puder when I shall be able, &c. 

puder es 

puder 

puder mos 

puderdes 

puderem 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
poder to be able. 

GERUNDS. 

podendo being able 

PARTICIPLE. 

pudido, been able 



Saber, to know 





INDICATIVE MOOD. 




Present. 




set 


I know sabemos 


we know 


sdbes 


thou knowest sabeis 


you know 


sdbe 


he knows sdbem 
Imperfect. 


they know 


sabia 


I did know 




sabias 


thou didst know> &c 




sabia, 


&c. 





Preterperfect definite. 
soube I knew, &c. soubemos 
soubeste soubestes 

soube soubcrao 

Preterperfect. 
tenho sabido I have known, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 77 

Future. 
saberei I shall or will know, &c. (according to the 

saherds, &c. regular verbs. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

saibdmos nos let us know 
sdbe tu know thou sabei vos know you 

scuba elle let him know saibao elles let them know 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 
Present. 
que eu sdiba that I may know 

sdibas thou mayest know, &c, 

sdiba 

saibdmos 

saibdis 

saibao 

Imperfect. 
que eu soubera or soubesse that I might know, &c. 

soubera or soubesses 
soubera or soubesse 
souberamos or soubessemos 
soubereis or soubesseis 
souberao or soubessem 

Second Imperfect. 
sabcria I should know, &c. saberiamos 

saberias saberieis 

saberia saberiao 

Future. 

qudndo eu souber when I shall know, &c. 
souberes 
souber 
soubermos 
souberdes 
souberem 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

saber to know 

GERUND. 

sabendo knowing 



78 PORTUGUESE 

PARTICIPLE. 

saUdo (for the masc.) sabida (for the feminine) known 



Of the Irregular Verb trazer, to bring. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

trdgo I bring trazemos we bring, &c. 

trdzes thou bringest trazeis 

trdz he brings trdzem 

Imperfect. 

trazia, I did bring 

trazias, &c. thou didst bring, &c. (according to the regulars) 

Preterperfect definite. 
trouxe I brought trouxemos 

trouxeste thou broughtest, &c. trouxestes 

trouxe trouxeruo 

Preterperfect. 
tenho trazido I have brought, &c. 
tens trazido, &c. 



Future. 




trarei I shall or will bring, &c. 


traremos 


trards 


trareis 


trard 


trardo 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

tragdmos nos let us bring 
trdze tu bring thou trazei vos bring you 

trdga Slle let him bring trdgao elles, let them bring 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

Present. 

que eu trdga that I may bring, &c. 

trdgas 
trdga 
tragdmos 
tragdis 
tragau 



GRAMMA R. 79 

Imperfect. 

que eu trouxera or trouxesse that I may bring, $c. 

trouxer as or trouxesses 
trouxera or trouxesse 
trouxeramos or trouxessemos 
trouxereis or trbuxesseis 
trouxerao or irouxessem 

Second Imperfect. 
eu traria I should bring, &c. trariamos 



trarias 


trarieis > 


traria 


trariao 




Future. 


quando eu trouxer 


when I shall bring, &c. 


trouxeres 




trouxer 




trouxermos 




trouxerdes 




trouxerem 





INFINITIVE MOOD, 
Present. 
trazer to bring 

GERUND. 

trazendo bringing 

PARTICIPLE. 

trazido masc. trazida fern, brought 



Conjugation of the Irregular Verb ver, to see, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 

vejo I see vemos 

vis thou seest vedes 

vi he sees, &c vem 

Imperfect. 

via I did see, &c. 

vias 

via &c. 



80 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfcct definite. 



v'r I saw &c. 




vimos 


vistc 




vistcs 


vio 


Preterperfect. 


virau 


tenho visto 


I have seen, 


&c. 


this visto &c 


Future. 




verei I shall see, &c. 




verds, &c. 






IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




ve tu 


see thou 




veja elk 


let him see 


vejdmos nos 


let us see 




vide vos 


see you 




vejao elks 


let them see him 


OPTATIVE MOOD. 




que ea veja that I may see, &c. vejdmos 


v&jas 


vejais 




veja 


vejao 





Imperfect. 

que eu viva or visse thai I might see, &c. 
vivas or visses 
vira or visse 
viramos or vissemos 
vireis or viseis 
virao or vissem 

Second Imperfect. 

eu veria I should see, &c. veriamos 

lerias v tries 

veria vertao 

Future. 
qudndo eu vir when I shall see, &c. 

vires 
vir 

virmos 
virdes 
vir em 



GRAMMAR. 81 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
ver to see 

GERUND. 

vendo seeing 

PARTICIPLE. 

visto, vista seen 

In like manner are conjugated the compounds 
antever, prever, and rever. 

The verb jprotf/r j when it signifies to provide, for, 
or, to take care of, is conjugated in the present indi- 
cative thus : 

eu provenhoy I take care of, fyc. provimos 

provens provindes 

provem provem 

But when it signifies to make provision, it is con- 
jugated thus : 

euprovejo, I make provision, #c. provemos 

proves proveis 

prove prdvem 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb dizer, to say. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

dzgo> I say, <$•<;. dizemos 

dtzes dizeis 

diz dizem 

Preterimperfect. 
diz'ia, I did say, §c. 
dizias, &c. 

Preterperfect definite. 
disse, I said ; fyc. dissemos 

dissiste dissestes 

disse disserao 

G 



82 PORTUGUESE 

Preterperfect. 

tcnho ditto, I have said, t$-c. 
tens ditto, &c. 

Future. 

direi I shall or will say, <$'C« 
dims, &c. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


dize tu 


say thou 


diga elk 


let him say 


digdmos n6s 


let us say 


dizei vos 


say you 


digad elks 


let them say 



OPTATIVE MOOD. 

que eu diga that I may say, fyc. 

digas, &c. 

Imperfect. 

que eu dissera or diss6sse that I might say, fyc, 
disseras or dissesses 
dissera or diss6sse 
diss6ramos or dissessemos 
dissereis or dissesseis 
disserao or dissessem 

Second Imperfect. 
diria I should say, fyc. 

dirias, &c. 

Future. 

qudndo eu dissir when shall I say, $c 

disseres 
disser, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

dizer to say 

GERUND. 

dizendo saying 

PARTICIPLES. 

ditto, ditto. said 



GRAMMAR. 83 

Observe, that the compounds desdizer, to unsay, . | 

and contradizer, to contradict, are in all points con- 
jugated like dizer. 



jugation 


of the Irregular Verb 
willing. 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 




Present. 


quero 
queres 
quer 


I will, or am willing 
thou art willing 
he is willing, fyc. 


queremos 




quereis 




querent 






Imperfect. 


queria 


I was willing, fyc. 


queriasy &c. 




Preterperfect definite. 


quiz 

quiz6ste 

quiz 


I have been willing, fyc. 


quizemos 
quizestes 




quizerao 






Future. 


quererei 


I shall be willing, fyc. 



quereras, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

queiras tu be thou willing 

queira elle let him be willing 

queirdmos nos let us be willing 

queirdis vos be you willing 

queirao elles let "them be willing 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

que tu queira that I may be willing, $$c, 

queiras, &c. 



84 PORTUGUESE 

Imperfect. 

que eu quizera or quizesse that I were willing 
quizeras or quizesses thou wert willing 

quizera or quizesse he were willing 

quiztramos or quizessemos we were willing 
quize'reis or quizesseis you were willing 

quizerab or quizessem they were willing 

Second Imperfect. 

ew quereria I should or would be willing, fyc. 

quererias, &c. 

Future. 

qudndo eu quizer when I shall be willing, fyc. 

quizeres, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
querer to be willing 

i GERUND. 

querindo being willing 

PARTICIPLE. 

querido been willing 

Quer is sometimes a conjunction, when repeated 
in a sentence, and when it is rendered into English 
by whether and or ; as, ^w/r ws o tenhais feito, quer 
nao, whether you have done that or no. But when 
it is not repeated, and is joined to the particle se, 
it is sometimes rendered into English by at least ; 
as, hum se quer^ one at least; and sometimes by 
however, when joined to the particle que; as como 
quer que seja, however it be. In all which cases, it 
is not to be confounded with the third person sin- 
gular of the indicative of the verb querer. 

The verb querer is sometimes used with the 
particle se instead of the verb dever ; as, as cuusas 
nao se quer em feitas a pressa, things must not be 
done in a hurry. 



GRAMMAR. 85 

Of the Irregular Verb valer, to be worth. 

I shall give no other tenses of this verb than the 
present indicative, the imperative, and the present 
of the subjunctive, none but these being irregular. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

vdlho I am worth, fyc. 

vales 

vale or val 

valemos 

valeis 

vdkm 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
vale tu be thou worth 

vdlha tile let him be worth 

valhdmos nos let us be worth 

valei vos be you worth 

vdlhao elles let- them be worth . 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

que tu vdlha that I may be worth, fyc, 
vdlhas 
vdlha 
valhdmos 
valhdis 
vdlhao 



Of the Irregular Verb perder, to lose. 

This verb changes the c before o of the present 
indicative into d in the other persons of the same 
tense, as well as in the other tenses and moods, ex- 
cept the imperative and present subjunctive. It is 
conjugated in the following manner : 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
perco, I lose, Sec. perdemos 

perdes perdeis 

perde, perdem 



86 PORTUGUESE 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

phdc tu lose thou 

perca elk let him lose 

percdmos nos let us lose 

perdei vos lose you 

percao illes let them lose 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

que eu perca that I might lose, fyc, 

percas 
perca, &c. 

The compounds of the verb ter, as, contenho, I 
contain ; detenho, I detain, &c. are conjugated in 
like manner. 

Se me verbs of this conjugation are only irregular 
in the participle passive ; as escrito, from escrever ; 
absulto, from absolver. 

Those that have the j before o in the present in- 
dicative change the j into g in all tenses and per- 
sons, in which the j would otherwise meet with the 
vowels i or e ; as, eleger, to elect ; eu clejo, tu eleges, 
&c. I elect, &c. 

Imperfect. Preter-def. 

elegia, fyc. elegi elegeste, &c. I elected, tyc. 

The verbs ending in eyo in the present indicative, 
change that termination into ia in the imperfect, 
and into i in the preter-defmite, and are so conju- 
gated. 





INDICATIVE 


MOOD. 




Present. 




eu let/o 

les 

U 


I read, fyc. 


lemos 

ledes 

lem 


tu Via 
lias, &c. 


Imperfect. 
I did read, fyc. 





GRAMMAR. 87 

Preter definite. 

tu It I read, #c. 

Uste, Sfc. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

hdmos nos let us read 
It tu read thou lede vos read you 

lea elle, let him read leao elks let them read 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

que eu lea that I may read, fyc, 

leas 
lea, &c. 

You may observe that they lose the y through all 
the other moods and tenses. The verb ever, to be- 
lieve, is conjugated in the same manner. 



Of the Irregular Verbs in in 
Ir, to go. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present tense. 

vou I go vamos we go 

vds thou goest ides you go 

vai he goes vao they go 

Preterimperfect. 

hia I did go, fyc. hiamos 

Mas hieis 

hia Mao 

Preterperfect definite. 

fid I went fomos we went 

foste thou wentest fostes you went 
foi he went forao they went 

Preterperfect. 
*2,°&c. } ' ldo { l have 8° ne ' * C< 



88 PORTUGUESE 

Preterpluperfect. 

tn'hts { ido I l had g° ne > ** 

Future. 

irei I shall or will go, fyc, 

, irds, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

vdmos nos y let us go 
vdi tu go thou tde vos go ye 

vd elle let him go vao elles let them go 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

que Su vd that I may go, $c. 

vds 
vd 

vdmos 
vddes 
vao 

First Preterimperfect. 

que eufora or fosse that I might go, fyc. 

for as ox fosses 
fora oxjosse 
foramos or fossemos 
foreis oxfosseis 
fordo ox f ossein 

Second Preterimperfect. 
iria I should go, fyc. 

irias, &c. 

Preterperfect. 

It is composed of the participle ido and the pre- 
sent subjunctive of the auxiliary verb th\ 

Preterpluperfect. 

It is composed of the participle ido and the first 
preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 



GRAMMAR. 89 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
It is composed of the participle ido and the second 
preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb 
tfr. 

Future. 
qudndo eufor when I shall go, <&c, 

fores 
for 
formos 
fordes 
forem * 

Second Future. 

qudndo eu tiver f ,^ \ when I shall have gone, 

tiveres, &c. \ j <$rc 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
ir to go 

GERUND. 

tndo going 

PARTICIPLE. 

ido gone 
Fzr, to come. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
venho I come, §c. vimos 

vens vindes 

vem vem 

Imperfect. 
vinha I did come, fyc. vinhamos 
vinhas vinheis 

vinha mnhao 

Preter definite. 
vim I came, fyc. viemos 

viesle viestes 

veio vierao, 






90 PORTUGUESE 

Preterimpcrfect. 

tenho v'mdo I have come, §c. 
tens vhido, <$c 

Future, 

virti I shall come, $c. 

virasy &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

venhdmos nos let us come 
vem tu come thou vinde vos come you 

vhiha ille let him come venhao tiles let them come 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
que eu venha 

Imperfect. 
que eu viera, or viesse 

Second Imperfect. 
viria, virias, &c. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
vir to come 

GERUND. 

v'mdo coming 

PARTICIPLE. 

v'mdo come 
The compounds of vir; as convlr to be conve- 
nient ; sobrevir, to come unlooked for, are con- 
jugated in the same manner. 

Of the Irregular Verbs, mentir, to lie, sentir, to feel ; 
servir, to serve; ferir, to wound. 

These verbs change the i of the first person sin- 
gular of the present tense, indicative, into e in the 



GRAMMAR. 91 

other persons of the same tense, as well as in the 
other tenses and moods, except in the imperative 
and the present subjunctive. They are conjugated 
thus : 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present. 



eu minto 
eu sinto 
eu s'irvo 



tu mentes 
tu sentes 
tu serves 



elle mSnte, &c. 
elle sente, &c. 
elle serve, &c. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

mente tu minta elle mintdmos nos menti v&s m'mtao tiles 
sente tu sinta elle sintdmos nos senti vos smtao elles 
serve tu sirva elle sirvdmos nos servi vos sirvao elles 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

minta mintas^ &e. 
sinta sintas, &c. 

sirva sirvas, &c. 

The compounds, desmentir assentir, consents, 
dissentir, presentir, are conjugated like mentir and 
sentir; and also the verbs afferir, refer ir, conferir, 
defer v'r, differ tr, infer 'ir. 

Of the Irregular Verbs affliglr, to afflict ; corrigir, 
to correct, fingir, to feign; ungir, to anoint; 
compungir, frigir, dirigir, tingir, cingir, &c. 

These verbs change the g of the infinitive mood 
into j in those tenses where the g would other vvise 
meet with the vowel 0, as in the first person singu- 
lar of the present indicative afflijo ; or a as in the 
third person of the imperative in both numbers, in 
the first plural of the same tense, and in the present 
subjunctive. 

Of the Irregular Verb seguir, to follow. 

This verb changes the e of the infinitive mood 
into i in the first person singular of the present indi- 



92 PORTUGUESE 

cative, eu sigo, I follow : in the present subjunctive 
que eu s/ga, that I may follow ; and in the impera- 
tive where it is conjugated thus : segue tu, siga elk, 
sigdmos nos, scgui vos, si gab elks. 

Observe that the u is lost in those tenses where 
it would otherwise meet with the vowels o and a, 
as you see in the examples ; and this observation 
applies also to the verbs distlnguir, to distinguish ; 
extingwr, to extinguish, &c. 

The compounds are perseguir, to persecute ; 
conseguir, to obtain ; proseguir to pursue. 

Of the Irregular Verb ouvir, to hear. 

This verb changes the v of the infinitive mood 
into f in the first person singular of the present 
indicative, eu Sugo, I hear, tu ouves, &c. in the 
present subjunctive and in the imperative mood, 
where it is conjugated thus : ouve tu, ouga elk, 
ougdmos nos, ouvi vos, oucao elles, hear thou, &c. 

Of the Irregular Verb dormfr, to sleep. 

This verb changes the o of the infinitive mood 
into u in the first person singular of the present 
indicative, thus eu durmo tu dormes, elle dorme, 
&c. I sleep, 8$c. In the present subjunctive, que 
eudurma, &c. that I may sleep ; and in the impe- 
rative mood, where it is conjugated thus ; dorme tu, 
durma elk, durmamos nos, dormi vos, durmao elks, 
sleep thou, 8$c. 

Of the Irregular Verb fugir, to fly away. 

This verb is irregular in the present indicative, 
and is thus conjugated : fujo, foges, foge, fugimos, 
fugis,fogem, 1 run away, &;c. It is also irregular 
in the imperative mood where it is conjugated 
thus : foge tu, fuja elk, fujdmos nbs,fugi v6s,fujad 
elks. Finally, it is irregular in the present sub- 
junctive ; que eu fuja, fit) as, &c. 



GRAMMA R. 93 

It keeps the u in all other tenses and moods, as 
also the g. 

The verb surgir, to arrive, or to come to an an- 
chor, has the same irregularity, and makes surlo, in 
the participle passive. 

The verbs, subir, cubrir, encubrir, descubrir, acu- 
dir, bullir, sumir, consumer, cuspzr, construir\ tossir 
&c. have the same irregularity in regard to the let- 
ter u. 

Of the Irregular Verb pedir to ask. 

This verb is irregular in the first person singular 
of the present indicative and subjunctive, as well as 
in the imperative, in which it changes the d into g. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

en peco I ask, #c. nos pedimos 

tu pedes vos pedis 

elle pede elks pedem 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

pecamos nos let us ask 
pede tu ask thou pedi vos ask you 

peca elle let him ask pecao elles let them ask 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. ■ 

que etc pica that I may ask, #c. pecamos 

picas pecdis 

peca pecao 

In like manner is conjugated the verb medh\ to 
measure : eu me$o, tu medes, &c. 

Of the Irregular Verb vestir, to dress. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

eu visto I dress, <$fc. vestimos 

vestes vestis 

vests vestem 



94 PORTUGUESE 

IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

vislamos n6s let us dress 
vestc tu dress thou vesti vos dress you 

vista ilia let him dress vistao elks let them dress 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

que eu vista that I may dress, fyc. vistamos 

vistas mstdis 

vista vistao 

In all other tenses and moods it keeps the let- 
ter e ; and in like manner is conjugated the verb 
despir 

Of the Irregular Verb sortfr, to furnish, or stock. 

Feyjo says, that the o of this verb is to be changed 
into u in those tenses where the t is followed by e 
or a, and that it is to be kept when the t is followed 
byi; but in the Fabula dos Planetas we read, surtio 
effeyto, it took effect : and in Andrade, 2 'part. Apolo- 
get. we read, nab sortirab effeyto, where the verb 
sortirab is in the same tense, viz. inthepreterperfectj 
definite; therefore nothing can be determined about 
the irregularity of this verb. 

Of the Irregular Verb carpir, to weep. 

This verb is defective, and is only used in those 
tenses and persons where the p is followed by i ; as 
carpzmoS) carpis, we weep, you weep. Preterimper- 
fect, carpia, carpias, &c. I did weep, fyc. 

Of the Irregular Verb parir, to bring forth young. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

cu pairo I bring forth, fyc. parimos 

pares pans 

pare parem 

Imperfect. 
paria, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 95 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
pairdmos 
pare tu bring thou forth, tyc. pari 
paira ilia pdirao 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

que eu paira that I may say, Sfc. pairdmos 
pairas pairdis 

paira pairao 

Of the Irregular Verb repetir, to repeat. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
repito I repeat, fyc. repetimos 

repeles repetis 

repete repetem 

Imperfect. 

repetid, repetias, &c. 

Preterperfect definite. 

repeti, repetiste, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

repete lie repeat thou, fyc. repitdmos, &c. 

repita elle 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

que eu repita that I may repeat, fyc. 
repitas, &c. 

Imperfect. 
repetira y or repetisse that I might repeat. 

Of the Irregular Verbs sahir, to go out, andcahir, to 

fall. 

INDICATIVE MOOD.' 

Present. 
sdj/o I go out, 8fc. sahimos 

sdhes sahis 

sake sahem 

Preterimperfect. 

salua, sahicts, &c, 



96 PORTUGUESE 

Prcterperfect definite. 

sahi, sahiste, &c. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

sahdmos nus 
sake tu sahi vos 

sdi/a elk sdgao elks 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

que eu soya, sdi/as, &c. 
This is the common way of writing the irregular 
tenses of the verb sahir as well as those of the verb 
cahir^ viz. eu cdyo, tucahes, &c. I fall, &;c. according 
to Feyjo, 

Of the Irregular Verb, ordir, to ivarp in a loom. 

Feyjo says that this verb changes the o into u in 
those persons where it would otherwise meet with 
the syllables da, de, do, 

Of the Irregular Verb advertir, to warn. 

Advertir is irregular in the following tenses, only 
by changing vir into ver. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

advirto I warn, fyc. advertimos 

advertes advertis 

advertc adveriem 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

advirlamos nos 
ddverte tu warn thou, Sfc. adverti vos 

advirla ilk advirtao elks 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present. 
que eu advtrta that I may warn, fyc. advirtdmos 

advirtas advirtdis 

advirta advirtao 



GRAMMA R. 07 

Conjugation of the Irregular Verb por, to place. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

ponho I put, fyc. pomos 
poens pondes 

poem poem 

Preterimperfect. 

punha I did put, fyc. punhamos 
punhas punheis 

punha punhao 

Preterperfect definite. 

puz I put, fyc. puzemos 

puzcste puzestes 

poz puzerao 

Preterperfect. 
It is composed of the present indicative of the 
auxiliary verb ter, and the participle posto. 
Preterplu perfect. 

Composed of the participle posto, and the imper- 
fect of the auxiliary verb ter. 

Future. 

parti I shall or will put, fyc. portmos 
pords poreis 

pord pordd 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

ponhdmos nos 
poem put thou, #c. ponde vos 

ponha file ponkao elks 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

Present. 

que ea ponha that I may put, #c. 
iu ponhas, &c. 

First Preterimperfect. 

que £u puzera or puzesse that I might put, fya 
tu puzeras, or puzesses, &c. 
H 



98 PORTUGUESE 

Second Preterimperfcct. 
eu porta, I should put, fyc. 

tu porias, &c. 

Pretcrperfect. 
It is composed of the participle posto, and the 
present subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ten, 
Preterpluperfect . 
Composed of the participle pdsto, and the first 
preterimperfect subjunctive N of the auxiliary verb 
ter. 

Second Preterpluperfect. 
Composed of the participle posto, and the second 
preterimperfect subjunctive of the auxiliary verb 
ter. 

Future. 
quando eu puser, when I shall put, Sfc. 

tu pushes, &c. 

Second Future. 
Composed of the participle posto, and the future 
subjunctive of the auxiliary verb ter. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present. 
por to put 

GERUND. 

pondo, putting 

PARTICIPLE PASSIVE. 

pdsto put 
After the same manner are conjugated the verbs 
derived from por; as compur, to compose; clispor 
to dispose ; propor, to propose, &c. 

Some verbs are irregular only in the participle 
passive; as aberto, from abrir ; escrito, from escre- 

ver, &c. 

Of Verbs Neuter. 
Verbs neuter are those which make a complete 



GRAMMAR. 99 

sense of themselves, and do not govern any case 
after them, like the verb sactive ; as dormir, to sleep ; 
anddr, to go ; tremir, to tremble, &c. There are, 
however, some verbs neuter which may govern an 
accusative ; as dormir hum sono profundo, to sleep 
soundly ; iu fui andando meu caminho, e nao disse 
huma palavra, I went my way, and said not a word. 
Verbs neuter may also be defined as those which, in 
their compound tenses, are seldom conjugated 
with the verb sir, to be ; as, I sleep, I tremble, I 
speak, &c. We may indeed say, iu tinho dormido, 
1 have slept ; iu tenho tremido, I have trembled ; 
but not, I am slept, &c. I said seldom* because 
sometimes verbs neuter may be conjugated with the 
verb sir ; as, sir bemfallado, to have a good name. 
It is necessary to be acquainted with the nature 
of a verb neuter, to avoid mistakes in the participle, 
as may be seen in the Syntax of Participles. 



Of Reciprocal Verbs. 

The term Reciprocal is given to such Verbs as 
return the action upon the agent, and are conju- 
gated through all their tenses with the pronouns 
conjunctive me, te, se, &c. 

EXAMPLE. 

indicative Present. 

eu me arrependo I repent, fyc, 

tu te arrependes 
eile se arrepende, &c. 

Imperfect. 
eu me arrependia, I did repent, #c. 
and so of the rest. 

Yet, it is to be observed that the pronouns con- 
junctive me, te, &c. may be placed either before or 
after the verb, in the indicative, and consequently 
we may say, iu me limbro, or eu Zimbro-me*, I re- 

H 2 



100 PORTUGUESE 

member ; me lembrei, or lembrei-me, I remembered, 
&c. But in the imperative they should be placed 
after the verb, as in the following 

EXAMPLE. 

lembremo-nos nos 
lembra-te tu remember thou, fyc. lembrdi-vos vos 
Umbre-se elk lembrem-se elks 

In which example 3^011 will observe also, that the 
first person plural, which in the other verbs is like 
the first person plural of the present subjunctive, has 
the last consonant, s, cut off ; and so from lembremos 
w r e cut off the s to make lembremo-nos ; and from 
arrependdmos we make arrependdmo-nos, &c. In re- 
gard to the infinitive, we may say, he necessdrio ar- 
repender-se dos peccados, it is necessary to repent of 
sins ; he necessdrio lembrdr-se, it is necessary to re- 
member ; and not se arrepender, or se lembrdr. In 
like manner we may say, lembrdndo-me, remember- 
ing, and not me lembr&ndo. But the present infi- 
nitive may be preceded by the particle para (which 
forms the Portuguese supine), and then the pro- 
noun conjunctive may be placed either before or 
after it ; and we may say, para lembrdr-se, or 
joara se lembrdr, to remember, or in order to re- 
member. 

In the subjunctive mood, you must put the 
pronoun conjunctive before the present ; but you 
must carefully observe, that the pronouns conjunc- 
tive must be placed before it when preceded by the 
particles se, if, que, that; thus we may say, que eu 
me lembrdsse, se e*u me lembrdsse, that I might re- 
member, &c. but not que eu lembrdsse me, &c. But 
when the first preterimperfect is not preceded by 
any particle, then you must place the pronoun con- 
junctive after it ; as, arrependerame eu disso, I wish 
I repented it. 

In the second preterimperfect we may place the 
pronouns conjunctive either before or after it, there- 



GRAMMAR. 101 

fore you may say arrependeria-me se, &c. or eu me 
arrependeria se, &c. I should' repent if, 8$c. 

In the future you must always place the pronouns 
conjunctive before it ; thus, qudndo eu me lembrar, 
when I shall remember : but not qudndo eu lembrdr- 
me. 

Note, all the verbs active may become recipro- 
cals. 

EXAMPLE. 

eu me dmo I love myself 

tu te dmas thou lovest thyself 

elle se dma he loves himself 

nos nos amdmos we love ourselves, fyc. 

Conjugation of the Reciprocal Verb ir-se, to go away. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

eu me vou I go away 

tu te vds, &c. thou goest away, $*c. 

Preterimperfect. 
Su me tiia I did go away 
tu te Idas, &c. thou didst go away, #c. 

Preterperfect definite. 
eu me fid, I went away 
tu tefoste, &c. thou wentestjiway, $c. 

Preterperfect. 

eu me tenho ido I am gone away, or I have gone away. 
tu te lens ido, &c. thou hast gone away, fyc. 

Preterpluperfect . 
iu me t'tnha ido I was gone away, or I had gone away. 

tu te tinhas ido, &c. thou hast gone away, fyc. 

Future. 

eu me irei, &c. I shall or will go away 
tu te irds, &c. thou shalt go away 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
vdi-te, go thou away 
vd-se let him go away 

vdmo-nos let us go away 
tde-vos go away, get away, or get you gone 
vdo-se let them go away 



102 PORTUGUESE 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

que hi me vd that I may go away 

que tu te vds, &c. that thou mayest go away, #c. 

First Preterimperfect. 

eu me for a, or me fosse I went away 

teforas, or te fosses, &c. thou wentest away, fyc. 

Second Preterimperfect. 

eu me iria I would, fyc. go away 

tu te irias thou wouldst, #c. 

Preterperfect. 

que eu me tenha Mo that I have gone away, #c. 

Preterpluperfect. 

que eu me tivera, or me tivesse tdo that I had gone away 

Second Preterpluperfect. 

£u me teria tdo I should have gone away, fyc. 

Future. 

qudndo eu me for when I shall go away, Sfc. 

Second Future. 
qudndo eu me tiver tdo when I shall have gone away, §c, 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
zr-se to go away 
Preterperfect. 
Ur-se tdo, to have gone away 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present. 
gut st vd that is gone away 



GRAMMAR. 103 

Preterit. 
Mo gone away 

Future. 
que ha de ir-se that is to go, away 

GERUNDS. 

inclose going away 
tendo-se Mo having gone away 

SUPINE. 

para zr-se to go, or in order to go" away 

Observe, that in the compound tenses the 
pronouns me, te, &c. are placed before the auxi- 
liary verb. 

2dly. This verb is also used in speaking of vessels 
to signify their being leaky ; as vdi-se a cuba, the tub 
leaks. It is also used before the gerunds ; as, o in- 
verno vdi-se acabando, the winter is drawing towards 
an end ; elks vao-se prepardndo, they are preparing 
themselves : in which examples and in the like, the 
verb is to be rendered into English by the verb to 
be itself, and without addition of the adverb away ; 
and sometimes it is placed before the present infi- 
nitive ; as, ir-se deitdr, to go to bed. 

Of the Reciprocal Verb vir-se, to come away. 

This verb is to be conjugated like the verb vir ; 
but you must place the pronouns conjunctive 
me, te, &c. according to the observations made 
above. 

Of the Reciprocal Verb avir-se, to agree. 

This is a compound verb, which is to be conju- 
gated by putting the particle a before the verb 
vir in all its tenses and moods ; attending to 



104 PORTUGUESE 

the observations already made concerning the 
pronouns conjunctive ; and also in regard to the 
reciprocal verb haver-se, to behave; in the con- 
jugation of which, no more is necessary than to 
add the pronouns conjunctive to the verb haver. 

Impersonal Verbs. 

There are three sorts of verbs impersonal, which 
have only the third person singular. 

The first are properly impersonals of themselves ; 
as, 



succede 


it happens 


bdsta 


it is enough, or it suffices 


chove 


it rains 


troveja 


it thunders 



The second are derived from verbs active, fol- 
lowed by the particle se, which renders them im- 
personal ; as, ama-se, they love ; diz-se, they say ; 
nota-se, it is noted. They are also called passive 
impersonals. 

The third, which have a great affinity with re- 
ciprocal verbs, are conjugated with the pronouns 
conjunctive, me, te, the, nos, vos, Ihes ; as doe me 
doe te, doe the, &c. 

The Impersonal Verbs of themselves are, 

conv6m, it is convenient 

succede, it happens, or it falh out 

esld-me hem, it becomes me 

hdsta, it is enough 

hd-se, it is necessary 

chovisca, it misles 

chove, or cake pedra, it hails 

gta it freezes 

neva, it snows 

fuzila, or relampaguea, it lightens 

importa, it matters, it concerns 

parece, it seems 



GRAMMAR. 105 

and the like, which are conjugated with the third 
persons singular of each tense ; as, 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

chove it rains 

Imperfect. 

chovia it did rain 

Preterperfect definite. 

chov&o it rained 

Preterperfect. 

tern chovido it has rained 

Preterpluperfect. 
tinha chovido it had rained 

Future. 
choverd it shall or will rain 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

chdva let it rain 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS, 

Present. 

que chdva that it may rain 

Imperfect. 
que chovera, or chovesse that it might rain 

Second Imperfect. 

choveria it should rain 

Future. 

qudndo chover ■ when it shall rain 

Second Future. 

qudndo liver chovido when it shall have rained 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
chovir to rain 



106 PORTUGUESE 

The particle se which composes the scond sort 
of impersonal verbs, may be placed either before or 
after them ; as, diz-se, they say ; sabe-se, it is known ; 
sabia-se, it was known : logo se soube, it was imme- 
diately known ; se diz, it is said, §c. but sometimes 
they make no use of the particle se, and only put 
the verb in the third person plural ; as, dize??i, in- 
stead of se diz, they say. 

In like manner all the verbs active may become 
impersonal. 

In regard to these verbs, observe, that when the 
noun that follows them is in the singular number, 
you must put the verb in the singular ; if the noun 
be in the plural, you must put the verb in the plural. 

EXAMPLE. 

Louva-se o capitao, they praise the captain. 
Louvao-se os capitals, they praise the captains. 
Fe-se hum homem, they see a man. 
Vem-se homens, they see men. 

When Ihe is used after the word se, then the is to 
be rendered into English by his or her ; as, Wiwa- 
se-lhe o valor, they praise his or her courage. 

The third sort of impersonal verbs are such as 
are conjugated with the pronouns personal, me, te, 
Ihe, &c. with the third person singular. 

EXAMPLE. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

desagrdda-me I am displeased, or it displeases me 

desdgrada-te thou art displeased 

desagrada-lhe he or she is displeased 

desagrdda-nos we are displeased 

desagrdda-vos you are displeased 

desdgrada-lhes they are displeased 

Imperfect. 
desagradava-me I was displeased 



GRAMMAR. 107 

Preterperfect definite. 
* desagradou-me I was displeased 
Future. 
desagraddr-me-hd I shall be displeased 

OPTATIVE MOOD. 

que me desagrdde that I may be displeased 

Imperfect. 

que me desagraddra or me desagraddsse that I were displeased 

Second Imperfect. 

desagraddr-me*hia I should be displeased 

Conjugate after the same manner, 

succede-me, it happens to me 
doe-me, it grieves or it pains me 
, parece-me, it seems to me 
he-me preciso* it behoves me 
agrdda-me, it pleases me 
lembro-me, I remember 

Many of these impersonal verbs have the third 
person singular and plural ; as, 

doe me a perna, my leg pains me 

doem me os olhos, I have sore eyes 

o vosso vesttdo partce-me novo, your coat appears new to 

me 
os vossos sapdtos me 'parecem muito compridos, your shoes 

seem to me too long 

Of the Verb ser, to be. 

The verb ser is also used as an impersonal, as will 
be seen in the following examples : he tempo de le- 
vantdr-se, it is time to get up ; era tempo de hir, it 
was time to go, 6fC. and particularly when it is con- 
jugated with the adjectives preciso or necessario ; as, 
he preciso or necessario fazer isto, this must be done ; 
era preciso or necessario escrever, it was necessary to 
write ; eu iria, se fdsse preciso, I would go, if it 



108 PORTUGUESE 

should be necessary ; he precisq que eu va, I must 
go ; h6 preciso que eu ley a, I must read ; he prtciso 
que elle coma, he must eat ; seriapreciso que eu fosse, 
I should go. You see by the last examples, that 
when the verb sir and the adjective are before the 
conjunctive mood, with the participle que, the con- 
junctive is rendered in English by the infinitive ; 
but if the verb sir is followed by the relative or par- 
ticle que, it must then be rendered in English in 
the following manner ; as, eu he que tenhofeito aquillo, 
'tis I who have done that ; tu he que tens, 8$c. 'tis 
thou who hast, &c. elle he que tern, 6fc. 'tis he who, 
&c. nos he que temos, fyc. 'tis we who have, &c. vos 
he que thicks, fyc. 'tis you who have, &c. elks he que 
tern, <§c. 'tis they who have, &c. a ley he que o mantlet, 
'tis the law that prescribes it ; ella he que o ere, 'tis 
she who believes it; elks he que ojizerao? is it they 
have done it ? eu he que o fiz, 'twas I who did it ; 
entao he que eu to?no as minhas medidas, ^tis then I 
take my measures ; entao he que eu vi, 'twas then I 
saw, or only then I saw. You may observe that 
que is not relative in the last examples, and that it 
is left out in English. 

Of the Verb haver, when it is impersonal. 
It is to be thus conjugated. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present. 

ha, or nao ha there is, or there is not, or there are ; or 
there are not 

Imperfect. 
hav'ia there was, or there were 

Prcterperfect definite. 
houve there was or there were 



GRAMMAR. 109 

Preterperfect. 

tern havido there has been, or there have been 

Preterpluperfect. 

tinha havido there had been 

Future. 

haverd there shall be 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

hdja let there be 

OPTATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS, 

que hdja that there may be 

Imperfect. 

que houvera or houvtsse that there were 

Second Imperfect. 

haveria there would be 

Preterperfect. 

que Xtnha havido if there had been 

Preterpluperfect. 
se tivesse havido if there had been 

Future. 

qudndo houver when there will or shall be 

Second Future. 

qudndo liver havido when there shall have been 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
haver there to be 

Preterit. 
ter havido there to have been 

GERUNDS. 

havendo there being 

Undo havido in there having been 

Those who learn Portuguese are greatly at a loss 
how to render the following expressions, there is not ; 



110 PORTUGUESE 

is there 9 , although there is nothing more' easy. I 
have explained them at large in the following con- 
jugation. • 

Conjugation of the Verb impersonal there is, ha, 
when it marks the place, through all its tenses. 



There is of it 
There is not of it 
Is there of it ? 
Is there not of it ? 

There was of it 
There was not of it 
Was there of it ? 
Was there not of it ? 

There was of it 
There was not of it 
Was there of it ? 
Was there not of it ? 

There shall be of it 
There shall not be of it 
Shall there be of it ? 
Shall there not be of it ? 

That there may be of it 
That there may not be of it 
That there were of it 
That there were not of it 
There would be of it 
There would not be of it 
Would there not be of it ? 

If there had been of it 
If there had not been of it 

Had there been of it P 
Had there not been of it ? 

There would have been of it 
There would not have been 

of it 
Would there have been of it ? 
Would there not have been 

of it? 
When there will be of it 
When there will not be of it 



ha la disso 
nao ha la disso 
ha la disso ? 
nao ha Id disso ? 

havia la disso 
nao havia Id disso 
havia la disso ? 
nao havia la disso? 

houve la disso 
nao houve Id disso 
houve la disso f 
nao houve la disso ? 

haverd Id disso 
nao haverd la disso 
haverd la disso f 
nao haverd la disso 

que hdja la disso 

nao hdja Id disso [disso 

que houvera or houvesse la 

nao houvera or houvesse la 

haveria la disso [disso 

nao haveria la disso 

nao haveria la disso ? 

se tivesse havido la disso 

se nao tivesse havido la disso 

teria havido la disso ? 
nao teria havido Id disso ? 

teria havido la disso 
nao teria havido la disso 

teria havido Id disso f 
nao teria havido la disso ? 

qudndo houver Id disso 
qudndo nao houver Id disso 



GRAMMAR. Ill 

When there will have been quando tivSr havido Id disso 

of it 

When there will not have quando nao tiver havido Id 

been of it disso 

•Will there have been of it ? terd havido Id disso c i 

Will there not have been too nao terd havido la disso f 

much of it ? 

For there having been too por ter havido Id demasiada- 

much of it mente disso 

In there having been too little tendo havido Id muito pouco 

of it disso 

Most sentences beginning with the word some, and 
the verb to be, are expressed in Portuguese by the 
impersonal ha; as, some friends are false, ha am't- 
gosfalsos; some Christians are unworthy of that 
name, ha Christdos que nao sao dignos de tal nome. 

Observe, that ha comes before a substantive even 
of the plural number. 

The impersonal ha\s besides used to denote a 
quantity of time, space, and number ; as, ha dez 
dnnos que morreo, he has been dead these ten years ; 
or, he died ten years ago ; ha trinta milhuens d* almas 
em Frdnga\ there are thirty millions of souls in 
France ; de Paris a Ldndres ha 120 legoas, Paris is 
120 leagues from London. 

The question of space is asked thus, gudnto ha de 
Parts a Londres? how far is Paris from London. 

Of the impersonal Verb ha-se, it is necessary ', or must. 

This verb answers to the Italian bisogna, and to 
the French il faut, and always requires after it the 
particle de, and the infinitive. It denotes the ne- 
cessity of doing something, and is Englished by must, 
and sometimes by the verb to be, through all its 
tenses, with the words necessary, requisite, needful, 
&c. and as it denotes the necessity of doing 
something in general, without specifying who must, 
therefore the agent coming before must may be 



112 PORTUGUESE 

either / or ive, he, or she, or any body, according to 
the subject of the sentence: as, 

Hd-se defazer aquillo, one, or we, or you, or he, 
or somebody must do that. 

Hd-se de hir, I or you, or we, or somebody must 



go- 



Sometimes the verb coming after this impersonal, 
is Englished by the passive voice ; as, hd-se defazer 
isto, this must be done. 

It is very often joined with mister ; as, hd-se de 

mister dinheiroparademdndas, one must have money 

to go to law ; hd-se de mister hum bom amigo para 

fazer fortuna no mundo, to push one's fortune in the 

world, one must have a good friend. 

In the conjugation of this verb, you must use 
the verb to) be with the word necessary, as I have 
already said. 

EXAMPLE. 

Present, hd-se, it is necessary. Imperfect, havia- 
se, it was necessary ; and so through all the tenses 
and moods. 

Sometimes the infinitive that follows the particle 
de is placed between this impersonal and its particle 
se ; as, hd-de achdrse, it will be found ; and some- 
times the infinitive precedes the impersonal, and 
this follows the particle se ; as, achdr-se-hd, it will 
be found; in this case you must not join the 
particle de to it. Observe, that the infinitive may 
be also placed between the imperfect tense of this 
impersonal verb and its particle se ; as, havia de 
achdr-se, it was to be found ; but when the infinitive 
precedes both the impersonal and its particle se, 
then you must put the particle se before the 
impersonal, and make use of the imperfect hia, 
and not havia; thus we must say, achdr-se hia, and 
not achdr-se havia. 



GRAMMAR. 113 

Of the Defective Verbs carpi r, to weep, and so&r, 
to be wont. 

The verb carpir is used only in those tenses and 
persons where the p is followed by an i; as, carpt- 
mos, carpis, we weep, you weep. Preterimp. carpia, 
carpias, &c. I did weep, &c. 

The verb soer is only used in the third persons of 
the present indicative of the preterimperfect of the 
same mood, and in the gerund ; as, elk sbe, he is 
wont; elks soem, they are wont. Imperf. elk soia, 
he was wont ; elks soiao, they were wont. Gerund, 
soendo, being wont. 



CHAP. VI. 

OF THE PARTICIPLES. 

THE participle is a tense of the infinitive, which 
serves to form the preterperfects and preter- 
pluperfects of all the verbs ; as, tenho amado, L have 
loved ; tinha amado, I had loved. 

Amado is a participle, and all the verbs in ar form 
the participle in ado; as, amado, cantado, &c. 

Amado is likewise a noun adjective. Example. 
Homem amado, mother amada ; livros amddos, letras 
amadas. 

Some participles are frequently abridged ; as, 
envdltOy or envolvido, corrupto, or corrompido, enxhto 
or enxugddo ; and several others, which the use of 
authors will point to you. 

The regular verbs ending in er or ir form the 
participle in ido ; as, vendido, recebido, luz'tdo, nu* 
trido, &c. 

I 



114 PORTUG UESE 

There are three sorts of participles ; namely, 
active, passive, and absolute. 

The active participles are composed of the verb 
tcr ; as, tenho amado, tinha amado, &c. 

The passive participles are preceded by the verb 
sh\ to be ; as, sou amado , sendo louvado, &c. 

The passive participles are of the same nature 
as those called absolute in Latin ; and you must 
observe, that having and being are often left out in 
Portuguese. 

EXAMPLE. 

Feito tsto, having done this. 

Dzto zsto, having said so. 

Acabada a cea, after he or they have supped. 

The auxiliary and participle are not always im- 
mediately joined together in compound tenses ; as, 
Nos temos, com a grdga de Deos, vencido os nossos 
inimigoS) we have, by the grace of God, overcome 
our enemies. 



CHAP. VII. 

OF THE ADVERBS. 

THE adverb is that which gives more or less force 
to the verb. 

The adverb has the same effect with the verb as 
the adjective with the substantive : it explains the 
accidents and circumstances of the action of the 
verb. 

There are a great many sorts ; as, adverbs of 
time, place, quantity, &c. 

Adverbs of time; as, at present, presentemente ; 
now, agora ; yesterday, ontem ; to day., huje ; never, 



GRAMMAR. 115 

nunca; always, sempre ; in the mean time, entre- 
tanto. 

Adverbs of place ; as, where, onde ; here, aqui ; 
from whence, dunde; there, alt; from hence, da- 
qui ; above, em chna, below, e?n baxo ; far, longe ; 
near, pt'rto. 

Adverbs of quantity; as, how much, qudnto, 
how many, qudntos ; or qudntas ; so much, tdnto ; 
much, muito ; little, pouco. 

A great many adverbs are formed from adjec- 
tives, changing o into amente ; sdnto, santamente, 
holily ; rko, ricamente, richly ; douto, doutamente, 
learnedly. 

From adjectives in e or / we likewise form adverbs, 
by adding minte to them ; as, 

Constdnte, const ant entente, constantly. 

Diligente, diUgentemente, diligently. 

Prudente, prudentemente, prudently. 

Fiel,Jielmente, faithfully. 

In order to assist the memory of those who are 
learning the Portuguese language, I have here 
collected a large number of adverbs, which, by- 
frequent repetition, may be easily retained, espe- 
cially those terminated in mente, 

A COLLECTION OF ADVERBS. 

Abundantemtnte, abundantly Adeos, farewell 

Com razao,justamente, justly Admiravel mente "\ g 

Absolutamente, absolutely Maravilhosamente V§ 

A Escachapernas, or a ca- A's mil maravilhas J % 

valleiro, a-straddle Astutamente, cunningly 

Agora, or por hora, now at Atreicoadamente, treacher- 

this time ously 

Jd,parajd, now, immediately De maravilha, very seldom 

Com condicdo, upon condition A miudo, often 

De parte, aside Ass'im, so 

De travez, askew, asquint ,* Tao, so 

as, olhdr de trav6z, to look A'pressa, in haste 

askew, or asquint Facilmente, easily 

Actualmente, actually A'o avesso, or de avessas, the 
De propositi, purposely wrong side outward 

I 2 



116 PORTU 

De improviso, or improvisa- 

mente, unawares 
Anligamente, anciently 
Quasi, pretty near, almost 
Entdo, then 

Desde entdo, since that time 
Desde qudndo ? since when ? 
De qudndo ha? from what 

time ? how long ? 
De qudndo em qudndo, now 

and then, ever and anon 
Qudndo hem, or aindo qudndo 

albeit, although it should 

be 
Qudndo muito, at the most 
Qudndo menos, at least 
Cd, here, or hither 
La, there 
Alt, there, in that place 

there expresses the 
place where stands the 
Ahi, -j person spoken to ; as 
ahi onde esids, there 
where you are 
Jcold, there 
Tra%, or detrdz, behind 
Para trdz, backward 
I'sto he, to wit 
Em vez, instead 
Tambem, also 
Tdnto que 1 
Logo que f 
De pensddo, wilfully 
Acdso, by chance 
Fixaminte, stedfastly 
Finalmente, finally 
Livremente, freely 
Miiito, much 
Depressa, quickly 
Aqui, here 
Ate aqui, as far as here, or 

till now, or hitherto 
D'aqui, em didnte, hencefor- 
ward, or hereafter 
Bern, well 



as soon as 



GUESE 

APmanhaa, to-morrow 

A* manhda pela manhda, to- 
morrow morning 

Dcspois d? a manhda, after 
to-morrow 

Ultimam&nte, lastly 

Como, as 

Como ? how ? 

Cedo, soon 

Tdrde, late 

Primeiro que, before that 

Primeiro que tudo, before all, 
or in the first place 

Fora, abroad, out 

Jd, already 

De sdlto, at one jump 

De qudndo em qudndo, from 
time to time 

A'ntcs, before 

Despois, afterwards 

Juntamente, together 

Enteiram&ite, entirely 

A'o redor, or em torno, about 

De bdlde, in vain 

Loucamente, madly 

Muito, very 

Alrevidamente, boldly 

Felicemente, happily 

Vergonhosamente, shamefully 

Nunca, never 

Nunca mais, never since 

Logo, immediately 

Ainda, yet ; as, ainda nao 
veio, he is not come yet 

Ainda, even ; as, seria ver- 
gonha ainda o falldr nisso, 
it were a shame even to 
speak of it 

Nem se quer, even 

Vilmente, basely 

Mai, ill 

Mais, more 

Menos, less 

Ate, until, or even 

Sim, yes 



GRAMMAR. 117 

Nad, no, not Qudndo, when 

O'nde, where Ndda, nothing 

De cor, by heart Verdadeiraminte, truly 

As vezes, sometimes; from Dentro, within 
time to time Devagdr, softly 



CHAP. VIII. 

OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 

PREPOSITIONS are a part of speech indeclin- 
able, most commonly set before a noun, a pronoun, 
or verb. 

Every preposition requires some case after it, as 
you will see in the following collection ; 
Genitive. 

Antes do dia, before day-break 

Didnte de Deos, before God 

Dentro da igreja within the church 

De trdz ao paldcio, behind the palace 

Debdxo da mesa, under the table 

Em cima da mesa, upon the table 

Alem, besides 

A lent dos mares, on that side of the seas 

Alem disso, besides that;, moreover 

Alem de que, idem 

Aquem, or ddquem dos mares, on this side of the seas 

Ao redor, or em contorno da ciddde, round about the city 

Perto de Londres, near London 

Acerca da quelle negocio, concerning that affair 

For a da cdsa, out of the house 

Fora de perigo, out of danger 

Fora de si, out of one's wits 

This preposition governs also a nominative; as, fora seu 
irmao, except his brother, or his brother excepted. 

Defronte de minha cdsa, over-against my house. 
Defronte da igreja, facing the church 
Despois de cea, after supper 

Dative. 

Qudnto aquillo, with respect to that 
Pegado a muralha, close to the wall 



118 PORTUGUESE 

Dtsde o bico do pe ate a cabeca, from top to toe 
Accusative. 

Per ante ojuiz, before the judge. 

Plntre, between, among, or amongst 

E'ntre os homcns, among men 

Sobre a mesa, upon the table 

Conforme, or segundo a ley, according to the law 

Por amor de Deos, for God's sake 

Pelo mundo, through the world 

Pela rua, through the streets 

Pelas terras, through the lands 

Por grdnde que seja, let it never be so great 

Contra elles, against them 

Traz do templo, behind the temple 

Durante, during ; as, durante o inverno, during the winter 

We shall be more particular about prepositions 
when we examine their construction. 



CHAP. IX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 

A Conjugation is an indeclinable part of 
speech which serves to join the members and parts 
of speech together, in shewing the dependency of 
relation and coherency between the words and 
sentences. 

Some conjugations are copulative, which join, 
and, as it were, couple two terms together ; as, e, 
and : Portugueses e Ingleses, Portuguese and English. 

Some are disjunctive, which shew separation or 
division ; as, nem, nor, neither ; ou, either, or. 
Example ; nem este, nem aquelle, neither this, nor 
that ; ou este, ou aquelle, either this or that ; nem 
mdis, nem menos, neither more nor less ; quer o faga, 
quer nao, tudo para mini he o mesmo, it is all one to 
me whether he does it, or no ; quer seja verdade, 
quer nao, whether it be true, or not; nem se quer 
hum, not even one. 

The adversative denote restriction, or contrariety ; 



GRAMMAR. 119 

as, mas, or porem, but ; comtudo, yet, however; mas 
antes, or pello contrdrio, nay. 

The conjunctions conditional suppose a condi 
tion, and serve to restrain and limit what has just 
been said ; as, se, if; com condicdm que, com isto que, 
dado cdso que, provided that, or upon condition that, 
or in case that, &c. 

The concessive, which shew the assent we give to 
a thing ; as, embora, or seja embora, well and good ; 
est a feito, done, agreed. 

The causal shew the reason of something; as, 
porque, for, or because, or why. 

The concluding denote a consequence drawn 
from what is before ; as, logo or por consequencia, 
therefore, then, or consequently. 

The transitive, which serve to pass from one sen- 
tence to another; as, alem disso, moreover, or besides 
that; sobre tudo, or em summa, after all, upon the 
whole, in the main; a propbsito, now I think of it, 
or now we are speaking of that. 

There are others of a different sort ; as, se que'r, 
or ao menos, at least ; aindaque, although ; de sorte 
que, so that; antes quero ped'ir que fuvtar, Til rather 
beg than steal ; antes morrerei que dizer-volo, Pll 
rather die than tell you ; jd que, since, &c. 

To the above-mentioned parts of speech gramma- 
rians have added Interjections, which are particles 
serving to denote some passion or emotion of the 
mind; but there is another sort, which maybe called 
demonstrative: as, aqui and la; Ex. este homem aqui, 
this man ; aquella mother la, that woman, &c. and 
some others continuative, because they denote con- 
tinuation in the speech ; as, com effeito, in effect; 
alem disso, besides ; bra vejdmos, now let us see \jinal- 
mente fbmonos embora, and so, sir, we went away. 
To which we may add those invented to imitate the 
sounds of dumb creatures, and the noise which is 
occasioned by the clashing of bodies against one 
another ; as, zaz, traz, thwick-thwack, &c. 



120 PORTUGUESE 

Interjective Particles. 
Of Joy. 
Ha, ha, ha ! Ha, ha, ha ! 
Oh que gosto /Oh joy ! 

Of Grief. 
Ay ! Alas ! ah ! 
Ay de mm! Woe is me ! lack ! 
Meu Deos ! My God ! 

Of Pain. 
Ay! Ay! 
Oh / Oh ! 

To encourage. 

0'ravAmos!\ Come, come on ! 

To call. 
0, old, Ho, hey, hip 1 

Of admiration or surprise. 
O, O Id, ahi ! Lack-a-day ! 
A pre! Heyday! 

Of aversion. 
I'rra ! ^ 
Ndda! > Awav, away with, fve ! 

For making people go out of the way, or stand away. 
Guardem-se, or arredem-se ! Have a care, clear the 
way, or stand away ! 

For shouting. 
Viva! Huzza ! 

Of silence. 
Caldivos! Hush ! Peace ! 

Of cursing and threatening. 
At, gudi! Woe ! 

For derision. 
Ah ! Ah ! oh ! oh ! oh ! 

Of wishing. 
O'provera a Deos ! Would to God ! 



GRAMMAR. 



121 



Oxala ! or hah ! O that ! 
Ose! Would! 

The interjection O serves for different emotions 
of the mind, as admiration, grief, wish, &c. and 
sometimes is used ironically, but differently uttered, 
according to the emotion which it expresses. 

Some Abbreviations used in the Portuguese 
Language. 



An (0 


Antonio 


Anthony 


Seb am 


Sebastidm 


Sebastian 


JJmo pe 


Beat'issimo Padre 


The most blessed Father 


Cap m 


Capitao 


Captain 


Corap a 


Companhia 


Company 


Corr 


Carreio 


Post 


D. 


Dom or Dona 


Don or Dona 


D r , D or 


Doutor 


Doctor 


D s 


Deos 


God 


D°, D* 


Ditto, dfitta 


Said 


Ex m0 , Ex™ 


JExcellentissimo, maMost excellent 


V. E. 


Vossa excellencia 


Your Excellence 


V. s. 


Vossa senhoria - 


Your Lordship 


V. A. 


Vossa altesa 


Your Highness 


V. M. or V mce 


Vossa merce 


You 


V. P. 


Vossa paterniddde 


Your Paternity 


V. Mag de 


Vossa magestdde 


Your Majesty 


S. 


Santo 


Saint 


Fran co 


Francisco 


Francis 


G de 


Guarde 


Save 


J. H. S. 


Jesus 


Jesus 


M 8 a s 


Muitos dnnos 


Many Years 


M e 


Mestre 


Master 


S or , S fa 


Senhor, ora 


Sir, Lady 


R rao 


Reverendissimo 


Most Reverend 


pa 


Para 


For 


Q e 


Que 


That 


Q do 


Qudndo 


When 


Q m 


Quern 


Who 


Q t0 


Qudnto 


How much 


Supp te 


Supplicdnte 


Petitioner 


Gen^ 1 


General 


General 


Tent e 


Tenente 


Lieutenant 


V. G. 


Verbe gratia 


For Example 






And many others that must be learned by use 



122 PORTUGUESE 

PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR. 



PART II. 
CHAP. I. 

OF THE DIVISION OF SYNTAX. 

jg YNTAX is a Greek word, by the Latins called 
construction; and it signifies the right placing 
and connecting of words in a sentence. It is divided 
into three sorts ; the first, of Order or Arrangement ; 
the second, of Concordance ; the third of Govern- 
ment. The Syntax of Order or Arrangement, is the 
fit disposition of words in a sentence. The Syntax 
of Concordance, is when the parts of speech agree 
with one another, as the substantive with the adjec- 
tive, or the nominative with the verb. The Syntax 
of Government, is when one part of speech governs 
another. 

For the sake of those who, perhaps, have not a 
grammatical knowledge of their own language, I 
shall lay down some general rules of Portuguese 
construction. 



GRAMMAR. 123 

Of the Order of Words. 

1. The nominative is that to which we attribute 
the action of the verb, and is generally ranged in 
the first place ; it may be either a noun or pronoun, 
as, Francisco escr eve, Francis writes ; eufdllo, I speak. 

2. When the action of the verb is attributed to 
many persons or things, these all belong to the no- 
minative, and are ranged in the first place, together 
with their conjunction ; as, Pedro e Paulo lent, 
Peter and Paul read. 

3. The adjectives belonging to the nominative 
substantive, to which the action of the verb is attri- 
buted, are put after the substantive, and before the 
verb ; as, os estuddntes morigerddos e diligentes estu- 
dao, the obedient and diligent scholars study. 

4. If the nominative has an article, this article 
always takes the first place. 

,5. Sometimes an infinitive is put for a noun, and 
stands for a nominative ; as o dormir faz hem, sleep- 
ing does one good ; and sometimes a verb with its 
case ; as, he dcto de humaniddde ter compaLvdo dos 
afflictos, to have compassion on the afflicted is an 
act of humanity. 

6. The nominative is sometimes understood ; as, 
dmo, where you understand eu ; and so of the other 
persons of the verb. 

7. After the nominative you put the verb ; and if 
there is an adverb, it is to be placed immediately 
after the verb, whose accident and circumstances it 
explains; as, Pedro dmapor extremo a gloria, Peter 
is extremely fond of glory. 

8. The cases governed by the verb are put after 
it ; they may be one, or many, according to the na- 
ture of the action ; as, eu a mo a Pedro, I love Peter. 
Pago presente de hum Uvro a Paulo, I make a present 
of a book to Paul. 



124 PORTUGUESE 

9. The preposition is always put before the case 
it governs ; as, perto de casa, near the house. 

10. The relative is always placed after the ante- 
cedent ; as, Pedro o qual estuda, Peter who studies. 

II. Of Concordance. 

1. The adjectives agree with their substantives 
in gender, number, and case ; as, homem virtuoso, a 
virtuous man ; bella mother, a handsome woman ; 
sumptuosos paldcios, &c. sumptuous palaces, &c. 

2. When two or more substantives singular come 
together, the adjective belonging to them must be 
put in the plural ; as, tdnto el rey como a rainha 
montddos a cavallo parecem bem, both the king and 
the queen look well when they ride. 

3. If the substantives happen to be one in the 
singular and the other in the plural, or to be of 
different genders, the adjective common to both 
agrees in number and gender with the last ; as, elle 
tinha os blhos e a bdca abtrta, or elle t'mha a buca e os 
olhos abertos, his eyes and mouth were opened. As 
lagdas e rios estdvao congelados, the ponds and rivers 
were frozen. 

4. But when there is one or many words between 
the last noun and the adjective, that adjective (com- 
mon to all) agrees with the noun masculine, though 
the last noun be feminine ; and if the nouns are in 
the singular, then the adjective common must be 
put in the plural number and masculine gender ; as, 
o rio e a lagua estavao cogelados ; the pond and river 
were frozen. O trabalho, a industria, e a fortuna 
uriidos ; pains, industry, and fortune joined together. 

5. Every verb personal agrees with its nomina- 
tive, expressed or understood, both in number and 
person. 

6. The relative qual with the article agrees en- 
tirely with the antecedent ; but without the article 



GRAMMAR. 125 

and denoting an absolute quality, it agrees with 
what follows ; as, aquelte, coragao o quai, &c. that 
heart which, &c. Consider dndo quaes seriab as con- 
dicoens, &c. considering which would be the con- 
ditions, &c. 

7. The question and answer always agree in every 
thing ; as, a quesenhdra pertence v?n ce ? Hie respondeo, 
pertenco a ra'mha: To what lady do you belong, sir ? 
he answered, I belong to the queen. 

III. Of the Dependence of the Parts of Speech 
on one another, 

1. The nominative being the basis of the sen- 
tence, the verb depends on it, as the other cases 
depend on the verb. The adjective depends on the 
substantive that supports it ; and the adverb on the 
verb whose accidents it explains. 

2. The genitive depends on a substantive, ex- 
pressed or understood, by which it is governed. 

3. The accusative depends either on a verb ac- 
cusative, or on a preposition. 

4. The ablative depends on a preposition by 
which it is governed ; as, par to de Roma, I go from 
Rome. 

5. The dative and vocative have, strictly speak- 
ing, no dependence on the other parts : the dative 
is common, as it were, to all nouns and verbs ; the 
vocative only points out the person to whom you 
speak.^ 

I now come to the Construction of the several 
parts of speech. 



s 



126 PORTUGUESE 

CHAP. II. 

OF THE SYNTAX OF ARTICLES. 

BEFORE we come to the syntax of the articles, 
remember that o, a, os, as, are articles only when 
they precede the nouns or pronouns, but not when 
joined to the verbs. 

Those who understand Latin will quickly per- 
ceive the difference, if they take notice that every 
time they render o, a, by ilium, Mam, Mud ; or by 
eum, earn, id ; and os, as, by iilos Mas, Ma ; or by 
eos, eas, ea ; they are relative pronouns. 

1. The article is used before the names of the 
species or things which can be spoken of; therefore 
nouns of substances, arts, sciences, plays, metals, 
virtues, and vices, having no article before them in 
English, require the article in Portuguese ; as, 

ouro e a prdta nao podem fazerfeliz ao homem, 
gold and silver cannot make the happiness of man. 

A virtude nao he compativel com o vieio, virtue 
cannot agree with vice. 

A philosophia he huma sciSncia muito nobre, philo- 
sophy is a very noble science. 

Joguemos as cartas, let us play at cards. 

2. The article is not placed before a substantive 
which is followed by the adjective of number that 
stands for a surname, or. meet with a proper or 
Christian name; as, Joseph Primeiro, Joseph the 
First. 

3. When a book or some part of it, as chapter, 
page, &c. is quoted, the adjective of number may 
come either before or after the substantive ; but if 
it comes after, the two words are construed with- 
out the article; as, livro primeiro, capitulo segundo, 
&c. book i. chapter ii. If the adjective of number 



GRAMMAR. 127 

comes before the substantive, it takes the article ; 
as, o primeiro livro, the first book. 

4. O placed before que signifies what or which ; 
as, fdga o que quiser, let him do what he likes ; o 
que eujiz, which I did. 

5. The article is never made use of before proper 
names of men, women, gods, goddesses, saints. 

6. The article is not used in Portuguese before 
the pronouns possessive relative ; as, de quern he esta 
cdsa ? he minha, he tua, 6fC, whose house is this ? it 
is mine, it is thine, &c. 

7. When a mount's, mountain's or hill's name, is 
preceded by the word monte, it takes neither ar- 
ticle nor preposition ; as, o Monte Atlantc, Mount 
Atlas ; os Monies Pireneos, the Pirenean Moun- 
tains ; but after the word sen*a, a ridge of hills, it 
takes the article ; as, a Serra da Estrella, Mount- 
Strella ; Serra do Potosi, Mount Potosi ; however, 
they say, also, Serra Lioa. 

8. The noun of the measure, weight, and the 
number of the things that have been bought, re- 
quires the articles ; as, o trigo vende-se a tdnto o al- 
queire, wheat sold so much a peck, three quarts 
and one pint. 

A manteiga vende-se a tdnto o arratel, butter cost 
so much a pound. 

Os ovos vendem-se a tdnto a duzia, eggs are sold 
so much a dozen. 

9. No article is used with proper names of per- 
sons and planets, except a terra, the earth ; a sol, 
the sun ; a lua, the moon. 

10. When proper names are used in a determinate 
sense, that is, when they are applied to particular 
objects, then they take the article ; o Deos dos Chris- 
tdos, the God of Christians; o Archimedes de Ing- 
laterra, the Archimedes of England. The proper 
names of renowned poets and painters keep also the 
article ; as, o Camoens, o Pope, o Tdsso, o Ticidno, &c. 



12S PORTUGUESE 

11. The indefinite article de is used before nouns 
following one of this, sorte, especie, genero, and any 
other noun of which they express the kind, charac- 
ter, quality, and nature : which sort of nouns are 
usually Englished by an adjective, or even by the 
substantive itself placed adjectively, and making 
together, as it were, but a word compound ; as, 
Dor de cabeca, the head ach ; huma sorte de fruto, 
a sort of fruit ; fallar de tolo, a foolish speech. 

Sometimes the English adjective may be made 
an adjective in Portuguese, as in the last example 
hum fallar tolo, a foolish speech ; but not unfre- 
quently the Portuguese express the English ad- 
jective by a substantive of the same signification 
with de before the other noun, though they have an 
adjective of the same nature as the English ad- 
jective ; as, o diabo de minha mother, my devilish 
wife ; and sometimes the adjective is used by them 
substantively, or the substantive is understood ; as, 
o velhaco de meu filho, my rascally son ; a velhaca 
de sua may, his or her rascally mother. Finally 
they also make use of the definite article ; as, o 
diabo do homem, or da mother, the devilish man or 
woman ; a pbbre da mother, the poor woman, &c. 

12. Nouns are used without article in the fol- 
lowing cases : 

1st. At the title of a performance, and in the 
middle of sentences, where they characterise in a 
particular manner the person or thing spoken of, in 
which case the English use especially the particle 
a ; as, 

Discurso sobre as obrigacoens da religiao natural, 
a discourse concerning the obligations of natural 
religion. 

Primeira parte, the first part. 

O Conde de Clermont, principe do Sdngue, morreo, 
&c. the count of Clermont, a prince of the blood, 
died, &c, 



GRAMMAR. 129 

O S t0 Antonio ; ndo de noventa pegas, the St. An- 
thony ; a ninety gun ship. 

2ndly. In sentences of exclamation ; as, 

As mais bellas flares sdo as que menos durao ; 
qualquer chuva as desmdia, o vento as mure ha, o sol as 
queima, e aedba de secdr ; sem foliar numa infiniddde 
de insectos que as perseguem e deitao a perder ; 
natural e verdadeira imdgem da belle za das senhoras ! 
the most beautiful flowers last but a very short time ; 
the least rain tarnishes them, the wind withers them, 
the sun scorches them, and completes the drying of 
them ; without mentioning an infinite number of 
insects that spoil and hurt them : a natural and true 
image of ladies' beauty! 

3dly. When they meet with a noun of number in 
an indefinite sense ; as, mil soldados de cavdllo contra 
cem infantes, a thousand horse against an hundred 
foot. 

Tenho lido dous poetas, I have read two poets, that 
is, any two out of all that ever existed. 

But before a noun of number, in a definite sense, 
it would take the article ; as, 

Tenho lido os dous poetas, I have read both poets ; 
because this plainly iudicates a definite two, ot 
whom some mention has been made already. 

Os cem infantes que combaterao contra os mil de 
cavdllo, que, &;c. the hundred foot that fought with 
the thousand horse, that, &c. 

4thly. After the verb sir, when it signifies to 
become, and after sSr tornado por, to be accounted ; 
passdr por, to pass for ; as, elle sera doutor com o 
tempo, he will become a doctor in time ; elle passa 
por marinheiro, he passes for a sailor. 

When the adjective is used substantively, it must 
have the neuter article o before it : 

O verde offende menos a vista que o vermelho, 
green hurts the eye less than red. 

There are also some adverbs preceded by the 

K 



130 PORTUGUESE 

neutral article o ; as the following, o melhor que eu 
pudcr, the best I can ; o menos que f6r possivel, 
the least possible. 

Articles are repeated in Portuguese before as 
many nouns (requiring the article) as there are in 
the sentence ; as, 

O ouro, a prat a, a saude, as hour as, e os deletes 
nao podem fazer feliz ao homem que nao tern sciencia 
nem virtude, gold, silver, health, honours, and plea- 
sures, cannot make a man happy without wisdom 
and virtue. 

The article o is put before the word senhor, sir, or 
my lord ; as, 

O senhor duque, my lord duke ; o scnhdr presidente, 
my lord the president ; os senhores, the gentlemen ; 
dos senhores, of the gentlemen. 

The feminine article a must be prefixed to senhor a, 
my lady, or madam ; as, a senhora duqu/za, or con- 
dessa de, 8§c. my lady duchess, or countess of, &c. 

The article is never used in Portuguese as it is in 
English, before mais, more, or menos, less, in the fol- 
lowing sentences : qudnto mais vivemos, tdnto mens 
aprendemos, the longer we live, the more we learn ; 
qudnto mais hum hydropico he be, mais side tern, the 
more an hydropic drinks, the more thirsty he is ; 
qudnto mais hum homem he pobre, qudnto menos 
cuidados tern, the poorer people are, the less care 
they have, &c. 

Sometimes the English particle to, before infini- 
tives, is rendered in Portuguese by the article*?; 
as, hefdcil o dizer, o ver, 8$c. it is easy to say, to 
see, &c. 

In a word, the natural associators with articles are 
those common appellatives which denote the several 
genera and species of beings, or those words which, 
though indefinite, are yet capable, through the ar- 
ticle, of becoming definite. Therefore Apollonius 
makes it part of the pronoun's definition, to refuse 



GRAMMAR. 131 

coalescence with the article ; and it would be absurd 
to say o eu, the I ; or o tu, the thou ; because no- 
thing can make those pronouns more definite than 
they are. 

N. B. When the adjective hiwi, huma, is used as 
an article in Portuguese, it respects our primary 
perception, and denotes individuals as unknown ; 
but the articles, o a, respect our secondary percep- 
tion, and denote individuals as known. To explain 
by an example : I see an object pass by, which I 
never saw till then ; what do I say ? AH vai hum 
pobre com huma barba comprida, there goes a beggar 
with a long beard. The man departs, and returns a 
week after ; what do I say then ? AH vai o pobre 
da barba comprkla, there goes the beggar with the 
long beard. 



CHAP. III. 



OF THE SYNTAX OF NOUNS ; AND FIRST, OF THE 
SUBSTANTIVES. 

WHEN two or more substantives come together, 
without a comma between them, they all govern 
each the next in the genitive, the first governing 
the second, the second the third in the same case, 
and so on (that is, the first is always followed by 
the preposition de, or by the article before the 
next noun) ; but that genitive can never come in 
Portuguese before the noun that governs it, as in 
Pnglish : 

A philosophia de Newton, Newton's philosophy. 

As guar das do principe, the prince's guards. 

A porta de casa, the house-gate. 
K 2 



132 PORTUGUESE 

Eis aqui a cdsa ao companheiro do irmdo de minha 
mother, here is my wife's brother's partner's house. 

When two substantives singular are the nomina- 
tive of a verb, this must be put in the plural ; as, 
men irmdo e mm pdi estdo no cdmpo, my brother and 
my father are in the country. 

If the nominative is a collective name, the verb 
is always put in the singular ; as, tuda a cidade 
assist to, all the city was present. 

OF THE SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 

Of adjectives, some are put before the noun, and 
some after ; and others may be put indifferently, 
either before or after. 

The pronouns adjective possessive, meu, teu, seu, 
8$c. and adjectives of number, come before the sub- 
stantive as in English. Ex. Meu pdi, my father ; a 
sua cdsa, his house ; duas pegoas, two people ; o 
primeiro homem, the first man. 

But when the adjective of number stands for a 
surname, or meets with a proper or Christian name, 
it comes after the substantive, without the article; 
as, Jodo, V. John the fifth. 

These following Adjectives come after the Substantive. 

1st. Verbal adjectives and participles ; as, hum 
homem divertido, a comical, a merry man ; huma 
mother estimdda, a woman esteemed. 

2dly. Adjectives of names of nations ; as, hum 
mathemdtico Inglez, an English mathematician ; hum 
alfaidte France z, a French taylor ; musica Italia na, 
Italian music. 

3dly. Adjectives of colour ; as, hum vestklo negro, 
a black suit of clothes ; hum capote vermelho, a red 
cloak, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 133 

4thly. Adjectives of figure ; as, huma misa red6n- 
da, a round table ; hum campo triangular, a triangu- 
lar field, &c. 

5thly. Adjectives expressing some physical or 
natural quality; such are quente, hot; frio, cold; 
humido, wet ; corcovado, hunch-backed, &c. 

Most other adjectives are placed before or after 
the substantive; as, sdnto, holy ; verdadeiro, true, &c. 

If the substantive has three or more adjectives be- 
longing to it, they must absolutely be put after it 
with the enclitic e before the last, which must like- 
wise be observed, even when there be but two ad- 
jectives; for the Portuguese don't say, huma desa- 
graddvel enfadonha obra, &c. but huma obra desa- 
gradavel e enfaddnha, &c, a disagreeable, tedious 
work. 

Of adjectives, some always require after them 
either a noun or verb, which they govern ; as, 
digno de louvor, praise-worthy ; digno de ser amado, 
worthy to be loved ; capaz de ensinar, capable to 
teach ; and these have always the particle de after 
them. 

Some will be used absolutely without being ever 
attended by any noun or verb ; as, prudente, wise ; 
incur avel, incurable, &c. 

Others may be construed both with and without 
a noun, which they govern ; ilia he huma molher 
insensivel) she is a woman without any sensibility ; 
ilia he insensivd ao amor, she is insensible, and a 
stranger to the passion of love. 

The following adjectives, which require the pre- 
position de before the next infinitive, govern the 
genitive case. Observe, that some of them require 
in English the preposition at or with before the next 
noun. 

Digno, worthy : as, Hie he digno de louvSr, he is 
worthy of praise. This adjective is sometimes fol- 
lowed by que ; as digna que sen nome f6sse y 8$c. her 
name deserved to be, Sec. 



134 PORTUGUESE 

Indtgno, unworthy ; as, imligno da estimagao quefdco 
delle, unworthy of the esteem which I have for him. 

Capaz, capable ; incapdz, incapable ; as, capaz, 
or incapdz de servir a prSpria pdtria, capable or in- 
capable of serving one's country. 

Notddo, charged ; as, not ado de avareza, charged 
with avarice. 

Contente, glad ; as, estdu contente do successo que 
elle teve, I am glad or overjoyed at his success. 

Canc/ido, tired ; as, cancddo de estuddr, tired of 
studying. 

Dezejoso, greedy ; as, dezejdso de gloria, greedy of 
glory, &c. as likewise adjectives signifying fulness, 
emptiness, plenty, want, desire, knowledge, remem- 
brance, ignorance, or forgetting. 

All adjectives signifying inclination, advantage 
and disadvantage, profit or disprofit, pleasure or 
displeasure, due submission, resistance, likeness, 
govern the dative case ; as, insensivel as affrdntas, 
insensible of affronts ; ser incllnado a alguma causa, 
to be inclined to something ; nocivo a saude, hurtful 
to health. 

These adjectives signifying dimensions, as, alto, 
high, tall ; largo, wide, broad ; and comprido, long, 
come after words of the measure of magnitude, 
both in English and Portuguese ; but they are pre- 
ceded by de in Portuguese ; as, des pes de largo, ten 
feet broad ; sets pes de comprido, six feet long, &c. 
they also turn the adjective of the dimension into 
its substantive, with the word of the measure before : 
but the word of the dimension is always preceded 
by de; as seis pes de altura, six feet high; dez pes 
de largura, ten feet broad. 

The adjectives signifying experience, knowledge, 
or science, require em, ox no, na, nos, nas, after them ; 
as, versado, nos livros, versed in books ; exptrto na 
medicina, expert in medicine. 

The cardinal nouns require the genitive case after 
them ; as, hum dos ddus, one of the two. 



GRAMMAR. 135 

The ordinal nouns, as well as the collective and 
proportional, likewise require the genitive after 
them ; as, oprimeiro dos reys, the first of the kings, 
huma duzia de ovos, a dozen of eggs, &c. 

Of the Syntax of Comparatives and Superlatives. 

The comparative is not made of the positive in 
Portuguese, as in Latin and English, but by adding 
mdis, more, or menos, less which govern que, signify- 
ing than ; as, o todo he mayor que a parte, the whole 
is greater than the part ; o seu amdnte he mdis hello, 
mdis moco, e mdis ricoque ella, her lover is handsomer, 
younger and richer than she is ; eu dcho-o agora 
menos bellodo que qudndo o comprei, I now find it less 
handsome than when I bought it. 

The simple comparatives mais, and menos, meet- 
ing with a noun of number, are attended by de; as, 
ainda que Hie tivesse mais de cem homens, though he 
has above an hundred men ; elle tern mdis de vinte 
dnnos, he is abore twenty. 

When the comparison is made by so as, as much 
as, they must be rendered by cdmo. 

EXAMPLE. 

O meu livro he tad bello cdmo o vosso, my book is 
as handsome as yours ; hum principe nab he tad po~ 
deroso como hum rey, a prince is not so powerful as 
a king. 

They put sometimes muito and pduco before the 
simple comparatives mdis and menos; as, elle he 
muito mdis grdnde, he is taller by much ; elle he 1 
pduco mdis grande, lie is taller by little, &c. 






136 PORTUGUESE 



CHAP. IV. 

OP THE SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. 

WE have sufficiently explained the pronouns in 
the first part ; and to avoid any further repetition, 
I shall only observe, that, 

1st. The English make use of ihe verb to be, put 
impersonally through all its tenses in the third per- 
son, before the pronouns personal, I,thou, he, she, we, 
you, they ; it is I ; it is he, &c. In Portuguese the 
verb to be, on this occasion, is not impersonal ; as 
they express, it is I, by sou eu ; it is thou, es tu ; 
it is he, he ilia ; it is we, somos nos ; it is ye, sois vos, 
it is she, he ilia : it is they, masc. sad elles; it is 
they, fem. sab ellas ; and in like manner through all 
the tenses ; as, it was I, era eu ; it was we, iramos 
nos, &c. 

2ndly. The Portuguese seldom make use of the 
second person singular or plural, but when through 
a great familiarity among friends, or speaking to 
God, or a father and mother to their children, or to 
servants ; thus, you are in the right of it, is ex- 
pressed by vm ce tern razdo, instead of tendes razao ; 
como esta vm ce ? how do you do ? In the plural they 
say vm ces . 

Observe here, that when an adjective comes aftei 
vm ce V. S. V. E. &c. it does not agree in gender 
with vm ce V. S. &c. but with the person we speak 
to, or we speak of, thus we say to a lady or woman ; 
vm ce he mu'ito bella, you are very beautiful ; and to 
a man, vm ce he muito bum, you are very good. 

3dly. Nos is generally used by the king, a gover- 
nor, or a bishop, in their writings, and then it sig- 
nifies in English we ; as, nosmanclamos, or mandamos, 
we command ; but nos before or after a verb in Por- 



GRAMMAR. 137 

tuguese signifies us in English ; as, tile nos disse, 
he told us ; ddi-nos tempo, give us time. 

4thly. Vos is also applied to a single person, but 
only speaking to inferiors, or between familiar 
friends, to avoid the word thou, tu, which would 
be too gross and unmannerly. 

5thly. The pronouns conjunctive are joined to 
verbs, and stand for the dative and accusative cases, 
as, deu me, he gave me ; ama-me, love me ; but the 
pronouns personal are used instead of them when 
they are preceded by a preposition, and not imme- 
diately followed by a verb ; elle fallSu contra mim, 
he spoke against me. 

6thly. When o, a, os, as, are joined to the pre- 
sent infinitive mood, they change the last r of it into 
lo, la, fyc. thus ; para ama-lo, to love him ; para vela, 
or, ve las, to see her, or them, &c. and when they 
are joined to the preterperfect indicative of the 
verb fazir, and some others that have that tense 
ending in iz, they change the last z of them into lo, 
la, 8$c. as ji~lo, I did it ; ellefe-lo, he did, or made 
it, &c. but when they are joined to the future in- 
dicative of any verb with the auxiliary verb haver, 
then they change the terminations rei, ras, &c. of 
the futures into lo, la, 8$c. as fa~lo-hei, I'll do it ; 
ama-lo-hei, I'll love him, &c. 

Remarks on the Pronouns. 

1st. Him, or it, which follow the verb in English, 
must be expressed in Portuguese as in the following 
examples : 

When him or it in English follow the verb in the 
first person of the singular number, it must be ex- 
pressed in Portuguese by o before or after the verb. 
Exam. 1 call him or it, eu o chdmo, or eu chdmo-o. 

When him or it in English follow the verb in the 
first person of the singular number, it may be ex 
pressed in Portuguese either by o before the verb, Q 



138 PORTUGUESE 

lo after it, making an elision of the last consonant 
of the verb. Exam. Thou callest him or it, tu o 
chdmas, or tu chdma lo. 

When him or it is joined with the third person 
singular of a verb, it may be expressed by o before 
or after the verb. Ex. He calls him or it, elk o 
chdma ,or elk chdma~o. 

When him or it is with a verb in the first person 
plural, it may be expressed in Portuguese either by 
o before the verb, or lo after it, making an elision, 
as in the second case. Ex. We call him or\t, 716s 
chamdmos or nos chamdmo-lo. 

When him or it is after a verb in the second person 
plural, it is expressed in Portuguese either by 
before the verb, or lo after it, making an elision, 
&c. Ex. You. call him or it, vos chamais, or vos 
chamai-lo. 

When him or it follows the verb in the third 
person plural, it may be expressed in Portuguese 
either by before the verb, or no after it. Examp. 
They call him or it, elks chdmao, or elks chamao-no. 

Sndly. Her or Rafter a verb in English is ex- 
pressed in Portuguese by a, according to the rules 
just now proposed. 

3rdly." Them after a verb is expressed in Portu- 
guese by os for the masculine, and by as for the 
feminine, according to the gender and the rules 
proposed. 

4thly. The words 0, a, os, as, must always be 
put after the gerunds, but not before the infinitives. 
Examp. Seeing him, we must not say, vendo, but 
vendo-o, because vendo is a gerund. To see him, in- 
stead of saying para ver-o, you must say para ver, 
because it is in the infinitive. 

5thly. The words lo, la, los, las, must always be 
put after the verbs. Examp. To see him, you must 
say para ve-lo, ox para over, and not para olver. 
The same words must follow also the adverb ei ; 



GRAMMAR. 139 

as, ei-lo aqui, here he is ; ei-lo all, there he is ; 
ei-los aqui, here they are ; ei4a ali, there she is ; 
ei-las all, there they are. They follow likewise the 
persons of the verbs : eu ji-lo ; tu Jizeste-lo ; elk fe- 
lo ; nos fizemo-lo, &c. I made it, &c. 

I have here been speaking of the words o, a, os 
as, lo, la, los, las, and not of the articles o, a, os, as; 
because when those words precede, and sometimes 
when they follow the verbs, they are not articles, 
but pronouns relative. They are articles only 
when they precede the nouns or pronouns. 



CHAP. V. 



OF THE SYNTAX OF VERBS. 

THE verbs through every tense and mood 
(except the infinitive) ought to be preceded by a 
nominative case, either expressed or understood, 
with which they must agree in number and person. 
The nominative is expressed when we say, eu 
dmo, tu cdntas ; understood when we say, canto 
digo, &c. 

The Portuguese, as well as English, use the 
second person plural, though they address them- 
selves but to a single person. 



EXAMPLES. 

Mtu amigOj vos nao tendes razao, my friend, you 
are in the wrong. 

And if we would speak in the third person, we 
must say, vem ce tern razdo, sir, you are in the right. 

The verb active governs the accusative ; as, dmo 
a virtude, I love virtue. 



140 PORTUGUESE 

The verb passive requires an ablative after it ; 
as, os doutos sad envejados pillos ignordntes, the 
learned are envied by the ignorant. 

There is in Portuguese another way of making 
the passive, by adding the relative se to the third 
person singular or plural ; as, dma se Dios, God is 
loved. 

When there are two nominatives singular before 
a verb, it must be put in the plural number. 

When a noun is collective, the verb requires the 
singular, not the plural ; as, a ginte estd olhando, the 
people are looking. 

Syntax of the Auxiliary Verbs. 

The verb tir is made use of to conjugate all the 
compound tenses of verbs ; as, tenho amado, tinha 
amado, I have loved, I had loved. 

Ter signifies also to possess, to obtain ; as tenho 
dinheiro, I have money ; tern miuta capaciddde, he 
has a great deal of capacity. 

Haver, in account books and trade, expresses 
credit or discharge. 

Haver is also taken impersonally in Portuguese, 
and signifies in English there be ; as ha muito duro 
no Mexico, there is a great quantity of gold in 
Mexico. 

Havtr-se, made reciprocal, is the same as to be- 
have, to act ; as huuve-se o governadur com tal pru- 
dencia, que, 85c, the governor behaved with such 
wisdom, that, &c. 

We have already observed the difference betwixt 
sir and estar. 

The verb estar is also used to conjugate the other 
verbs, chiefly expressing action ; as estoii Undo, 
estou escrevindo, 1 am reading, I am writing. 

Estar, with the preposition em, in or with, no na 
nos, ijas, signifies to be present in a place ; as estuu 
no cdmpo, I am in the country. 



GRAMMAR. 141 

Estdr,* with the preposition para denotes the in- 
clination of doing what the following verb expresses, 
but without a full determination ; as, estdu para ir 
me para Lund res, I have a mind to go and live in 
London. 

Estdr, with the preposition por, and the infinitive 
of the verb following, means, that the thing express- 
ed by the verb is not yet done ; as, isto estd por 
escrever, this is not yet written ; isto estd por alimpdr, 
this is not yet cleaned ; estdr por algutm signifies to 
agree with one, or to be of his opinion. 

N. B. See in the Third Part the different signi- 
fications of the verbs estdr and haver. 

When sir signifies the possessive of one thing, it 
governs the genitive ; as, a rua he £ eUrey, the 
street belongs to the king ; esta cdsa he de meu pay, 
this house belongs to my father. 

Em s6r is taken for a thing to be whole or entire, 
without any alteration or mutilation ; as, as fazen- 
das estdo em ser, the goods are not sold. 

Of the Syntax of Verbs active, passive, &$c. 

When two verbs come together, with or without 
any nominative case, then the latter must be in the 
infinitive mood ; as, quer vm ee aprender afalldr In- 
glez ? will you learn to speak English ? 

All verbs active govern the accusative ; but if 
they are followed by a proper name of God, man, 
or woman, or any noun expressing their qualities or 
title, then it governs the dative case ; as, conhego a 
seu pay, I know his father; Achdrao a Joao no 
caminho, they found John in the road. 

All verbs of gesture, moving, going, resting, or 
doing, as also the verbs that have the word that 
goes before, and the word that comes after, both be- 
longing to one thing, require the nominative after 
them ; as, Pedro vdi err ado, Peter goes on wrong ; 



142 PORTUGUESE 

opobre dorme descant; ado, the poor sleeps without care. 
Also the verb of the infinitive mood has the same 
case, when verbs of wishing and the like come after 
them ; as tddos dezejao sir ricos, every body wishes 
to be rich ; antes quisera ser dduto que parccelo, I 
had rather be learned than be accounted so. 

After verbs the Portuguese express yes and no by 
que sim and que nab. Example, creyo que sim, I be 
lieve yes ; creyo que nao, I believe not ; digo que sim, 
I say yes ; cuido que nab, I think not ; aposto que 
sim, I lay yes ; quereis apostar que nao? have you a 
mind to lay not? 

Verbs signifying grief, compassion, want, remem- 
brance, forgetting, &c. will have the genitive ; as, 
pesame muito da morte de sen irmko, I am very sorry 
for the death of your brother ; elle morre defome, he 
perishes by hunger ; lembre-se do que me disse, re- 
member what you said to me ; compadeci-me das suas 
disgracas, I pitied him for his misfortunes ; esqueci- 
me de tudo isto, all this I forgot. 

The reciprocals of jeering, boasting, and distrust- 
ing, govern also the genitive; as,jactar-se, gloriar- 
se, picar-se, envergonhar-se, &c. 

All the verbs active govern the dative only when 
the substantive represents a person ; as, eu conheco 
a vm ce , &c. I know you, &c. 

The folio wing verbs belong to this rule of the dative : 
Jogar, to play ; as, jogar cartas, to play at cards ; 
jogar aos centos, to play at picquet ; jogar ao xadrez*, 
to play at chess, &c. 

Obedecer, desobedecer agradar, comprazer ; as, eu 
obedeco a Deos e el-rey, I obey God and the king ; 
comprazeo em tiido aos soldados, in all he pleased the 
soldiers. 

Mandar, when it signifies to command an army, 
company, &c. requires the accusative, but, when 
other things, the dative ; as, elle manddva a cavalla- 
ria 9 he commanded the horse ; o governador man- 



GRAMMAR. 143 

ddu a todos os moradores que se relirdssem para suas 
cdsas, the governor ordered all the inhabitants to 
retire into their houses. 

Ir, to go ; as, vou a Paris, I go to Paris. 

Assistir, ajuddr, socorrer, to help ; assistir ao 
officio divinOy to assist at divine service. 

Sauddr, to salute or greet ; as, elle sduda a todos, 
he salutes every body. 

Falldr, to speak ; satizfazer, to satisfy ; servir, to 
serve ;favorecer, to favour ; ameacdr, to threaten. 

The verbs of pleasing, displeasing, granting, de- 
nying, pardoning, will have the person in the da- 
tive case. 

The i m personals acontecer, succeder, importdr, per- 
tencer, and the like to these, will have often two 
datives, of person ; as, a mini me succedeo, it happen- 
ed to me ; a elle Iheconvem, it suits him, or it is con- 
venient for him ; a elle nao Ihe importa, it does not 
concern him, Sec. 

All the active verbs require the accusative ; and 
the Latin verbs which govern the accusative of the 
thing, and the dative of the person, govern gene- 
rally the same in Portuguese ; as, escrevei o que digo 
a vosso irmdo, write to your brother what I say. 

Verbs of asking, teaching, arraying, will have an 
accusative of the doer or sufferer, and sometimes 
verbs neuter will have an accusative of the thing ; 
as, gozdr saude, to enjoy health ; peco este favdr, I 
ask this favour; elle toca muito bemjlduta, he plays 
very well on the flute ; curdr huma doenca, to cure 
a sickness. 

Verbs passive, and the greatest part of the reci- 
procals require the ablative, with de, do, da, dos, 
das, por, or pello, pella, pellos, pellas; as fui cha- 
mddo porel-rey, I was called by the king ; retirei-me 
da ciddde, I retired from the city ; elle foi amddo do 
pdvo, he was loved by the people. Except acostdr- 
se, which requires a dative, preceded by a ; encostdr- 
se, which sometimes will have a dative, and some- 



144 PORTUGUESE 

times an ablative, preceded by em, no, na, nos, or 
nas ; meter-se, which requires an ablative ; sentar- 
se, introduzir-sc, &c. which must have the ablative 
with the preposition em, no, net, nos, nas. 

The verbs joined with a noun which they govern, 
must have the infinitive with de ; as, tenho vontade 
de rir, I am inclined to laugh. 

The price of any thing bought or sold, or bar- 
tered, will have the accusative with por. 

The verb pdr se, when it signifies to begin, must 
have the infinitive, with the particle a; as, parse a 
chorar, to begin to cry. 

Verbs of plenty, filling, emptying, loading, un- 
loading, will have the ablative ; as, esta terra abun- 
da de trigo ; this country abounds with corn ; elle 
esta carregado de miserias, he is loaded with calami- 
ties. 

Verbs denoting custom, help, beginning, exhorta- 
tion, invitation, require the infinitive with the par- 
ticle a ; as, ajudar a semear, to help to sow, convi- 
doume a cear, he invited me to supper. 

Verbs that signify distance, receiving, or taking 
away, will have the ablative ; as, a Madeira dista 
de Marrocos 320 mtlhas, Madeira lies 320 miles 
from Morocco. 

Verbs signifying receiving, or taking away, ge- 
gerally require the ablative of the person ; but 
they sometimes require an accusative: particularly 
the verb receber, when it signifies to welcome, or 
to entertain : as, elle recebe todos com muito agrado, 
he gives his company a hearty reception, he makes 
them very welcome. 

Verbs denoting obligation, govern the following 
infinitive with the preposition a; as, eu o obrigarei 
afazer zsto, I will oblige him to do it. 

Verbs of arguing, quarrelling, fighting, &c. will 
have the ablative with com ; as, pelejuu mais de huma 
hora com seu irmao, he quarrelled more than one 
hour with his brother. 



GRAMMAR. 145 

After the verb substantive sir, to be, para is 
made use of as well as a : the first is employed to 
denote the use or destination of any thing ; as, esta 
penna he para escrever, this pen is to write with. 
But the particle a is used to denote only the action ; 
as, ellefoi o prime iro a fugir, he was the first to 
run away. 

Verbs of motion to a place always govern the 
dative ; as, vou a comedia, I go to the play. 
Though the verb voltdr, to return, may also have 
an accusative, with the preposition para. But 
verbs of motion from a place govern the ablative 
with de, do, da, dos, das ; as, venho do cdmpo, I come 
from the country. If the motion is through a place, 
then they govern the accusative, with por ; as* 
passarei por Ldndres, I will come by the way of 
London. 

Of the Use and Construction of the Tenses, 

Although I have spoken at large upon the tenses 
in the First Part, I would further observe, 

1. That the infinitive and the auxiliary verb haver, 
are used together with the pronouns lo, la, los, las, 
instead of the future indicative; as, ouvir-lo-hei, I 
will hear him : and then the r of the infinitive is 
changed into lo, la, los, las ; sometimes the infini- 
tive and the auxiliary verb haver, are used with the 
pronouns conjunctive me, te, se, Sec, instead of the 
same future ; as, dar-lhe-hei, I will give him ; agas- 
tar-se-ha, he will be angry. 

c 2. That when we find the particle if, which in 
Portuguese is expressed by se, before the imperfect 
indicative, we must generally use the imperfect 
subjunctive in Portuguese ; example, se eu tivesse, if 
I had ; se eu pudesse, if I could. But sometimes the 
imperfect indicative is used ; as, disse4he que se 
queria, &c. ; he told him that if he was willing, -(§•<?♦ 



1 



146 PORTUGUESE 

3. That the first imperfect subjunctive in Portu- 
guese is also used in a sense that denotes the present, 
especially in sentences of wishing ; as, quizera que 
Domingo fizesse bum tempo, I wish it would be fine 
weather on Sunday. But if the same tense is pre- 
ceded by a'nida que, although, then it must be ren- 
dered into English by the second imperfect subjunc- 
tive, or by the imperfect indicative ; as, en nao a 
quizera, ainda que tivesse milhdens cle seu, though she 
was worth several millions, I would not have her ; 
ainda que elle consentisse nisso, nao se podia fazer, 
although he would consent to it, that could not be 
done. Lastly, when the first imperfect subjunctive 
is preceded by se, it is sometimes rendered into 
English by the second imperfect subjunctive ; as, 
se elle viesse, if he should come. 

The English are apt to put the first imperfect of 
the subjunctive where the Portuguese make use of 
the second ; as, I had been in the wrong, nao term 
tido razao ; and though they may say nao tivera tido 
razao, they may not say nao tivesse tido razao, to 
express the English of, / should have been in the 
wrong, or / had been in the wrong. 

Note, that to express in Portuguese, though that 
should be, we must say, qudndo isso fosse, and not seria. 

The Portuguese use the future tense subjunctive 
after the conjunction if, when they speak of a future 
action, but the English, the present indicative : ex- 
ample, to-morrow, if I have time, amanhaa se tiver 
tempo, and not se tenho ; if he comes, we shall see 
him, nus o veremos, se elle vier. 

A conjunction between two verbs obliges the last 
to be of the same number, person, and tense as the 
first: example, the king wills and commands, el rei 
quer e ordena ; I see and I know, eu vejo e conhego* 

Sometimes the present is made use of, instead of 
the preter definite in narrations, as, no niesmo tempo 
que hia andando, o encuntra, o despe, e o dta a huma 



GRA M M A R. 147 

arvore, as he was going, he meets him, Strips him, 
and ties him to a tree. 

When the Portuguese use the infinitive with a 
third person in the plural, they add em to it, and it 
is generally preceded by po?\ for, and para, in order 
to, thai, or to the end that ; as, ellesforao enforcados 
por furthrem, they were hanged for robbing; para 
serem e?iformados, that, to the end that they may be 
informed ; para podfaem dizer, that they may be 
able to say. 

Observe, that when the Portuguese put por before 
the first future subjunctive, they speak of a time 
past ; as, por fallardes, because you have spoken. 
But when they put para before it, then they speak 
of a time to come ; as, parafalldrmos, to give us 
an opportunity for speaking, in order to speak. 

Of Moods. 

All the tenses of the indicative mood may be em- 
ployed without any conjunction before them ; but 
they admit also of some. Besides the conjunction 
que, those that may be made use of are se, como, and 
quctndo ; with some distinction in respect to se, be- 
cause this conjunction is seldom used before the fu- 
ture tense, and then it is governed by a verb signi- 
fying ignorance, doubt, or interrogation ; as, nao 
sti se hao de air, I do not know whether they will 
come ? estou em duvida se os inimigos pasSarao o rw, 
I doubt whether the enemy will pass the river ; 
nao pergunto se partira, I do not ask whether he 
will set out. 

The optative or subjunctive in Portuguese has 
always some sign annexed;* as, oxala, prouvera a 
Decs, 6 se! would to God, I pra}^ God, God grant ; 
&c. ; que para, que, &c. that, &c. 

The particle que is not expressed in the present 
tense of this mood ; but it is understood in sen- 

l2 



14$ PORTUGUESE 

tences of wishing or praying ; as, Deos o faca bom, 
let God amend him. 

When que is between two verbs, the last is not 
always put in the subjunctive, because, though some 
say creyo que venha, I believe he comes ; I think it is 
better to say creyo que vem ; but when there is a 
negation, the verb following que must be put in the 
subjunctive ; as, nao creyo que venha, I do not be- 
lieve he will come, nab creyo que venha tab cedo, I 
do not believe he will come so soon. 

When the verbs crer, to believe, saber, to know, 
are used interrogatively, and followed by the par- 
ticle que, the next verb is put in the indicative, 
when the person that asked the question makes no 
doubt of the thing which is the object in question ; 
as, if knowing that peace is made, I want to know 
if the people whom I converse with know it too, I 
should express myself thus, sabeis vos que estafeita a 
paz f do you know that peace is made ? But if I 
have it only by a report, and doubt of it, and want 
to be informed of it, I must ask the question thus, 
sabeis vos que a paz esteja feita? and not sabeis vos 
que est a feita a paz P 

Observe also, that the present subjunctive of 
saber is elegantly used when it is attended by a 
negative, and the particle quern this phrase, nab que 
eu saiba, not that I know of. 

All the verbs used impersonally with the particle 
que require the subjunctive ; as, he preciso que elle 
v nha, he must come; convent que isto sefaca, it is 
convenient that this be done. You must only ex- 
cept such sentences as express any positive assurance, 
or certainty ; as, he certo que vem, it is certain that 
he comes ; set que esta em ccisa, I know he is at home. 

From these observations it follows, that all the 
verbs not expressing a positive assurance, or believ- 
ing, but only denoting ignorance, doubt, fear, as- 
tonishment, admiration, wishing, praying, pretension, 



GRAMMAR. 149 

or desire, govern the subjunctive mood after que ; 
as, duvido que possa, I doubt if it be in his power ; 
tSmo que mdrra, I am afraid he will die ; admiro-me 
que consmta nisso, I wonder he agrees to it, &c. ; to 
all which they add oxala, an Arabic word, signifying 
God grant, which is used in Portuguese before all 
the tenses of the optative or conjunctive, as well as 
prhza a Deos, may it please God ; or, prouvera a 
Deos, might it please God. 

When que is relative, and there is a verb in the 
imperative or in the indicative, with a negative or 
interrogation before it, it governs likewise the sub- 
junctive ; as nod ha cousa que mats me inquiete, there 
is nothing that disturbs me more ; ha cousano mundo 
que me possa dar icinto gosto ? is there any thing in 
the world that may give me more pleasure? allegai- 
Ihe ichitas razuens que o pessao persuadir, give him 
so many reasons that he may be persuaded. 

The present subjunctive is sometimes rendered 
into English by the second preterimperfect subjunc- 
tive, when it is followed by a verb in the future 
tense ; as, alnda que hi trabdlhe, nunca hei de cangar^ 
though 1 should work, I never should be tired. 

The Portuguese use specially the same present 
subjunctive for the future ; as in these sentences, 
and others like: 

Nad duvido que venha, I do not doubt but he will 
come. 

Duvido que o faca y I doubt that, or whether he 
will do it. 

Therefore avoid carefully those faults which fo- 
reigners are so apt to make, in considering rather 
the tense which they want to turn into Portuguese, 
than the mood which the genius of the language 
requires. 

The present indicative is also used for the future, 
as well as in English : example, jantais hdje em 
casa 1 do you dine at home to-day ? 



150 PORTUGUESE 

Of the Particles governing the Optative or Sub- 
junctive. 

The conjunction que, that, generally requires the 
subjunctive after it ; but antes que, prime iro que, be- 
fore that, always requires it. 

Que makes all the words to which it is joined be- 
come conjunctives, as, para que, to the end that , 
hem que, ainda que, 8$c. Pdsto que, although ; ate 
que, till ; quando, cdmo querque, which commonly 
govern the subjunctive. But com que assim governs 
the indicative ; as, com que, or com que assim vira 
amanhaa, so he will come to-morrow. 

In Portuguese to express though, or although, if 
it is try ainda que, you may put either the subjunc- 
tive or indicative after it : example ; ainda que seja 
homem honrddo, though he is an honest man ; ainda 
que elle faz aquillo, though he does that. But if 
you render although or though by nao obstante, then 
you must use the infinitive ; example, though he 
h an honest man ; nao obstante sir elle homem 
honrddo; though he does this, nao obstante fazer 
elle isto. 

The impersonal verbs generally govern the sub- 
junctive with que ; but with this distinction, when 
the impersonal is in the present tense or future, of 
the indicative mood, then it requires the present 
subjunctive mood ; but when the impersonal, or any 
other verb taken impersonally, is in any of the pre- 
terites indicative, then it governs the imperfect, per- 
fect, or pluperfect of the subjunctive, according to 
the meaning of the sentence ; as, import a muito que 
el-rey veja tudo, it is of great moment that the king 
may see all \foiconvienenteque o principe fosse com elle, 
it was convenient that the prince should go with him. 

The present subjunctive is likewise construed, 
when the particle por is separated from que by an 
adjective ; as, por grdnde, por admirdvel, por douto 
que seja, though he be great, admirable, learned. 



GRAMMAR. 151 

An imperative often requires the future of the 
subjunctive ; as succida o que succeder, or sSja o que 
for, happen what shall happen, at all events. 

The imperfect subjunctive is repeated in this 
phrase, and others like, succedesse, o que succedesse, 
let happen what would. 

The future of the subjunctive mood follows gene- 
rally these, logo que, qudndo, se, cdmo, 8$c. ; as, logo 
que chegdr iremosapassear, as soon as he comes, we 
will go and take a walk; qudndo vier, estaremos 
promptos, when he comes we shall be ready. 

Observe that qudndo and logo que may also be 
construed with the indicative mood ; as, qudndo el- 
rey ve tudo, nab o engdnao, when the king sees every 
thing, he is not deceived ; logo que chegou, falUi com 
elle, as soon as he came, I spoke with him. 

Of the Infinitive Mood. 

In Portuguese there is not a general sign before 
the infinitive, as in English the particle to; but 
there are several particles used before the infinitive, 
denoting the same as to does in English, and they 
are governed by the preceding verbs or nouns. 
These particles are the following : a, para, de, com, 
em, por, ate, despots de ; and the article o, when the 
infinitive serves as a nominative to another verb ; 
as, o dizer e o fazer sad duas cousas, saying and 
doing are two different things. 

A coming between two verbs, denotes the second 
as the object of the first ; as, a tarddnca das nossas 
esperdngas nos ensina a mortijicar os nossos dezejos, 
the delay of our hopes teaches us to mortify our de- 
sires ; elle comega a discorrer, he begins to reason. 

Para denotes the intention or usefulness : as, a ad- 
versiddde serve para experimentar apaciencia, adver- 
sity serves to try one's patience. Para after an ad- 
jective denotes its object ; as, esta prompto paraobe- 
decer, he is ready to obey. 



152 PORTUGUESE 

De is put between two verbs, if the first go- 
verns the genitive or ablative ; and when the sub- 
stantive or adjective governs either of these two 
cases, de must go before the following verbs, or in- 
finitive ; as, venho de ver a meu pay, 1 have just seen 
my father ; he tempo de hir-se, it is time to go 
away ; el-rey foi servido de mandar, the king has 
been pleased to order. 

The infinitive is on several occasions governed by 
prepositions or conjunctions ; as, sem dizer palavra, 
without speaking a word ; where you may observe 
it is expressed in English by the participle present ; 
as nunca se canga de jugar, he is never weary of 
playing ; diverte-se em cacdr, he delights in hunting ; 
elle estd doente por trabalhar demasiadamente, by 
working too much he is sick ; perde o seu tempo em 
passear, he loses his time in walking; hei-de ir-me 
sem me despedfr ? shall I go away without taking 
my leave ? 

The infinitive is also used passively; as nao ha 
que dizer, que ver, &c. ; there is nothing to be said, 
seen, &c. 

The gerund of any verb active may be conjugated 
with the verb estar, to be, after the same manner as 
in English ; as, estou escrevendo, I am writing ; 
elle estava dormindo, he was asleep, 8§c. 



CHAP. VI. 

OF THE SYNTAX OF PARTICIPLES AND 
GERUNDS. 

THE participle in the Portuguese language ge- 
nerally ends in do, or to ; as, amado, visto, dito, &c. 

The active participles that follow the verb ter, 
to have, must end in o ; as, 

Tenho visto elrey, I have seen the king. 



GRAMMAR. 153 

Tenho visto a rainha, I have seen the queen. 

Eu tin ha amddo os livi^os, I had loved books. 

Eu tinha levddo as cartas, I had carried the letters. 

We meet with authors who sometimes make the 
participles agree with the thing of which they are 
speaking ; as, in Camoens, Canto 1, Stanza xxix. 

E porque como vistes^ tern passados. 

Na vidgem tad dsperos perigos, 

Tdntos climas, e ceos experimentados, fyc. 
And Canto 2, Stan, lxxvi. 

Sad offerecimentos verdadeiros, 

E paldvras, sinceras, nao dobrddas, 

As que o rei/ mdnda a os nbbres cavaleiros, 

Que tanto mar e terras tern passadas. 

If it be a verb neuter, the participle ought always 
to terminate in o: example, 

El-rey temjantddO) the king has dined ; a rainha 
tern ceddo, the queen has supped ; os vossos amigos 
tern rido, your friends have laughed ; minhas ir?ndas 9 
tern dormidO) my sisters have slept. 

When the active participle appears to precede 
an infinitive, it must be terminated in o ; as o juiz 
Ihe tinha feito cortdr a cabeca, the judge has caused 
his head to be cut off. 

The passive participles which are joined with the 
tenses of the verb ser, to be, agree with the sub- 
stantive that precedes the verb ser ; o capitdo foi 
louvddo, the captain was praised ; a virtude he esti- 
mdda, virtue is esteemed ; os preguicosos sao cen- 
surddos, the lazy are blamed ; as vossas joyas fdrao 
vendidaS) your jewels were sold. 

The Portuguese generally suppress the gerunds 
having and being before the participles ; as, dlto isto, 
having said so ; acabddo o sermao, the sermon being 
ended. This manner of speaking is called by 
grammarians ablatives absolute. 

The participle of the present tense in Portuguese 
has singular and plural, but one termination serves 
for both genders ; as hum homem temente a Deos, a 



154 PORTUGUESE 

man fearing God ; hiuna molher temente a Deos, 
a woman fearing God ; homens tementes a Deos, 
people fearing God. 

There are many participles which are used sub- 
stantively ; as, ignordnte, amdnte, ouvmte, estuddnte, 
&c. ; an ignorant, a lover, an auditor or hearer, a 
scholar, §c. 

It is better to place the nominative after the 
gerund than before ; as estdndo el-rey na comhlia, 
the king being at the play. 



CHAP. VII. 

OF PREPOSITIONS. 

A preposition is a part of speech, which is 
put before nouns, and sometimes before verbs, to 
explain some particular circumstance. 

Prepositions may be divided into separable and 
inseparable. An inseparable preposition is never 
found but in compound words, and signifies nothing 
of itself. A separable preposition is generally sepa- 
rated from other words, and signifies something of 
itself. 

The inseparable prepositions are, 

Ab and abs ; as abrogdr, to abrogate ; Abster-se, 
to abstain. 

Arce, or archi ; as, arceb/spo, an archbishop ; ar- 
chiduque, an archduke. 

Ad; as, adventicio, adventitious. 

Am ; as ambiguo, ambiguous ; ampdro, protection, 
shelter. 

Circum ; as, circumstdncia, circumstance. 

Co ; as, cohabitar, to live together, to cohabit. 

Des, serves to express the contrary of the word 
it is joined to ; as, desacerto, mistake ; desfazer, to 



GRAMMAR. 155 

undo ; desenganar, to undeceive ; are the contrary 
of acerto, fazer, and enganar. 

Dis ; as, dispor, to dispose ; distinguir, to distin- 
guish ; distribuir, to distribute. 

Ex ; as, extrahir, to extract. 

In, has commonly a negative or privative sense, 
denoting the contrary of the meaning of the word 
it precedes; as, incapaz, unable; infeliz, unhappy ; 
inaccao, inaction, 8$c. ; but sometimes it is affirma- 
tive, as in Latin. 

Observe, that in before r is changed into ir ; as, 
irregular, irregular ; irrational, irrational : before /, 
into il ; as ilkgitimo, illegitimate ; before m, in is 
changed into im ; as, immaterial, immaterial. 

Ob ; as, obviar, to obviate. 

Pos; as, pospor, to postpose, or to postpone. 

Pre ; as, preceder, to go before ; predecessor, an 
ancestor. 

Pro ; as, propor, to propose ; prometer, to pro- 
mise. 

Re, is a participle borrowed from the Latins, 
which generally denotes iteration, or backward 
action ; as, reedificdr, to rebuild ; repercutir, to 
repercute, or strike back. 

So ; as, socorrer, to help to succour. 

Sor ; as, sorrir to smile. 

Sos; as, soster, to support. 

Soto ; as, sotopur, to put or lay under. 

Sub ; or sob ; as, subalterno, subaltern ; subscrever, 
to subscribe ; sobpena, sobcolor, fyc. 

The Arabic article al, which is common to all 
genders and both numbers, is found in the begin- 
ning of almost all the words that remain in the Por- 
tuguese language from the Arabic, and it is the 
surest way to distinguish them. But the Portu- 
guese articles are added to the Arabic nouns, with- 
out taking off their article, al, as a almofada, the 
cushion ; o Alcorao, the Koran, <§c. 



156 PORTUGUESE 

The Greek preposition anti enters into the coin- 
position of a great many Portuguese words, which 
cannot be set down here. It is enough to observe, 
that it signifies generally opposite ; as in Antipodas, 
Antipodes; antipapa, antipope; and sometimes it 
signifies before ; as in antiloquio, a preface, a' 
speaking first ; but in this last sense it is derived 
from the Latin preposition ante. 

Of Separable Prepositions. 

It is absolutely impossible ever to attain to the 
knowledge of any language whatever, without tho- 
roughly understanding the various relations denoted 
by the prepositions, and the several cases of nouns 
which they govern ; both which relations and cases 
being arbitrary, vary and differ much in all lan- 
guages. This only instance will evince it : the 
English say, to think of a thing; the French, fo 
think to a thing ; the Germans and Dutch, to think 
o?i, or upon a thing ; the Spaniards and Portuguese, 
to think in a thing, &c. Now it will avail an English- 
man but little to know that of is expressed in Portu- 
guese by de, if he does not know what relations em 
and de denote in that language ; since the Portu- 
guese say, to think in a thing, and not of & thing ; 
therefore we will treat here of each of them, and of 
their construction separately. 

1st. A, or rather ao, as, aos, (at, in, on, 8$c.) de- 
note the place whither one is going ; as, 

Eu vou a Londres, I go to London. 

Voltdr a Portugal, to return, or go back to Por- 
tugal . 

A, in this sense, is a preposition, but in the 
following observations, it is a particle. 

9ndly. A denotes time ; as, chegar a tempo, to 
arrive in time ; a todo o tempo, at all times. 

3rdly. A denotes the mode of being, or of doing 
of people; as also their posture, gesture, or action ; as 



GRAMMAR. m 

Estdr a stia vontdde, to be at one's ease. 

A direita, on the right hand ; a esqaerda, on the 
left hand. 

Viver a sua vontade, to live to/me's mind, as one 
likes. 

Andar a pe ou a cavallo, to go on foot, or on horse- 
back. 

Montar a cavhllo, to ride on horseback. 

Correr a redea solta, to ride full speed. 

Trajdrd Francesa, to dress after the French mode. 

Viver a Ingleza, to live after the English fashion. 

Andar a grdndes pdssos, to walk at a great rate. 

Andar a pdssos lentos, to walk very slowly. 

4thly. A denotes the price of things ; as, a otto 
.velins, at eight shillings. It denotes also the weight : 
but as the nouns signifying weight are generally used 
in the plural number, s is added to a, when it is 
placed before nouns of the feminine gender, and 
when it precedes nouns of the masculine gender : 
thus, as 6?igas, by the ounce; aos arrateis, by the 
pound, &c. A denotes also the measure ; as, 
medir a palmos, to span or measure by the hand 
extended. 

When a is preceded by daqui, and followed by a 
noun of time, it denotes the space of time after 
which something is to be done: as, el-rey partird 
daqui a tres dias, the king will set out three days 
hence. 

5thly. A denotes the tools used in working, as 
likewise the games one plays at ; as, abrir ao buril, 
to grave ; where o is added to a ; trabalhar a candea, 
to do any thing by candle-light ; a agulha, with the 
needle. 

Andar a vela, to sail, or to be under sail. 

Jogdr a ptla, to play at tennis. 

Jogdr as cartas, to play at cards ; here s is added 
to «, the noun being of the feminine gender and 
plural number. 



153 PORTUGUESE 

Jogdr aos centos, to pay at piquet ; here os is 
added to a, as preceding a noun signifying a game, 
of the masculine gender and plural number. 

6th ly. A signifies sometimes as. Examp. Estd 
isto a seu gosto ? Is this as you like it? And some- 
times it signifies after ; as, a seu modo, after his or 
her way. It signifies also in; as, aoprincipio, in the 
beginning ; but then o is added to it. 

7thly. A is also put before infinitives, pre- 
ceded by another verb ; as ensindr a cantdr, to teach 
to sing. It is also placed between two equal num- 
bers, to denote order ; as, ddus a dous, two by two ; 
qudtro a qudtro, four by four : and sometimes it is 
preceded by a participle or adjective, and followed 
by an infinitive mood. 

8thly. A is a particle of composition, with many 
nouns, verbs, and adverbs, of which it often in- 
creases the meaning ; as, adinheirddo, very rich, 
that has a great deal of money ; but it generally ex- 
presses in verbs the action of the nouns they are 
composed of; as, ajoelhdr, to kneel down, which 
is formed from a and joelho, knee ; abranddr, to ap- 
pease ; alargdr, to enlarge ; from brdndo, soft ; 
largo, wide, &c. 

9th ly. A, when it is preceded by the verb ser, 
and followed by the pronouns personal, signifies in 
the stead of; as, se eu fosse a vos, faria aquilo, If I 
were you (in your place), I would do that. 

lOthly. When a is placed before cdsa, and the 
sense implies going to, t it is Englished by to, but the 
word cdsa is left out ; as, ellefoi a cdsa do governador, 
he went to the governor's. You must observe, that 
a in this sense is a preposition. 

1 lthly. A'o pe signifies near ; as, ponde ham ao pe 
do outro, place, put, or set them near one another. 
Sometimes mesmo comes before ao pe, to express 
still more the nearness of a thing, and mesmo ao pe 
is Englished by hard by, just by, fyc. ; as, a sua cdsa 
estd mesmo ao peda mbiha, his house is just by mine. 



GRAMMAR. '159 

12thly. When the noun respeito is preceded by a, 
it is used in the same sense as em comparacao, but 
requires one of these particles, do, da, dos, das, after 
it, and signifies in comparison of, in regard to, in 
respect of ; as, isto he ndda a respeito do que posso 
dizer, this is nothing to other things that 1 can say. 
13thly. When a comes before a verb neuter, it 
marks a dative ; and after a verb active, an accusa- 
tive case. 

A before the verb proposito is used in familiar dis- 
course ; as, a proposito, esquecime de dizer-voso outro 
dia ; now I think onH, I forgot to tell you the 
other day. 

14thly. Ao revez, or as avessas, are also used as 
prepositions, attended by, de, do, da, 8$c. ; and it sig- 
nifies quite the reverse, or, contrary ; as, ellefaztudo 
ao revez, or as avessas do que ouvera deser, ou do que 
the dizem, he does every thing quite the reverse of 
right, or contrary to what he is bid. 

15thly. A before truco signifies provided that. It 
is also used before the word tiro, as, a tiro de peca, 
within cannon-shot. 

16thly. Car a acara, corpo a cdrpo, signify face to 
face, body to body. Tomar hiima cousa a bda ou 
a ma parte, signifies to take a thing well or ill.; 

Such are the chief relations denoted by the parti- 
cle a. The others must be learned in construing 
and reading good Portuguese books. 

1st. De, or rather do, da, dos, das, (of, from, 
<%•£.) denote, first, the place one comes from ; as, 
sahir de Ldndres, to go out of London ; v'lr de Fran- 
ca, das Tndias, &c. ; -to come from France, from the 
Indies, &c. 

2nd. De between two nouns denotes the quality 
of the person expressed by the first noun ; as, hum 
homem de hunra, a man of honour : or the matter 
which the thing of the first noun is made of; as, 
Huma cstatua de mdrmore, a statue of marble. 



I 



160 PORTUGUESE 

Hiuna pdnte ele madeira ou de pedra, a wood or 
stone bridge. 

Observe, that two nouns so joined with de are com- 
monly Englished by two nouns likewise, but with- 
out a preposition, or rather by a compound word, 
whose first noun (whether substantive or adjective) 
expresses the matter and quality, manner, form, and 
use of the other ; as a stone bridge, huma pdnte de 
pedra; a dancing-master, hum mestre de danca. 

3rd. De, do, da, dos,das, are used after the par- 
ticiples of the preterite, wither; as ser amado, ou 
bem visto do povo, dos sdbios, 8$c ; to be beloved by 
the people, by the learned, &c. 

Do serves for the masculine, da for the feminine, 
and de for both. 

4th. De sometimes signifies by; as, de noite, by 
night ; de dia, by day. 

5th. De before em, and many nouns of time de- 
notes the regular interval of the time after which 
something begins again ; as, eu vou velo de dous em 
dbus diets, I go to see him every other day ; and be- 
fore nouns of place and adverbs repeated with em or 
para between, f/e denotes the passing from one place 
or condition to another ; as, correr de riia em rua, 
to run from street to street ; ele mal parapebr, worse 
and worse. 

6th. De after some verbs, signifies after or in ; 
as elle portou-se d'esta sbrte, he behaved in or after 
this manner. 

7th. De is used before an infinitive, and is then 
governed by some preceding noun or verb; as cei- 
paz de ensinar, capable of teaching ; digno de ser 
amado, worthy to be loved, &c. ; procurar defazer, 
to endeavour to do ; authoridaele ele pregar, the 
power or authority of preaching, &c. 

8th. De is sometimes Englished by on ; as, p6r~ 
se dejoelhos, to kneel down on one's knees. 

De between two nouns denotes the use which 



GRAMMAR. 161 

a thing is designed for ; as, azeite de cahdea, lamp- 
oil ; arma de fogo, a fire-arm, moinho de vento, a 
windmill. 

This relation is expressed in English by two 
nouns, making a compound word : the first of 
which signifies the manner, form, and use, denoted 
by the Portuguese preposition ; as cadeira de bragos, 
an arm-chair, or elbow-chair ; vela de cera, a wax- 
candle, &c. 

10. De denotes sometimes the quality of things ; 
as, miyas de tres fios, stockings with three threads. 
Sometimes it denotes also the price; as, pdnno de 
dezoito xelins, eighteen shilling cloth. 

1 1 . De is sometimes Englished by upon ; as, viver 
or sustentar se de peive, to live upon fish. Some- 
times it is Englished by with ; as, morrer defrw, to 
starve with cold. 

12. De sometimes signifies for or out of ; as, saU 
tar de alegria, to leap for joy ; de modesio, out of 
modesty. 

13. De signifies sometimes at ; as, zombar de al- 
guem, laugh at one. 

14. De is sometimes left out in English ; as, go- 
zdr de huma causa, to enjoy a thing. 

15. De, followed by two nouns of number and 
the preposition ate between them, is Englished by 
between; as, hum komem de quarenta ate cincoenta 
annos, a man between forty and fifty. 

16. De, preceded by the preposition dldnte, is left 
out in English ; as, didnte de mini, before me ; di- 
dnte de Deos, before God. 

17. De, when it is placed before casa, and the 
sense implies coming from, is Englished by from; but 
the word casa sometimes is left out in English, and 
sometimes not ; as, venho de casa (meaning my 
house) I come from home, from my house : but 
venho da casa da Senhora C. must be rendered in 
English thus, I am returning from Mrs. C.'s. 

M 



162 PORTUGUESE 

Finally, de is used before several words ; as, de 
brucos, lying all along on the ground ; de madrugd- 
da, soon in the morning ; de veras, in earnest, seri- 
ously ; de verdo, in summer ; homem de paldvra, a 
man as good as his word ; de castas, backwards, or 
on one's back ; anddr de pe, to be sickly without 
being bed-rid ; and many others, which must be 
learned by use. 

A'ntes. 

III. Antes, before, shows a relation of time, of 
which it denotes priority ; and is always opposite 
to depots, after ; as, antes da criacdo do mundo, before 
the creation of the world. 

Primeiro is also a preposition ; as, elle chegdu 
primfiro que eu, he arrived before me. 

Didnte. 

IV. Didnte, before, shows a relation of place, 
and it is always opposite to detrdz, behind. It sig- 
nifies also sometimes em or na presenca ; as, ha ar- 
vores didnte de sua cdsa, there are trees before his 
house ; punde aquillo didnte dofogo, set or put that 
before the fire ; pregdr didnte del-rei, to preach be- 
fore the king. 

Didnte is also sometimes an adverb, and may be 
used instead of adidnte ; as, ir didnte or adidnte, to 
go before ; but in the following phrase you must 
say, nao vddes tdnto adidnte, and not didnte, don't go 
so far ; por didnte is to be Englished by on in the 
following phrase, ide por didnte, go on. 

Depots. 

V. Depdis, after, denotes posteriority of time, and 
is used in opposition to antes ; as, depots do diluvio> 
after the deluge : depots do mew dia, afternoon. 

Depots also is used with an infinitive ; as, feito 
aquillo, or tendo feito aquillo, or depots de fazer 



GRAMMAR. 163 

aquillo, after having done that ; and it is also made 
a conjunction with que, governing the indicative ; as, 
depots que tevefeito aquillo, after he had done that. 

Detrdz. 

VI. Detraz, behind, denotes posteriority both of 
place and order, and it is said in opposition to didnte ; 
as, a sua casa esta detraz davossa, his house is behind 
yours ; elk vinha detraz de mim ; he walked after me. 

Em. 

VII. Em, or no, na, nos, nas (in, into, within, 
&c.) denote a relation both of time and place. The 
many various significations in which these preposi- 
tions are used, must be accurately observed, and 
much regard had to them in practice. 

No and na are sometimes rendered into English 
by a ; as, duds vezes no dia, na semdna, &c. twice a 
day, a week, &c. 

No, na, &c. are always used before nouns de- 
noting the place wherein something is kept ; as, esta 
?io gabinete, it is in the closet; na papeleira, in the* 
bureau ; nas gavetas, in the drawers ; na rua, in the 
street, &c. but sometimes they are Englished by 
upon ; as, cahir no chad, to fall upon the ground. 

Em, no, na, &c. signifies commonly in ; as, em, 
Lundres, in London ; esta na graca del~rey, he is in 
favour with the king ; but in some cases it has a 
very particular meaning ; as, estar em corpo, which 
signifies literally to be in body ; but the true sense of 
it is, to be ivithout a cloak; so that the bodv is more 
exposed to view without an upper garment. Estar 
empernas, literally, to be in legs, signifies to be bare- 
legged ; that is, the legs exposed without stockings. 
Estar em camisa is said of one that has only the 
shirt on his back. 

When this preposition em is before an infinitive, 
then it is an English gerund ; as, consiste emfall&r 
bem, it consists in speaking well ; but when it is 

M c 2 



J 



164 PORTUGUESE 

found before a gerund, it signifies as soon as; as, 

em acabdndo irei, as soon as I have clone, I wilt 

g° 

Nos nossos tempos is Englished by now-a-days. 

Em is used in sentences that imply a general 
sense; as Elle est a em miserdvel est ado, he is in a 
wretched condition ; and not no miserdvel ; but if the 
sentence implies a particular sense, you must make 
use of no, na, &c. as, no miserdvel estddo em que elle 
estd in the wretched condition wherein he is ; and 
not em miserdvel. You must observe in this last 
example and the like, that em is to be used before 
que, and not no, na, &c. which are to be placed only 
before qual ; therefore you must not say, no miserd- 
vel estddo no que elle estd ; but no miserdvel estddo 
no qual elle estd. 

Em, construed with pronouns without an article, 
makes a sort of adverb, rendered into English by a 
preposition and a noun ; thus in this sentence, nos 
irernos em cache we shall go in a coach, em coche is 
an adverb of manner, which shows how we shall go : 
but no cache denotes something besides ; as if a 
company were considering how they shall ride to a 
place, somebody would say, vos ireis na cadeirinha, 
e nos no cache, you shall go in the chair, and we in 
the coach; no coche would be said in opposition to 
na cadeirinha, and both respectively to some speci- 
fied chair and coach ; or else they should say, vos 
ireis em cadeirinha, e nos em cdche. But in this other 
sentence, eu deixei o meu chapeo no coche, I left my 
hat in the coach, it would be improper to say em 
cdche, because some particular coach is meant, 
that which has drove me here or there, or which 
has been spoken of. 

We say de verdo^ no verao, or em o verdo ; de invcr- 
no } no inverno, &c. in summer, in winter, &c. 

Em is also rendered into English by at ; as, em 
tddo o tempo, at all times. 



GRAMMAR. 165 

Em is used, and never no, na, &c. before proper 
names of cities and authors ; as elle esta em Londres, 
he is in London ; nos lemos em Cicero, we read in 
Cicero. But they say no Porto, in Oporto. 

Em, and no, na, &c. are construed with the names 
of kingdoms ; as, em or na, Inglaterra, in England : 
but no, na, is most commonly construed with names 
of provinces ; as, no Alentejo, na Beira, &c. in Alen- 
tejo, in Beira, &c. 

Em is sometimes rendered into English by into: 
as, Narciso foi transformado emjlor, Narcissus was 
metamorphosed into a flower: and sometimes by 
to ; as de rua em raa, from street to street. 

No, na, are sometimes rendered into English by 
against ; as, dar co' a cabeca na parede, to dash one^s 
head against the wail. 

No, na, &c. are also rendered into English by in, 
and sometimes by into ; as ter hum menino nos brdcos, 
to hold a child in one's arms ; entregar alguma cousa 
nas mads de alguem, to deliver a thing into some- 
body's hands. 

Em is used before the word travez, as in this 
phrase, por-se de mar em travez com alguem^ to fall 
out together. 

Em before a noun of time, denotes the space of 
time that slides away in doing something ; as, el-rey 
foi a Hanover, em tres dias, the king went to Hano- 
ver in three days ; that is, he was no longer than 
three days in going. 

Em is sometimes used after the verb Mr, to go ; 
as, vai em quatro meses que eu aqui cheguei, it is 
now going on four months since I came hither. 

Em before qudnto, and sometimes without it, is 
rendered into English by while or whilst; as, em 
qudnto vbs fazeis aquillo, eufarii isto, while you do 
that, 1 shall do this ; but if they are followed by a 
noun of time with an interrogation, then they must 
be rendered into English by in how much, or many ; 
as, em qudnto tempo 7 , in how much time? Ob- 



166 PORTUGUESE 

serve, that em quanta mim, a ti, a elle, &c. are 
rendered into English by for what concerns me, thee, 
him, &c. 

No serves for the masculine, na for the femi- 
nine, and em for both. 

Em signifies as ; as, em sinal da sua amizade, as a 
token of his friendship ; em premio, as a reward. 

The prepositions em, no, na, &c. and dentro, have 
very often the same signification, therefore they may 
sometimes be used one instead of the other ; as 
est a na gaveta, or dentro da gaveta, it is in the 
drawer ; esta na cidade, or dentro da cidade, he is in 
town. 

Em before the words favor, utilidade, considera- 
cdm, razdo, and the like, signifies in behalf of, for 
the sake of, on account of, Sec. as, em razabdas be lias 
accoens que elle tern feito, in consideration of the 
great things he has performed. 

Observe, that they very often make an elision of 
the last vowels, o, a, of the preposition no, na, 
when there is a vowel in the beginning of the next 
word ; n s agoa, instead of na agoa; they also cut 
off the e of the preposition em, and change the m 
into n, as you may see in Camoens, Canto 2, Stanza 
xxxii. n' algum porto, instead of em algum porto, 
wherein you must observe that n is to be Englished 
by to or into. 

Com. 

VII. This preposition signifies with, and it denotes 
conjunction, union, mixing, assembling, keeping 
company; as, casar Mma donzella com hum hbmem 
honrado, to marry a maid with an honest man ; hir 
com alguem, to go with one ; com a ajuda de Deos, 
by God's help, &c. 

Observe that most of the adverbs formed of the 
adjectives are turned in Portuguese by the pre- 
position com and the substantive ; as, atrevidamente, 
boldly, com atrevimento, with boldness ; elegante- 



GRAMMAR. 167 

mente, elegantly ; com elegancia, with elegance ; cor- 
tezmente, politely, com cortezia, with politeness, &c. 

The last consonant m is very often cut off, even 
before the noun of number hum, one; and so they 
say, cum, instead of com hum, as may be seen in 
Camoens, Cant. 2, Stanza xxxvii. 

With me, with thee, with himself, &c. are rendered 
into Portuguese by commigo, comtigo, or comvosco, 
comsigo comnosco, comvosco, corns ■/ go. 

When com is preceded by para, it signifies to- 
wards, and sometimes over, in English ; as, sejamos 
piedosos para com os pbbres, let us be merciful to- 
wards the poor. Ter grdnde poder para com alguem, 
to have great influence over somebody's mind. 

Com before the word capa is used metaphorically, 
and then it signifies under colour ov pretext. 

Para. 

VIII. Para is rendered into English by for ; but 
it signifies also to, when it is found before the in- 
finitive, and denotes the intention, or purpose in 
doing something ; as, este livro he para meu irmao, 
this book is for my brother ; estapenna he para escre- 
ver, this pen is to write ; Deos nos fez para amalo, 
God made us for to love him ; o comer he necessdrio 
para conservar a vida, eating is necessary for pre- 
serving life. 

Para que is rendered into English by for what ; 
as, para que he isto? for what is this? and sometimes 
by that, or in order that ; as, para que venha virme, 
that he may come and see me. But porque signifies 
ivhy, for what, upon what account, as, porque nad 
vindes? why don't you come? but when it is not 
followed by an interrogation, it signifies because. 

Para serves likewise before the verbs, to denote 
what one is able to do in consequence of his present 
disposition ; as, Hie he bastantemente forte para andiir 
a cavdllo, he is strong enough to ride ; elle tern bus- 



168 PORTUGUESE 

tdnte cabeddl para sustcntdr-se, he has means enough 
to maintain himself; a occasido he muito favor dvel 
para nos nao servir-mos della, the occasion is too 
favourable to let it slip. 

Para expresses also the capacity or incapacity of 
doing any thing; as, elle he homem para isto, he is 
the proper man wanted for this ; he homem para pou- 
co, he is good for little ; he homem para ndda, he is 
good for nothing. 

This preposition is also used to denote the end or 
motive of doing any thing ; as, trabdlho para o hem 
publico, I work for the public good ; hum hospital 
para os pbbres, an hospital for the poor. 

Para is a preposition of time ; a&istome bdstapara 

todo o anno ; this is sufficient to me for all the year ; 

est ad umdos para sSmpre, they are united for ever; 

para duus meses ha muito pouco, for two months it 

was too little. 

Para is sometimes preceded by the adverb la, 
and followed by a noun of time, and then it is 
Englished by against or towards ; as, Id para o Jim 
da semdna, against the end of the week, or towards 
the end of the week. 

Para is sometimes Englished by considering, or 
with respect to ; as, este menino estd muito adiantddo 
para a iddde que tern, or para o pouco tempo que 
aprende, this child is very forward for his age, or 
considering the little time he has learned \para Ingle z 
fdlla demasiadamente, he talks too much considering 
that he is an Englishman. 

Para signifies sometimes just or ready to ; as, elle 
estd para partir, he is just going away, he is ready 
to go. 

Para is also used before the word grdcas ; as, Slle 
nao he para grdcas, he takes no jest ; elle nao estd 
para grdcas, he is out of humour, or he is in an ill 
humour. 

Para onde ? signifies whither? to what place? 



GRAMMAR. 169 

Para que ? or para que Jim ? signifies to what end 
or purpose? Para cima signifies upward. 

Para huma e antra parte, signifies to both sides, 
places, ox parts. 

Para is also Englished by towards, and is said of 
places ; as, para o oriente, towards, or to the east. 

Para onde quer que, signifies whither, or to what 
place thou wilt, any where. 

Para Sutra parte, signifies towards another place. 

Para comigo, towards me. 

Para o didnte, signifies/or the time to come. 

Demim, para mim, signifies for what concerns me. 

Para is used by Camoens. Cant. 2, Stanza xxiv. 
before the preposition detraz, and signifies back- 
wards. 

Para between two nouns of number is Englished 
by or, and sometimes by and ; as, hum hbmem de 
quarenta para cincoenta dnnos, a man between forty 
and fifty ; dista quatro para cinco legoas, it is about 
four or five leagues distant. 

Por. 

IX. Por, pello, pella, pellos, or pellas, signifies/or ; 
as, por amor de vos, for your sake ; por sets semdnas, 
for six weeks ; paldvra por palavra, word for word. 

Polo and pola instead of pello and pella, are out 
of use. 

Por sometimes denotes that the thing is not yet 
done ; as, esta Sbra esta por acabar, this work is not 
yet finished. 

Por, by, for, over, through ; as, alcancSi-o por 
empenho, I obtained it by protection ; eu vou por 
dinheiro, I am going for money ; passeio pillos cdmpos, 
I walk through the fields ; por todo o remo, all over 
the kingdom. 

When por is before an infinitive, and followed by 
a negative, in the latter part of the sentence, it is 
Englished by although or though; as, por ser dev6ta t 



170 PORTUGUESE 

or por devota que seja, nao deuva de ser molher, though 
she is a religious woman, yet she is a woman ; por 
ser pobre, or por pobre que seja, nao deLva de ser 
soberba, though she has no fortune, she is neverthe- 
less, or for all that, proud. Here the negative with 
the verb dei,var are rendered into English by the 
verb to be, and the particles nevertheless, yet, &c. 
Sometimes the words nem por tsso are used before 
the verb deixar, but the sense is the same. 

Por followed by an adjective and the particle que 
with a verb in the subjunctive mood, is rendered 
into English by never so ; as, por grdnde que elk 
seja, let him be never so great ; por pouco que seja, 
never so little. 

Por before menos, signifies far less than, or under ; 
as, vm ce nao o tera por menos de v'inte libras, you shall 
not have it under twenty pounds. 

Por before qudnto, with an interrogation, signifies 
for how much, at what rate ? But if there be no 
interrogation, as in the following and the like sen- 
tences, then it is to be Englished by for never so 
much ; as, nao o farm por qudnto me dessem, 1 would 
not do it for never so much. 

Por before cima signifies upwards, and before baxo 
is Englished by downwards ; as, o remedio bbra por 
chna e por bdxo, the medicine operates, or works, 
upwards and downwards. 

Por before pouco, muito, bem, &c. and followed by 
que, makes a sort of conjunction governing the sub- 
junctive, and is Englished by if, followed by ever 
or never so little, much, well, &c. as, por pouco que 
erreis, if you do amiss never so little; por bem que 
eu faca, if I do never so well, &c. 

Por before mini signifies sometimes as for, or for 
all ; as, por mim estou prompto, as for me, or, for my 
part I am ready ; por mini podeis dormir se quizerdes, 
you may sleep for all me. 

Por,pello, pella, &c. denote the efficient cause of 



GRAMMAR. 171 

a thing, as also the motive and means, or ways of 
doing it ; in all which significations they are 
Englished by by, through, out of, at, &c. as, 

A Asia f Si conquistada por Alexandre , Asia was 
conquered by Alexander. 

V6s fallals nisso so por enveja, it is out of envy 
only you speak of it. 

E'lle entrou pella porta, mas sahio pella janella, he 
got in at the door, but he got out at the window, 
&c. 

Por denotes place, after the verbs ir and passdr ; 
as, por onde ireis vos f which way shall you go ? 

Eu passarei por Frdnga, I'll go through France ; 
por onde passou elle? which way did he go ? 

Por construed with nouns without an article, 
denotes most times distribution of people, time, and 
place; and it is Englished by a, or every, before the 
noun ; as, 

E'lle deu tdnto por cabeca, he gave so much a head. 

Tdnto por soldddo, por anno, por mis, porsemdna, &c. 
so much a soldier, a year, a month, a week; a razdo 
de vinte por cento, at the rate of twenty per cent. 

E'lle pede tdnto por legoa, he asks so much a 
league, or every league. 

Por, between two nouns without an article, or 
between two infinitives without a preposition, 
denotes the choice which one makes between two 
things, alike in their nature, but different in their 
circumstances ; as, 

Cdsa por cdsa antes quero hta que aquella, since I 
must have one of these two houses, I like this better 
than that ; morrer por morrer, melhor he morrer 
combatendo que fugindo, when a man must die, it is 
better to die in fighting than in running away. 

Pello meyo is rendered into English by through ; 
as, pello meyo dos cdmpos, through the fields. 

Por meyo is rendered into English by by ; as, elle 
alcancou o sen intento por meyo de astugias, he has 
compassed his ends by devices. 



172 PORTUGUESE 

Por turno signifies in o?ie's turn. 

Por before the infinitives is used instead of para 
by the best Portuguese writers ; and por que instead 
of para que ; as may be seen particularly in Camoens, 
Canto 2, Stanza vii. and viii. and in the following 
example, por nao, or para nao repetir o quejd temos, 
dtto, not to repeat what we have already said. 

Por is sometimes Englished by for, upon the 
account of, for sake, &c. as, elle far a isto por amor 
de vos, he will do this upon your account, or for your 
sake ; deixarab-o por morto, he was left for dead ; 
eu tenho-o por meu amigo, 1 take him to be my 
friend ; todos os homens de bem sao, or estao por elle, 
all honest people are for him, or are on his side ; por 
quern me tomais vos P who do you take ine for ? 

We have already observed, that porque without 
an interrogation signifies because; but it has the 
same signification in the following sentence, and the 
like ; porque elle he mentiroso segue-se que tambem 
eu o seja ; because he is a liar, does it follow there- 
fore that I am one ? 

Por isto, or por Ssta razao, signifies therefore. 

O porque signifies the reason, the cause, or the 
subject ; as, sdbe-se o porque P is it known upon 
what account ? 

Por mbdo de dizer signifies as one may say, if I, 
or ive, may say, &c. 

Por didnte signifies before ; and por detraz signi- 
fies behind. 

Por ventura signifies perhaps. 

Pello passddo signifies formerly, in time past, 
heretofore. 

Por nenhum cdso, by no means. 

Por mar e por terra, by sea and land. 

Hum por hum signifies one by one. 

Por is sometimes Englished by in ; as, e lies sao 
vinie por todos, they are twenty in all. 

When the verb passdr is followed by por, then the 
word alto signifies to forget ; as, passdu~lhe aqwllo por 



GRAMMAR. 173 

alto, he forgot that; but speaking of goods it sig- 
nifies to smuggle. 

Por joined with the verb ir signifies to fetch, and 
seek after ; as, vdipor vinho, go fetch some wine ; vdi 
pello medico, go see for the physician. 

Por is commonly used before the substantives ; as, 
por exemplo, for example ; por commodidade, for con- 
veniency ; por costume, for custom sake ; and many 
others, that may be learned by use. 

You must observe, that pello serves for the mas- 
culine, pella for the feminine, and por for both. 

Contra. 

X. Contra (against, contrary to) denotes oppo^ 
sition ; as, que diz vm ce contra isto P what do you say 
against this ? It signifies also over against, opposite to. 

Pro e contra signifies in English pro and con. 

Desde. 

XI. Desde denotes both time and place, and enu- 
meration of things, and is commonly followed in 
the sentence by the preposition ate (to) ; then desde 
denotes the term from w hence, and ate that of hither- 
to ; as, 

Desde o principio ate ofim, from the beginning to 
the end. 

E'llefoiape desde Windsor ate Londres, he walked 
from Windsor to London. 

Eu tenho visto todos desde o primeiro ate o ultimo, I 
have seen them all from the first to the last ; furao 
todos mbrtos desde o primeiro ate o ultimo, they were 
all slain to a man. 

Desde a criacao do mundo, from or since the crea- 
tion. 

Desde o berco, ou infdncia, from the cradle, from 
a child. 



174 PORTUGUESE 

Desde jd, even now ; as, desde jd prevejo, I even 
now foresee. 

Desde agora, from this time forward. 

Desde entao, from that time ever since. 

Desde que, as soon as, when. 

Desde quandoi how long since, or ago ? 

Rio navegdvel desde o seu nascimento ; a river na- 
vigable at its very rise. 

AtL 

XII. Ate signifies till, even, to, &c. as yon may 
see in the following examples. 

Ate onde ? how far ? 

Ate Rdma, as far as Rome. 

Ate quando P till when or how long ? 

Ate que eu viva, as long as I live. 

He hum homem de tarda bonddde, que ate os seus 
inimigos sao obrigddos a estimdlo, he is so good a man 
that even his enemies have a value for him. 

Ate os mats vis homem tomdvao a liber ddde de, &c. 
the very worst of men took such a liberty as to, 
8$c. 

Ate que, until, till. 

Ate as orelhas, up to the ears. 

Elle vendeo ate a camtsa, he has sold the very 
shirt off his back. 

Ate agora, or ate aqui, till now, or hitherto. 

Ateaqui (speaking of a place), to this place, hither, 
so far. 

Ate Id, to that place, so far. 

AtS que isto sefaca, till it be done. 

Ate entao, till then, till that time. 

Ate is also used before an infinitive ; as, gritdr 
ate enrouquecer, to bawl one's self hoarse. 

Rir ate arrehentdr pellas ilhdrgas, to split one's 
sides with laughing. 

Ddr de comer a alguem ate arrebentar, to fill, or 
cram one with victuals till he bursts. 



GRAMMAR. 175 

Ate a primeira, till our next meeting, till we 



meet again, 



Por cima. 



XIII. Por cima (above, over), denotes superiority 
of place ; as, 

Morar por cima da alguem, to live or lodge above 
somebody. 

A bdlla Ihepassdu por cima da cabeca, the ball went 
over his head. 

Por cima de tudo, upon the whole. 

Para cima. 

XIV. Paracima (above) denotes superiority of age, 
and is sometimes put at the end of the sentence ; as, 

Elles alistarao tudos que t'mhao de dez dnnos para 
cima, they enlisted every body above ten. 

A cima, 

XV. A cima (above) denotes rank, and some 
moral subjects ; as, 

A cima, delle, above him, or superior to him. 

Estar a cima de tudo, to be above the world. 

Huma mother que esta a cima de tudo, nao se Ihe da 
do que o mundo diz delta, a woman who is above the 
public censure, don't care what people say of her. 

Em cima. 

XVI. Em cima (upon) ; as em cima da mesa, upon 
the table. 

Em cima de tudo isto, or only em cima, signifies 
and besides all that, over and above all that. 

De cima. 

XVII. De cma, when it is an adverb, signifies 
from above ; but when a preposition, it is Englished 
by from, off, ox from off; as, 



176 PORTUGUESE 

Tirai aqiiillo de cima da mesa, take that from off 
the table. 

Elle nunca tirou osseus blhos de cima delta, he never 
turned his eyes from her. 

Cahir de cima das drvoras, to fall off the trees. 

Debaxo. 

XVIII. The preposition debaxo (under, below, or 
from under) denotes the time and place ; I say the 
time of a denomination of a reign, or government ; 
as, debaxo do imperio de Augusto, under The empire of 
Augustus. 

Debaxo, as a preposition of place, marks out in- 
feriority of position ; as, 

Tudo o que ha debaxo dos ceos, all there is under 
heaven. 

Ter huma almofada debaxo dos jotlhos, to have a 
cushion under the knees. 

Estar debaxo da chdve, to be under lock and key. 

Debaxo is sometimes rendered into English by 
upon ; as, affirmar huma causa debaxo de juramento, 
to swear a thing, to declare upon oath. 

Abaxo. 

XIX. This preposition is rendered into English 
by under, inferior, or next; as assentou-se abaxo delles, 
he sat inferior, or under them ; as, assentou-se abaxo 
de mini ; he sat next, inferior to me, or he was next 
man to me : abaxo del-reielle he o primeiro, he is the 
next man to the king. 

This preposition is sometimes put at the end of 
the following phrases, de telhas abaxo, here below, 
in this lower world, de cabeca abaxo, headlong. 

Fora. 

XX. Fora (out, without, except, but), denotes 
exclusion, and exception. It requires generally a 
genitive before a noun of time, or place; but it 
governs also the nominative ; as, 



GRAMMAR. 177 

For a do reyno, out of the kingdom. 

For a da cidade, out of town. 

For a de tempo, out of season. 

Procurdi-ofora de cdsa, look forhim without doors. 

E'lles sahirab todos, for a dous ou tres, they all 
went out except, or but, two or three. 

E'lle Ihepermite tudo, for a o ir as assembleas, he 
indulges her in every thing, but in going to assem- 
blies. 

E'lle tern todos os poderes, fora o de concluir, he has 
full powers, except of concluding. 

Fora is sometimes preceded by tad, and then it is 
to be rendered into English by so far ; as elle est a 
tao fora de socorrer os seus alliados, que se decldra 
contra elles, he is so far from assisting his allies, that 
he declares himself against them. 

Fora is sometimes rendered into English by be- 
sides ; as, fora daquilles que, &c. besides those that, 
8§c. and sometimes by beyond; as, fora de medida, 
beyond measure. 

For a dehor as signifies beyond the hour, or very late. 

For alguem fora da porta, or manddr alguem 
pella porta fora, to turn one out of doors. 

Defornte or front e. 

This preposition governs the genitive, and signi- 
fies over against. It is followed by de, do, da, &c. 
as, 

Def route da sua cdsa esta hum oute'iro, over against 
his house is a hilL 

Eu estdva defronte delle, I was over against him. 

Sem. 

Sem signifies imthout ; as, 
Sem dinheiro, without money, 
Sem duvida, without end. 

Sem dar a entender, or sem fazer conhecer, with- 
out giving to understand. 

N 



178 PORTUGUESE 

Sem metis, nem menos, without any reason or pro- 
vocation. 

Est a 7 s sem a mo, to be out of place. 

Sem que algum ado precedente possa derrogar o 
presente, any former act to the contrary of the 
present notwithstanding. 

Sem governs also the infinitive, which is rendered 
into English with the participle; as, fallar sem 
saber, to speak without knowing. 

It is also a conjunction with que, governing the 
subjunctive ; as, 

Enfada-se sem que Ihe digao nada, he is angry 
without any body saying any thing to him. 

Nad era euja bastantamente infeliz, semque procu- 
rasseis de acrescentar a m'mha infelicidade P was I 
not miserable enough before, but you must still 
labour to make me more so ? 

Lembro-me sem que me digais, I remember with- 
out your telling. 

E'lle vird sem que mandem por elle, he will come 
without sending for. 

Conforme or seguiuk. 

XXIII. Conforme or segundo (according to, con- 
formable to) govern ■ the nominative, and never 
the dative as in English : as, 

EI lie foi tratddo conforme o seu merecimento, he 
was treated according to his deserts. 

Conforme o men parecer, in my judgment, in my 
opinion. 

In common conversation conforme is used adverb- 
ially, and Englished as follows : 

I'sso he conforme, or only conforme, it is as it hap- 
pens ; may be ; may be not ; that is according, 

Conforme a occasiao o pedir, according as there 
may be need. 

Sobre. 

XXIV. Sobre signifies upon ; as, sabre a mesa> 
upon the table ; sobre o rh, upon the river. 



GRAMMAR. 179 

Sdbre tudo, or sobre todas as cousas, over all, above 
all, above all things, above any thing, especially ; 
as, sobre tudo tende cuidado na saude, but, above all 
things, mind your health. 

P6r alguem sobre si, or dar Ihe o primeiro lugar, 
to place one above himself. 

Ir sobre huma cidade, to march against a town. 

Ir sobre alguem, to fall, or to rush upon one. 

Ir sobre seguro, to go upon sure grounds. 

Sobre a noite, about or towards the evening. 

Sobre o verde, somewhat green. 

Sdbre a minha palavra, upon my word. 

Sobre palavra, upon parole. 

Mandar carta sobre carta, to send letter upon letter. 

E'lle recebeo a carta sobre o jantdr, he had just 
dined when he received the letter. 

E'lle dorme sobre o jantdr, he sleeps immediately 
after dinner. 

Sobre isto, or sobre Sstas cousas, is sometimes 
Englished by more than that, or besides that; as, 

E'lle roubou-o, e sobre isto matdu-o, he robbed 
him, and more than that, he killed him. 

Sobre que, is rendered into English by though 
or although ; as, 

E'ste negbcio sobre que he difficult o so, nabhe impossivel, 
altho' this is a hard affair, yet it is not impossible. 

Sobre is Englished sometimes by besides ; as, 

Sobre as miserias da guerra, elle teve a disgraga, 
&c. besides the miseries of the war, he had the 
misfortune of, fyc. 

Estar sobre si, or andar sobre si, signifies to stand 
upon one's guard. 

E'u vos escreverei sobre esta materia, I will write 
to you about this matter. 

Acerca. 

XXV. Acerca, signifies about, as, acerca disto 
Ihe disse, about this I told him ; acerca de la ir Ihe 
respond*, about going there I answered him. 

N 2 



180 PORTUGUESE 

Per to, junto, ao pe, pegddo. 

XXVI. Perto, (near, by, about)denotes proximity 
of place and time, and governs the genitive case ; 
as, aquillo esta muito perto do lume, that is very near 
the fire ; perto das otto horas, about eight o'clock. 

Perto do rio, near the river. 

Estdmos perto do Natal, we are near Christmas. 

Ao pe requires also the genitive case ; as, 

Assent aivos ao pe de mim, sit down by me, or near 
me ; ao pe do rio, near the river, &c. 

Note, that junto (near or by) and pegddo (hard 
by) require the dative case ; as, 

Junto a ciddde, near the town. 

Pegddo ao paldcio, hard by the palace. 

Longe. 

Longe, far, a great way off, governs the genitive, 
and the particle de, or do, da, &c. as, 
Longe de cdsa, far from home. 
Longe daqui, far from hence. 

De longo, or ao longo. 

This preposition requires the genitive case ; as, 
Ao longo da pray a, along the shore. 
Ao longo da cbsta, do prddo, &c. along the coast, 
the meadow, &c. 

Of further Particles. 

Ainda, ainda que,postoque 'or qudndo bem, ainda assim, 
or com 4 u do. 

Ainda signifies yet ; as, elle ainda nab veyo, he is 
not come yet. It signifies also even; as, seria ver- 
gonha ainda o fallar msso, it were a shame even to 
speak of it ; nem ainda por cem libras, no not for a 
rfundred pounds. 

Ainda que signifies, though or although ; as, ainda 
que vos sois mats velho do que elle, though you be 
older than he ; ainda que assim fdsse though it were 
so. 



GRAMMAR. 181 

Ainda qui, is very often followed by com tudo, 
yet for all that ; as, ainda que elle nab tivesse neces- 
sidade disso, com tudo, &c. though he had no need of 
it, yet, $c. 

Ainda asszm, or com tudo, is sometimes Englished 
by nevertheless, or for all that ; as, ainda assim sempre 
ellefoi louvavel, he was praise-worthy for all that. 
J a desde, j a que and j 'a por que. 

Ja desde is rendered into English by even from; 
as,jd desde o principio, even from the beginning. 

Ja que signifies since ; as, 

Ja que isso assim he, since it is so. 

The particle que sometimes is not placed imme- 
diately after ja ; as,jV* ha dous annos que morreo, he 
died two years since or ago. 

J a ha muito tempo que sahistes de casa, it is a long- 
time since you went from home. 

Ja por que, is repeated in the same sentence, and 
then the first is rendered into English by first, be- 
cause ; and the second by secondly, because ; as, ja 
por que era cego, ja por que era co,vo, first, because 
he was blind, and secondly, because he was lame. 

Depois que. 

Depuis que is rendered into English by after ; as 
Depdis que eu tinha entrado, after I was gone in. 

Com que. 

Com que is only a note either of introduction, or 
connexion ; as, 

Com que havia hum homem enfermo, &c. now a 
certain man was sick ; sometimes they add to it 
the particle assim, and then it is to be rendered into 
English by and so. 

Ou. 

Ou signifies or, or either ; as, ou bom, ou mao % 
either good or bad ; metis ou menos, more or less ; 
ou elle queira ou nab, whether he will or not. 



182 PORTUGUESE 

Quer. 

Quer, when a particle, must be repeated, and the 
first is rendered into English by either or whether, 
and the second by or ; as, quer elle queira quer nao, 
whether he will or not ; quer vos o tenhaisfeito } quer 
nao, whether you have done that, or not. 

Se quer, or ao menos. 

Se quer, or ao menos, Sec. signifies at least, however ; 
as, se vos nao quereis ser por elle nao sejdis se qair 
contra elle, if you don't choose to be for him, at least 
don't oppose him ; dai-lhe se quer com que sustentar- 
se, give him, however, a subsistence ; o nosso primeiro 
Jim he de livrarnos de tddos os males, ao menos dos 
maybres, our chief end is to be freed from all evils ; 
at least the greatest. 

Nem se quer hum, is rendered into English by 
never a one, so much, or in the following manner ; as, 
fdrao tddos mortos, e nem se quer hum escapou, they 
were all slain to a man. 

Qudndo muito. 

Qudndo muito (at most, at furthest,) is generally 
used before the nouns of time and price ; as, elle 
estara aqui dentro em hum mez qudndo muito, he will 
be here in a month at furthest ; dez libras qudndo 
muito, ten pounds at most. 

Tdnto. 

Tdnto, so much, is sometimes followed by como, 
and then it is rendered into English by as well as, 
as much as, &c. 

A'mo-te tdnto como a mim mesmo, I love thee as 
well as myself. 

E'lle teme tdnto como qualquer de vos, que Ihe re- 
sulte algum ddno y he is afraid of harm as much as 
any of you. 



GRAMMAR. 183 

Cuideiqueaestimdsse tdnto comoasi mesmo, I thought 
he esteemed her, as much as he did himself. 

E'lles vem tdnto de d'ta como de noite, they can see 
as well by day as by night. 

E'u the tdnto como vos, I had as much as you. 

O'utro tdnto is rendered into English by the double, 
twice as much, or as much ; as, 

E'u alcancei dutro tdnto mats por isso, I had as 
much more for it ; eu posso faze r dutro tdnto, I can 
do as much. 

Tdnto followed by asshn, is a particle merely ex- 
pletive ; as, 

Tdnto asshn que Ihe posso eu fazer? how can I 
help it ; vaite, tdnto asshn nao ha nada para ti, go 
away, here is nothing for you. 

Tdnto ass'im followed by que without an interro- 
gation, is sometimes rendered by so that, in so much 
that ; as, tdnto ass'im que elle nao quer ouvir mdis 
fallar nisso, so that he will hear no more of it. 

Tdnto mdis is followed by que, and Englished by 
and the more so as ; as, 

E'u estdu prompto para ir com vm ce hum dia destes 
a comidia, se v?n ce quizer, tdnto mdis que sedeve repre- 
sents huma nova peca ; I am ready to go with you 
some day or other to the play, if you'll give me 
leave ; and the more so, as a new piece is to be acted. 

Tdnto que, or logo que, is rendered into English by 
as soon as ; as, tdnto que eu o vi, as soon as I saw him. 

Tdnto melhor is rendered into English by so much 
the better, 

Tdnto is sometimes preceded by com, and followed 
by que, and is Englished by so, provided that ; as com 
tdnto que o facais, provided that you do it ; com 
tdnto que me nao faca mal, so he do me no hurt. 

Tdnto qudnto is Englished by as much as ; as, 

Tdnto qudnto posso, as much as I can. 
Tao. 

lao, so, is generally followed by como ; as ? 



184 PORTUGUESE 

Este naoki tab bom como o outro, this is not so good 
as the other ; eu sei isso tab bem como vos, I know it 
ns well as you. 

Tad is sometimes followed by que, and Englished 
by so, such, to that degree ; as, 

E'lle he tab prudente que nab tern igudl, he is so wise 
that he has not his equal ; nab sou tab louco que o 
creya, I am not so simple, or I am not such a fool 
as to believe it; faz tab grdnde vento que, &c. the 
wind is so high that, &c. or the wind blows to that 
degree, &c. 

Como. 

Como, is Englished by as, like, how, &c. as may 
be seen in the following expressions: 

Como ? how ? 

Dizeime cdmo Ihe hei de fallar P tell me how I 
may speak to him. 

Como assim ? how so ? 

Cdmo ! what ! 

Como quer que, whereas. 

Como quer que seja, howsoever, in what manner 
or fashion soever. 

Seja como for, be it as it will. 

Cdmo isto assim he, since it is so. 

Como, as it were, or almost. 

Como se, as if, or even as if; as, como se elles ti- 
vessem ja vencido, as if they had already over- 
come. 

Como tambem, as well as. 

Rico como elle he, as rich as he is. 

Como sois men am'tgo, quero, &c. as (or because) 
you are my friend, FJ1, &c. 

Dizeime o como, tell me how. 

E'u sei como fa zer para que elle venha, I know the 
way 1 shall take to make him come. 

Como elle la nab esteia, eu irei, provided he is not 
there, I will come. 



GRAMMAR. 185 

Assim. 

Assim, so, thus, is rendered into English as in 
the following expressions : 

Pois hi assim de vSras? de veras que assim he, is 
it even so ? it is even so. 

Assim seja, or seja assim, so be it, or be it so. 

Assim hS, it is so. 

Para assim dizer, as it were. 

Assim sdu eu louco, que, &c. I am not so foolish 
as to, &c. 

Assim Deos me salve, as I hope to be saved. 

Tdnto assim, so that. 

Assim he que vos, &c. is this your way, S$c, 

Assim como assim, after all, nevertheless, or for all 
that ; as, em vao dilatais a vessa Jornada, assim como 
assim he preciso que vddes, it is in vain for you to put 
off your journey, you must go thither nevertheless, 
or for all that, you must go after all. 

Assim como, as well as, or as soon as. 

Pasta assim por agora thus much for this time. 

Assim na pdz, como na guerra, both in time of 
peace and war. 

Assim, assim, so so, indifferent. 

Assim queira elle como pode, he can if he will. 

Assim is sometimes preceded by e ; as, e assim que 
quer isto dizir ? how now ? what do you mean by 
this ? And sometimes assim is followed by cdmo ; 
as, assim como o sol eclipsa os outros planetas, da 
mesma sorte, &c. as the sun eclipses the other pla- 
nets, so, (§*C. 

&. 

Se, if; as, se elle vier, if he comes ; seme amasses, 
should you love me ; se elle fosse homem de hour a, 
were he but an honest man : se soubissem quern eu 
sou, todos diriao, &c. were it told who I am, every 
one would say, &c. se he verdade que, &c. if so be 
that, 8$c. 

The reciprocal verbs, as well as those that are 



186 PORTUGUESE 

used impersonally, may have two se se joined toge- 
ther ; as, se se for, if he goes away ; se se fdlla nisso, 
if they speak to it. 

Se is sometimes rendered into English by whether ; 
and when it is repeated, the second is Englished by 
or ; as, 

Quisera sober se a culpa h6 nossa, se vossa, I would 
know whether it is our fault or yours. 

Alias, 

Alias is sometimes rendered into English by 
else ; as, enirdi, porque alias fecharei a porta, come 
in, or else I'll shut the door ; porque alias seriao os 
vossos filhos immundos, else were your children un- 
clean. And sometimes it is rendered into English 
by otherwise, in other things, or respects. 

Embora. 

Embora is rendered into English by pros- 
perously, auspiciously ; but sometimes it is a par- 
ticle merely expletive, and answers to the Italian 
pure : as, dizei muito embora o que quizerdes, say what 
you please : the Italian says, dite pur quel che vipidce. 

Muito embora seja assim, well, let it be so. 

Embora is sometimes Englished by away ; as, 
vaite embora, go away. 

Soldo. 

Sendo signifies if not, did not, were it not that, but 
that ; as, 

Sendo tivesse medo de meu pay, but that I fear my 
father. 

Se elle nao tivesse vergdnha de confessar, but that 
he was ashamed to confess. 

The following expressions, in which they make 
use of this particle, may be Englished by but, for, 
and some other variations. 

Se nao fdsse por elle, but for him, or had it not 
been for him, or had he not been. 



GRAMMAR. 187 

Senao fosse por vos, had you not been, or had it 
not been for you, without you, without your help, 
hindrance, &c. 

Senao fosse por mim, elle morreria defome, were it 
not for rne, he would starve. 

Senao is sometimes Englished by but : as, nem elles 
tern outro intento, senao, &c. nor do they aim at any 
thing else but, &c. 

Ninguem disse assim senao Cicero, nobody said so 
but Cicero. 

Senao may be also expressed by mais que in the 
following sentence, and the like : 

Elle nao faz senao jogdr, or elle nao faz mais que 
jogar, he does nothing but play. 

Nad, nao porque. 

Nao, not, or no, when followed by porque, is 
Englished by not that, not but that; as, nao porque 
Ihefalt sse engenho, not but that he had wit ; nao por- 
que nao fosse justo, mas porque, &c. not but that it 
was right, but because, &c. nao porque a cdusa seja 
impossivel mas porque, &c. not that the thing is pos- 
sible, but because, &c. 

Tambem, or outrosi. 

Tambem, or outrosi, signifies also, too, likewise; as, 
v 6s assim o quereis e eu tambem, you will have it so, 
and I too. 

Para que, porquL 

See the prepositions para and por. 

PSis. 

This particle is very much used by the Portuguese, 
and is rendered into English several ways, as in 
the following examples : 

Pois ide, e vmde logo, go, then, and come back 
presently. 

Pois nao sou eu capaz de fazillo ? what, am I not 
capable of doing it? 



18S PORTUGUESE 

Pais, or pais entao que quer dizer isto ? Well, and 
what of all this P 

Pais, or pais entao que hei de fazer ? What shall 
I do then ? 

Pais eu digo que elle estd dcntro, why, he is here 
within, I say. 

Puis por que me vigidis? Why, then, do you watch 
me ? 

E'lle tern cabeca ; puis tambem hum alfineie a tern, 
he has got a head, and so has a pin. 

Pois before nao, and preceded by an interroga- 
tion, denotes a strong assertion, and is Englished by 
without doubt, yes, surely, to besiwe, &c. as, vird elle? 
p6is nao ! will he come ? yes, to be sure. 

Antes, or mdis depressa. 

These particles are sometimes rendered into Eng- 
lish by rather or sooner ; as, antes or mdis depressa 
quizera morrer, I would rather die ; antes quizera 
viver so que na vbssa-companhia, I would sooner live 
alone than be in your company. Sometimes antes 
is Englished by before ; as, Tde-vos antes que elle 
venha, go away before he comes ; antes que eu morra, 
before I die. 

Mas antes, pelo contrario, mas pelo contrdrio. 
These particles are rendered into English by on 
the contrary, on the other hand, nay ; as, mas antes, 
mas pelo contrdrio, or pelo contrdrio isto he muito dif- 
ferente, nay, it is quite another thing ; mas antes, pelo 
contrdrio, &c. elle he avarento, nay, or on the con- 
trary, he is a covetous man. 

Para melhor dizer. 
This phrase is rendered into English by nay ; as, 
elle tern jd bastdnte, ou para melhor dizer, mdis do 
necessdrio, he has already enough, nay, too much ; 
a isto he que nos chamdmos direito das gentes, ou para 
melhor dizer , da razdb, this is what we call the law of 



GRAMMAR. 189 

nations, which may be called more properly the law 
of reason. 

Que. 

We have already observed that que is a particle 
which most conjunctions are composed of; as, ainda 
que, although ; de sbrte que, so that, fyc. 

The particle que sometimes is the sign of the third 
persons of the imperative, as let in English ; as, que 
falle, let him speak ; que riao, let them laugh. 

Que is used between two verbs, to determine and 
specify the sense of the first, as eu vos asseguro que 
assim he, I assure you that it is so; duvido que asszm 
seja, I doubt whether it is so or not. 

Que is used also after hora in the beginning of a 
sentence, and followed by a verb in the subjunctive, 
to denote by exclamation one's surprise, aversion, 
and reluctance to something ; in which case there is 
a verb grammatically understood before que; as, 
hora que se esquecesse elle de si mesmo ! I wonder, or 
is it possible for him to have forgot himself! 

The exclamation, or admiration, is sometimes 
expressed without any verb ; as, que gosto ; e ao 
mesmo tempo, que pena ! how much pleasure and 
trouble at once ! 

Que is sometimes repeated ; as, 

Que bellos livros que tendes, what fine books you 
have got ; que bella que he a virtude! how beautiful 
is virtue ! 

Que is sometimes followed by de; as, quede loucos 
ha no mundol how many fools there are in the world. 

Que is used after nouns denoting time, and is 
sometimes Englished by when or since, &c. and 
sometimes left out ; as, 

O dia que ellepartio, the day when he set out. 

Qudnto tempo ha que estais em Londres ? how long 
have you lived in London ? 

Ha dez dnnos quefaz a mesma cdusa, he has done 
the same thing these ten years. 



190 PORTUGUESE 

H& dez dnnos que morrio, he died ten years ago. 

Que is sometimes rendered into English by 
because, as in Camoens, canto 2, stanza xvi. que 
levemente hum ammo, and sometimes by that, to the 
end that) in order to ; as in, ibid, stanza xvii. que cdmo 
vissem, que no rio, &c. 

Que before se in the beginning of a sentence, is a 
redundancy not expressed in English ; as, que se vos 
dizeis que, if you say that, &c. 

Que is used after the conjunction a perns (scarcely 
or hardly), and is Englished by but; as, arenas 
acabou de fallar, que logo morreo ; he had scarcely 
done speaking, but he expired. 

Que sometimes is preceded by de sbrte, de maneira, 

de geito, and then it is Englished by so that, in such 

a manner, insomuch that ; as, eu ofarei de sorte que 

Jiqueis cont ente, I will do it so that, or in that 

manner that, you shall be contented. 

De veras, 
De vSras signifies in earnest ; but sometimes it 
is Englished by no sure ; de veras ; nao oposso cre'r, 
no sure ! 

Hora. 
Hbra, or or a, is an interjection that serves to en* 
courage, as we have seen above ; but when it is 
repeated, it is Englished by sometimes, one while, 
another while ; as, bra esta bem, bra esta mal, some- 
times he is well, sometimes ill, elle bra esta de hum 
parecer, e bra de outro, he is now of one opinion, 
and next moment of another. Por or a, signifies 
now, for the present. 



GRAMMAR. 101 

CHAP. VIII. 

OF THE PORTUGUESE ORTHOGRAPHY AND FIRST 
OF CAPITALS AND STOPS. 

I. PROPER names, as well as surnames, always 
begin with a capital. 

II. The names of nations, kingdoms," and pro- 
vinces, also begin with a capital ; as, France z^ 
French ; Inglez, English, &c. 

III. All names of dignities, and degrees, and 
honours, require a capital ; as, Rey, Bispo, &c. 
King, Bishop, &c. 

IV. At the beginning of a period, as well as of 
a verse, the first letter is always a capital. 

V. The names of arts and sciences, as well as 
those of kindred, begin with a capital. 

Of Stops. 

The use of stops, or points, is to distinguish words 
and sentences. 

The Portuguese have six stops, or pauses, viz. 

1. The panto find', the same as our period or full 
stop (.), and is used at the end of a period, to show 
that the sentence is completely finished. 

2. The dous pantos, which is our colon (:), and 
is the pause made between two members of a 
period ; that is, when the sense is complete, but the 
sentence not ended. 

3. The ponto e vzrgula, is our semicolon (;), and 
denotes that short pause which is made in the sub- 
division of the members or parts of a sentence. 

4. The panto de inter rogacdm, the point of inter- 
rogation thus (?). 

5. Ponto de admiracdm, the point of admiration, 
thus (!). 

6. The vzrgala, the same with our comma (,) 
and is the shortest pause or resting, in speech, being 



192 PORTUGUESE 

used chiefly to distinguish nouns, verbs, and ad- 
verbs, as also the parts of a shorter sentence. 

The conjunction e, the relative qual, and the dis- 
junctions ou and nem, require a comma before them. 

The Portuguesem ake use also of a parenthesis, 
thus ( ) ; but they do not make use of the diaeresis, 
called by their printers crema (••); they use also 
the dngulo, thus a, called by the printers caret. 

The apostrophe, or, as they call it, viracento, is 
used in this as in other languages, being designed 
only for the more pleasant and easy pronunciation, 
of words, by cutting off an antecedent vowel ; as 
d' armaS) d' elvas, and not ddrmas, delvas, &c. 
Although this is allowable in cases wherein, 
by use, they seem to be one word ; as, nesta, neste, 
desta, deste, nalgum, daquelle, nelle, nella, daqut, 
dali, atequi, ategora ; and not em elle, de elle, &c. 

Of the Accents. 

The accent is a sound of the voice by which we 
pronounce some syllables shorter, others longer. 

I intend to speak here only of the accents the 
Portuguese ought to make use of, according to 
Maduretra^ in his Portuguese Orthography. 

The Portuguese indeed are acquainted with three 
accents, but they ought to make use of two only, 
namely, the acute, which descends from the right 
to the left ('), and the circumflex, thus (t). 

1. The acute serves to prolong the pronuncia- 
tion, and is put, according to Madureira, on the 
last syllable of the third person singular of the 
future tense ; as, amard, lerd, &c. 

2. On the penultima of the preterplu perfect tense 
of the indicative mood ; as, amara, ensinara, &c. 

3. The acute accent ought to be put also on 
the penultima of the third persons of the present 
tense of the verb renunciar, pronuncidr, duviddr, &c. 
thus renuncia, pronuncia, duvida 7 &c. that they may 



GRAMMAR. 193 

be distinguished from the nouns renuncia,pronuncia, 
duvida, &c. The same accent is also put on estd, 
)i6> to distinguish them from esta, this, and no, in the. 

The vowel o has two sounds, according to the 
two accents that may be put on it ; one open, when 
it is marked with the acute accent, and is pro- 
nounced like o in store; the other close, when it is 
marked, with the circumflex accent, and then is 
pronounced like u in stumble. 

There are many nouns, both substantive and 
adjective, which are accented in the singular with 
the circumflex, and in the plural with the acute; 
and the adjectives that have two terminations, 
particularly those ending in oso, osa, must be 
accented Tin the singular) with the circumflex in the 
masculine, and with the acute in the feminine ; as, 

F6go\ fire ; plural, fogos. 

For no 9 oven ; plural, fornos. 

olho, eye ; plural, olhos. 

6vo, egg ; plural, ovos. 

6sso 9 bone ; plural, qssos. 

Poco, well ; plural, pcgos. 

P6rco 9 hog ; plura.1, porcos. 

Rogo, prayer; plural, rogos. And so fojo, torno, 
formdso, sequioso, supposto> povo, tor to, tort a, copioso, 
&c. 

The following keep the circumflex accent in 
both numbers: bolo, bolos ; bdjo, bojos ; boto, botos ; 
coco, cocos ; choro, choros ; coto, cdtos ; forro, fdrros ; 
gordo, gordos ; gosto, gostos ; gozo, gozos ; lobo, Ubos ; 
moco, mogos ; nojo, nojos ; potro, potros ; tolo, tdlos ; 
f err olho, f err olhos; raposo\ rapdsos ; arroz, arrozes; 
algoz, algozes, &c. 

On the contrary, the following keep the acute 
accent in both numbers : cbpo, copos ; mbdo, modos ; 
nosso, nossos ; vosso, vossos, &c. 

When the circumflex accent is put on the e, then 
the e is pronounced like the French masculine e; 
but when e is accented with the acute accent, then 

O 



194 PORTUGUESE 

the c is to be pronounced like the e open in French, 
and it is exceedingly sonorous and long. See the 
pronunciation of the vowel e. 

Nouns ending in ax, iz, oz uz, must have the 
acute accent on the vowel before the z ; as, rapaz, 
a boy; noz, a walnut; alcacuz, licorice; but you 
must except arroz, rice ; algoz, a hang-man. 

Nouns ending in ez generally have the circumflex 
accent ; as mez, a month ; marquez, a marquis, &c. 
except the surnames ; as, Alvarez, Antunez, Lopez, 
Henriquez, Gongalvez, Rodriguez, Perez, Nunez, 
Tellez, &c. 

Some Observations upon the Portuguese 
Orthography. 

Both the Portuguese orthographers and best au- 
thors vary so much in their rules and ways of writ- 
ing, that it is impossible for any grammarian to clear 
up this part of the Portuguese grammar, it requiring 
no less authority than that of the Royal Portuguese 
Academy. However, not totally to set -aside so 
material a part of the Grammar, I shall present the 
learner with the following^observations : 

I. When the Latin words from which the Portu- 
guese are derived, begin with a b, the Portuguese 
likewise must begin with it; therefore you must 
write and pronounce the b, in the following words, 
bom, bondade, bem, bento, &c. because they are de- 
rived from bonus, bonitas, &c. But you must except 
balnha, bexiga, bairro, which begin with aZ>, though 
they are derived from vagina, vesica, vicus. 

II. Likewise if the Latin words begin with a' \v, 
the Portuguese words derived from them must also 
begin with it ; as vida, viver, varrer, ver, vinho, &c. 
from vita, viver e, verrere videre, vinum, Sec. 

Though b ought to be pronounced only by closing 
the lips, and v by touching the superior teeth with 
the inferior lips ; yet, by a certain affinity between 



GRAMMAR. 195 

these two letters, in speaking there is a great confu- 
sion in the pronunciation of them in the province 
of E ntre Douro e Minho: and this confusion has 
not been peculiar to the Portuguese language, for 
Nebriva says, in his Castilian Orthography, that 
in his time some Spaniards could hardly make 
any distinction between these two Letters. 

III. Thep found in some words originally Latin, 
is changed in Portuguese into a b ; as, cdbra, cabello, 
cabega, &c. from capra, capillus, caput, &c. 

IV. The Portuguese generally make use of the y 
in the following words : ay, rey, frey, ley, may, 
pay, mayo, meyo, and some others. 

Bluteau says, that we must make use of the y in 
words having a Greek origin ; as, sy'llaba, Chryso- 
peia, pyr amide, polygono, hydrographia, hydropico, 
phy'sica, hyperbole, hypocrita, Apocrypho, Sec. 

V. The ph are used by the Portuguese in some 
words taken from the Greek : as philosophia, philo- 
logia, Philadelphia, epitdphio, &c. 

VI. The r in Portuguese has two pronunciations, 
one soft, expressed by a single r as in arado, a 
plough; and after the consonants, b, c, d,f,g,p, t ; 
and another hard, in which two rr are used ; as in 
bdrro, cdrro, &c. But you must observe, 

1. That in the beginning of a word two rr must 
never be used, because then the r is always pro- 
nounced hard in Portuguese ; as in the words remo, 
rico, rodd, Sec. 

2. When the consonants /, n, s, are before the r, 
either in a single word, or a compound one, this 
letter must never be doubled, because then its sound 
is always strong ; as in abalrodr, enriquecer, honra, 
desregrddo, Henrique, Israelita, Sec. 

3. The r after a b, is also pronounced hard in 
compounds with the prepositions ab, ob, sub, and 
yet is not doubled ; as in abrogdr,obrepgao subrepgao, 

VII. The s is never doubled in the beginning 
of words, nor after the consonants ; therefore you 

o 2 



106 PORTUGUESE 

must write sardr, saber, falsamente, falso, manso, 
&c. 

The s is pronounced like z between two vowels, 
in words derived from the Latin, as well as in those 
that end in dsa, and 6so ; as miisa, cdso, riso, amoroso, 
cuidaduso, cdsa, &c. You must also observe, that coser, 
signifies to sew, but cozer signifies to boil or bake. 

VIII. Th are generally used in words derived from 
the Greek ; as amphitheatro, atheista, theologo, le- 
thdrgo, methodo, &c. 

Th is also used in the Portuguese preposition 
athe ; though some write it thus, ate. 

IX. When pt is found in Latin words, it must be 
kept in the Portuguese derived from them ; as, apto, 
inepto, optimo, &c. from aptus, ineptus, optimus, &c. 
The same must be observed in regard to ct. 

X. Ch is sounded like k, in words derived from 
the Greek ; as, orchdnjo, archiduque, Chrysostomo, 
chrysol, chrisblogo, Christovao, monarchic &c. These 
words must be written with ch, in order to preserve 
to the eye their etymology. 

Note, that ch in words that are not derived from 
the Greek is pronounced like sh in the English 
words shawl, shoot, &c. but as some confound the 
ch with the x, and begin with x those words that 
should begin with ch, I have thought it necessary to 
make a collection of them. 



WORDS BEGINNING WITH 



CHA. 



CM 

Chaa 

Chaca 

Chacina 

Chago 

Chacota 

Chafariz 

Chaga 

Chalupa 

Chama 



Chamalote 


Chanc^oneta 


Chamar 


Chanqueta 


Chamariz 


Chantagera 


Chambao 


Chantrado 


Chamejar 


Chantre 


Chamiga 
Chamine 


Cha 
Chapa 


Chamuscar 


Chapado 


Chan^a 


Chapeado 


Chancela 


Chapeleta 


Chancelaria 


Chap6o 


Chanceler 


Chapim 



GRAMMAR, 



197 



Chapinhar 


Chibo 


Chofrado 


Chapuz 


Chicharos 


Ch6fre 


Charamela 


Chicharro 


Ch61dab61da 


Charameleiro 


Chichelos 


Choque 


Charco 


Chicoria 


Chorar 


Charneca 


Chicote 


Chorrilho 


Charneira 


Chifra 


Chorro 


Char61a 


Chifrar 


Chover 


Charpa 


Chjfre 


Choupa 


Charro 


Chilindrao 


Choupana 


Charrua 


Chilrar 


Choupo, or Chopo 


Chasco 


Chimbeo 


Chourico 


Chasona 


Chinear 


Choutar 


Chatim 


Chincheiro 




Chato 


Chinchorro 


CHIT. 


Chavao 


Chinela 


Chiica 
Chupamel 
Chupar 
Chuchurriar 


Chavascal 

Chave 

Chavalha 


Chiqueiro 

Chispa 

Chispar 


Chaveta 


Chiste 


Chuco 
Chufa 


Chavinha 


Chita 


CHE. 


CHO. 


Chumago 


Chea, or Cheya 
Chefe 


Choca 

Choca 
_ Chocalhar 
" Chocalho 

Chocar 

Chocarrear 

Chocarrice 


Chumbar 
Chumbo 


Chegar 

Cheriar, and its de- 
rivatives. 
Cherivia 
Cherne. 


Churriao 

Churume 

Chusma 

Chuva 

Chuveiro. 


CHI. 

Chiar 


Choco 
Chocos 


CHY. 


Chibarro 


Chocolate 


Chy'pre. 


The following 


words begin 


with ce and not se. 


Cea 


Cedela 


Cegar 


Ceado 


Cedenho 


C%o 


Cear 


Ceder 


Cegonha 


CEB. 


Cedilho 


Cegude 


Cebola 

Cebolal 

Cebolinho 


Cedo 

Cedro 

Cedula 


Cegueira 

CEI. 

Ceifa 


CED. 


CEG, 


Ceifao 


Cedavim 


Cesa 


Ceirao 






198 



PORTUGUESE 



Ceirmha 


Centeal 


Cerracao 


Ceivar. 


Centesimo 


Cerrar 




Centeyo 


Cerralheiro 




Cento 


Cerralho 


CEL. 


Centoculo 


Cerrarse 




Centopea 


Cerro 


Celada 


Central 


C6rta 


Celebracao 


Centro 


Certo 


Celebrar 


Centuplo 


Certaa 


Celebre 


Centuria 


Certeza 


Celeste 


Centuriao 


Certida 


Celestial 


Ceo 


Certificar 


Celestrina 


CEP. 


Cerva 


Celeusma 


Cepa 
Cepilho 
Cepo 
Ceptro 


Cerval 


Celga 


Cerveja 


Celha 


Cervilhas 


Celho 


Cerviz 


Celibado 


Ceruda 


Celibato 


CER. 


Ceruleo 


Celicola 


Cera 


Cervo 


Celidonia 


Ceraferario 


Cerzir. 


eaia 


Cerbero 


CES. 


Celleiro 


Cerca 


Cesar 
Cesarea 


Celleireiro 
Celtas. 


Cercado 
Cercar 


CEM. 

Cem 
Cemiterio. 


Cercador / 

Cercadura 

Cerce 


Cesma 

Cesmaria 

Cesmeiro 


CEN. 


Cerceado 


\J%Z&tjCkKJ 


Cenaculo 


Cercear 


Cessacao 

Cessar 

Cesta 


Ceno 


Cercillo 


Cenobio 
Cenobitico 


Cerco 
Cerdoso 


Cestinha 
Cp^tinno 


Cenotaphia 


Cerebro 


Cesteiro 


Cenoura 


Cereijas 


Cesto 


Cenrada 


Cercijal 


Cesura 


Cenreira 


Ceremonia 




Censo 


Ceremonial 


CEV 


Censor 


Cerieiro 


Ceva 


Censura 


Cernc 


Cevada 


Censurado 


Cernelha 


Cevadal 


Censurar 


Cerol 


Cevadeira 


Centauro 


Ceroulas 


Cevadouro 


Centena 


Cerqueiro 


Cevar 



GRAMMAR. 



199 



Cezao 



CEZ. 

Cezimbar. 



N. B. Cerrar signifies to shut, or shut up ; but 
serrar signifies to saw, to cut timber or other mat- 
ter with a saw. 

The following words must have ci, and not si, in 
their beginning. 



CIA. 



Ciarse 
Ciatica. 



CIB. 



Ciba 

Cibalho 

Ciborio. 



cic. 



Cicatriz 

Cicero 

Cicioso. 



CID. 



Cidadao 

Cidadaos 

Cidade 

Cidadoa 

Cidra 

Cidrada 

Cidrao 

Cidreifa. 



cie. 



Ciencia 



CIF 



Cifar 
Cifra 
Cifrar. 



CIG, 



Cigana 



Cigano 


Cintura 


Cigarra 


Cinza 


Cigude 


Cinzento 


Cigurelha 


Cinzeiro 


CIL.' 


CIO. 


Cilada 


Cio 


Cilhas 


Cioso 


CilMr 


Ciosa. 


Cilicia 




Cilicio 


CIP. 


Cilladas 


Cip6 




Cipreste 


CIM. 


Cipriano. 


Cima 




Cimalha 


CIR. 


Clmbalo 


Ciranda 


Cirri eyra 


Cirandagem 


Cimento 


Cirandar 


Cimitarra 


Circo 


Cimo. 


Circulacao 
Circular 


CIN. 


Circulo 


Cinca 


Circuito 


Cincar 


Circumcidar 


Cincho 


Circumcisao 


Cinco 


Circumferencia 


Cincoenta 


Circumspecto 


Cingidouro 


Circumspeccao 


Cingir 


Circumstancia 


Cingulo 


Circumstantes 


Cinnamomo 


Cirio 


Cinta 


Cirurgia 


Cintillar 


Cirurgiao 



200 
Cirzir 



PORTUGUESE 



CIS. 



Ciscar 

Cisco 

Cisma 

Cismatico 

Cisne 

Cisterciense 

Cisterna 



CIT. 

Citacao 

Citado 

Citar 

Citerior 

Cithara 

Githaredo 

Citrino 

civ. 



Civel 
Civil 
Civilidade. 



ciu. 



Chime 
Ciumes. 

Cizania 
Cizirao. 



ciz, 



XL No Portuguese word begins with go; but, ac- 
cording to Madureira, there are some that begin 
with ca, and gu ; as gapdtOn gapateiro, gargago^ guja, 
cugidade, gumo, gurra, gurrar, and some others. 

The g is used after p in those Portuguese words 
that have in their Latin root pt ; as descripgao, ac- 
cepgao, &c. from description accept to, &c. 



Of Double Letters. 

It is to be generally observed, that the consonants 
are doubled in those Portuguese words, whose Latin 
roots have likewise the same double consonants ; as 
accelerdr, accento, occidente, Sec. from acceiero, ac- 
centus, occidenSn &c. affiigir.affluencianaffirmagadn &c. 
from qffligo, affluentia, affirmation &c. as will be seen 
in the following collection ; 

B 

Is to be doubled in abbade, abbacial, abbad/a, ab- 
badesscin abbreviaturan dbbreviar 7 and some others. 



Is to be doubled in the following words, and 
some of their derivatives. 



Abstraccao 

Ac£a5 

Accento 



Accentual* 
Accepcao 

Acceita 



Acceitacao 
Acceitador 
Acceitar 



Accessao 

Accessivel 

Aceesso 

Accessorio 

Accidental 

Accidente 

Accelerada 

Accelerado 

Accelerar 

Acclama^ao 

Acclamar 

Accommoda^ao 

Accomodado 

Accommodar 

Accuriiula9ao 

Accumulado 

Accumular 

Accusacao 

Accusado 

Accusador 

Accusar 

Accusativo 

Adstric^ao 

Afflic^ao 

Attrac9ao. 



Baccho 

Bocca 

Boccaca 

Boccadinho 

Boccado 

Boccal. 



Circumspec^ao 

Coac9ao 

Coc9ao 

Collec9ao 

Constric9ao 

Construc9ao 

Contrac9ao 

Correc9ao 

Decoc9ao 



GRAMMAR. 

Deduc9ao 

Desjec9ao 

Desoccupa9ao 

Desoccupado 

Desoccupar 

Detrac9ao 

Dic9ao 

Diccionario 

Direc9ao 

Distrac9ao 



201 



Eccentrico 

Ecclesiastico 

Erec9ao 

Evic9ao 

Exac9ao 

Extrac9ao 



Eac9ao 
Fic9ao 
Frac9ao 

Impeccabilidade 1 

Impeccavel 

Inaccessivel 

I ndic9ao 

Induc9ao 

Infec9ao 

Infrac9ao 

Inspec9ao 

Instmc9ao 

Intellec9ao 

Interjec9ao 

Intersec9ao 

Introduc9ao. 

Maimduc9ao 

Objec9ao 

Obstruc9ao 

Occasiao 



Occasional* 

Occaso 

Occidental 

Occidente 

Occiduo 

Occisao 

Occurrer 

Occultamente 

Occultado 

Occultar 

Occulto 

Occupa9ao 

Occupado 

Occupar 

Occurrencia 

Occurrente. 



Peccado 

Peccador 

Peccadora 

Peccante 

Peccar 

Predic9ao 

Preoccupar 

Produc9ao 

Projec9ao 

Profec9ao 

Putrefac9ao. 

Barefac9ao 

Recondac9ao 

Refec9ao 

Befrac9ao 

Besecca9ao 

Bestric9ao 



Satisfac9ao 

Seccar 

Secco 

Sec9ao 

Seccura 

Socco 



202 



PORTUGUESE 



Soccorrer 


Successivel 


Transac^ao 


Soccorro 


Successor 


Tradacgao 


Subtrac9ao 


Succintamente 




Succeder 


Succinto 




Successao 


Succo 


Vacca 


Successo 


Succoso 


Vaccada 


Successivo 


Succubo. . 


Vaccum. 



D. 

This letter is doubled in the following words 
addigao, addicionado^ addiciondr, additamento, additar 



Is to be doubled in 



Affabilidade 


Affeminado 


Affirmadamente 


Affavel 


Affeminarse 


Affirmador 


Affadigado 


Afferradamente 


Affirmar 


Affadigar 


Afferrado 


Affistularse 


Affagado 


Afferrar 


Affixar. 


Affagar 


Afferretoado 




Affagos 
Affamado 


Afferetoar 
Afferrolhado 


Afflamarse 

Afflic9a5 

Afflicto 

Affligir 

Affluencia 

■3 


Affaraarse 


Afferrolhar 


Affastado 


Afferventado 


Affastar 
Affazendado 


Afferventar 
Affervorado 


Affazerse. 


Affervorar. 


Affocinhar 


Affeado 


Affiado 


Affogado 


Affear 


Affiar 


Affogador 


Affeamento 


Affidalgado 


Affogar 


Affect adamente 


Affidalgarse 


Affogamento 


Affectado 


Affigurado 


Affogueado 


Affectar 


Affigurar 


Affoguear 


Affecto 


Affilhada 


Afforado 


Affectuoso 


Affilador 


Afforador 


Affeicao 


Affilar 


Afforar 


Affei9oado . 


Affinado 


Afforamento 


Affeiyoar 


Affinar 


Afformentar 


Affeite 


Affincado 


Afformoseado 


Affeitar 


Affincar 


Afformosear. 



GRAMMAR. 



208 



AfFoutado 


Affugentar. 


Diffusamente 


Affoutar 


AfFumado 


Diffuso 


Affouteza 


AfFumar 


Effectivamente 


Affbuto. " 


Affundado 


Effectivo 




AfFundarse 


Effeito 




AfFundirse 


Effeituar 


Affracar 


Affuzillar. 


Efficazmente 


AfFramengado 




Efficacia 


AfFreguesado 




Efficaz 


Affreguesarse 


Diffamado 


Efficiente 


AfFronta 


DifFamar 


Effigie 


Affrontado 


DifFeren^a 




Affrontamento 


Differen^r 




Affrontar 


DifFerer^as 


OfFender 


Affrontosamente 


DifFerente 


OfFerecer 


Afirontoso 


DifFerentemente 


Offuscar. 


Aftroxadamente 


Difficil 




Affroxado 


Difficuldade 




AfFroxar. 


Difficultar 


Suffdcar 




Difficultosamente 


Suffragio, and some 




Difficultoso 


others 



AfFugentado 



DifFusao 



G. 



This letter is to be doubled in 



Aggravante 
Aggravar 
Aggravado 
Aggravo 



Aggressor 
Exaggera^ao 
Exaggerador 
Exaggerado 

L. 



Is to be doubled in 

AcaFelladura 

Acafellar 

Acallentado 

Acallentar 

Acapellado. 



Aballado 

Aballador 

Aballar 

Aballo 

Aballisado 

Abillisador 

Aballisar. 



Acafellador 



Affillado 

Affillador 

Affillar. 



Exaggerar 
Suggerir 
Suggestao 
Suggerido. 



Allega9ao 

Allegado 

Allegar 

Allegoria 

Allegorico 

Allegorisar 

Alleluia 

Alliviar 

Allucina^ao 

Allucinar 



204 


PORTUGU] 


ESE 


Alludir 


Bacellada 


Cavalleiro 


Allumiar 


Bacello 


Cavallo. 


Allusao. 


Barbella 
Barrella. 


Cebolla 


Amantellado 




Cebollal 


Amarello 


Bella 


Cebollinho 


Arnarellecerse 


Bellarnente 


Chanceller 


Amerellidao 


Bello 


Chancellaria 


Amollado 


Belleza 


C&Ia 


Amollar 
Amollecer 


Belleguim 
Bellico 


Celleiro. 


Amollecido 
Amollentar 


Bellico so 
Belligero 


Clavellina 


Ampolla. 


Belluino. 


Codicillo 


Annullagao 
Annullar. 


Bulla 
Bullario. 


C6Ua 
Collado 
Collar 
Colleira 


Appellagao 

Appellante 

Appellar 

Appellidar 

Appellido. 


Calliope 

Camillo 

Cavillagao 

Cavillosamente 

Caballina 


Collagao 

Collateral 

Collecgao 

Collecta 

Collectivo 

Collector 




Cadella 


Collega 


Aquella 


Cadellinha 


Collegiada 


A quelle 


Callo 


Collegial 


Aquelloutro 


Camartello 


Collegio 


Aquillo 


Cambadella 
Cancella 


Colligar 
Colligir 




Capella 


Colly'rio 


Armellas 


Capellao 


C6II0 


Arrepellado 


Capellada 


Collocagao 


Arrepellao 


Capellania 


Collocar 


Arrepellar 


Capello 
Capillar 
Castella 


Colloquio 


Atropellado 


Castello 


Compellir 


Atropellar. 


Casullo 


Compostella 




Casulla 


Constella^a 




Cavalla 


Corrollario 


Avillanado. 


Cavallaria 


Covello 



Courella 



GRAMMAR. 

Encelleirar. 



205 



Gabella 
Gallado 
Galladura 



Delia 


Equipollencia 


Gallar 


Dallas 
Delle 


Equipollente. 


Gallego 
Gallia 


Delles 




Gallicado 


Degollado 


Escabellado 


Gallicar 


Degolla9ao 


Escabello 


Gallico 


Degollar 


Esciidella 


Gallinha 


Degolladouro. 


Escudellao 
Estillagao 


Gallinha^o 
Gallinheira 


Distillacao 


Estillado 
Estillar 


Gallinheiro 
Gallinhola 


DistiUador 
Distillar. 


Estillicidio 
Estrella 


Galliopoli 
Galliota 




Estrellado. 


Galliza 


Donzella. 




Gallo 




Excellencia 


Gam ell a 




Excellente 


Gazella. 


Duello. 


Expellir. 


G611a 


Ebulligao. 


Falla 
Fallacha 






Fallacia 


Hellesponto 


Ella 

Ellas 


Fallador 
Fallar 


Hendecasy'llabo 
Holla nda 


Elle 


Fallecer 


Hypallage. 


E'lles 


Fallecido 




Elleboro 


Fallencia 


Janella 

Janelleira 

Janellinha 


Ellipse 
EUiptico. 


Fallido. 




Ferdizello. 


Jarmello. 


Emolliente 




• 


Emollir. 






Enallage 


Flagellante 
Flagello. 


Illa9ao 

Illaquear. 

Illativo 


Encapellado 




Illegitimo 


Encapellar 


F611e 


Illeso 


Encastellada 


Folliculo 


Illigar 


Encastellar 


Fontello. 


Illiciador 



206 



PORTUGUESE 



lllicitamente 


Mirandella 


Pelle 


Illicito 


Miscellania 


Pellesinha 


Illocavel 


M611e, 


Pellica 


Illudido 


Molleira 


Pellicula 


Illudir 


Molleza 


Panella 


Illuminagao 
Illuminado 


Mollice 


Pimpinella 


Mollidao 


Phillis^ 


Illuminar 


Mollificante 


Pollegada 


Illuminativo 


Mollificar 


Pollegar 


Illusao 


Mollinar 


Pollez 


Illuso 


Monosyllabo. 


Pollucao 


Illustracao 




Pollute 


Illustrar 


Nella 

Nellas 

Nelle 

Nelles ' 

Nigella 

Novella 

Novelleiro 

Nulla 

Nullidade 

Nullo 

Nuzellos. 


Polysy'llabo 


Illustre 


Portacollo 


Illustrissimo 

Illy'rio 

Imbella 


Portella 
Postilla 
Pousafolles 


Impellir 
Incapillato 
Infallivel 
Inintelligivel 


Prunelle 
Pulmella 
Pupilla . 
Pupillo 


Intervallo. 


Pusillanimidade 




Pusillanime. 


Libello 


/ 




Lordello 
Lousella. 


Odivellas 
Ollaria 


Quartella. 


Marcella 
Marcellina 


Olleiro 
Ouguella. 


Rabadella 
Rebellado 


Marcello 




Rebellao 


Martellada 


Palla 


Rebellarse 


Martellar 


Palladio 


Rebelliao 


Martello 


Pallante 


Rella 


Martellinho 


Pallas 


Rodofolle 


Malfallante 


Palliado 


Rodopello 


Mallogrado 


Palliar 


Rosella 


Mamillar 


Pallidez 


Ruella. 


Medulla 


Pallido 




Mellifluo 


Pallio 


Sella 


Mello 


Paradella 


Sellado 


Metallico 


Parallaxe 


Sellador 


Millcnario 


Parallelo 


Sellagap 


Millesimo 


Paralellogramo 


Sellar 





GRAMMAR. 


Selleiro 


Tolla 


Vassallo 


Sello 


Tollice 




Sentinella 


Tollo 




Sibylla 


Torcicollo 


Velleidade 


Sigillo 


Tranquillidade 


Vellicacao 


Sigillado 


Tranquillo 


Vellicar 


Sobrepelliz 


Trella 


Velio 


Sugillagao 


Trisy'llabo 


Velloso 


Sy'llaba 


Tunicella 


Velludo 


Syllabatico 


Tullio 


Verdesella 


Syllabico 






Syllogisar 
Syllogismo. 


Vacillagao 


Villa 




Vaeillante 


Villania 




Vacillar 


Villaamente 


Tabella 


Valla 


Villao 


Tabelliao 


Vallado 


Villao 


Tabellioa 


Vallar 


Vitella . 


Titillacao 


Valle 


Vitellino. 


Titillar 


Vassallagem 





207 



N. R. Annulled signifies to annul; but annular is 
an adjective, and signifies annular, or in the form of 
a ring. L is doubled by some in the words pelo, 
pela, (for) thus pello pella. 



M 



Is to be doubled in 



Accommodar 

Commemoracao 

Commenda 

Commensurar 

Commentar 

Commercial* 

Commettar 

Comminacao 

Commiseracao 

Commissao 

Commissario 

Commogao 

Commodo 

Commover 



Commum 

Commungar 

Communicar 

Communidade 

Commutar 

Consummar 

Desaccommodar 

Descommodo 

Dilemma 

Emmadeirar 

Emmadeixar 

Emmagrecer 

Emmanquecer 

Emmassar 



Emmudecer 

Engommar 

Epigramma 

Flamma 

Flammante 

Flammula 

Gemma 

Gomma 

Grammatica 

Immaculada 

Immanente 

Immarcessivel 

Immaterial 

Immaturo 






208 P 

Immediatamentc 

Immemoravel 

Immenso 

Immensuravcl 

Immobilidade 

Immoderadamente 

Immodesto 

Immodico 

Immolar 

Immortalisar 



ORTUGUE 

Immortificado 

Immovel 

Immudavel 

lmmundo 

Immunidade 

Immutavel 

Incommodo 

Incommunicavel 

Incommutavel 

Inflammar 



SE 

Mamma 
Mammar 
Rccommendar 
Somma 
Sommar 
Sumrna 
Summario 
Summidade 
Symmetria, and some 
others 



N. B. M, and not n, is always made use of before 
b, m, p. 

N 

Is likewise doubled in several verbs com- 
pounded with an, en, in, con, as, annelar, annLva, 
annao, anncita, annel, Anna, anno, annular, conneocab, 
conne.ro, depenndr, empenndr, ennastrar, ennegrecSr 
innato, innavegdvel, innocencia, manna, Maridnna, 
pdnno, pinna, when it signifies a pen, tyrdnno, and 
some others. 



This letter is to be doubled in words beginning 
with p compounded with the Latin prepositions ad, 
ob, sub; as, apparato apparecer, oppur, opprim'ir sup- 
por, Philippe, poppa, &c. 

N. B. Pdppa signifies /?#/?, or a sort of spoon-meat 
for children ; but papa signifies the Pope. 

R. 

The r is doubled in such words as are strongly 
pronounced in the middle; as guerra, arranedr ar- 
reddr arrimar, arruindr, carregdr, cdrro, &c. 

S. 

The s is to be doubled in the Portuguese superla- 
tives, because it is doubled in the Latin roots ; it is 
also doubled in the following words : 



GRAM M A R. 



209 



Abbadessa 


Assaltar 


Condessa 
Assar 


Asseyo 
Assessor 


Assanhar 


Assim 


Assegurar 


Assist! r 


Assignor 

Assolar 

Access© 


Assombrar 
A ssoprar 
Assobiar 


Aggressor 
Appressar 
Amassar 


Assustar 

Atravessar 

Necessitar 


Arremessar 


Nisso 



Nosso 
Nossa 
E'ssa 
E'sse 
I'sso 
O'sso 
Passear 
Passar 
Remessa 

Ingresso, and many 
others. 



T is doubled in the following words and their 
derivatives : 



Attemperar 


Attribuir 


Permittir 


Atten^ao 


Attribute 


Prometter 


Attender 


Attri^o 


Remetter 


Attentar 


Attrito 


Remettir 


Attenuacao 


Commetter 


Setta 


Attenuar 


Demittir 


Settenta 


Attonito 


Enfittar 


Settecentos 


Attracqao 


Fitta 


Transmittir 


Attractivo 


Intrommetter 




Attrahir 


Omittir 





OF THE QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES AND THEIR 
SOUND. 

Of Words that make their Penuliima in a. 

N. B. Observe what we have said above con- 
cerning the accents. 

All words ending in abo 9 aba, dco, aca, acho, acha, 
ago, aga, ado, Ada, afo, hfa % ago, aga, agem, agre, alho, 
alha, alo, ala, have the penultimas long ; as, diabo, 
mangaba, macdcomacdca r cavaca, mingicho, garnacha, 
madrago, linhaga, amado, punhada (except reldmpago, 
antropofago, Uvado, and cagado, which are short in 
the penultima), abdfo, abafa, saramago, adaga (ex- 
cept stomago, or estomago, dmago, amaraco, which 



210 PORTUGUESE 

are short), trabdlho,loalha,baddlo (except anomalo, bu- 
falo, escdndalo, which are short), tanchdgem,vindgre. 

Words ending in dmo, dma, dnho, dnha, duo, Ana, 
have their penultirnas long; as, escdmo, courdma^ 
castdnho, ardnha, engdno } pestdna ; except pdmpano, 
tympano, bigamo. 

Words ending in dpo, dpa, dque, aro, dra, have 
their pen ultimas long ; as, guardandpo^ soldpa, bas- 
bdque, cmpdro, scar a ; except cant aro, pucaro, laparo 
bafaro, luparo, pifaro, picaro, camera, tdmara, 
pass aro, Ldzaro, bar bar o, cocaras, &c. 

Words ending in drro, drra, dto, dta, dvo, dva, 
dxo, dxas, make the pen ultima long : as, bizdrro, 
bizdrra, biscdto, patardta, escrdvo, escrdva (except 
cdncava, and bisavu), cartdxo, tarrdxa. 

Of Words that make their Penultima in e. 

All words ending in ebo, eba, edo, eda, efa, have 
their penultima long ; as, mancebo, manceba, azedo, 
azeda, sanefa. 

Words ending in efe are long ; as, magarefe: as 
well as those ending in eco, eca, ego, ega; as boneco, 
boneca, cab ego, cabega. 

Words ending in ego, ega, are long ; as, morcego, 
socego, relego, entrega, allega ; except conego, trdfego, 
corrego, sofrego, pecego, fclego, butega, cocegas 

Words ending in ejo, eja, elo, ela, are long ; as, 
caranguejo, bocejo, igreja, Alentejo, envfja, mart elo, 
querela. 

Words ending in emo, ema, eno, ena, are long ; as, 
supremo, postema, aceno, agucena ; except apozema. 

N. B. the penultima is short in the word mgreme. 

Words ending in epo, epa, epe, ique, ero, era, are 
long ; as, decepo, carepa, julepe, moleque, severo, 
severa y tempero (when a noun) : and tempLro (when 
a verb), except dspero, prospero. 

Words ending in ho, esa, izo, eza, e'to, eta, etc, 
evo, eva, 'eve, are long ; as, ace so, acesa, desprezo, 



GRAMMAR. 211 

grandeza and despriso (when a verb) entremeto, gal- 
heta, ramalhete, bofete, atrevo, atreva, atreve. 

Of Words that make their Penultima in i. 

Words ending in ibo, iba, ibe, kho, kha, khe, ko, 
tea, igo, iga, ke, ido, ida, ifo, (fa, ife, have the pe- 
nultima long ; as, est ri bo, arriba, arribe, esgukho, 
esguicha, azeviche, panko (a sort of stuff), botka; 
except mecdnico, ecumenico, cirtico, politico, pdnico, 
(panic), and some others borrowed from the Greek 
and Latin. In Tco, ica, &c. as, roligo, preguica, vel- 
hice, marido, medida ; excepf humido, pdllido, horrido, 
and some others derived from the Latin. In ifo, 
tf a, &c. as borrifo, alcatifa, patife. 

Words ending in igo and iga, are long ; as, amigo, 
amiga, except, prodigo, prodiga. 

Words ending in ijo, and ija, are long ; as, affltjo, 
artemija. 

Words ending in Hho, Hha, are long; as, atilho, 
beatilha. Others ending in Ho, Ha, as, gorgomilo, 
perfila, desfila. 

Words ending in imo, ima, have the penultima 
long ; as, opt imo, cadimo, esgrima, lastima (when a 
verb) ; except lastima (when a noun), Jeronimo, pes- 
simo, and all the superlatives, anonimo, and some 
others. 

Words ending in mho, inha, mo, ma, ipo, tpa, tpe, 
have the penultima long ; as, constipo, constipa, Euripo, 
acipipe. Others in iquoiqua, ique, iro, ira, ire; as, 
iniqup, iniqua, lambique, retiro, mentira, suspire. 

Words ending in /so, isa, izo, iza, Ho, Ha ivo, iva, 
ixo, ixa, are long in the penultima ; as, aviso, camisa, 
juizo, ajuiza, altivo, altiva, prolLvo, prolixa, apito, 
cabrlto ; except pulpito, vomito, decrepito, espirito, 
debito, and some others. 

Rales for such words as make their penultima in o. 

Words ending in 6bo, 6ba, obe, obra, 6bro, bbre, 
P2 



212 PORTUGUESE 

have their pen ultima long; as, Ibbo, lob a, arrbba, 
arrbbe, glbbo, alcdva, qbro, 6bra, ebbre, ebbro, db-bro. 
Words ending in bcho, ocha, bco, oca, bco, bga, bdo, 
bda, ode, oso, osa, ose, have the penuitima long; as, 
agarrocho, garrbcha, carocha, blbco, except alliloco) 
massarbca, minhbea, almbco, mbga (a girl), mbga, or 
mbssa (a notch), almbgo (when a verb), carrbga, lb- 
do, bbda, bode, pbde (the third person singular of the 
present indicative of the verb poder), pbde (the third 
person singular of the preterperfect definite of the 
same verb), galhbfa, bbfe. 

Words ending in bfro, bfra, of re, are long ; as, 
alcaxbfra, cbfre, cnxbfre. 

Words ending in ago, bga, bgue are long ; as, af- 
fbgo, off oga, affbgue, desafbgo when a verb, and des- 
afbgo, when a noun. 

Words ending in by o,bj a, have the penuitima long ; 
as, despojo, when a verb, nbjo, despojo, when a noun. 
Words ending in oh, 61a, ble, are long ; as, vio- 
la, gallinhbla, bbla, engole, miblo, boh, rebblo, tblo, 
cebbla; except perola, frivolo, benevolo, malevoh. 

Words ending in bmo, 6ma, bme, have the penui- 
tima long; as, mordbrno, redbma,fbme, except Thome, 
Words ending in bnho, bnha, 6no, vna, have the 
penuitima long ; as, bisbnho, risbnha, dbno, atafdna, 
dona ; except altisono, and inusono. 

Words ending in bpla, bpo, Spa, ope, bpro, bpra, 
bpre, oque, have the penuitima long ; as, manbpla, 
tbpo, tbpa, galbpe, assbpro, when a verb, assbpra, as- 
sbpre, assbpro, when a noun, botbqae. 

Words ending in bro, bra, ore, are long in the 
penuitima ; as, penhbro, penhbra, penhbre, chbro, 
when a noun ; chbro when a verb ; except bacoro, 
rimora, pblvora, drvore. 

Words ending in brro, brra, are long ; as, soc- 
corro, mbrro, cachbrra; and some others ending in 
oso, ose, bsa, bzo, ozb, as, prlmorbso, prlmorbsa, 
industribso, indastribsa, cibzo, cibza, desebse. 



GRAMMAR. 213 

Words ending in 6to, ota, 6te, have their penulti- 
ma long ; as, goto, gota, bota, devbto,frbta, capote, 
garrote. 

Words ending in ovo, ova, ove, are long in the 
penultima ; as, ovo, concova, aprove. 

Words ending in 6xo, oxa, are long in the pe- 
nultima ; as, roxo, roxa,pintarr6xo. 

Rules for such Words as make their Penultimct 

in ii. 

Words ending in ubo, uba, ubro, ubra, ucho, ucha, 
uco, uca, ugo, uc^a, make the penultima long ; as, 
adubo, aduba; except succubo, incubo, and some others ; 
incubro, incubra, machucho, embucha, caduco, caduca, 
rebugo, embuga. 

Words ending in udo, uda, ude, ufo, ufa, ufe, ugo, 
uga, ujo, uja, have the penultima long; as, felpudo, 
felpuda, almude, pantufo, adufa, adufe, sanguesuga, 
caramujo, azambuja. 

Words ending in Mho, ulha, ulhe, ulo, ula, ule, umo, 
uma, lime, unho, unha, iinhe ; as, bagulho, borbulha, 
entulhe, engi'do, engida, bulebuie ; except vocdbulo, 
vestibulo, dngulo, regalo, opusculo, Iremulo, patibulo, 
thiribulo, and some others ; consumo, consuma, car- 
durne, testemunho, testemunha, empunhe. 

Words ending in uno, una, une, upo, upa, upe, uque, 
tiro, ura, ure, are long jn the penultima ; as, desuno, 
fortuna, desune, apupo, apupa, apupe, estuque, maduro, 
madura, apiire. 

Words ending in uso, usd, use, uzo, uza, uze, uto, 
uta, ute, uxo, uxa, uxe, have the penultima long ; as, 
parafiiso, parafusa, para/use, reduzo, reduza, reduze, 
conduto, labuta, enxuta, labute ; except cSmputo when 
a noun ; repuxo, empiixa, empuxe ; and some others 
ending in uvo, uva, uve ; as, viuvo, viuva, enviuve. 

N. B. When the penultima is immediately fol- 
lowed by another vowel, observe that, 

A before e must be accented with the acute ac- 



214 PORTUGUESE 

cent, and pronounced accordingly; as, scie, cde: 
but before i it has no accent. 

A before o must be pronounced and accented 
thus bacalhao ; but when the relative o is added to 
the thiid person singular of the present indicative, 
then a has no accent; as, dm:i-o. 

E before a is accented thus, baled; and some- 
times wi+h the acute 5 as assembled, idea, and some 
others ; and sometimes has no accent at all, as in 
gavea, femea, and some others. 

E before o is exceedingly sonorous and long, as 
in chapeo, coruchh ; except pateo, ferreo, plumbeo, 
aureo, argenteo. 

I before a, e, o, is long ; as, diz'ta, fazia, almo- 
tolia ; except such as are borrowed from the Latin ; 
as, nescia, comedia, feria, sciencia, prudencia, and 
sabia when an adjective, &c. /before and e, is 
long ; as, desvie, desvio ; except vicio and some 
others. 

O before a is accented thus, coroa, toa, maa, 
esmoa. 

O before e is long in the words doe, moe, roe, and 
in the verb soe when it signifies to be wont ; but 
when it signifies to sound, it is to be accented thus, 
soe. 

U before a is long; as, rua, charrua ; except 
melliflua, insua. 

U before e and is long ; as, concluo, recuo, con- 
clue, recue; except mellifluo, and some others derived 
from the Latin, 



GRAMMAR. 215 



CHAP. IX. 

Etymology of the Portuguese Tongue from the 

Latin 

THE Portuguese retains so great an affinity to 
the Latin, that several words of the latter are pre- 
served in the former, by only allowing a small al- 
teration; as may easily be seen in the following 
observations : 

1. The o of the Latin words is preserved in some 
Portuguese ones ; some Latin words are entirely 
preserved in the Portuguese ; as, hospede, cbrda, 
•porta, &c. 

2. The u is changed into o; as, forca, goloso, 
estopa, mo sea, amdmos, &c. from furca, gulosus, 
stupa, musca, amamus, &c. 

3. The diphthong, au, is frequently changed into 
ou ; as, louvavel, ouro, cuuve, muuro, &c. from lauda- 
bilis, aurum, caulis, maurus, &c. 

4. The e is preserved in several Portuguese 
words ; as, certo, servo, erva, thra,ferro, &c. from 
certus,servus, herba, terra, ferrum, &c. 

5. The e takes the place off; as, enfermo, seco, 
&c. from infirmus, sicus, &c. ; and thei is sometimes 
preserved, as in indzgno, benigno, &c.from indignus, 
benignus, &c. 

6. The b is also changed into v ; as, arvore, du- 
viddr, dever, estava, amava, &c. from arbor, dubltare, 
debere, stabat, amabat, &c. 

7. The c is very often changed into g ; as, digo, 
agudo, amtgo, migalha, &c. from dico, acutus, amicus, 
arnica, &c. 

8. Cl is changed into ch ; as, chamdr, chave, 
from clamare, clavis, &c. 

9. When the e in Latin is followed by t, this 



216 PORTUGUESE 

letter is changed into c ; as, accad, diccao, &c. from 
actio, dictio, &c. ; and sometimes the e before t is 
changed into i; ?is,/eito, leito, noite, Uite, peito, &c. 
from /actus, ledum, mete, lacte, pectus, &c. Finally, 
both the c and t are preserved in a great number of 
words ; as, acto, afflkto, distincto, &c. from actus, 
afflict us, distinct us, &c. 

10. Thesis often lost; as, roer, excluir, raio, 
&c. from rodere, excluder e, radius, &c. 

11. The/ is frequently preserved; as in filho, 
fazer, fervor, formdso, &c. ftomjilius, facer e, fervor, 
formosus, fyc. 

12. The g is changed into i; as, reino, from 
regnum. Sometimes it is quite lost, as in dedo,/rio, 
setta, sinal, bainha, &c. from digitus, /rigus, sagitta, 
signum, vagina, &c. 

13. The h is placed instead of the /; as, alho, 
from allium. Sometimes it is added ; as, artilho, 
alheo, felha, consttho, &c. from articulus, alienus, 
folium, consilium, &c. 

14. The ?i is sometimes added, and sometimes 
taken off; as, mdncha, ilka, SalHre, espdso, from 
macula, insula, sal nit rum, sponsus, &c. 

15. The mn is preserved by many Portuguese 
•writers in the words alumno, calumnia, columna, 
damno, solemne, somno, from alumnus, calumnia, 
columna, damnum, &c. 

16. The double nn of the Latin is preserved in 
several words ; as in anno, innocencia, innocuo, inna- 
vegavel, innovar, connexo, &c. from annus, innocen- 
tia, innocuus, bmavigabilis, innovar e, connexus, &c. 

17. The gn and gm are preserved in several 
Portuguese words ; as \naugmento,/ragmhito, enig- 
ma, benigno, d/g?io, ind/gno, ignommia, &c. from aug- 
mentum,/ragmentum, cenigma, benignus, dignus, &c. 

18. The e and the i after n are sometimes 
changed into // ; as in ardnha, vinha, Hespdnha, cas- 
tanha, &c. from aranea, vinea, Hispania, castanca, &c. 



GRAMMAR. 217 

19. The p is changed into b; as in cobra, ca- 
bello, cabeca, &c. from capra, capillus, caput, &c. 
Sometimes pi is changed into ch ; as, chdga, chbro, 
chuva, &c. from plaga, ploro, phtvia, &c. 

20. The q is changed into g ; as, igudl, alguim, 
antigo, agoa, aguia, &c. from equus, aliquis, antiquus, 
aqua, aquila, &c. 

21. The t is likewise changed into d; as, ca 
dea,fado, lado, nadar,piedade, &c. from catena, fatum, 
latus, natare, pietas, &c. The ti of the Latin is 
sometimes changed into ca, and sometimes into ci ; 
as in grhca, dementia, paciencia, &c. from gratia, 
dementia, patientia, &c. 

N. B. i\il these alterations are not general in all 
the words, but are used in several ; and on some oc- 
casions the Latin word is preserved without any mu- 
tilation or variation. And as it would be endless to 
pretend to shew all the affinity between the Portu- 
guese and the Latin, I shall only observe, that they 
sometimes add, and sometimes take off letters from 
the Latin roots ; as in fdcil, debit, final, material, 
estrepiio, estdmago, expectador, especular, &c. from 
facilis, debilis,finalis, Crepitus, spectator, &c. 



END OF THE SECOND PART. 






218 



PORTUGUESE 



PORTUGUESE 



GRAMMAR. 



PART III. 



CONTAINING 



The most elegant Phrases of the Portuguese 
Language, 

II. Such Words as are most used in Discourse. 

III. A Collection of the choicest Portuguese Pro- 

verbs. 

IV. Familiar Dialogues. 



The different Significations o/'andar, to go. 



ANDA'R a p6 
Anddr a cavdllo 
Anddr pella pdsta 
Anddr em cdche 
Anddr d v6la 
Anddr pella bolina 
Anddr para didnte 
Anddr para trdz 
Anddr a trds de alguem 



Anddr ds apalpad6llas 
Anddr com Umpo 



To go on foot 

To ride on horseback 

To ride, or go post 

To ride in a coach 

To saji 

To sail with a side wind 

To go forward 

To go backward 

To go behind, or after one, 

also to follow, to press, 

to solicit a person 
To grope along, to grope, 

or feel one's way 
To go with the times 



GRAMMAR, 



219 



Anddr pejdda 

Anddr sahida 

Anddr perdido 
Anddr de p6 

Anddr com honra 

A'nda 

A'nda para didnte 

Anddr de esguelha 

Anddr de mal para pe6r 

Anddr de r&ixa com al- 
guem 

Com o anddr do t&mpo 
Anddr de galdpe 
Anddr em cdrpo 



A'nda o mundo as av6ssas 

Anddr espalhddos 

Anddr trabalhdndo nal- 

guma 6bra 
Anddr de gatinhas 
Anddr de cdcoras 
Anddr dizendo 



To be with child, or big 
with child 

(speaking of a bitcK) To be 
proud 

To go astray 

To be sickish, but not bed 
rid 

To act like an honest man 

Go 

Go on 

To go sideling 

To fall out of the frying- 
pan into the fire 

To bear one a grudge, to 
have a spleen against 
him, to owe him a spite 

At long run 

To gallop 

To be in cuerpo, or to be 
without the upper coat 
or cloak, so as to disco- 
ver the true shape of the 
cuerpo or body 

The world is come about 

ToUe about 

To^e about some piece of 
work 

To go crawling 

To go on one's breech 

To publish or report 



The different Significations of dar and dar-se, 



Dar 

Bar a entendSr 

Darf6 



Dar or vendSr fiddo 

Dar d luz 

Dar senhoria 

Dar tu, or foliar a alguSm 

portu 
Dar-se,apartido, ovlangdr- 

se no partido de algu6m 



To give, to strike 
To make one believe 
To credit, to believe, also 
to perceive, to descry, to 
take notice, to smell out 
To sell upon credit 
To publish 
To my-lord a man 
To thee and thou one 

To side with one, to be fot 
him 






220 

Dar paldvra 
Dar huma sdlva 



Dar fiaddr 

Dar principio, or fim 

Dar cdnta 

Dar-se ao estiido 

Dar em que f altar 



Dar entrdda 

Dar cdusa 

Dar que em entend&r 

Dar de beb6r 

Dar educes 

Dar hum coscorrdo 

Dar paneddas 

Dar murros 

Dar murrddas 

Dar ofdro a alguimde al- 

giima cousa 
Dar huma estoedda 
Dar os bons dias 
Dar a guarddr 
Dar d edsia 
Dar com algu6m 



Dar em alguem 

Dar cdrtas 

Dar sobre o inimigo 

Dar os parabtns 

Dar os parab6ns a algu&m 

da sua chegdda 
Dar a mao ajuddndo 
Dar a escolh6r 
Dar enfddo a alguSm 
Dar no dlvo 
Dar as edstas 

Dar parte de hum negdcio 



PORTUGUESE 



To promise 

To give a volley of shot, or 
to make a discharge of 
guns in honour of some 
persons of quality 

To bail 

To begin, or end 

To give an account 

To apply one's self to study 

To make one speak, to give 
an occasion to be talked 
of 

To give access to 

To give cause 

To vex one sadly, to trou- 
ble one 

To give drink 

To kick 

To give a box on the ear 

To beat with a cudgel 

To cuff 

To butt, as rams do 

To smell out a matter 

To give a thrust 

To bid one good-morrow 

To give in keeping 

To run a-ground 

To meet with one by 
chance, to light upon a 
person 

To strike one, also to ac- 
cuse one 

To deal, or give the cards 

To fall upon the enemy 

To congratulate 

To bid one welcome 

To give a helping hand 

To let one take his choice 

To molest one 

To hit the mark 

To run away, to betake 

one's self to" flight 
To impart a business 



GRAM 

Dar pello amdr de Deos 
Dar huma surra 
Dar huma vdlta em redondo 
Dar huma vista de dlhos 
Dar alcdnce ao que se de- 

zeja 
Dar suspiros 
Dar ouvidos 
Dar em rosto 

Da cd 

Deu-me huma ddr 
Dar quefazer a alguem, or 
occupdr alguem 

Dar hdras 

reldgio da hdras 

Dar a alma a Deos 

Dar comsigo em alguma 

parte 
Dar leite 
Dar garrdte 
Dar vdzes 
sol da nos dlhos 

Dar razoens 

Dar coj?isigo no chao 

Darfriito 

Dar as maos 

Dar com a porta na cdra 

de alguem 
Dar com a porta ?ios dlhos 

a alguma cdusa (me- 

taph.) 
Dar pressa 
E'sta travessa vai dar a 

rica larga 
Dei no pensamenio de, &c. 

Nab sabe a6nde ha de dar 

com a cabeqa 
I'sto vos ha de dar na 

cabeqa 
Dar com a cabega tiellas 

parede$ 



MAR, 



221 



To give for God's sake 

To beat one soundly 

To walk a turn 

To cast an eye on 

To obtain, or compass one's 

wish 
To sigh 

To give hearing 
To upbraid, to cast in the 

teeth 
Give hither 

I was taken with a pain 
To employ one, to set him 

at work, to set him upon 

some business 
To strike 
The clock strikes 
To give up the ghost, to die 
To cast one's self into a 

place, or to go to a place 
To suckle 
To strangle 
To cry out, to bawl 
The sun shines in one's 

eyes 
To debate, or contend 
To fall upon the ground 
To bear fruit 
To shake hands 
To shut the door upon one 

To slight, to despise a thing 



To press, or hasten 

This lane strikes, or goes 

into the broad street 
It came into my head to, 

fyc. 
He does not know which 

way to turn himself 
The mischief will light upon 

your own head 
To beat one's head against 

the wall 






222 



PORTUGUESE 



Dar em tddos, or dizSr mat 

de tddos 
Dar b6a cdnta de si 

Dar a c6nta 

E'u dar6i cdnta disso 

E'lle d6u em ir dquSlle lugdr 

Dar em droga 

Dar em ridicularias 

Dar huma figa a alguem 

Dar-se por culpddo 

De nenhuma sorte vos dels 
por entendido, or achddo 
Dar-se por aggravddo 
Dar-se por satisf6ito 
Dar-se por vencido 

Dar-se por desentendido 



Qudndo se d4r a occasido 

Dar-se pressa 

Elle deu-se a tdda a sdrte 

de vicios 
Nao se me dd disso 
Que se vos da a v6s disso ? 
Pduco se me dd 
Nao se Uie dd morrer 
E'lles dao-se muito hem 

E'sta came nao se dd bem 
comigo 



To have a satirical virulent 
tongue, to spare nobody 
To give a good account of 
himself, to behave cleverly 
To pay an account 
I'll be answerable for it 
He began to use that place 
To grow a mere drug 
To grow, or become ridicu- 
lous 
To flirt at one, to fig 3 to 

give the fico 
To acknowledge one's self 

guilty 
Take no notice of any thing 

To make a shew of anger 

To rest satisfied 

To submit, to surrender 
one's self a prisoner, or to 
yield a point 

To feign one's self ignorant, 
to take no notice of any 
thing, to make as if one 
saw or knew not 

When occasion shall require 
it 

To be in haste, to make haste 

He gave himself over to all 
manner of vices 

I mind it not 

What have you to do withit ? 

I care but little 

He does not fear death 

They agree mighty well to- 
gether 

This meat does not agree 
with me 



Of the different Significations of the Verb estar. 

We use the verb estar to make an action of re- 
pose, by putting the verb that follows in the ge- 
rund ; as, Hie estd escrevindo, he is writing.* 

Estar has several other significations ; as ? 



GRAMMAR, 



223 



Estdr em p£ 

Estdr bem, or mal 

Estdr asseniddo 

Estdr para sahir, para 

fdra 
Estdr com o sentido em 

Frdnga, or estdr com o 

sentido em outra parte 
Estd muito hem 
Estd para chover 
Estdr para cahir 
Estdr para morrer 
Estdr em duvida 
Estar6mos a ver 
Estdr com huma mao sdbre 

a Sutra 
Estdr em cdsa 
Aquilo nod me estd hem 

Estdr dormindo 

Estdr faz6ndo 

Estdr de n6jo 

Estdr dMrta 

Estdr de sentine'lla 

Estd aUgre 

E'lle estd como quer 

Estdr em perigo 

Estdr encostddo 

Estdr esperdndo 

Estdr muito tempo 

Estdr calddo 

Estdr or viver com dutros 

Estdr de cima 

Estdr debdxo 

Estdr hem aviddo 

Estdr d esp6ra 

Estdr enamorddo 

Estdr de cdma 

Estdr no campo 

Estdr com saude, or de 

saude 
Estdr quieto 
Estdr neutral 
Estarei por tudo o que vos 

parecer mdis convenient^ 



To stand upright 
To be well, or ill 
To be sitting 
To be just going out 

To have one's wits a wool- 
gathering 

It is well, it is very well 

It is going to rain 

To be ready to fall 

To be like to die 

To be in doubt 

We will expect the issue 

To stand idle 

To stay at home 

That does not become me 

well 
To lie sleeping 
To be a doiug 
To be in mourning 
To look needfully about 
To stand centry 
To be merry 
He lives in clover 
To be in danger 
To lean upon 
To expect 

To stay a good while 
To be silent 
To dwell with others 
To lie over 
To lie under 
To be in an ill taking 
To lie in wait 
To be in love 
To be bed-rid 
To live in the country 
To be in health 

To stand still, or to be quiet 
To stand neuter 
I shall stand to whatever 
you shall think proper 



224 PORTU 

A difficult! dde estd em, %c. 

Estdr por algufrm 

Estdr por, or em lugdr de, 

Sfc. 
E'lle estdva na altiira do 

Cdbo de Boa Esperdnoa 
Eu nao qu6ro estdr as ra- 

zoens comvdsco 
Estd qudnto quiz6res 
A6nde estdis de cdsa ? 
E star Si pello que diss&r a 

pessoa que for de vdsso 

maydr agrddo 
Nao podemos estdr por isso 
Nao qu6ro estdr p&tta vossa 

sentSnga 
C6mo estd vm ce ? 



G U E B E 

The difficulty consists in, 

&c. 
To stand for one, to be of 

his side 
To stand for, or signify 

He stood off the Cape of 

Good Hope 
I won't stand, or dispute 

with you 
Stay as long as you please 
Where do you live ? 
I'll refer it to whom you 

please 

We can't stand to that 

I wonttake your judgment 

How do you do, sir ? 



Estai\ joined with the infinitive of a verb and the 
particle para, signifies to be ready, or about doing a 
thing, which has always reference to the signification 
of the verb ; as 



Estou para ir 

Estdu para comprdr hum 

cavdllo 
Estou para cazdrme 
E'sta cdsa estd para cahir 
Estdu para dize'r 
Estdr com a boca ab6rta 

(metaph.) 
Estdr de regimSnto 
Estdr Jiddo em alguem, 

Estdr no f undo 
Estdr defronte 
Estdr em competencia 
Estdr ao lume 



Estdr de longe 
Estdr alto 



Estdr a mao dirtiita de al- 
guem 



I am going, I am ready to go 
I am about buying a horse 

I am going to be married 

This house is ready to fall 

I dare say 

To stare, to look, to hearken 
attentively 

To keep to a diet 

To trust to, to rely or de- 
pend upon one 

To lie at the bottom 

To lie over-against 

To stand in competition 

To stand by the fire 

To stand at a distance 

To stand high, or in a high 
place 

To be at one's right hand, 
to have the first place 



Elle estSve em perigo de 

dfog&rse 
Nao estdr no cdso de, &c. 

Estdr a drdem de alguim 
Isso nao estd nos tSrmos 
Nao estdu no cdso 
Estdr ds razdens 

Estdr hem com algtiSm 

Estdr hem 

Bern aviddo estaria Su, se, 

&c. 
Estdr emconcSito de hdmem 

honrddo 
Estdr na/6 

Estdr de pdsse 

Deixdi estdr isso, 
Estdr em si 
Estdr fora de si 
Deixavos estdr (a sort of 
threatening) 



GRAMMAR. 225 

He was like to be drowned 



Not to be aSle, or in the 

case of, Sfc. 
To be at one's disposal. 
That is not right, it won't do 
I don't understand the case 
To contend, to strive, or 

quarrel 
To be in favour with one, to 
live in friendship with him 
To be well, to be at ease 
It would be very bad for 

me, indeed, if, fyc. 
To be looked upon as an 

honest man 
To believe, to think, or sup- 
pose 
To possess, to have the pos- 
session of a thing 
Let that alone 
To be in one's right wits 
To be out of one's wits 
I'll be revenged on you, 
you shall pay for it 



We have already observed the difference between 
ser and estdr. See page 55. 

Of the different Significations of faz&r and faz&r se. 

Fazer signifies to do, to make, to create ; also to form 
of materials ; also to feign, to seem, to make as if 



Elle fez que nao o via 

FazSr huma saude 

E'lle Ike fez cortdr a cabega 

FazSr pe atrdz (metaph.) 



Que Undes v6s que faz6r 
com isto 



Q 



He madeasifhedidnotseeit 
To drink, or to toast a health 
He caused his head to be 

cut off 
To fall, or draw back, to 

give ground ; to yield, 

to submit 
What have you to do with 
it? or what is that to you ? 



226 



PORTUGUESE 



Faz&r brio de alguma 

cdusa 
Faz&r Jim ao dezejo 

Fazer por alguma c6usa 



Fdgo por isso 

Fazer ao negdcio, or ao caso 

Faz&r esmolas 

Faz&r gdsto 

Fazer gdsto 

Faz&r o gdsto, or a vontdde 

a algu&m 
Faz&r paralUlo 
Fazer de com&r 
Faz&r fumo 

Fazir auzente a algu&m 
Fazfrio 
Fazer gente 
Fazer em peddgos 
Fazer zombaria de algu&m 

Naofagdis caso disso 

Fazer agodda 

Isto^ me faz vir a dgoa a 

bdca 
Fazer dlto 
Fazer cdsa (in playing at 

backgammon) 
Faz&r a c&a 
Faz&r car as 
Faz&r enr&dos 

Faz&r carrdncas 
Faz&r cdso 

Faz&r de tripas coragao 
Faz&r muitocdso de alguma 

cdusa 
Naofdgo cdsod&lle 
Faz&r festa 
Faz&r huma festa 



To make a pride of a thing, 

to glory in it 
To satisfy one's desire, or 

longing 
To take pains, to endeavour, 

to labour to a certain 

purpose, to work for a 

certain end 
I endeavour after it 
To come to the purpose 
To give almg 
To spend 

To like, to be pleased with 
To please one, to comply 

with one's desire 
To parallel, to compare 
To cook 
To smoak 

To believe one absent 
It is cold 

To raise men, soldiers 
To pull into pieces 
To mock, or to laugh at a 

person 
Do not mind that 
To take in fresh water 
This makes my teeth, or 

mouth, water 
To halt in a march 
To put two men on the 

same point 
To get supper ready 
To make mouths 
To form a secret design 

against another 
To pout 
To make account of, or 

esteem 
To make one's utmost efforts 
To make great account of a 

thing, to make much of it 
I don't mind him 
To endear, to fondle 
To give an entertainment, 

to feast 



GRAM 

FazSr as vSzes de algu6m 

Fazer trapdgas 

Fazer lugdr 

Fazir merce 

Fazer ouvidos de mercaddr 

Tir que fazer 

Fazer exercicio 

FazSr exercicio (a military 

word) 
Os soldddos estdo fazdndo 

exercicio 
QuefazHs aqui ? 
Fazer hum vestido 
Fazer huma ley, hum dis- 

curso 
Fazer guSrra 
Fazer saber alguma cousa 

a alguem 
Fazer enraivecer alguim 
Fazer huma cdnta 
Fazer conta 
E'lle fazia huma c6nta, e 

sahio-lhe dutra 
Faz6r contas com algu6m 

I'sso ndo me faz ndda 

Fazer pdusa 

Fazer de alguSm toby 

Fazer dinh6iro de alguma 

cdusa 
Torndr a fazer 
FazSr a razao 
Ter que fazer com algu6m 

FazSr a alguem hum gil- 

vdz na cdra 
FazSr hdnra 

Faz6rf€ 

Fazer forte 
Fazer mencdo 
Faz6r mal 



MAR. 227 

To make any business for 

another 
To chicane, to cavil, to use 

tricks 
To make room 
To grant a favour 
To make as if one were deaf 
To be busy 
To use exercise 
To exercise 

The soldier's exercise 

What do you here ? 

To make a suit of clothes 

To make a law, a speech 

To make war 

To make one acquainted 

with a thing 
To make one mad 
To cast up an account 
To intend, or to propose 
He was much disappointed 

To settle accounts with 

one 
It is nothing to me, that 

does not concern me 
To make a stand 
To make a fool of one 
To make money of a thing, 

to sell it 
To make again 
To pledge one 
To deal with one, or to 

have to do with one 
To mark one in the face 

To honour 

To make known, to testify, 

to witness 
To fortify, or strengthen 
To mention 
To hurt 



Q 2 



228 



Fazir de alguim o que 

huma pess6a quer 
Fazir huma apdsta 
Faz vinto 
Faz hdje duto dias 

Fazir vida com alguim 

Fazir a sua vontdde 
Fazir o possivel 

Nad far Sis ndda com isso 
Nadfagdis mdis assim 
Se torndrdes a fazir assim 
Dezijo quefdga a sua for- 

tuna 
Custdu-me muito a fazel- 

lovir 
Fazir a dutrem o que qui- 

ziramos que dutrem nos 

fizisse a n6s 
Nad tinho que fazir com- 

isso 
Fazir o que alguem mdnda 
Faz de mim o que vos pa- 

recir 
Fazir hum grdnde estrdndo 
E'llefdi o que fez tudo na- 

quille negdcio 
Que fare' is hdje ? 



Fazir o seu curso 

Fazir huma bda cdsa 

Fazir a bdrba 
Fazir a cdma. 
Nad sii que Ihe fazir 
Fazer grdnde negdcio 
Fazir o seu officio 
Fazir profissad 
T6dos ofaziad mdrto 

Fazir vir 



PORTUGUESE 

To dispose of one 



To lay a wager 

The wind blows 

This day se'n night, or a 
week ago 

To cohabit, or dwell to- 
gether 

To do as one pleases 

To do one's best, or endea- 
vour to do one's utmost 

You will do no good in it 

Do so no more 

If ever you do so again 

I wish he may do well 

I had much to do to get him 

to come 
To do by others as you 

would be done by 

I have nothing to do with it 

To do as one is bid 

Do with me as you shall 

think fit 
To make a great noise 
He was the do-all in that 

business 
What will you do to-day ? 

or how do you employ 

yourself to-day ? 
To finish its course as a 

star does 
To raise, to set up one's fa- 
mily 
To shave 
To make the bed 
I can't help it 
To drive a great trade 
To exercise, or discharge 
To profess 
They gave out that he was 

dead 
To call, or send for 



GRAMMAR. 



229 



Fazer entrdr, ou sahir al- 

guSm 
Vsto nab faz ndda 
Nao s6i que fazer disso 
Ja nao tenho que faz&r 

com 6lle 
Faz&r hum livro 
FazSr amizdde com algu4m 

FazSr ex&mplo em alguSm, 
or castigdllo para dar 
exemplo 

Fazir huma c6usa muito 
ao desentendido 



Faz6r das suas 

E'lle sempre estd faztfndo 

das suas 
Faz6r fdscas 



Fazer de pessda 
FazSr jurdr algu6m 

FazSrsaltdr, or vodrpGllos 

dres 
Faz6r b6a vezinhdnca 

Faz&r Unha 
FazSr a rdnda 
Fazer dividas 

Faz lua 

Fazer vioUncia 

Faz&r-se ao trabdlho 

Faz6r-se tdlo 
Faz€r-se vdlho 

Faze*r*sef4io 



To call in,, or out, to bid 

one come in, or out 
It is no matter 
I have no need of it 
I have done with him 

To write a book 

To make friendship, to get 
into friendship with one 

To make one a public ex- 
ample 

To do a thing very covertly, 
so that people can't ap- 
prehend that it is done on 
set purpose, and with a 
design 

To play the fool, to dodge, 
to play tricks 

He is always playing his 
foolish tricks 

To bully, to provoke, to ex- 
cite by words, or actions 
of contempt ; also to 
elude, or deceive by false 
show 

To behave courageously 

To tender the oaths to one, 
to put one to his oaths 

To blow up 

To keep fair with one's 
neighbours 

To fell wood 

To walk the rounds 

To run in debt, to contract 
debts 

The moon shines 

To offer violence 

To inure one's self to hard- 
ships 

To play the ninny 

To grow old, or to grow in 
years 

To grow ugly 



230 PORTUGUESE 

FazSr-se sobgrbo To grow proud 

Faz-se tdrde It grows late 

FazSrse signifies also to feign, to pretend, to seeni^ 
make as if 
Faz-se mduco He won't hear 

The different significations o/t&r and ter-se. 



Ter que faze* r 

Ter 6dio 

Ter por costume 

Ter alguSm por ignordnte 

Ter cuidddo de 

Ter cuidddos 

Terfastio 

Ter dnimo 

Ter bdafdma 

Ter cdra d'ago 

Ter necessiddde 

Ter pr6ssa 

Ter mMtos firnios 

Ter grdnde presumpgao 

Ter razao 
Nao tSr razao 
Ter algiima cousa debdxo 
da lingua 



To be busy 

To hate 

To be wont 

To believe one ignorant 

To be careful of 

To be full of care, or 

thoughtful 
To loath, to see food with 

dislike 
To have courage 
To be well spoken of 
To have a brazen face 
To be in want 
To be in haste 
To be very proud 
To presume much on one's 

self 
To be in the right 
To be in the wrong 
To have a thing at one's 

tongue's end 



Ter algiima ctysa na ponta da lingua, we say, to 
have a thing at one's finger's ends, to have it perfect. 
They also say, saber alguma cousa nas pontas dos 
dedos, which answers exactly to our English phrase. 



Ter feigoens feiticeiras 

Termdfdma 

Ter ciume8 

Ter mSyos 

Ter no pensamento 

Ter obrigagdd 

Ter mido 

Ter razdo, e mdis querazdo 



To have a taking look 

To be ill spoken of 

To be jealous of 

To be able, or have means 

To bear in mind 

To be obliged 

To be fearful 

To have reason, to spare 



GRAMMAR. 



231 



Que tSndes vds com isso ? 
Ter carru&gem e criddos 

Ter a algue*m suspinso 
Hdmem que tern bda feicao 

Ter m^sa franca 



Terfrio 

Ter as cdstas quintes com 

algugm, 
Ter por hem 
Te'nho-o por doudo 
Ter mad na sua resolucdo 
Ter com que 
Nao tendes de que vos 

queixdr 
Nao tendes que, &c. 

Fsto nao tern ndda que fa- 

zSr, com o que eu digo 
Ter 6ntre maos 

T6nho isso por c6rto 

Ir ter com algudm 

Vinho ter com vm ce para 

sabSr cdmo pdssa a sen- 

hdra fulldna 
Ir ter a algum lugdr 
E'sta rua vdi ter ao mer- 

cddo 
Ter alguim por si 

TSmos por n6s a authori- 
dade dos mdis prudentes 
Ter para si 

Ter em muito 
Ter em pouco 
Ser tido em b6a cdnta 



Ter mao 



What is that to you ? 

To keep a coach and ser- 
vants 

To hold one in suspence 

A man of good address, a 
polite man 

To keep open table, to keep 
a table where a man may 
come without bidding 

To be cold 

To be backed, or supported 
by one 

To approve of, or consent 

I take him to be mad 

To be still in one mind 

To have wherewith 

You have no reason of 
complaint 

It is useless, or it will be to 
no purpose for you to,<^*c. 

That is nothing to the pur- 
pose 

To have in hand, or in one's 
possession 

I hold that for a certainty 

To address one's self to one 

I address, or apply myself 
to you to know how Miss 
such a one does 

To go to a place 

This street strikes, or goes 
into the market 

To be supported, or pro- 
tected by one 

We have the wisest men of 
our side, or of our opinion 

To think, or imagine, to 
reckon 

To set much by 

To value but little 

To be esteemed, regarded, 
or valued, to be in great 
esteem 

To hold or keep in, to re- 
strain 



232 PORTUGUESE 

Ter mad nalguma cdusa 



A'tomos que tern mad huns 

nos dutros 
Tinha mad, or tern mad 
Ter 

Terse em p6 
Terse hem a cavdllo 

Terse em casa 
Terse com alguSm 



Nad me pdsso ter com riso 
Nad se pdde ter, que nad 
fdlle 



To bear up, to support, to 
prop, to keep up, to hold 
up 

Atoms that stick together 

Hold, stop 

To contain 

To stand, to stand up 

To sit fast, or well, on 

horseback 
To keep at home 
To hold out, to resist, to 

stand against one, to cope 

with one, to oppose, or 

resist him 
I can't forbear laughing 
He can't forbear speaking 



The different Significations of quer£r. 
Querer signifies to will, to be willing , and to be- 



lieve ; as 

Qudrem alguns 
Querer hem 
Querir mat 
A'ntes querer 
Qu&ira DSos 

Mas qu6ro que assim s6ja 
Que quer dizSr aquelle 

hdmem ? 
Que quer diz6r isto ? 

I'sto quer dizer que, &c. 

E'u qu6ro absolutamGnteque 

E'u assim o qu6ro 

Eflle quer que v6s obedecais 

Nad quero 

E'lle ofard qudndo quizer 

E'lle quer partir amanhaa, 

mat que 6u the que'ro me, 
vSnha a mim 



Some believe 

To love 

To hate 

To have rather 

God grant it, God send it 

may be so 
I grant it, suppose it were so 
What does that man mean ? 

What means this ? what's 

the meaning of that ? 
The meaning is that, <Vc 
I positively resolve that, #c. 
I'll have it so 
He will have you obey 
1 will not, I won't 
He will doit when he pleases 

or when he has a mind to it 
He intends, or has a mind, 

to set out to-morrow 
I wish him no more harm 

than I do myself 



GRAMMAR. 



233 



Haver ) 

Tu has de hir 
E'lle ha de vir hdje 
Se eu houv6r de hir 
Aindaque isso me houvtsse 

de custar a vida 
E'lle estd todo nu, e ha de 

ter muitofrio 
Hav6is v6s de estdr em 

cdsa ? 
Eu hei de achdrme Id 
E'lle ha de ser enforcddo 
Eu hei de recebSr dinhHro 
Vos he que havSis de jugdr 
Aquillo he que v6s havieis 

defazer 
Hav&r por hem 
HavSr por mal 
Que ha de ser 
Aquillo nunca hd-de ser 
E'u Mi de ser a causa da 

sua mdrte. ou ruina 
Para hav&r defalldr,ouvir, 

&c. 
Que hd de ser de mint ? 
Haver filhos 

Livros do deve^e h a de havSr 

Haver misUr 

Hd miste'r apressdr-se 



to have. 

You must go 

He is to come to-day 

If I shall be obliged to go 

Though I were to lose my 

life for't 
He is all naked, he must 

be very cold 
Shall you be at home ? 

I must be there 
He is to be hanged 
I am to receive money 
You are to play 
You should do that 

To take in good part 

To take in ill part 

That is to be hereafter 

That will never be 

I shall be the death, or ruin 

of him 
In order to speak, hear, fyc, 

What is to become of me ? 
To beget, to become the 

father of children. 
Books of debtor andcredi tor 
To want 
It is necessary to haste, or 

to make haste 



Haver, when impersonal, is rendered into Eng- 
lish by the verb to be, preceded by there ; as, 



Hd 

Hd hdmens tad malvddos 

Havia Mima molhe'r 

Hd alguns bons e outros 

mdos 
Hd muitas cdsas 
Hd alguma cousa de ndvo? 
Hd mdis he Mima hdra 
Hd muito Umpo 
Hd p6rto de hiima hora que 

Hie sahio 



There is, or there are 
There are men so wicked 
There was a woman 
There are some good, and 

some bad 
There are several houses 
Is there any news ? 
It is above an hour since 
Long since 
It is almost an hour since 

he went out 



234 

Hd hum dnno 
Hd 6uto dias 
Hd p6rto de 20 Ugoas da 

qui Id 
Naohd 
E'lle cuida que nao hd mdis 

que purgdr 



HavSr se, v. r. 



E'lle sdbe c6mo sehd-de ha- 
v6r, or &lle sdbe cdmo ha 
de haverse 

Elle hduve-se de mane'ira 
que, &c. 



PORTUGUESE 

A year ago 

Eight days ago 

It is near upon 20 leagues 

thither 
There is not 
He believes that purging is 

all in all, or that purging 

is the only remedy in such 

a case 
To carry, to behave one's 

self 
He knows how to behave 

himself 



He behaved himself in such 
a manner that, <^c. 



N. B. When this verb is used impersonally, it is 
always followed by the particle de ; as, 

Ha-se de mister dinh6iro Money is wanted 

ffa-sedefazer, or dizSristo This must be done, or said 

Ha-se de fazer o que 6lle People must do what he 

quiz6r pleases 

Hir, a neuter and irregular verb, to go, to walk, 
to march ; also, to grow, to reach any estate gra- 
dually, to be going. 

To travel by sea and land 
How go your concerns ? 



Hir por mar e por iSrra 
Cdmo vao os vdssos nego- 

cios ? 
Tudo vdi bem 
As suas cousas vao muito 

mal 
Hir d mdo 

Ilir passdndo 
Hir anddndo 



Hir anddndo, or passdndo 



Que vdi de novo ? 
Que vdi nisto ? or Snde vdi 
isto a dar comsigo ? 



All is well, all goes well 

Things go very ill (or very 
hard) with him 

To hinder, to obstruct, to 
obviate 

To grow outof fashion or use 

To go on or forward, to 
keep or hold on his way ; 
also to proceed, to con- 
tinue on, to prosecute 

Tc shift, to pass life not 
quite well, to live though 
with difficulty 

Is there any thing new ? 

What of all this ? 



GRAMMAR, 



235 



Hir debdxo 

Hir para 

Qudnto rnais vdmos para a 

primav6ra, mdiscompri- 

dos sdo os dias 
Hir de mal para pe6r 
Hir didnte 
Hir por didnte 
Hir ao encontro 
Hir aofundo 
Hir e vir 

Naofdgo mdis do que hir e 

voltar 
Isso ja Id vdi 
Eilo la vdi 
Eilo vdi 
Que vos parSce daquSlla 

molh6r ? eilo vdi 6lla ndo 

hefSa 
Eilo vdi, fdlga que assim 

seja 
Como as cdusas agora vad 

Por que pdrte ides ? 
D6os vd comvosco 

Hir d rdda do mundo 

Hir com algu6m 

E'sla trav6ssa vdi ter d 

rua Idrga 
E'u o irei ver de caminho 

Hir continudndo o seu ca- 
minho 

Hirfdra do seu caminho 

Hir hum de huma bdnda, e 
outro da dutra 

Hir para trdz 

Hir detrdz 

Hir atrdz de alguSm 

Hir em alcdnce de alguSm 

Hir buscdr 
Hir para dintro 



To come by the worst 
To approach, to go near 
The uearer the spring, the 
longer the days 

To grow worse and worse 

To go before 

To go on, or forward 

To go to meet 

To sink, or fall to the bottom 

To go to and fro, to go and 
come 

I will not stay, I shall be 
back presently 

'Tis a thing past and done 

There he goes 

So so, pretty well 

How do you like that wo- 
man ? She is so so, she 
may pass 

Well, well, I am glad on't 

As things go now, as the 

world goes 
Which way d'ye go ? 
The Lord of heaven go 

with you 
To go about the world 
To go along with one 
This lane goes into the 

broad street 
I will call upon him as I go 

along 
To go along 

To go out of one's way 
To go asunder 

To go backward 

To go behind 

To pursue, to go after one 

To go after one, in order to 

overtake him 
To go for, or fetch 
To go in 



236 



PORTUGUESE 



Hir para for a 
Hir peregrindndo 
HirfazSr hiima embaixdda 
Hir ver, cantdr, &c. 
Hirfazer hum negocio 
Hir com a mar6 
Hir par a par com alguSm 
Vdi para qudtro mSses que 
£u aqui cheguH 

I'de em paz 

t6mpo vai abranddndo 
Hir (at cards) 
Hir-se, v. r. 



Hir-se a 6lha, ou a panilla 

Hir-se o enfirmo 

A quarSsma vdi-se aca- 

bdndo 
Hir«se 

Ndda se vdi mdis depr6ssa 

que o timpo 
AquSlles mdntes vdo-se es- 

tendSndo 
Hir-se embdra 
Esperdi ate que a cdlma se 

va embdra 
Vdi-te embdra; que ndo 

sdbes engoddr a gSnte 
Hir-se de huma carta (at 

cards) 
Vdi-se fazendo tdrde 
Vdi-se chegdndo a noite 
Vdi-se chegdndo o tempo 

da s6ga 
Vai-se acabdndo o meu 

consulado 
Hir-se escapulindo 
Hir-se a mdo 



To go out 

To go a pilgrimage 

To go on an embassy 

To go to see, to sing, <^c. 

To go upon a business 

To go with the tide 

To go cheek by jole with one 

It is now going on four 

months since I came 

hither 
Depart in peace 
The weather grows mild 
To go, to lay, to stake, to set 
To go, to go away, to go 

one's way, to depart, also 

to run, or leak 
Is for the pot to boil over 
Is for a sick man to die 
Lent draws to an end 

To slip, or pass away (as 

time) 
Nothing goes faster than 

time 
Those mountains extend, or 

stretch themselves. 
To go away, also to be over 
Stay till the heat be over 

Away, or go, you know not 

how to wheedle people 
To throw away a card 

It grows late 

The night draws on 

It grows near harvest 

My consulship is almost at 

an end 
To sneak away 
To refrain, to forbear, to 

abstain 



Hir-se impersonal ; as, vdi-se, they go ; foi-se, 
they are gone ; hir-se hd, they shall go. 



GRAMMAR. 



237 



To 



Senh6r, corno amigo, 

game ofavdr 
Eu vos p£go, or p6govos 
Pe'golhe em cortesia 
Pe'golhe encarecidamente 



Pe'golhe por favor que, &c. 
Fagame afinSza 
Pe'golhe perdad 



pray. 
Dear sir, do me the favour 

I pray you 

I beseech you 

I intreat, or conjure, you to 

do it 
I beg of you that, <^*c. 
Do me the kindness 
I beg your pardon 



Expressions of Kindness, 



Minha vida 

Minha alma 

MSu amdr 

M4u querido, minha querida 

M6u coragdo 

Filho do m€u coragao 

Filha da minha alma 



My life 

My dear soul 

My love 

My little darling 

My dear love, my love 

My dear child 

My little honey 



AgradSgo a vm ce 

JDdu a vm" as agradeci- 

mejitos 
BSij'o as mads de vm" 
Fdlo-hei com todo a gdsto 
Com todo o meu coragdo 
De miiito bda vontdde 
Veja vm" se o pdsso servir 

nalgujna cdusa 
Dispdnha vm" como Ihe 

parecer dSste siu criddo 
Estdu esperdndo p Silas 6r- 

dens de vm" 
Ja que vm" assim ordena 
As drdens de vm ce 
Fico muito obrigddo a vm" 

Quer vm" que 6u fdga al- 

guma cdusa 
Sem ceremdnia 
Nad tern vm" mdis quefallar 
Fdgame a hour a de me p6r 

aos pCs da snr* 



To shew Civility. 

I thank you 

I give you thanks 



I kiss your hand 

I will do it cheerfully 

With all my heart 

Heartily, willingly 

See if it is in my power to 

serve you 
Do what you please with 

your servant 
I wait for your commands 

Since you will have it so 

At your service 

I am very much obliged to 
you 

Have you any thing to com- 
mand me 

Without ceremony 

You need but to speak 

Present my respects, or 
duty, to my fttdy 



238 



PORTUGUESE 



Nab sfri cdmo agradecSr a 
vm" tdntos favores 

Nab sou de comprimentos 
Deixemos estes comprim6n- 

tos 
I'sso he o melhor 



I know not how to make a 
proper return for so many 
favours 

] am not for ceremonies 

Away with these ceremonies 
or compliments 

That is the best way 



To give tokens of Affirmation, Consent, Belief, 
and Refusal. 



He verddde 

He isso verddde ? 

He muito verddde 

Para dizirvos a verddde 

Com effeito he assim 

Quern duvida disso ? 

Nad ha duvida nisso 

Pareceme que si?n, que nab 

Apdsto que sim 

Apdsto que nab 

Creame vm ce ? 

Estd vm" zomfydndo ? 

Fdlla vm ce de v6ras ? 

Fdllo de v6ras 

Pots, estd fSito 

Pouco a pouco 

I'sso nab he verddde 

Nab ha tal cdusa 

He mentira 

Estdva zombdndo 

Seja muio embdra 

Nab qu6ro 



It is true 

Is it true ? 

It is but too true 

To tell you the truth 

Really it is so 

Who doubts it \ 

There is no doubt of it 

I think so, not 

I Jay it is 

I lay it is not 

Do believe me ? 

Don't you jest? 

Are you in earnest? 

I am in earnest 

Well, let it be so 

Softly, fair and softly 

It is not true 

There is no such thing 

It is a lie 

I did but jest 

Let it be so 

I won't, I will not 



To consult, 



Que se ha defazSr ? 

Que far6mos ? 

Que Ihe parece a vm ce 

eufdga ? 
Que remedio tern isso ? 
Fagdmos assim 
Fagdmos huma cousa 
Serd melhdr que 
Seria melhdr que 



What is to be done ? 
What shall we do ? 
que What do you advise me to 
do? 
What remedy is there for it ? 
Let us do so, and so 
Let us do one thing 
It will be better that 
It would be better that 



GRAMMAR. 

Esperdi hum pduco Stay a little 

Deixdime com isso Let me alone 

Antes quizira I had rather 

Se isso fosse comigo Were I in your place 

Tudo he o mismo It is all one 

Of Eating and Drinking. 



239 



Tinhofdme 

Morro defdme 

Coma vm ce alguma cousa 

Que quer vm ce comer? 

Quir vm" corner mdis ? 

Tinho side 

J a matii afdme 

Tin ho muita side 

Morro de side 

Berne de bebir 

Viva vm" miiitos dnnos 

Eu beberia hum cdpo de 

vinho 
Poes beba vm ce 
Te'nho bebido bast ante 
Nao pdsso beber mais 
Ja matei a side 



I am hungry 

I am almost starved 

Eat something 

What will you eat ? 

Will you eat any more ? 

I am dry, or thirsty 

I have no more stomach 

I am very dry 

I am almost dead with thirst 

Give me some drink 

I thank you 

I could drink a glass of wine 

Drink then 
I have drank enough 
I can drink no more 
I am no more thirsty, or my 
thirst is quenched 



Of Going, Coming, Stirring, &c. 

Ddnde vem vm" ? 
Para onde vai vm ce ? 
Vinho de ; vou para, or a 
Quer vm ce subir, ou descir ? 



E'ntre vm c %faya vm ce 
Nad se bula daqui 
Chigue se para mim 
Va-se vm ce 
Vem cd 

Espire por mim 
Nad vd tad deprissa 
Tire-se de didnte de mim 
Nad me tdque 
Deixe estdr isso 
Estou bem aqui 
A'bra vm? a porta 



From whence do you come? 
Where do you go ? 
I come from ; I am going to 
Will you come up, or come 

down ? 
Come in, go out 
Do not stir from hence 
Come near to me 
Go your way, be gone 
Come hither 
Stay for me 
Do not go so fast 
Get you out of my way 
Do not touch me 
Let that alone 
I am well here 
Open the door 



240 



PORTUGUESE 



Fe'che a pdrta 

A' bra, ou fe'che a jane'Ua 

V6nha vm" por aqui 
Passe por Id 
Que procura vm et ? 
Que perd6o vm" ? 



Shut the door 

Open the window, or shut 

the window 
Come this way- 
Pass that way 
What do you look for ? 
What have you lost ? 



To wish well to a Person, 



O Ceo vos guarde 
D6os vos dS bdafortuna 
Dezfy'o-vos t6do o hem 

DSos vos ajude 

Dios vos perdde 

I'de com Deos 

AU vSr-nos 

B6m provtito faga a vm" 



Heaven preserve you 
God send you good luck 
I wish you every thing that 

is good 
God assist you 
God forgive you 
God be with you 
Till I see you again 
Much good may do you 



To wish ill. 



O didbo te Uve 
Maldito sfy'as tu 
Vdipara os quintosinfirnos 
Vdite enforcdr 
Eftforcddo sejas tu 



The devil take thee 
A curse on thee 
Away, go to hell 
Go and be hanged 
Would thou wert hanged 



To swear. 



Assim DSos me sdlve 

Arrebentado sSja €u 
Em conciencia 



As God shall help me, shall 

save me 
May I burst 
In my conscience 



To threaten and insult. 



O'lha que te hei de dar 
DHxa-te estdr, or cdla-te 

que me has de pagdr 
Juro que te fargi arre- 

pender disso 
Se me enfaddres 
Coiiddo de ti 
Pducas raz6ens i or cala 

68sa bdca 
I'sto basta 



Take care, I will beat thee 
Thou wilt pay it me 

I swear thou shalt repent of 

it 
If you put me into a passion 
Woe be to thee 
Hold your tongue, don't 

speak to me 
It is enough, it is sufficient 



GRAMMAR 



241 



To mock, to blame, and to call one names. 



Que bSlofocinho ! 

Que cdra de m6no ! 

TrapacSiro 

Embusteiro 

Mexeriqueiro 

Que b€lo sogeito 

Velhdco 

Mardto 

Ma casta 

T6nto .. 

Asneirdo 



O the fine snout ! 

What an ape's face ! 

A chicaner 

A cheat, an impostor 

A tale-bearer, a tell-tale 

O the dull thing 

A knave 

A rogue, a rascal 

Cursed race 

Giddy-brains, blunderbuss 

A great beast, a thick-skull 



To admire. 



a D4os ! 

He possivel ! 

Quern teria imaginddo, 

crido, dito 
Que animal ! 
Que maravilha ! or que mi" 

Idgre ! 
Nad me maravilho ! 
C6mo pdde ser isto! or 

Cdmo he possivel ! 
Eis aqui cdmo sdo as 

c6usas deste mujido ! 



O God! 

Is it possible ! 

Who would have thought, 

believed, said ! 
What a beast I 

strange ! 

1 don't wonder 
How can that be i 

So goes the world ! 



To show Joy and Displeasure. 



Que gdsto ! 

Que gldria ! 

Que alegria ! 

Que contentame'nto he o 

mSu ! 
Que feliciddde ! 
Sinto isso 
Sinto isso na alma 
Sinto isso no coragao 
O' que desgrdca he a minha! 



R 



What pleasure ! 
What glory ! 
What joy ! 
How pleased I am ! 

What happiness ! 

I am sorry for it 

That touches my very soul 

It pierces me to the heart 

O how unhappy am I ! 



242 



PORTUGUESE 



Affrontdr-me dtsta sdrte ! 
Assim he que se trdta ? 
Olha mardto ! 
Que b6lla cortesia ! 
Nad deverla tratdr comigo 

de'sta sdrte 
Par6ce-te hem ? 
Aprtnde, peddco d* dsno 
O'tha cdmo me trdta e*ste 

animdl 
Olhdi que velhdco he Sste 
Que didbo tern 6llef&ito ? 
P6is } ainda teimdis ? 



To affront me thus ! 

Do you deal thus ? 

You rogue ! 

O what fine manners ! 

You ought not to treat me 

thus 
Do you think that well ? 
Learn, beast as thou art 
See the brute, how he uses 

me 
Do you behold that rascal 
What the devil has hedone ? 
What, are you obstinate 

still ? 



To call. 



Ouve ! 

Onde estds ? 

Hiima paldvra 

Duas paldvras sominte 



Hark! 

Where art thou ? 
A word 

I'll speak but two words to 
you 



To show Uneasiness, Trouble, and Sorrow. 



Sinto or pSsame 
Deixame 

P6go-te que me deixes 
Nad me qu6bres a cabSga 
Ora vdmos, deixame 
Deixame, vai com Deos 
Vdite daqui or vdite emb6ra 
Vai tratdr da tua vida 
Vdite na ma hdra, or vdite 

co? didbo 
Nad mefacas a cabica tonta 
J a me tens dito is so hum 

cento de vezes 



I am sorry 
Let me be quiet 
Prithee get thee gone 
Do not break my head 
Away, away 
Go, go, God be with you 
Get thee gone from hence 
Go mind your own business 
Go to the devil 

Do not make me giddy 
You have told it me a hun- 
dred times already 



To ask, 



Que n6vas ha ? 

Que he isto ? que hd ? 



What news ? 

What is this, 

matter ? 



what is the 



GRAMMAR. 



243 



O'nde ides? 

D6nde vindes ? 

Que quer dizSr ? 

De que stirve ? 

Que vos par See ? 

Quern teve tal atrevimSnto 

Que dizem ? que se diz ? 

Cdmo diz vm ce ? 

Por que nab me responde 



Where are you going ? 

Whence come you ? 

What do you mean ? 

To what purpose ? 

What do you think ? 
? Who has been so bold ? 

What do they say ? 

How do you say ? 
? Why don't you answer ? 



To forbid. 



Deixdi estar isso 
Nab toquSis 
Nab digdis ?iada 
Guarddivos 



Let that alone 
Do not touch 
Say not a word 
Have a care 



Of speaking, saying, doing, &c. 



Falle vm" alto 

Falle vm" mdnso 

Com quern f alia vm" ? 

Falle vm e comigo ? 

Falle-lhe 

Fdlla vm ct Portuguez ? 

Que diz vm" ? 

Nab digo nada 

Ella nab quer caldr-se 

Ouvi dizSr que 

Assim mo diss6rab 
Assim dizem 
Assim dizem todos 
Quern Iho disse a vm" ? 
Dissemo o &r. A. 
Pois tile he que Iho disse 
Pois 6lla he que o disse ? 
Qudndo o ouvio vm. di%€r 
Disserab mo hoje 
Nab posso crS-lo 
Que diz elle ? 
Que vos disse elle ? 
E'lle nab me disse nada 
Nab Iho diga vm. 
E'u Iho direi 
Nab diga nada 
Disse vm. aquillo ? 



Speak loud 

Speak low 

Who do you speak to ? 

Do you speak to me ? 

Speak to him, or to her 

Do you speak Portuguese 1 

What do you say ? 

I say nothing 

She will not hold her tongue 

I was told that— — 

I was told so 

They say so 

Every one says so 

Who told it you ? 

Mr. A. told it me 
? Did he tell you so ? 

Did she tell it? 
? When did you hear it ? 

I heard it to-day 

I can't believe it 

What does he say ? 

What did he say to you ? 

He said nothing to me 

Do not tell him that 

I'll tell him, or her of it 

Say not a word 

Did you say that ? 
R2 



244 P O R T U 

Nad o disse 

Nao disse vm, assim ? 

Que est a vm. faz€ndo ? 

Que tern vm.fe'ito ? 

Nad f ago nada 

Nao Unhofeito nada 

Tern vm. acabddo ? 

Que estd 6llefaz6ndo ? 

Quefaz 6lla ? 

Que quer,ox que ordSna vm ? 

Que Ihefalta ? 

Of understanding 

Entende-o, or perc6be-o vm . 

hem ? 
Perctbe vm . o que elle disse ? 

Percebe vm. o que elle diz ? 

Eniendeme, or perc6beme 

vm. ? 
Entendo a vm. muito bem 
Nao entendo a vm. 
Sabe vm. a lingua Portu- 

gueza ? 
Nad a set 

Tem-me vm. percebido ? 
^Igdra o perc6bo 
Nad seperctbe o queille diz 

ParSce gdgo 

Of knowing, or hav 

Sabe vm. isso ? 

Nad o h6% 

Nad sei nada disso 

E'lla bem o sabia 

Porventura nad sabia Slle 

isso ? 
DSmos que Su o soub6sse 
E'lle nad saberd ndda disso 
Elle nunca soubenddadisto 

E'u sdube-o primeiro, or 
dntes q e vm. o soub6sse 



GUESE 

I did not say it 
Did you not say so ? 
What are you doing ? 
What have you done ? 
I do nothing 
I have done nothing 
Have you done ? 
What is he doing ? 
What does she do ? 
What is your pleasure ? 
What do you want? 

or apprehending. 

Do you understand him 

well? 
Did you understand what 

he said ? 
Do you understand what he 

says ? 
Do you understand me ? 

I understand you very well 
I do not understand you 
Do you understand Portu- 
guese? 
I do not understand it 
Did you understand me ? 
Now I understand you 
One cannot understand 

what he utters 
He speaks like a stammerer 

ing Knowledge of. 

Do you know that? 
I do not know it 
I knew nothing of it 
She knew well of it 
Did he not know of it ? 

Suppose I knew it 

He shall know nothing of it 

He never knew any thing 

about this 
I knew it before you 



GRAMMAR. 



245 



Is it so, or not? 
Not that I know of 



He isto assim ou nao ? 
Nad que 6u saiba 

Of knowing or being acquainted with, forgetting, 
and remembering. 



ConhSce-o vm. ? 
Conhece a vm. ? 
ConhSce-os vm. ? 
Conhigo-o muito hem 
Nad os conhego 
N6s nao nos conhecSmos 
Conhego- o de vista 
Conhego-a de nome 
Elle conhecSo-me muito hem 
Conh$ce-me vm. ? 
T4nho-me esqUecido do sSu 

ndme 
Tem-se vm. esquecido de 

mini? 
Conhece-vos ella ? 
ConhSce o Sr. a vm. ? 

Par tee que nao me conhice 

St. hem me conhece 

E'lle ja me nao conkSce 
T6nho a honra de ser s$u 

conhecido 
Limbra-se vm. disso ? 
Nad me limbro disso 
LSmbro-me muito bem disso 

Of Age, Life, 

Que iddde tern vm. ? 
Que iddde tern sSu irmao ? 
T6nho vinte e cinco dnnos 
Tern vinte e ddus dnnos 
Vm. tern mdis dnnos do que 

6u 
Que iddde terd vm. ? 
He vm. casddo ? 
Qudntas vSzes tern vm. sido 

casddo ? 



Do you know him ? 

Do you know her? 

Do you know them ? 

I know him very well 

I do not know them 

We do not know one another 

1 know him by sight 

I have heard of her 

He knew me very well 

Do you know T me? 

I have forgot your name 

Did you forget me ? 

Does she know you ? 
Does the gentleman know 

you? 
It appears he does not know 

me 
The gentleman knows me 

well 
He knows me no more 
I have the honour to be 

known to him 
Do you remember that? 
I do not remember it 
I do remember it very well 

Death, &c. 

How old are you ? 

How old is your brother ? 

I am five and twenty 

He is twenty-two years old 

You are older than I 

How old may you be ? 
Are you married ? 
How often have you been 
married ? 



246 PORTUGUESE 

Qudntas molhe'res tern vm. 



ainda pay, e 



tido ? 
Tern vm. 

may? 
Miu pay morrdo 
Minha may morre'o 
Ha ddus dmws que miu 

pay morreo 
Minha mdycasou outra vez 
Qudntosfilhos tern vm. ? 

Tenho qudtro * 

Filhosy oufilhas? 

T6nho hum filho 9 e ires 

filhas ? 
Qudntos irmads tern vm. ? 

Nab tenho nenhum vivo 

Todos morrirad 

Todos hav&nos de morr£r 



How many wives have you 

had? 
Have you father and mother 

still alive ? 
My father is dead 
My mother is dead 
My father has been dead 

these two years 
My mother is married again 
How many children have 

you? 
I have four 
Sons or daughters ? 
I have one son and three 

daughters 
How many brothers have 

you? 
I have none alive 
They are all dead 
We must all die 



Of the word hora, as a Noun as well as an Interjection, 



H6ra 

Eu estarei Id, dentro de 

hiima hora 
Que horas sad ? 
Sao s6te hdras 
A que hdras estareis vds 

la? 
As horas que for preciso 



Hdras desoccupddas 
A ultima hdra ou a 

da mdrte 
Cada hdra 
De hdra, em hdra 
Meya hdra 
Hum qudrto de hdra 
Huma hdra e mSya 
P6rto das ndve hdras 
Hd huma hdra 

Fdra de hdras 



hdra 



An hour, also a particular 

time 
I will be there within an 

hour 
What's o'clock ? 
It is seven o'clock 
At what hour or time will 

you be there ? 
In due or good time, at the 

time appointed 
Leisure hours 
The last hour, or the dying 

hour 
Every hour 
Hourly, every hour 
Half an hour 
A quarter of an hour 
An hour and a half 
About nine o'clock 
An hour ago, or an hour 

since 
Beyond the hour, or very 

late 



GRAMMAR. 



247 



A hdra8 

Recolhir-se a boas hdras 
RecolhSr-sefdra de hdras 
Hdras de jantar ou de cedr 
P6rto das hdras de jantar 
Ainda estdis na cdma a 

6sfas hdras ? 
O reldgio da hdras 
Jd d6ra5 dnze hdras 
Reldgio de hdra 
Miiito a boas hdras 
A bdas hdras 

Na md hdra 

Vdi te na ma-hdra 

T6da a hdra que 

A tdda a hdra que quiz6rdes 

Hdra 

Molh6r que dnda para cdda 

hdra 
Hdras defazir oracdo 
Hdras de hir d igrSja 
Hdras de hir para a cdma 
Hdras de comer 
Jd nao sdo hdras 
Chegdr d hdra 
Estdr esperdndo pella sua 

hdra 
Nao vir a hdra 



Sdo hdras de, &c. 
Hdras candnicas 



Hdras 



In time 

To keep good hours 

To keep bad hours 

Dinner, or supper time 

About dinner-time 

Are you a-bed at this time 

of the day? 
The clock strikes 
It struck eleven o'clock 
Hour-glass 
Early, betimes 
Ir good time, in time, at 

the time appointed 
In an ill hour, unluckily, 

unfortunately 
Go to the devil, go and be 

hanged 
Whensoever, at what time 

soever 
At what time you will 
Time or hour of child-birth 
A woman near her time 

Prayer-time 

Church-time 

Bed-time 

Times of eating 

The time is past, it is too late 

Is for a person to die 

To wait for God's time 

To long, to desire earnestly, 
to wish with eagerness 
continued, with em, or de 
before the thing desired 

It is time to, fyc. 

The set time for the clergy 
to say their office ; also 
those parts of the office 
itself, called Prime, 
Tierce, Sixth, None, &c. 

Any little prayer-book, but 
particularly that in which 
is the office of the Blessed 
Virgin 



248 PORTUGUESE, &c. 

As quarSnta hdras So they call the space of 

three days, in which the 
consecrated Host is ex 
posed and laid to public 
view 

Horography, account of 
hours 

Horometry 



C6nta das hdras 

A'rte de dividir o t6mpo em 
hdras 



Hora as an Adverb and Interjection, 



Hdra deixa-o-hir 

H6ra deixate d6stas par- 
voices 

Hdra, deix6mo-nos destes 
comprime'ntos 

Hdra-vdmos, despdxate 

Hdra vdmos, nao ha pe- 
rigo 

Hdra vdmos, tira daqui 
isto 

H6ra vdmos, tSm vergdnha 

Hdra, eu nao pdsso sofrdr 
aquillo 

Hdra hum, hdra outro 

E'lles hdra estdo sdbre hum 
p6, hdra sdbre dutro 

Hdra, que quer dizir isso ? 

Tudo o que he bdm, d6ve 
s6r amddo ; hdra, Deos 
he infinitamSnte bdm, 
Id go, &c. 

Hdra, havia hum enfSrmo 

Por hdra 



Pray let him go 

Away with these fopperies 

Away with these compli- 
ments 
Come, come, make haste 
Away, there is no danger 

Away with this 

Away for shame 
I cannot bear that 

Sometimes one, sometimes 

another 
They stand now on one 

foot, and then on another 
How now ? 
All that is good to be loved, 

now God is infinitely 

good, therefore, $c. 

Now there was a sick man 
At present, for the present, 
now, at this time 



( 249 ) 



VOCABULARY 



OP 



WORDS most used in DISCOURSE. 



Do Ceo e dos Elementos. 

DEOS 

Jesus Christo 

O Espirito Sdnto 

A Trinddde 

A Virgem 

Os dnjos 

Os archdnjos 

Os sdntos 

Os bemaventur&dos 

O c6o 

O par aiso 

Inf'6rno 

Purgatorio 

Os diabos 

O/dgo 

O dr 

A Urra 

O mdr 

O s6l 

A lua 

As estrGUas 

Os rdios 



Of the Heavens and the 

Elements 
GOD 

Jesus Christ 
The Holy Ghost 
The Trinity 
The Virgin 
The angels 
The arch-angels 
The saints 
The blessed 
Heaven 
Paradise 
Hell 

Purgatory 
The devils 
The fire 
The air 
The earth 
The sea 
The sun 
The moon 
The stars 
The rays 



250 



PORTUGUESE 



As nuvens 


The clouds 


vdnto 


The wind 


A chuva 


The rain 


trovao 


Thunder 


reldmpago 


The lightning 


Sardiva 


Hail 


rdyo 


The thunderbolt 


A n6ve 


The snow 


A gedda 


The frost 


carameh 


The ice 


orv&lho 


The dew 


N6voa 


A fog, or mist 


Nevo6iro 


A thick fog 


O terremdto 


The earthquake 


diluvio 


The deluge, or flood 


caldr 


The heat 


Ofrio 


The cold 


Do T3mpo. 


Of Time. 


Odia 


The day 


A ndite 


The night 


MSyo dia 


Noon 


MSya ndite 


Midnight 


A manh&a 


The morning 


Despdis do miyo dia 


The afternoon 


Huma hdra 


An hour 


Hum quarto de hdra 


A quarter of an hour 


MSya hdra 


Half an hour 


Tres quartos de hdra 


Three-quarters of an hour 


H6je 


To-day 


Ontem 


Yesterday 


Amanhaa 


To-morrow 


Antes d? dntem 


The day before yesterday 


Depots de amanhaa 


After to-morrow 


Depots de jantdr 


After dinner 


Depdis de cia 


After supper 


Huma semdna 


A week 


Hum mes 


A month 


Hum dnno 


A year 


Dia sdnto 


A holy-day 


Dia de trabdlho 


A working day 


nascSr do sdl 


The sun-rising 


pdr do sdl 


The sun-set 



GRAMMAR. 

TSmpo de stga, or da aceifa The harvest 
TSmpo de vindima The vintage 



251 



Das Estacoens do T6mpo. 


Of the Seasons 


A primavfra 


The spring 


verdo 


The summer 


outSno 


Autumn 


invSrno 


Winter 


Os Dias da Semana. 


The Days of the JR 


Domingo 


Sunday 


Segunda feira 


Monday 


TSrga feira 


Tuesday 


Quartet feira 


Wednesday 


QuintafSira 


Thursday 


Seorta feira 


Friday 


Sabado 


Saturday 


Dos M6ses. 


Of the Months 


Janeiro 


January 


FeverSiro 


February 


Mdrgo 


March 


Abril 


April 


Mdyo 


May 


Junho 


June 


Julho 


July 


Agosto 


August 


Setembro 


September 


Outubro 


October 


NovSmbro 


November 


Dezembro 


December 



Dias Santos. 

Dia de Anno bom 

Dia de R6ys, a Epiphania 

A Candeldria 



Holy-Days of the Year. 

New Year's Day 
Twelfth Day 
Candlemas Day 



252 



PORTUGUESE 



Purificagdd 


The Purification 


Entriido 


The Carnival, orShrovetide 


Qudrtafeira da Cinzas 


Ash Wednesday 


A Quar6sma 


The Lent 


Annunciagdb 


Lady day in March 


As Quatro TSmporas 


The Ember Weeks 


A Semdna sdnta 


The Holy Week 


Domingo de Ramos 


Palm Sunday 


Qudrtafeira de Trevas 


Wednesday before Easter 


QuintafSira de Endoencas 


Maunday Thursday, the 




last Thursday in Lent 


S6stafSira da Paixdo 


Good Friday 


Pdscoa da Resurreygdo 


Easter Day 


Assumpgdo de N. S a . 


Lady-Day in harvest 


As Rogagdens, or Ladain- 


Rogation Week 


has 




Ascensao 


The Ascension 


Pentecdste 


The Pentecost, or Whitsun- 




tide 


Via do Cdrpo de D6os 


Corpus Christi Day 


Dia de S. Jodo 


Midsummer Day 


Dia de S. PSdro 


Lammas Day 


Dia de tddos os Sdntos 


All Saints Day 


Dia dos Fiiiddos 


All Souls 


Dia de S. Martinho 


Martinmas 


Dia de Natdl 


Christmas Day 


Vigilia, or vSspera 


The eve 


Da Igreja e Dignidades 


Of the Church and Eccle- 


Ecclesiasticas. 


siastical Dignities. 


A ndve 


The aisle of the church 


Zimbdrio 


The dome 


Pindculo 


Pinnacle 


C6ro 


The choir 


Capttla 


The chapel 


Estdnte 


A reading desk, or choris- 




ter's desk 


Sacristia 


The vestry 


Campandrio, or t6rre dos 


The belfry, or steeple 


sinos 




Sino 


The bell 


Baddlo 


The clapper of the bell 


Pia 


The font 


ffysdpe 


A sprinkler 



GRAMMAR. 



253 



Confessiondrio 

Tribuna 

Cemite'rio 

Carneiro 

Altar 

Frontal 

Pallio 

Todlha do altar 

Missdl 

Sotdna 

Sobrepelliz 

Roquete 

O papa. 
Hum cardedl 
Hum patridrca 
Hum arcebispo 
Hum bispo 
Hum legddo 
Vice legddo 
Hum nuncio 
Hum prelddo 
Hum commendaddr 
Hum abbdde 
Huma abbadissa 
Hum prior 
Hum reitdr 
Beneficiddo 

Frdde % or religidso 
Coroa 

Hum guardido 
Hum definidor 
Hum provincial 
Hum gerdl 
Hum vigdrio 
Hum vigdrio gerdl 
Hum dedo 
Hum arcedidgo 
Didcono 
Subdidcono 
Hum cdnego 
Arcipr6ste 
Hum cUrigo 



A confession seat 

A tribune, or gallery 

A church-yard, a burying- 
place 

A charnel 

An altar 

An antipendium 

A canopy 

The altar cloth 

A missal, a mass-book 

A cassock 

A surplice 

A short surplice, a bishop's 
surplice 

The pope 

A cardinal 

A patriarch 

An archbishop 

A bishop 

A legate 

A vice-legate 

A nuncio 

A prelate 

A commander 

An abbot 

An abbess 

A prior 

A rector 

Beneficed clergyman, or in- 
cumbent 

A friar 

A shaven crown 

A guardian 

A definitor 

A provincial 

A general 

A vicar 

A vicar-general 

A dean 

Archdeacon 

Deacon 

A sub-deacon 

A canon 

Arch-priest 

A priest 



254 

Capellao 

Hum esmoUr 

Hum pdrroco 

Beneficio simples 

Fr6ira 

Hum prtgador 

Sacristdo, or sancristdo 

Menino do cdro 



PORTUGUESE 



A chaplain 

An almoner 

A curate 

Sinecure 

A nun 

A preacher, or lecturer 

A sexton, a vestry-keeper 

A singing boy 



N6mes das cousas que ge- 


Names of things mosi 


ralraente se comem. 


usually eaten. 


Pad 




Bread 


A'goa 




Water 


Vinho 




Wine 


Cdrne 




Meat, or flesh 


P6ixe 




Fish 


Cdrne cozida 




Boiled meat 


Cdrne agdda 




Roast meat 


Hum bocddo de 


pad 


A mouthful of bread 


Hum pasUl 


- 


A pye 


S6pa 




Soup 


Cdldo 




Broth 


Saldda 




A sallad 


Mdlho 




Any kind of sauce to dip 






in, provoking appetite 


Fruta 




Fruit 


Queijo 




Cheese 


Manteiga 




Butter 



Do Servico de huina Mesa. 

A mSsa 
Huma cadeira 
A todlha da misa 
Todlha de maos 
Hum guardandpo 
Humafdca 
Hum gdrfo 
Huma colhe'r 
Hum prdto 
Hum saleiro 
Galheta do vindgre 
Galheta do azeite 



Of the Covering of the Table, 

The table 

A chair 

The table-cloth 

A towel 

A napkin 

A knife 

A fork 

A spoon 

A plate 

A saltseller 

A vinegar-bottle, or cruet 

A cruet, or vial for oil 



GRAMMAR. 



255 



TalHr 


A cruet-stand 


AssucarSiro 


Sugar-basin 


Bayx6lla ou servigo de 


A set of silver plate 


, pr&ta 




Hiima cuMrta 


A cover 


Prdto, guardandpo, fdca, 


A course 


gdrfo, colh6r (tudo junto) 




Jdrro 


The ewer 


Huma bacia 


A basin 


Hum cdpo 


A glass 


Huma garrdfa 


A bottle 


Huma tdga 


A cup 


Castigdl 


A candlestick 


Vtla 


A candle 


Tesduras de espevitdr 


Snuffers 


Huma sdlva 


A salver 


Huma escudella 


A porringer 


C6sto pdra p6r o pdd 


A bread-basket 


Donz6lla 


A dumb-waiter 


Faqu6iro 


A case for knives 


Lduga de Bdrro 


Earthen ware 


Lduga de estdnho 


Pewter 


Do Corner, e Beber. 


Of Eating and Drinking. 


Vdca 


Beef 


Carn6iro 


Mutton 


vmiia 


Veal 


Cord6iro 


Lamb 


Gallinha 


Hen, a fowl 


Gdllo 


Cock 


Peru 


A turkey 


Almdndegas 


Force meat balls 


jantdr 


The dinner 


Almogo 


Breakfast 


Cea 


Supper 


Merenda 


The afternoon's luncheon 


Consodda 


A light supper, as upon a 




fast-day 


Banquette 


An entertainment, a banquet 


F6me 


Hunger 


Sede 


Thirst 


Fastio 


A loathing 


Pdo 


Bread 



256 



PORTUGUESE 



Pdbfrisco, or pdb mdlle 

Pad quGnte 

Pad de tddafarinha 

Pad brdncOy or pdb alvo 

Arrdz 

Pdb de rdla 

Pao de cevdda 

Pad de cent6o 

Pdb de avSa 

Pdb de milho miudo 

Pdd de milho grdnde, ou 

de maiz 
Pdb livedo 
Pdb dsmo 
Biscduto 
Migdlha de pdb 
Fatia de pdd 
Cddea de pdd 
Mdssa 
Tdrta 
R6sca 
Estofddo 
Fi&mbre 

Cdrne assdda $6bre grtthas 
Cdrnefrita 

Pic&do, or cdrne picdda 
Javaliy or p6rco monUz 
Presiinto 
Pdrco 
Cabrito 
Toucinho 
Hum Idmbo 
Maos de carneiro 
Fressura, or forgur a 
Cachdla de porco 
Li?iguiga, or lingoiga 
Ckourigo de sdngue de 

pdrco 
Fricass6 
Figado 
L6ite 
Ndta 
Sdro 

Bequeijdd 
Coalhdda 



New bread 
A hot loaf 
Common bread 
White bread 
Rice 

Brown bread 
Barley bread 
Rye bread 
Oaten bread 
Millet bread 
Indian corn bread 

Leavened bread 

Unleavened bread 

Biscuit 

A crumb of bread 

A slice of bread 

A crust of bread 

Dough 

A tart 

Bread made like a roll 

Stewed meat 

Cold meat 

Broiled meat 

Fried meat 

Sausage meat 

A wild boar 

Ham, gammon of bacon 

Pork 

Kid 

Bacon 

A loin 

Sheep's trotters 

A pluck 

A pig's head 

A sausage 

Black-pudding 

A fricassee 

Liver 

Milk 

Cream 

Whey 

A kind of new cheese 

Curdled milk 



GRAMMAR, 



257 



6vo 

G6mma do 6vo 
Clara do 6vo 
6vo fresco 
6vo mdlle 
6vo duro 
6vo assddo 
6vo gallddo 
6vos redes 

6vos escalfddos 

6vos fritos 

6vos mexidos, e fritos 

Bolinhdlo 

6vas de peixe 

D6ces 

ConfSitos 

Marmeldda 



An egg 

The yolk of an egg 

The white of an egg 

A new -laid egg 

A soft egg 

A hard egg 

A roasted egg 

An egg with a chicken in it 

Sweet eggs spun out like 

hairs 
Poached eggs 
Fried eggs 
An amlet 
A fritter 
The roes offish 
Sweetmeats 
Comfits 
Marmalade 



O que se A'ssa. 

Hum capad 
Hiimafrdnga 
Humfrdngo 
Pdmbos 
Pdmbo trocdz 

Gallinhola 

Huma espe'cie de galli- 
nhdla pequena dqualos 
Castelhdnoschamao gal- 
lineta ci6ga 

Perdiz 

Tdrdo 

Faisdo 

Faisaosinho 

Hum leitdo 

Veddo 

Hum coSlko 

Ldparo 

L6bre 

Adem 

Gdnso, or o mdcho da ddem 

Pdta 

Pdto 



S 



That which is roasted* 

A capon 
A pullet 
A chicken 
Pigeons 

A wood culver, or wood- 
pigeon 
A woodcock 
A snipe 



A partridge 

A thrush 

A pheasant 

A pheasant-powt 

A roasting-pig 

A stag 

A rabbit 

A young coney 

A hare 

A duck 

A drake 

Goose [goose 

Gander, the male of the 



258 


PORTUGUESE 


CaUidndra 




A sky-lark 


Codorniz 




A quail 


De 6utros Passaros. 


Of other Birds. 


A'guia 




An eagle 


A'guia ndva 




An eaglet 


Abutre 




A vulture 


Abestrus 




An ostrich 


Esmerilhab 




A merlin 


Gavidb 




A sparrow-hawk 


M6cho 




The horned owl 


Falcdo 




A falcon 


Falcdo que ainda nab v6a 


A jass-hawk 


Gerifdlte 




A ger-falcon 


Sdcre 




A saker, a saker-hawk 


Garga 




A heron 


MelharuQo 




Tomtit 


Gargtita 




A little heron 


Milhdno, or milhdfre 


A kite 


Corvo 




A crow, or raven 


Grdlha 




A rook 


Grdlho 




A jack-daw 


AlvUoa or rabUa 


A wag-tail 


Candrio 




A canary-bird 


Pintacilgo 




A gold-finch 


ftttrlo 




A black-bird 


Tentilhdd 




A chaffinch 


Houxin6l 




A nightingale 


Verdelhdb 




A green-bird 


Papagdyo 




A parrot 


F6ga 




A magpie 


Estorninho, or 


zorzdl 


A starling 


Francelho 




A hobby, a musket 


MScho 




Owl 


Coruja 




A screech owl 


MorcSgo 




A bat 


A've nocturna, 


cdmo m6lro, 


A goat milker 


que mdma as cobras 




Ofrancolim 




A godwit, a moor-cock 


Bufo 




A night crow, or raven 


CercSta 




A teal 


C6tvq morinho 




A cormorant 



GRAMMAR. 



259 



Gaiv6ta 


A moor-hen, or gull 


Gaivdo ' 


A martlet, or martin, a kind 




of swallow 


Andorinha 


A swallow 


Mergulhad 


A dive, or didapper 


Marr6ca 


A wild-duck 


Pic&nqo 


A wren, a little bird 


Taralhdo 


A kind of ortolan 


Pavdo 


A peacock 


Pavoa 


A pea-hen 


Ardra 


A macaw 


Parddl 


A sparrow 


Kola 


A turtle-dove 


Alcyon 


A king's fisher 


Cegonha 


A stork 


Ciico 


A cuckow 


Cisne 


A swan 


Pintarr6xo 


A red robin 


Grou 


A crane 


Pavoncino 


A lapwing 


Pelic&no 


A pelican 


Tarambdla 


A plover 


Pisco 


A bull-finch, or red-tail 


Para os Dias de Peixe, ou 


For Fish Days, or Fast 


de Jejum. 


Days, 


S6pa de 6rvas, &c. 


Soup meagre, or lenten 




pottage 


Peixe 


Fish 


P6ixe do mar 


Sea-fish 


P6ixe do rio, ou da dgoa 


Fresh-water fish 


doce 




Sdvel 


A shad 


Anch6va 


An anchovy 


Anguia, or Enguia 


An eel 


Bdrbo 


A barbel 


Lucio 


A pike, or jack 


Cdrpe 


A carp 


Siba 


A cuttle 


Lula 


A calamary 


Cdbra 


The miller's thumb 


Gordz 


A rochet, or roach 


Cdngro 


A conger [the gilt head 


Dourdda 


Dorado, St. Peter's fish, or 


s 


2 



260 



PORTUGUESE 



Linguddo 


A sole 


Lagdsta 


A lobster 


Borddlo 


A sturgeon ; some call it 




shad-fish 


Mugem 


A mullet 


Rodovdlho 


A byrt or turbot 


S&rda 


A sort of little mackarel 


Cavdlla 


A mackarel 


Sardinha 


A pilchard 


Bacalhdo 


Dry cod 


ArrSnque 


A herring 


Voaddr 


A flying-fish 


ArrSnque defdmo 


A red herring 


ArrSnque com 6vas 


A hard-rowed herring 


Pescdda 


A kind of cod fish 


Caddz 


A gudgeon 


Ostra 


An oyster 


Lamprea 


A lamprey 


Lamprea pequSna 


A lampern 


Pdrco marinho 


A porpoise 


P6lvo 


Pourcontrell or many-feet 


P6rca 


Perch 


Tinea 


A tench 


TrMa 


A trout 


Atiim 


* A tunny-fish 


Salman 


A salmon 


Carmarao 


A shrimp, or pawn 


Carangue'jo 


A crab 


Amiijoa 


A cockle 


Ervilhas 


Pease 


Fdvas 


Beans 


Espindfres 


Spinage 


Alcachdfras 


Artichokes 


Espdrgo 


Asparagus 


C6uve 


Cabbage, colewort 


Bepdlko 


Summer cabbage 


Ndbos 


Turnips 


Grelos de cduve 


Sprouts 


Cduve crespa 


Curled colewort 


Couve Fl6r 


Cauliflower 


Beldro6gas 


Purslane 


CenSuras 


Carrots 


CUgas, or aMgas 


Beets 


Tomdte8 


Love-apples 



GRAMMAR. 



261 



Para temparar o Corner. 



To season Meat with. 



Sal 


Salt 


Piminta 


Pepper 


Pimentdo 


Cayan pepper 


AzHte 


Oil 


Vindgre 


Vinegar 


Mostdrda 


Mustard 


Crdvo da India 


Cloves 


■Canela 


Cinnamon 


Loureiro 


Laurel 


Alcapdrras 


Capers 


Cogumdlos 


Mushrooms 


Tubara da ttrra 


Truffles 


Cebdlas 


Onions 


Our6gao 


Organy 


Fiincho' 


Fennel 


Cebolinhas 


Young onions 


A'lho 


Garlick 


Lardnjas 


Oranges 


Limoens 


JLiemons 


Pinhoens 


The kernels of a pine-appl 


Perreil 


Wild parsley 


Sdlsa 


Garden parsley 


Or tela a 


Mint 


Aipo 


Cellery ' 


A'lho porro 


Leek 


CoSntro 


Coriander 


Acafrdm 


Saffron 


Cominhos 


Cummins 


Para Salada. 


For a Salad. 


Almeirao 


Wild succory 


Almeirao hortSnse, or era- 


Endive 


divia 




Alfdce 


Lettuce 


Chicdria 


Succory 


Agridens 


Water cresses 


Mastritgos or masthrcos 


Cresses 


Cerefdlio 


Chervil 


Rdbao 


Raddish root 



262 



PORTUGUESE 



Para Sonibremesa. 

Afagads 

Piras 

PSra bergamdta 

PScegos 

CamoSza 

Albricdque 

CerSjas 

Cerejas de sdco 

Gin j as 

Ginja garrafdl 



Lardnja da China 

U'vas 

Pdssas de uva 

Uva espim 

Figos 

Figos lampos 

Ame'ixas 

Pdssas de amttxas 

Am6ras de garca, or de 

sylva 
Amor as quendcem de Mima 

sorte de sylva tSnra 
Amdras que ndcem da 

amorSira 
MarmUos 
Romdas 
Lima 
Azeitdnas 
Am€ndoas 
NSsperas 
Melao 

Melancia, or balancia 
Castdnhas 
N6zes 
Aveldns 
Mordngos 
Medrdnho 



Tdmara 



For the Dessert. 

Apples 

Pears 

A bergamot pear 

Peaches 

A pippin 

Apricot 

Cherries 

Hard cherries 

Sour cherries 

A very large sort of cherry, 

the fruit of the dwarf 

cherry-tree 
China-orange 
Grapes 
Raisins 
Gooseberries 
Figs * 
The first figs that come in 

May 
Plums 
Prunes 
Blackberries 

Raspberries 

Mulberries 

Quinces 

Pomegranates 

A lime 

Olives 

Almonds 

Medlars 

A melon 

Water-melon 

Chesnuts 

Walnuts 

Hazel nuts 

Strawberries 

A sort of fruit they have in 
Portugal like a straw- 
berry, said to intoxicate 

A date 



GRAMMAR. 



263 



Fistico 


A pistache-nut 


Alfarrdba 


A carob 


Boldta 


A sweet acorn 


$6rva 


Service 


Agqfeifa, or magdd de na- 


A jubub 


fega 




D6ces 


Sweet-meats 


Das A'rvores e Arbtistos. 


Of Trees and Shrubs. 


Damasqueiro 


An apricot-tree 


Amendoeira 


An almond-tree 


Cerej'Sira 


A cherry-tree 


CastanhSiro 


A chesnut-tree 


CidrSira 


A citron-tree 


SorvHra 


A service-tree 


Palmeiro, 


A palm-tree 


FiguSira 


A fig-tree 


MarmelSiro 


A quince-tree 


MacHra 


An apple-tree 


MacSira da ndfega 


A jubub-tree 


RomSira 


A pomegranate-tree 


Limo&iro 


A lemon-tree 


AmorSira 


A mulberry-tree 


OlivSira 


An olive-tree 


NesperSira 


A medlar-tree 


LaranjHra 


An orange-tree 


Murta 


Myrtle 


NoguSira 


A walnut-tree 


Zambuj&ira 


A wild olive-tree 


E'ra 


Ivy 


PeceguSiro 


A peach-tree 


RosSira 


A rose-bush 


Ameixiiira 


A plum-tree 


PerSira 


A pear-tree 


Rosmaninho 


Rosemary 


PinhSiro 


A pine-tree 


Gritsta 


Broom 


Dos Reptis, e Animaes am- 


Of Reptiles and Amphi- 


phibios. 


bious Creatures. 


Minhdca 


An earth-worm 


SerpGnte 


A serpent 



264 



PORTUGUESE 



SerpSnte com dzas 


A flying serpent 


A'spide 


An asp 


Cdbra 


A snake 


Cdbra de case av 61 


A rattle-snake 


Vibora 


A viper 


Lagdrto 


A lizard 


C/sga 


An evet, eft, or newt 


Alacrdo 


A scorpion 


Crocodilo 


A crocodile 


Jacare", or crocodilo da 


An alligator 


America 




Castdr 


A bearer 


Cdgado 


A land tortoise 


Ldntra 


An otter 


Dos InsSctos. 


Of Insects. 


Ardnha 


A spider 


Formiga 


A pismire or ant 


Caracdl 


A snail 


Pad 


A frog 


Sdpo 


A toad 


Ougdo 


Hand-worm 


Escarav6lho 


A beetle 


Caruncho 


Wood-worm 


Piolho, or lagdrta da hor* 


Caterpillar 


talica 




Cigdrra 


Grasshopper 


Borboleta 


A butterfly 


Grillo 


A cricket 


Piolho 


A louse 


Pidlho Iddro 


Crab-louse 


Lendea 


A nit 


Pulga 


A flea 


Mosca 


A fly 


Persovejo 


A bug 


Carrapdto 


A tick 


Gafanhdto 


A locust 


Polilha, or trdca 


Moth 


Vespa, or abespora 


A wasp 


AbUlia 


A bee 


Zdngo, or Zangdo 


A drone 


Tavao 


An ox fly 


B6y de 2)6os 


A lady-bird 


Mosquito 


A gnat 



GRAMMAR. 



265 



Graos de Parentesco. 

Pdy 

May 

Av6 

Av6 

Bisavd 

Bisavd 

Filho 

Filha 

Irmdo 

Irmda 

Primog6nito 

filho mats m6go 

Tio 

Tia 

Sobrinho 

Sobrinha 

Primo 

Prima 

Primo com irmdo 

Prima com irmda 

Cunhdclo 

Cunhdda 

Meyo irmda 

Sdgro 

Sdgra 

Padrdsto 

Madrdsta 

Enteddo 

Entedda 

Genro 

N6ra 

Neta 

N6to 

BisnMo 

Bisn6ta 

Consdrte, masc. and fem. 

Marido 

Molh6r 

Irmdo g6meo 

Coldgo, or irmdo de Uite 

Bastdrdo 

Compddre 



Degrees of Kindred. 

Father 

Mother 

Grandfather 

Grandmother 

Great grandfather 

Great grandmother 

Son 

Daughter 

Brother 

Sister 

The eldest son 

The youngest son 

Uncle 

Aunt 

Nephew 

Niece 

Cousin 

A female cousin 

The male first cousin 

The female first cousin 

Brother-in-law 

Sister-in-law 

Half-brother 

Father-in-law 

Mother-in-law 

A step-father 

A step-mother 

A step-son 

A step-daughter 

A son-in-law 

A daughter-in-law 

A grand-daughter 

A grand-son 

A great grand-son 

A great grand-daughter 

A consort 

Husband 

Wife 

A twin-brother 

A foster-brother 

A bastard 

A male-gossip 



266 



PORTUGUESE 



Comddre 


A female gossip 


Afilhddo 


A god-son 


Afilhdda 


A god-daughter 


Padrinho 


A god-father 


Madrinha 


A god-mother 


parSnte 


A male relation 


A parSnte 


A female relation 


ParGnte por affiniddde, or 


A kin, a relation either of 


consanguinidade 


affinity or consanguinity 


Dos differeutes G6neros de 


Of the Conditions of Man 


Estado de hum Homera, 


and Woman, as well as 


ou de huma Molher, e das 


of their Qualities. 


suas Qualidades, 




Hum hdmem 


A man 


Huma molhe'r 


A woman 


Hum hdmem de iddde 


An aged man 


Huma molh6r de iddde 


An aged woman 


Hum v6lho 


An old man 


Huma velha 


An old woman 


Hum mdgo, ou ?nancSbo 


A young man 


Huma rapariga 


A girl 


Hum amdnte 


A lover 


Huma amiga 


A mistress 


Huma cridnga, ou menino 


A child, a little child 


Hum rapdz 


A boy 


Hum rapazinho 


A little boy 


Huma menina 


A little girl 


Huma donz6lla 


A maiden 


Hiima virgem 


A virgin 


A'mo 


" A master 


A'ma 


A mistress 


Criddo 


A male-servant 


Cridda 


A female-servant 


Cidaddo 


A citizen 


Rustico 


A countryman 


Hum estrangHro 


A stranger, or foreigner 


Hum viuvo 


A widower 


Huma viuva 


A widow 


Hum herd6iro 


An heir 


Huma herd6ira 


An heiress 


Solt6iro 


A bachelor 


Estddo de solUiro 


Bachelorship 



GRAMMAR. 



267 



Hdrnem casddo 


A married man 


Molhe'r casdda 


A married woman 


Molh6r que estd de pdrto 
De'slro 


A lying-in woman 
Dexterous 


Agudo 
Recatddo 


Sharp 
Cautious 


Astuto, or velhdco 
EspGrto, or vivo 
Ddudo 


Cunning, sly, crafty 

Sprightly 

Mad 


Malicidso 


Malicious 


Timido 


Fearful 


Valerdso 


Brave 


T6nto 
EmbusUiro 


Stupid 
Deceitful 


Gross6iro 


Clownish 


Bern criddo 


Well-bred 


CorUz 


Courteous 


Justo 


Just 


Desavergonhddo 
Impertinenie 
Importiino 
Descuidddo 


Impudent 
Impertinent 
Troublesome 
Careless 


Temerdrio 


Rash 


Constdnte 


Constant 


Devdto 


Devout 


DiligSnte [sivo 
Miser icordi6so t or compas- 


Diligent 
Merciful 


Paciente 


Patient 


Ambicidso 


Ambitious 


Cobigdso 
Sober bo 


Covetous 
Proud 


Cobdrde 


Coward 


Lisonj6iro 
Goloso 


A flatterer 
Glutton 


Desledl 


Treacherous 


Desagradecido 
Inhumdno 


Ungrateful 
Inhumane 


Insolente 


Insolent 


Luxurioso 


Lewd 


Teimoso 


Positive, stubborn 


Preguigoso 
Prddigo 
Molher&ngo 
Atrevido 


Slothful 
Prodigal 
Given to women 
Bold 


AUgre 


Merry 



268 



PORTUGUESE 



Que tern ciumes 

Adiiltero 

Salteador 

Mataddr 

MurmuradSr 

Calumniad6r 

Feitice'iro 

Traiddr 

Malvddo 

Reb6lde 

Ptrfido 

B6bo 

Mentir6so 

Altivo 

Cdxo 

Estropeddo das mads 

C6go 

M6uco or sitrdo 

Canhdto, or esquirdo 

Mudo 



Jealous 

Adulterer 

A highwayman 

A murderer 

A censurer 

A calumniator 

A sorcerer 

A traitor 

Wicked 

A rebel 

Perfidious 

A buffoon 

A liar 

Haughty 

Lame of the legs 

Lame of the hands 

Blind 

Deaf 

Left-handed 

Dumb 



Dos Moradores de huma 
Cidade. 

Fiddlgo 

Ndbre 

Mecdnico 

Tendeiro 

Mercaddr, or hdmem de ne- 

gdcio 
O vMgo, or a pMbe 
Candlha, or a mdis vil 

g6nte da pMbe 
Official 

Jornattiro 
Ourives 

Ourives do 6uro 
Livrtiro 
Impressdr 
Barbttro 
Mercaddr de sSda 
Mercaddr de pdnno 



Of the Inhabitants of a 
City. 

A nobleman 
A gentleman 
A mechanic 
A shop-keeper 
Merchant, or tradesman 

The mob 
The rabble 

A workman, a man that 

labours with his hands 
A journeyman 
A silver-smith 
A gold-smith 
A book-seller 
A printer 
A barber 
A mercer 
A woollen-draper 



GRAMMAR. 



269 



Mercaddr de pdnno, de tin- 

ho, e roupas da India, or 
fanqueiro 
Alfay&te 

Alfaydte remenddo 
Costureira, 

Chapeleiro, or Sombreireiro 
Sapat6iro 

Remenddo (sapaUiro) 
FerrGiro 
Alveit&T 
Cerralheiro 
Parteira 
M6dico 
Charlatdo 

Cirurgidm, or surgido 
Tira dentes 
Selleiro 
Carpenteiro 
Pioneiro, or gastaddr (in 

an army) 
PadSiro 
Carniceiro 
Fruteiro 
Molher que vSnde verduras 

on ortalicas 
Pasteleiro 

Taverneiro, or vendeiro 
Cervejeiro, or o quefaz cer- 

veja 
Estalajadeiro 
Bofarinhiiro 
Melojoeiro 
Pregoeiro 

Joyeiro, or joyalheiro 
Boticdrio 
Vidraceiro 
Carvoeiro 
Jardineiro 
Letrddo 
Procurador 
Advogddo 
Juiz 

Carcereiro 
Carrdsco 



A linen-draper 



A tailor 

Botcher 

A sempstress 

A hatter 

Shoemaker 

A cobler 

A blacksmith 

Farrier 

A locksmith 

A midwife 

A physician 

A quack 

A surgeon 

A tooth- drawer 

A sadler 

A carpenter 

A pioneer 

A baker 
A butcher 
A fruiterer 
A herb woman 

A pastry-cook 
A vintner 
A brewer 

An inn-keeper 

A pedlar 

A watch-maker 

A crier 

A jeweller 

An apothecary 

A glazier 

A coal-man 

A gardener 

A lawyer 

A solicitor 

An advocate, or a pleader 

A judge 

A gaoler 

A hangman 



270 PORTUGUESE 

Maridla A porter 



Os cinco Sentidos. 

A vista 
O ouvido 
O olfacto 
O g6sto 
O tacto 



The five Senses. 

The sight 
The hearing 
The smell 
The taste 
The feeling 



As Partes do C6rpo Hu- 
mano. 

Cabega 

Midlos, or ce'rebro 

Toutigo 

TeSta 

Molleira 

Fdntes 

Orilha 

Cartildgem 

Timpano 

Sobrance'lha 

Pdlpebras, or Cap6llas dos 

dlhos 
Pestdnas 
Lagrimdl 
A'lvo do olho 
Meninas dos 6lhos 
Nariz 

Magda do fdsto 
V€ntas 
Sdpto, or diaphrdgmo do 

nariz 
A pdnta do nariz 
A bdca 
Os dSntes 
A gengiva 
A lingoa 
Paddr, paladdr, or c6o da 

bdca 
Queixdda 
A bdrba 



The Parts of the Human 
Body. 

The head 

The brains 

The hinder part of the head 

The forehead 

The mould of the head 

The temples 

The ear 

The gristle, or cartilage 

The drum of the ear 

Eye-brow 

The eye-lid 

The eye-lashes 

The corner of the eye 

The white of the eye 

The eye-balls 

The nose 

The ball of the cheeks 

The nostrils 

The gristle of the nose 

The tip of the nose 

The mouth 

The teeth 

The gum 

Tongue 

The roof, or palate of the 

mouth 
The jaw 
The chin 



GRAMMAR, 



271 



As bdrbas 

Bigddes 

O pescogo 

A niica 

A gargdnta 

Siyo 

T6ta 

Pttto 

Bico de piito 

Estdmago 

CosUlas 

Embigo 

Barriga 

Verilha 

O brdgo 

O cotovelo 

Sobdco, or sovdco 

A mao 

Pulso 

A pdlma da mao 

Os dSdos 

O d&do polegdr 

dedo mostrador 

DSdo do meyo 

Dido annular 

Dido meninho, or minimo 

Pontas dosdidos 

Juntas, e nos dos dSdos 

Dedo do p6 

A iinha 

As cdstas 

Os dmbros 

Ilhdrgas 

As nddegas 

C6xa 

Joelho 

Barriga da pirna 

Espinhdgo 

Tornozelo 

Opt 

Sdla do p6 

coragdd 

Os bdfes 



The beard 

Whiskers 

The neck 

The nape of the head 

The throat 

The bosom 

The pap 

The breast 

The nipple 

The stomach 

The ribs 

The navel 

The belly 

The groin 

The arm 

The elbow 

The arm-pit 

The hand 

The wrist 

The palm of the hand 

The fingers 

The thumb 

The fore-finger 

The middle-finger 

The ring-finger 

The little-finger 

The tips, or tops of the fin- 
gers 

The joints, and knuckles of 
the fingers 

A toe 

The nail 

The back 

The shoulders 

The sides 

The buttocks 

The thigh 

The knee 

The calf of the leg 

The ridge-bone of the back' 

The ancle 

The foot 

The sole of the foot 

The heart 

The lungs 



272 



PORTUGUESE 



Ofigado 

Obdgo 

Os ri7is 

A bdca do estdmago 

As tripas 

0/61 

A mddre 

Bewiga 

Sdngue 

Ciispo 

Ourina 

Excremfoito 

Su6r 

Mdnco or rdnho 

L&grima 

Car&pa, or cdspa 



The liver 

The spleen 

The kidneys 

The pit of the stomach 

The guts 

The gall 

The womb 

The bladder 

The blood 

Spittle 

Urine 

Dung 

Sweat or perspiration 

Mucus 

Tear 

Scurf 



Dos Vestidos. 

Hum vestido 

Cabelleira 

Cravdta 

Chap6o 

A'bas do chapeo [chapeo 

Cordao, ou fita, para o 

BarrGte 

Capdte 

Gibdo 

V6stia, or colSte 

Camisa 

Casdca 

Casacdo 

Calcdens 

Cerdulas 

M$as, or mSyas 

MSas de cabrestilho 

Ligas 

Sapdtos 

Chin6las 

B6tas 

Five'las 

Esporas 

Pimhos 

Tdlim, or taly 



Of Cloaths. 

A suit of cloaths 

A wig 

A cravat or neckcloth 

A hat 

The brims 

A hatband 

A cap 

A cloak 

A doublet 

A waistcoat 

A shirt 

A coat 

A great coat 

Breeches 

Drawers 

Stockings 

Stirrup stockings 

Garters 

Shoes 

Slippers 

Boots 

Buckles 

Spurs 

Ruffles 

A shoulder-belt 



GRAMMAR 



273 



Boldri6 


A sword-belt 


Expdda 


A sword 


Luvas 


Gloves 


Cinta 


A girdle 


LSngo 


Handkerchief 


L&ngo para o pesc6go 


A neck-handkerchief 


Samdrra, or pelldte do 


A shepherd's jacket 


cdmpo 




Para Molheres. 


For Women, 


Cctmisa de molhires 


A shift, or smock 


Toucddo 


A head-dress 


Sdya 


A petticoat 


Mantilha 


A little cloak women wear 




on their heads 


Mdnto 


A mantle, a kind of cloak 




women wear in Portugal, 




coveringtheir head andthe 




upper part of their body 


Aventdl 


An apron 


BraceUtes 


Bracelets 


AnH 


Ring 


Brincos 


Ear-rings 


L6que 


A fan 


Penteaddr 


A combing cloth 


Toucaddr 


A toilet, a dressing table 


Sindes 


Patches to wear on one's face 


Esp6lho 


A looking-glass 


Regdlo 


A muff 


Espartilho 


Stays 


P6nte 


A comb 


AlfinStes 


Pins 


Tesdura 


A pair of scissars 


Dedal 


A thimble 


Agiilha 


A needle 


Fio 


Thread 


Fio de pirolas 


A necklace of pearls 


Polvilhos 


Powder 


J6yas 


Jewels 


C6r 


Paint 


Palito 


A tooth-pick 


R6ca 


A distaff 


Fuso 


The spindle 


Almofadinhapara alfinStes 


Small pincushion 



274 



PORTUGUESE 



Asriitha de toucdr 


Bodkin 


Fitas 


Ribbons 


Fichu (sdrte de l&ico para 


A necklace 


o pescdgo) 




Tenazinhas 


Nippers 


Pendentes 


Bob, or pendant 


Palatina 


Tippet 


Gudrda infante, or Guard 


Farthingale, or hoop 


infante 




Feo 


Veil 


Renda 


Lace 


Bilros 


Bobbins 


Bilros feitos de 6sso 


Bones 


A'goa da rainha de Ungria 


Hungary water 


A'goa de cheiro 


Scented water 


Justilho 


Bodice 


Os doze Signos Celestes. 


The twelve Celestial Signs. 


Aries 


Aries, or the ram 


Touro 


The bull 


G6mini or Ge'minis 


The twins 


Cancer 


The crab 


Leao 


The lion 


Virgem 


The virgin 


Libra 


The balance 


Escorpido 


The scorpion 


Sagitdrio 


The archer 


Capricdrnio 


The goat 


Aqudrio 


The water-bearer 


Peixes 


The fishes 


De htima C&sa e do que 


Of a House, and all that 


lhe perteace. 


belongs to it. 


Cdsa 


A house . 


Alic6rse 


Foundation 


Paride 


A wall 


Tabique 


A light brick-wall 


Pdteo, or Pdtio 


A court, or yard 


Anddr, or sobrddo 


A floor 


Fachdda 


The front 


Jan6lla 


A window 



GRAM M A R. 



275 



Abobada 


A vault 


As escddas 


The stairs 


Degrdos 


Steps 


Telhddo 


A tiled roof 


Telhas 


Tiles 


Ladrilkos, or tijolos 


Bricks 


Sdla, or quarto 


A room 


Antecdmara 


Antichamber 


Sdla 


A hall 


T6cto 


A roof 


Alcova 


An alcove 


Balcdo 


A balcony 


GabinSte 


Closet 


Almdrio 


A cupboard 


Gudrda-roupa 


Wardrobe 


Ad6ga 


A cellar 


Cozinha 


A kitchen 


Desp&nsa 


A pantry 


Chemin6 


A chimney 


Cavallariga 


The stable 


Gallinh6iro i or cdsa das 


A hen-house 


gallinhas 




Poleiro 


A hen-roost 


Jar dim 


A garden 


Necessdria 


Water-closet 


Cdsa de jantdr 


A dining-room 


Quarto de cdma 


Bed-chamber 


Anddr rente da Rua 


A parlour 


Porta 


The door 


Postigo 


A wicket 


Limindr, or lumidr 


The threshold 


Clara bdia 


Sky-lights 


Algeroz 


The gutter tile 


Beiras, or abas do telhddo 


The eaves 


A couceira da porta 


The hinges 


Fechadura 


A lock 


Cadeddo 


A padlock 


Ferrolho 


The bolt 


Trdnca da pdrta 


The bar of a door 


Cdno da chdve 


The pipe of a key 


Chdve m6stra 


A master-key 


Gudrdas da fechadura 


The wards of a lock 


Palketdo da chdve 


Key bit 


Vidrdqa 


The glass of a window 


Escddafeita a carrac6l 


A winding stair-case 


T 


2 



276 

Escdda secr£ta 



Viga 

Parede m6stra 

Parades mfyas 

A'rca 

Cdma 

Sobrecto da cdma 

Cortinas da cdma 

Lengdes 

Cabeceira da cdma 

P6z da cdma 

Cdlcha 

Colchao 

Cobertdr 

Cobertdr defelpa 

Cam a de Armagao 

Travesseiro 

TapSte 

Tapegaria 

PedernSira 

I'sca 

M6cha 

Enxergao 

Estiira 

Cdens da chemin6 

Fdlles 

Tendzes 

F6rra 

Abdno, or abanaddr 

Panttla 

TSsto 

A'za da panSlla 

F6rro para atigdr o liime 

EscumadHra 

Colhir grdnde 

CaldSira 

Sertdd, o r frigidSira 

Coaddr 

Gr6lha$ 

Rdlo 

EspSto 

Almofariz 

Mao do almofariz 



PORTUGUESE 



Back-stairs, a private stair- 
case 
A beam 
The main wall 
The party walls 
Chest 
Bed 

The bed's tester 
Bed curtains 
Sheets 

The bed's head 
Bed's feet 

Counterpane, a quilt 
A matrass 
A blanket 
A rug 
Bedstead 
A pillow 
A carpet 
Tapestry 
A flint 
Tinder 
Match 
A straw-bed 
A mat 
Hand-irons 
Bellows 
Tongs 
A shovel 
Fire-pan 
A pipkin 
The pot-lid 

The ear of a pot, or pipkin 
A poker 
A skimmer 
A ladle 
A kettle 
A frying pan 
A cullender, or strainer 
Gridiron 
A grater 
A spit 
A mortar wherein things 

are pounded 
A pestle 



GRAMMAR. 



277 



Eeddma 

Bdlde 

Sabao - 

Rodllha 

Esfregdo 

Fdrno 

Pa do fdrno 

Vasculho para alimpar o 

fdrno 
Farinha 
Trinchdnte 
Morddmo 
Escudeiro 
Camareiro m6r 
Escova 
Vassdura 
Despenseiro 
Pdgem 
Lacdyo 
Cocheiro 
Cocheira 
M6go dos cavdllos, ou da 

estrebaria 
Copeiro 

Escudeiro de huma fiddlga 
A'mo, ou senhor da cdsa 
A'ma, ou senhdra da cdsa 
Grimpa 



A vial 

A bucket, or pail 

Soap 

A kitchen towel 

A dish-clout 

Oven 

The peel of the oven 

A maukin, a coal-rake to 

make clean an oven 
Meal-flour 
A carver 
A steward 
A valet-de-chambre 
A chamberlain 
A brush 
A broom 
A steward 
A page 
A footman 
A coachman 
A coach-house 
A groom 

A butler 

A lady's gentleman usher 

The master of the house 

The mistress of the house 

Weather-cock 



C6res. 



Colours. 



Brdnco 
Azul 

Azul ceUste 
Azulferrete 
Azul cldro 
C6r de camurga 
Amarilo 
C6r de rdsa 
C6r de pdlha 
Virde 

C6r de verde mar 3 ou virde 
cldro 



White 
Blue 

Sky-colour 
Dark blue 
Light blue 
Light yellow 
Yellow 
Rosy colour 
Straw colour 
Green 
Sea-green 



278 



PORTUGUESE 



Cdr vermSlha, or Incamada 
Cdr vermSlha muito viva, 

or car min 
Cdr de cdrne 
Cdr carmesin 
Cdr nSgra, or prSta 
Cdr de 11161 
Furta cdres 
Cdr viva 
Cdr triste 
Cdr escura 
Cor carregdda 
Cor defdgo 
Pdrdo 
Cor de cinza 
Escarldta 
Leonddo 
Cor de lardnja 
Cor de azeitdna 
Roxo 
Roxo, or cor de aurdra 



Red colour 

Carmine, a bright red colour 

Flesh colour 

Crimson red 

Black colour 

A dark yellow 

A deep changeable colour 

A lively and gay colour 

A dull colour 

A dark colour 

A deep colour 

Fire colour 

Grey 

Ash colour 

Scarlet 

Tawney 

Orange colour 

Olive colour 

Purple, violet 

Aurora colour 



R6xo sometimes signifies red or rosy colour ; particularly 
in poetry, as in Camdens, Canto I. Stanza 82. 

Para que ao PortuguSz se Ihe iorndsse, 
Em roxo sdngue a dgoa, que bebesse. 



Animaes. 



Beasts, 



Besta dome's tic a 

Besta brdva 

BSsta de cdrga 

BSsta de s6lla 

Gddo 

Gddo grdsso 

Gddo miudo 

Rebdnho 

Mandda de gddo grdsso 

Tduro 

BezSrra 

Bez6rro 

B6y 



Tame beast 

A wild beast 

A beast of burthen 

A beast for the saddle 

Cattle 

Great cattle 

Small cattle 

A flock 

A herd of big cattle 

A bull 

Heifer 

A calf, a steer, a young 

bullock 
An ox 



GRAMMA R. 



27 ( J 



Burro 

Burr a 

Pdrco 

Porca 

Fdca 

E'goa 

Cria 

Pdtra 

Cavdllo 

Cavdllo anao 

Cavdllo de pdsta 

Garranhdo, or cavdllo de 

langamSnto 
Cavdllo de alugiUl 
Cavdllo de cdche 
Cavdllo que dnda de chduto 
Cavdllo pequeno que s6rve 

para senhdras 
Cavdllo que tdma o freio 

entre denies 
Cavdllo rijo da bdca 
Cavdllo ddce de freio 



Cavdllo que tern boa b6ca 

Cavdllo que tropessa 
Cavdllo espantadiqo 
Cavdllo ardgnte, or fogdzo 
Cavdllo que morde e da 

educes 
Cavdllo rebelldo 
Cavdllo que naosdffre dncas 

Cavdllo mal mandddo 
Cavdllo de albdrda 
Cavdllo de cdrro 
Cavdllo de s6lla 
Cavdllo de corrSr 
Cavdllo de gu6rra 
Cavdllo ajaezddo 
Cavdllo de Barbaria 
Cavdllo cap ado 
Cavdllo sem ser capddo 
Cavdllo que da aos fdlles 



An ass 

A she-ass 

A hog, or pig 

A sow 

A young mare, also a nag 

A mare 

A foal, a filly 

A colt, or young horse 

A horse 

A nag 

A post-horse 

A stallion 

A hackney-horse 
A coach-horse 
A jolting-horse 
A palfrey 

A horse that champs the bit 

A hard-mouthed horse 

A tender-mouthed horse, 

one that easily submits to 

the curb 
A horse that will eat any 

thing 
A stumbling-horse 
A startling-horse 
A fiery horse 
A biting and kicking horse 

An untamed horse 

A horse that will not carry 

double 
A restive horse 
A pack-horse 
A cart-horse 
A saddle-horse 
A race-horse 
A war-horse 

A horse with all his furniture 
A Moorish horse, a barb 
A gelding 
A stone-horse 
A broken-winded horse 



280 



PORTUGUESE 



Cavdllo qualrdlvo 

Cavdllo alazdo 
Car alio bdio 
Cavdllo castdnho 
Cavdllo bdio e castdnho 
Cavdllo rocim 
Cavdllo remendddo 
Cavdllo rudo or russo por- 

celldno 
Cavdllo que sdffre ancas 
Cavdllo trolao 
Cavdllo que s6rve para an- 

ddr a. ctica 
Cavdllo que dnda de furta 

passo 
Cdo 

Cdo de quinta 
Cdo de cdga 
Cdo de dgoa 
Cdo de gddo 
Cdo de mdstra, pddengo, or 

perdigueiro 
Cdo defila 
Cfyo sacaddr 
Cdo de busca 
Aldo 
Gdlgo 
Cdo para cagdr rap6zas e 

Idntras 
Cachorrinho 
Cachorrinho defrdlda 
Cachdrro 
Macho, or mulo 
Miila 
Cdrga 

C6rga de Ires dnnos 
Cdrga de ddus dnnos 
Cdrga 

Cdrga ou cdra </e hum dnno 
Gdmo 
Veddo 

Cdbra montiz [nos 

Veddo grdnde de cinco dn- 
Doninha 



A horse that has four white 

feet 
A sorrel horse 
A bay horse 

A chesnut-coloured horse 
A chesnut bay 
A worthless nag, a poor jade 
A dapple horse 
A dapple-grey horse 

A double horse 
A trotting-horse 
A hunter 

A pad, an easy-paced horse 

A dog 

A house-dog 

A hound 

A water spaniel 

A shepherd's dog 

A setting dog 

A great cur, a mastiff dog 

A dog tumbler 

A finder 

A bull-dog 

A greyhound 

A terrier 

A little puppy, a whelp 

A lap-dog 

A little dog 

A he-mule 

A she-mule 

A she-deer, a doe 

A spade 

A pricket 

A wild buck 

A fawn 

A fallow deer 

A stag 

A wild she-goat 

A hart 

A weasel 



GRAMMAR. 



281 



Teixiigo, or texiigo 
Gdto de agdlia 


A badger 
A civet cat 


Doninha de rdbo mux fel- 

pudo a modo de rap6sa 
Elephdnte 
Foinha,fuinha 
Arminho 


A squirrel 

An elephant 

A marten, or martern 

An ermin 


Ourigo cacheiro 

Argandz 

Rdto 


An hedge-hog 
A dormouse 
A rat 


Raposa 


A fox 


Lobo 


A wolf 


Rata da Fndia 


A rat of India, of the big- 




ness of a cat 


Fordo 


A ferret 


Toupeira 
Leao 


A mole 
A lion 


Leda 


A lioness 


Zibelina 


A musk cat 


Leopdrdo 
U'rso 


A leopard 
A he-bear 


TJ'rsa 


A she-bear 


U'rso pequ£no 


A bear's cub 


Tigre 
Pdrco montez 


A tiger 

A wild bear 


Das Cousas do Canipo. 


Of Country Affairs, 


Cdsa do cdmpo, or quinta 
Cdsa de lavrador 


A country house 
A farm-house 


Quinteiro 


A husbandman, a farmer 


Boyeiro 


A herdsman, he that ploughs 
with oxen, or tends them 


Vaqueiro 
Porqueiro 
Pastdr 
Surrdo 


A cow-keeper 

A swine-herd 

A shepherd 

A scrip, or small bag 


Cajddo 

Pastora 

Herddde 

Hortoldo 

Hortaliga 

Cavaddr 


A shepherd's hook 

A shepherdess 

A great or large field, a wide 

arable ground 
A gardener 
All sorts of herbage 
A ploughman 



282 



PORTUGUESE 



Vinhateiro 


A vine-dresser 


Lavraddr 


A farmer, oue who culti- 




vates ground, whether his 




own or another's 


Pdstos 


Feeding ground, pasture, 




sheep-walk 


Arddo 


A plough 


Ferro do arddo 


The plough-share 


Rdbo do arddo 


The plough-handle 


Abegao, or official que faz 


A plough-wright 


arados 




Aguilkdda 


A goad 


Ensinho 


A rake 


Grade 


A harrow 


Semeador 


A sower 


Rogador 


A w T eeder 


Fduce rocad6ura 


A weeding-hook 


Fouce 


A scythe or sickle 


Poddo 


A pruning-knife 


Segaddr 


A reaper, or mower, harvest 




man 


Mangodl 


A flail 


Forcddo 


A prong to cast up sheaves 




of corn with 


Cacador 


A huntsman 


Pescador 


A fisherman 


Rego 


A furrow 


T6rra que fica levantdda 


A balk, or ridge of land be- 


Sntre dous rSgos 


tween two furrows 


Outeiro 


A hill 


Monte, or montdnha 


A mountain 


Vdlle 


A valley 


Lagda 


A moor, fen, or marsh, a 




standing water, but some- 




times dry 


Ldgo 


A lake or standing pool, but 




always full of water 


Ribeiro 


A brook, a stream of water, 




with a gentle or natural 




current 


Ribeirinho 


A rivulet, a streamlet 


Piano, or planicie 


A plain 


Penha, or rdcha 


A rock 


Penhdsco 


A great rock 


Des6rto 


A desert or wilderness 



GRAMMAR. 



283 



Despenhadeiro 

Bdsque 

Bdsque pequeno 

Peddgo de chad sem drvores, 

dentro de hum bdsque 
Pomdr, or verg6l 
Prddo, 
Ramdda 
Fdnte 
Trigo 

Trigo candid I 
Trigo bret&nha 
Centio 
Ferdd 

Tremez 

E spelt a 
Espiga 
Cabega da espiga 

Bainha, donde sake a espi- 
ga depots deformdda 
Legiimes 
Grdos de bico 
Lentilha 

Tramdgo, or tremdgo 
Feijoens 

Feijdo sapdla, or bdjes 
Feij'do fradinho 

Chicharo 

Carreta 

Cdrro 

R6da 

Caimbas 

E'ixo 

Rdyo da rdda 

Currdl de bdys 

Currdl de ovSlhas 

Currdl de cdbras 

Chiqueiro de pdrcos 

E'rva 

Trigo em e'rva 

JSedra 



A precipice 

A wood 

A grove, or thicket 

A glade in a wood 

An orchard 

A meadow 

A bower 

A fountain 

Wheat 

The best wheat 

Red wheat 

Rye 

Meslin, mixed corn, as 

wheat and rye, fyc. 
The corn of three months 

growth 
Spelt 

Ear of corn 
The grain at the top of the 

ear of corn 
The husk in which the ear 

of corn is lodged 
Pulse 

Spanish pease 
A lentil 
A lupine 
French-beans 
Kidney-beans 
A sort of small French beans 

with a black spot 
Chicklings, a sort of peas 
A waggon 
A cart 
A wheel 

The felloes of the wheel 
The axle-tree of a wheel 
The spoke of a wheel 
An ox-stall 
A sheep-fold 
A house for goats 
A hog's-sty 
Grass 
Green corn 
Standing corn 



284 



PORTUGUESE 



Tdrro 


A milk-pail 


Cincho 


A oheese-vat, to make 




cheese ia 


Enxdda 


A mattock, a hoe 


JEnxadao, or alviao 


A mattock 


Cdnga 


A yoke for oxen 


Congdlhos 


The arms of the yoke used 




for oxen 


S6be 


A hedge or fence 


O que fax s6bes 


Hedger 


Fduce rogadoura de que 


Hedging-bill 


uzao parafazer sebes 




Tempo de tosquia e af6sta 


The sheep-shearing, the 


que nSllefdzem os rusticos 


time of shearing sheep 


Cantiga dos segadores des- 


Harvest home 


pots de acabdrfo o tSmpo 




da s6ga 




Sdrga 


A bramble 


Mdta 


A thicket, a forest 


Mdto 


A heath 


Leira, or taboleiro 


A bed in a garden 


Ch6rro de dgoa 


A water-spout 


Ver6da 


A path 


Rdsto 


A track 


Cesta 


A basket 


Cabdz 


A frail, a pannier 


Cabdna, or choupdna 


A cottage, a hut 


Cab ago 


A dry hollow gourd used 




to keep seeds in 


Cdusas pertenc&ntes a 


Things relating to War. 


Gu6rra. 




Servigo or vida militdr 


Warfare 


Militdr or servirna gu6rra 


To serve in the army 


Artilharia, artelharia, or 


Artillery 


artilheria [haria 




Vanhdo, or pe*ga de artil- 


A cannon 


Canhdo de/6rro 


Iron cannon 


Canhdo de br6nze 


Brass cannon 


Alma do canhdo 


The mouth of a cannon 


Fogdo do canhdo 


The touch-hole of a cannon 


Culdtra do canhdo 


The breech of a cannon 



GRAMMAR. 



285 



Botdo, or extremiddde da 

culdtra 
Bellas encadeddas 
Bella de canhao 

CarrSta de canhao 

Pdlvora 

M6yo canhao 

Canhao dobrddo 

Canhao pdra batir hitma 

praga 
Canhao de vinte e qudtro 
Calibre 
Carregdr 
Escorvdr 
Fazer pontaria 
Petrechos, or munigdens de 

guerra 
Encravdr hiima p6ga 
Descavalgdr hiima p6ga 
Despardr 
Tiro de p6ga 
Trem de artilharia 
Colubrina 
Falconet e 
Petdrdo 
Pedreiro 

Bdmba 

Bombdrda 

Morteiro 

Granada 

Espingdrda 

Pistola 

Carabina 

MosquSte 

Machadinha 

Ldnga 

A lab dr da 

Partasdna 

Pique 

Caldr os piques pdra rests- 

tir d cavalaria 
Alfdnge 
Espdda 



The pummel 



Chain-shots 

A cannon-bullet, cannon- 
ball, or cannon-shot 
The carriage of a cannon 
Gun-powder 
A demi-cannon 
A double cannon 
A battering cannon 

A twenty-four pounder 

Caliber 

To load 

To prime 

To level 

Military stores 

To nail up a gun 

To dismount a gun 

To fire 

A cannon shot 

The train of artillery 

A culverin 

A falconet 

A petard 

A swivel gun, pederero, or 

paterero 
A bomb 

A great gun, a bombard 
A mortar-piece 
A granade 
A firelock 
A pistol 
A carabine 
A musket 
A battle-ax 
A lance 
An halbert 
A partizan 
A pike 
To present the pikes against 

the cavalry 
Scymeter 
A sword 



280 



PORTUGUESE 



Disembainhur a espdda 
Punho da espdda 
Magaa da espdda 
Guarnicdo da espdda 
F6lha da espdda 
Meter mdo a espdda 

Matdr 

Ferir 

Desbaratdr 

Saquedr 

Punhdl 

BayonSta 

Caldr a bayontita 

Capacete 

Morrido 

Visiira 

Gorjdl, or gdla 

Peito de drmas 

Courdga 

Espalddr 

Cossolete 

Broquel 

Escudo 

Addga 

Sdya de mdlha 

B€y de armas 

Arduto 
General 

Tendnte general 
SargSnto m6r de batdlha 
SargSnto mdr 
Sargento 

Mariscdl, or marlchdl 
M6stre de cdmpo general 
Coron6l 

M6stre de cdmpo 
Corone'l de infantaria 
Officidl de gu6rra 
Brigadeiro 
TenSnte corone'l 
Ajuddnte de sargSnto mor 
Ajuddnte de ten£nte de 
?n6stre de cdmpo 



To unsheath the sword 
The handle of a sword 
The pommel of a sword 
The hilt of a sword 
The blade of a sword 
To clap one's hand on one's 

sword 
To kill 
To wound 
To rout 
To sack 
A poniard 
A bayonet 
To fix the bayonets 
A helmet 
A morrion 

The vizor of an helmet 
The gorget 
A breast-plate 
A cuirass 
The back-plate 
A corslet 
A buckler 
A shield 

Dagger, a short sword 
A coat of mail 
The king at arms, or king 

of heralds 
A herald 
A general 

A lieutenant-general 
A major-general 
Major 
A Serjeant 
Marshal 

Camp-master general 
Colonel 
Camp-master 
Colonel of foot 
An officer 
Brigadier 
Lieutenant-colonel 
Adjutant 
Aid de camp 



GRAMMAR. 



287 



Cap it do 

Posto de capitdo 

Tenente 

Cornet a 

Alferes 

Bandeiras 

Estanddrte 

Alf6res de cavalaria que 
trdz o estanddrte 

Pagador 

Proveddr des mantimentos 
de huma armada 

Commissdrio 

Commissdrio gerdl 

Engenheiro 

Quartet mestre 

Cdbo de esquddra 

Tambor, or caixa 

Tambor or o que toca tam- 
bor 

Baquetas 

Cord6is de tambor 

Toques do tambor 

Tocdr o tambor 

Alvordda, or general 

Passar mdstra 

Trojnbeteiro, or trombeta 

Pifano 

Soldo 

Soldddo 

Soldddo que estd de senti- 

n6lla 
Entrdr de gudrda 

Sentin6lla 

Render a gudrda, senti- 

n€llas, &c. 
Blocdr, or bloquedr 
Infdnte, or soldddo de p6 
Granadeiro 
Bigddes 
Dragao 

Soldddo de cavdllo 
Montdr a cavdllo 



Captain 

Captaincy or captainship 

Lieutenant 

Cornet 

Ensign 

Colours 

Standard 

Standard-bearer 

Pay- master 
Purveyor 

Commissary 

Commissary-general 

Engineer 

Quarter-master 

Corporal 

Drum 

A drummer 

Drum-sticks 

Drum-strings 

The beats of a drum 

To beat a drum 

The general, one of the 

beats of the drum 
To muster, to review forces 
A trumpeter 
A fifer or fife 

Wages, or pay for soldiers 
A soldier 
Soldier on duty 

To mount, or go upon the 

guard 
Duty, centinel 
To relieve the guard, c^c. 

To block up 

A foot soldier 

Grenadier 

Whiskers 

Dragoon 

Trooper, or horse-soldier 

To get on horseback 



288 



PORTUGUESE 



Apedrse 


To alight 


Gu&rda da pess6a real, or 


Life-guard-man 


ar^heiro 




CouracHro 


Cuirassier 


MosquetHro 


Musketeer 


FuziUiro 


Fusilier 


Alabardeiro 


Halberdier 


Genisero 


Janissary 


Soldado armddo com Idnga 


A spearman 


Soldddo que l6va pique, or 


A pikeman 


piquSiro 




Besteiro, or soldado que 


Cross-bow-man 


pelS j a com bSsta 




PionSiro 


A pioneer 


MinSiro, or minador 


Miner 


Bombardeiro 


A bombardier 


tiro da artilharia, or o 


Gunshot, or the space to 


espdgo que a bala despa- 


which a shot can be 


rdda cdrre; Alcance 


thrown 


Artilheiro 


Matross, also a gunner, or 




cannoneer 


A arte da artilharia 


Gunnery 


General de artilharia 


General of artillery 


Voluntdrio 


A volunteer 


Recrutas 


Recruits 


Explorad6r, or correddr 


Scout 


de exe'rcito 




Espia 


Spy 


O que leva viveres ao ex6r- 


Sutler 


cito, or vivandeiro 




Soldddo quefaz correrias 


A marauder, a soldier that 




goes a marauding 


Timbdle or atabale 


Kettle-drum 


Infanteria 


The infantry 


Cavalaria 


Cavalry 


Cavalaria ligiira 


Light-horse 


Vangudrda 


The vanguard 


C6rpo de batdlha 


The main body of an army 


Retagudrda 


The rear 


C6rpo de res6rva 


The corps de reserve 


Cdrpo de gudrda 


The corps de guard 


PiquSte 


The piquets of an army, 




or piquet guard 


Ala 


The wing of an army 


Batalhdo 


Battalion 



GRAMMA 11 



289 



Desiacamento 

RegimSnto 

Companhia 

Esquadrdo 

Mochila 

Bagdgem, or bagdge 

Bated ores do cdmpo 

AlmazSm, or armazem 

Murdlhas 

Ame'a, on ameya 

Parapeito 

Castillo 

Fdrte 

FortalSza 

Fortificacdo 

Tdrre 

Citade'lla, or cidade'lla 

Baludrte 

Fileira 

Cortina 

MSya lua 

Troneira 

T6rra-pl6no 

Rebelim, or revelim 

Contrascdrpa 

Barreira 

Falsabrdga 

Fosso 

Guarita 

Casamdta 

Correddr, or estrdda enco- 

b6rta 
Cestdens 

Estacdda, or palissdda 
Reduto 
Ataldya 
Mdnta, or ManteUte 

Faxina 

Mina 

FazSr vodr a mina 

Trincheira 

Abrir as trincheiras 

Cdmpo 

Viveres 



U 



Detachment 

Regiment 

A company 

A squadron 

Knapsack 

Baggage 

Discoverers 

Magazines 

Walls 

A battlement 

The parapet 

A castle 

A fort 

A fortress 

Fortification 

A tower 

A citadel 

Bulwark 

A file 

A curtain 

Half moon 

A loop-hole 

A platform of earth 

A ravelin 

Counterscarp 

A barrier 

A faussbraye 

A ditch 

A centry-box 

A casemate 

The covered way 

Gabions 

A palisade 

A redoubt 

A watch tower 

A mantelet, or cover for 

men trom the shot 
Fascines 
A mine 

To spring a mine 
A trench 

To open the trenches 
Camp 
Provisions 



290 



PORTUGUESE 



Bisdnho 

Batalha 

Dar batalha 

Escaramuga 

Sitio, or cerco 

Quart6l 

Encamisdda 

Sortida 

BaUr 

Brtcha 

Pontdo 

Escaldda 

Ass alto 

Dar assdlto 

Tomdr por assdlto 

Chamdda 

Capituldr 

Capitulagdo 

Ttrgoas 

Guarnigdo 

Prebdste 

Prebdste-generd I 

L6va 

Levant dr soldddos, oxfazSr 

I6va de gSnte 
Lev ant dr o sitio 
Levantdr o cdmpo 
Assentdr o cdmpo 
Cdmpo voldnte 
Campdnha 
MeUr-se em campdnha 

Guerredr 

Piga de campdnha 

Forrdgem 

Quartets de inv6rno 

Dar quarUl 

Aquarteldr-se 

Marchdr 

Marchdr com bandeiras 

despregddas 
Tocdr a recolhSr 
Entregdr huma prdga 
Fila da vangudrda 
Fila do cintro 



A new recruit 

A battle 

To give battle 

A skirmish 

A siege 

A quarter 

A camisado 

A sally 

To batter 

A breach 

A pontoon 

An escalade 

An assault 

To storm 

To take by storm 

The chamade 

To capitulate 

Capitulation 

Truce 

Garrison 

A provost 

A provost marshal 

Levy 

To raise men, to levy, or 

raise soldiers 
To raise the siege 
To decamp 
To pitch one's camp 
A flying camp 
A campaign 
To begin the campaign, to 

open the field 
To war, to fight 
A field-piece 
A forage 
Winter quarters 
To give quarter 
To take quarter 
To march 
To march with flying 

colours 
To beat tap-tow 
To surrender a place 
Front rank 
Centre rank 



GRAMMAR 



291 



Fila da Rectagudrda 


Rear rank 


DirHta 


Right 


Esquerda 


Left 


Tempos 


Motions 


Exercicio 


Exercise 


FCchos 


Lock 


Cao or Perro da Anna 


Cock 


Crdnha 


Butt 


A boca da Anna 


Muzzle 


cdno 


The barrel 


Vareta 


Ramrod 


Gatilho 


Trigger 


Pellotdo 


Platoon 


Batalhao 


Battalion 


Ala 


Wing 


Devisdo 


Division 


Linha ou Fileira 


Line 


Caqadores 


Riflemen 


Fldnco 


Flank 


Estddo Maydr 


Staff 


Frente 


Front 


Infantaria Ligeira 


Light infantry- 


Regulamentos 


Regulations 


Palavras de Comando. 


Military Words of Cc 




mand. 


Sentido 


Attention 


Armas ao Hombro 


Shoulder arms 


Descangar sobre as Armas 


Order arms 


MetSr as Bayonetas 


Fix bayonets 


Apresentdr as Armas 


Present arms 


Caldr as Bayonitas 


Charge bayonets 


Descangar as Armas 


Support arms 


Tirdr as Bayonetas 


Unfix bayonets 


Cruzdr as Armas 


Pile arms 


Prepardr 


Make ready- 


Carregdr 


Load 


Tirdr o Cartucho 


Handle cartridge 


Escorvdr 


Prime 


Tirdr as Vargtas 


Draw ramrods 


Atuchdr o Cartucho 


Ram down cartridge 


Armas a Cara 


Present 


F6go 


Fire 


V 


2 



202 



PORTUGUESE 



MetSr o cartucho 

Fogo por pellotoes 

F6go de Filas 

Alto 

Format em linfia 

F6go obliquo 

Formdr 

Mdrcha 

Or clem cerrdda 

Desjildr 

Columna cerrdda 

Meia vdlta d esquerda 

Voltdr 

Avangdr 

Cerrdr as FiUiras 



Navegacao. 

Navio 

Ndo 

Ndo de guSrra 

Navio de cdrga, or mer- 

caniil 
Navio veUiro 

Navio ranc6iro 

Gale 

Galedca 

Galedo 

Galedta 

Comitre 

Fragdta 

Carrdca 

Fiista 

Pindga 

Bdrca de passdgem 

Bdrco 

Bdrca 

Canda 

Gonddla 

Esquife 

Chalupa, or baldndra 

Chaliipa pequtina 



Cast about 

Firing by platoons 

File firing 

Halt 

To form in line 

Oblique firing 

Form 

March 

Close order 

To file 

Close column 

On your left backward 

wheel 
Wheel 
Advance 
Close the ranks 



Navigation. 



A ship 

A large ship 

A line-of-battle ship 

A merchant-ship, a mer- 
chantman 

A very srood sailer, or a 
ship that sails well 

A bad sailer 

A galley 

A galleass 

A galleon 

A galliot, a small galley 

The boatswain of a galley 

A frigate 

A carrack 

A foist 

A pinnace 

A ferry-boat 

A boat 

A bark, great boat 

A canoe 

Gondola, a small boat, 
much used in Venice 

A skiff 

A sloop 

A shallop 



GRAMMAR. 



293 



Bergantim 

Balsa 

Capitdnia 

Almirdnta 

Armada 

Frdta 

Esquddra 

A bdrdo 

Popa 

Proa 

P6gas de prda para dar 
caga ao inimigo 

Tartdna 

Bruldte 

Falua 

BatAl, or bateira 

Caravela 

Sdrte de patdxo para ser- 
vigo dehiimando de guerra 

Ndo de linha 

Gudrda costa 

Galedta da qudl se Idngam 
as bombas 

Navio que s6rve para an- 
ddr a corso 

Corsdrio 

Hydcte 

Navio de transpdrte 

Ndo da India Oriental 

Ndo da India Occidental 

Sorte de embarcagdo pe- 
quena Holland6za de 
hum so mastro 

Navio pdra levdr carvdo 

Embarcagdens pequSnas 

Embarcagdo, or bdrco 
grdnde que s6rve pdra 
levdr fazendas a bdrdo 

Embarcagdo grdnde, ou ca- 
ravela, que s6rve pdra 
commercedr pella cdsta 

Embarcagdo de avizo 

PaquSte 

Bdrco de pescdr 

Ldncha 



A brigantine, or brig 

A float 

The admiral's ship 

The vice-admiral's ship 

A fleet, a navy 

A fleet of merchant ships 

A squadron, part of a fleet 

On board 

The poop, stern, or steerage 

The prow, or head 

Chase guns 

A tartan 

A fire-ship 

A felucca 

A small bark, a wherry 

A caravel 

A tender 

A line-of-battle ship 
A guard-ship 
Bomb-ketch 

A cruiser 

A privateer 

Yacht 

A transport 

East-India-man 

West-India-ship 

A Dutch dogger 



A collier 

Small craft 

A barge, a lighter 



A coasting vessel 



Advice-boat 
Packet-boat 
A fishing-boat 
Boat 



294 



PORTUGUESE- 



Bemos 
Pa do re-mo 

Sen1i)ia 

Ldstro, or Idsto 

Lastdr or langdr Idstro ao 

7MV10 

Mdstro or druore 
M astro grdnde 
Mdstro de mezena 
Mdstro do traquete 
Gurup6s 
Gdvea 

Quit ha 

VSrga, or entena 

Laiz or extremidddes das 

vergas 
Prdnckas, que cdbrem os 

costddos do navio da 

parte defora 
Vela * 
V6la mestra, or a v6la do 

mastro grdnde 
VHa da Gdvea 
Vela do joanete do mdstro 

grdnde 
Papqfigos 
MezSna 
Gdta, or vela de cima da 

mezena 
Traquete 
Veldcho 

Joanete do traquete 
Cevad6ira 
Vela lalina 
Fazerforga de v6la 
Mastareos 

Mastareo da mezena. or 

mastar6o da gdta 
Portinhola 
Bandtiras 
Fl&mmulas or galhardetes 



Oars 

The blade of the oar 

The well 

Ballast 

To ballast a ship 

A mast 

The main mast 

The mizen mast 

The fore mast 

The bowsprit, or boltsprit 

The round-top, main-top, 

or scuttle of a mast 
The keel 
A yard 
The yard-arm 

Side-planks, or side of a ship 



A sail 

The main sheet 

The main-top-sail 
Main-top-gallant-sail 

The mizen and fore-sail 

Mizen-sail 

Mizen-top-sail 

The fore-sail 
The fore-top-sail 
The fore-top-gallant-sail 
The sprit-sail 
A shoulder-of-mutton sail 
To crowd the sail 
The topmasts, or top-gal- 
lant-masts 
Mizen-top-mast 

A port-hole 
The colours 
Streamers, pendants 



'• By vela is often meant the ship itself. 



GRAMMAR, 



295 



Agulha de maredr 

Bitdcola 

Costuras do navio 

L6me 

Cdna do Ifrme 

Cub6rta 

Cub&rta corrida 

Escotilhas 

Escotilhdo 

Castillo de pop a 
Castello de proa 
Garrdr a dncora 

Ancora 

Meter a dncora na lancha, 

or bdte depots de leoan- 

tdla 
Ancora de rebdque 
Ancora de esperdnga 
U'nhas da dncora 
Argdla da dncora 
Estdr a dncora a pique 
Amdrra 
Vicar \ or cortdr as amdr- 

ras 
JSdnda, or prumo 
CutClos 
Mar6 
Bosina 
Prepardr hum navio, de. 

v6las, cdrdas, &c. 
Pildto 
Escrivdo 
Pilotdgem 
Carta de maredr 
Capitdo 
Capitdo tenSnte 
Conirame'stre 
Marinheiro 
Camardte 
Marinheiro que he camar- 

dda ou pertence ao mesmo 

rancho 
Torm6nta 



The mariner's compass 

Bittacle 

The seams of a ship 

Helm, or rudder 

The whip, or whip-staff 

Deck 

Flush fore and aft 

The hatches ; scuttles 

A room by the hatches, to 

keep the provisions 
The hind castle 
The fore castle 
To drive ; or when a ship 

drags her anchor 
The anchor 
To boat the anchor 



A kedger 

Sheet anchor y 

The flooks of an anchor 

The ring of an anchor 

Is for the anchor to be a- peak 

A cable 

To cut the cables 

The sounding lead 
Studding sails 
The tide 

A speaking trumpet 
To rig a ship 

Pilot, or steersman 
A purser 
Pilotage 
Sea-chart 
A captain 
First lieutenant 
A boatswain 
A sailor 
A cabin 
A messmate 



A tempest 



296 

Borrdsca 
Bondnga 
Calmaria 
Vdnto em pdpa 



Navio arrasddo em pdpa 

Derrdta 
Alar a bolina 

Ir pela bolina 

Nd da bolina 

BarlavSnto 

Ganhdr a barlavSnto 

Barlaventedr, or deitdr a 
barlavSnto 

Sotavento 

EscovSns 

Escdtas 

Veldme, cdrdas, e o mdis 
que he necessdrio pdra 
prepardr hum navio 

Cdrda 

Enxdrcias 

Arribdr 

Bombdrdo 

Estibdrdo 

Ld 

Meter de Id 

Bdmba 

Ddr d bomba 

Bdlde pdra deitdr dgoa na 

bdmba 
Escuma que sdhe da bdmba 

depdis de ter tirddo a 

dgoa 
Navio, cuja dgoa se nao 

pdde tirdr com a bdmba 
Mdnga de cduro por dnde 

sdhe a dgoa da bdmba 
Brdco da bdmba 
Fardl 
VSnlo 



PORTUGUESE 



A storm 

Fair weather 

Calm 

The wind full a-stern, a 

forewind 
A ship that sails before the 

wind 
The course, or way of a ship 
To sharp the main bowling, 

to haul up the bowling 
To tack upon a wind, sail 

upon a bowling 
The bowling knot 
Windward 
To get the wind 
To ply to windward 

Leeward 
Hawsers 

Tacks 

Tackle, or tackling, the rig- 
ging of a ship 

A rope 

Shrouds 

To put into a harbour 

Larboard 

Starboard 

Loof 

To loof, or keep the ship 

nearer the wind 
A pump 
To pump 
Pump-can 

Pump-suck 

A ship that is stoaked 

Pump-dale 

The pump handle 

Light, lantern, or lighthouse 

Wind 



GRAMMA R. 



297 



Rosa da Agulha, ou dos 
Ventos. 

Ndrte 

Ndrte 4 a a nord6ste 

Nor norde'ste 

Norde'ste 4 a a ndrte 

Norde'ste 

Norde'ste 4 a a Uste 

Les norde'ste 

L6ste, 4 a a norde'ste 

L6ste 

L6ste 4 a a su6ste 

L6s su6ste 

Su6ste 4 a a Uste 

Su6ste 

Su6ste 4 a a sul 

Susu6ste 

Sul 4 a a su6ste 

Sul 

Sul 4 a a sudo6ste 

Susudo6ste 

Sudoeste 4 a sul 

Sudoeste 

Sudo6ste 4 a a o6ste 

Oes sudo6ste 

06ste 4 a a sudoeste 

06ste 

Oeste 4 a a noro6ste 

Oes nor oeste 

Noro6ste 4 a a o6ste 

Noro6ste 

Noro6ste 4 a a norte 

Nor noroe'ste 

Norte 4 a a noro6ste 

Vento travessao, or Ira- 

vessia 
Dar a embarcacao a travez 
Pairdr 

Esporao 
Colher hum cdbo 
Largdr mais cdbo 
Abrir dgoa 
Fazer agodda 



The Fly of the Mariner's 
Compass. 

North • 

N. by E. 

N. N. E. 

N. E. by N. 

N. E. 

N. E. by E. 

E. N. E. 

E. by N. 

East 

E. by S. 

E. S. E. 

S. E by E. 

S. E. 

S. E. by S. 

S. S. E. 

S. by E. 

South 

S. by W. 

s. s. w. 

S. W. by S. 

s. w. 

S. W. by W. 

W. S. W. 

W. by S. 

West 

W. by N. 

W. N. W. 

N. W. by W. . 

N. W. 

N. W. by N. 

N. N. W. 

N. by W. 

Contrary wind 

To hull 

To ply to and again in one's 

station 
Beak 

To coil a cable 
To pay more cable 
To leak, or spring a leak 
To take in fresh water 



298 



PORTUGUESE 



At par hum ?iavio 


To grapple a ship 


Fale.va 


Grapple 


Peddgo de lona bredda que 


Tarpaulin 


se*pdem ao reddr domdsto 




e das bombas para que a 




dgoa nao penttre 




Passaddr 


A fidd, orpin of iron to open 




the strands of ropes 


Cdrda com que se pr&nde o 


Boat rope, or gift-rope 


bdte, or Idncha d pdpa 




do navio 




Apito 


A boatswain's call 


Abadernas 


Nippers 


Abita 


Bits 


Emprodr 


To steer right forward, to 




turn the prow straight 




forward 


Guindr o navio 


To yaw, or make yaws 


Parte superi6r, or mats dlta 


The tafferel 


da popa de hum navio 




Apagafandes 


Leech-lines 


Arreigddas 


Puttocks 


Brides 


Bunt lines 


Barredduras 


Bow-studding-sails 


Bartidouro 


Boat's skit 


Bastdrdos 


Parrels 


Bigdta 


A dead-eye 


Botdlos 


Studding-sail-booms 


Bracedr 


To brace 


Brdcos 


Braces 


Bragueiro, or vergueiro 


The rudder's rope 


Branddes 


Back-stays 


Buqdrdas 


Breast-hooks 


Cacholas 


Cheeks 


Caddste 


Stand-post 


Caderndl 


A large block with more 




than one shive 


Vavernas 


The floor- timbers 


Colhedores 


Lines of the shrouds 


Compassdr hum navio 


To trim a ship 


Cossduros 


Trucks 


Crdca 


The foulness of the ship's 




bottom 


Cabrestante 


The capstan 


Dar cdca 


To chase 



GRAMMAR. 



299 



Curvas 

Mesas da guarnigao 

Enborndes 

Porao 

Mdca 

Conv6z 

Camardte do cirurgiao 

Fr6te 

Cdrga 

Ordem que o capitao recebe 

para ddr d vela 
A acgdm de imbarcdr se 
Desembdrque 
Embargo 
Ancordgem 
Batdlha naval 
CaravUa mexeriqueira, ou 

de espia 
Arridr, or arredr 
Arredr as v6las 
Arredr bandeira 
Levant drf err o, levdr dnco- 

ras, levarferro, levar-se, 

or levar 
L6va 

Boledr a p6ga 

Pega de ttva 

Rebocdr, ou levdr dereboque 

FazSr costuras 

Passdgem 

Passageiro 

Vidgem 

Navio cujo capitao tern 

cartas de represdlias 
Querendr hum navio 
Bredr as costuras do navio 
Dar d costa 
Solugdr a ndo 

Naufragdr 

Naufrdgio 

Patrao, or me'sire de ndo 



The knees 

Chain-wales 

Scupper-holes 

The hold of a ship 

Hammock 

Deck or quarter-deck 

Cockpit 

Freight 

Cargo 

Sailing orders 

Embarkation 

Landing 

Embargo 

Anchorage 

Naval battle 

A ship for espial, or look out 

To veer 
To strike sail 
To strike the flag 
To weigh anchor 



The action of weighing or 
taking up the anchor 

To move a gun towards 
starboard or larboard 

The signal gun 

To tow 

To splice 

Passage 

Passenger 

Voyage 

Letters of marque 

To careen a ship 
To pay the seamf of a ship 
To run a-groundoron shore 
Is for a ship to roll, or to 

float in rough water 
To suffer a wreck, to be 

wrecked 
Shipwreck 
Shipmaster 



300 POR T U 

Carpe?iiciro de nauios 
E stale no 
Embarcar 
Embarcar 

Grumete 

Rapdz que serve como mdgo 

do navio 
Rapdz que serve ao capitao 
Calafdte 

Calafetdr hum navio 
Calafeto 
Arsenal, ou ribeira das 

ndos 
Emmastedr hum navio 

Remdr 
Remador 
Forgddo 
Despenseiro 

Mari?iheiros, e tdda a outra 
gentequepert6nce ao navio 
Chusma 
Guarnigao da ndo 

O sobrecdrga do navio 

Balestilha 

Quadrdnte 

Outdnte 

Der6 

Paravdnie 

Situagao de huma cosia, 
ilha, &c. a respeito de 
qualqu6r dutro lugdr 

Quarentena 

Baliza 

Ldrga 

Amardr 

Cagdr a v6la 

Cacedr hum navio 



Langdr hum navio do mdr 



G U E S E 

Shipwright 
Stocks 
To ship 

To go aboard, to take ship- 
^ ping 
The meanest sort of sailors ; 

or servant to the sailors 
Ship-boy 

A cabin-boy 

A calker 

To calk a ship 

Oakham 

An arsenal, a store-house, a 

dock-yard 
To fit a ship, or vessel, with 

masts 
To row 
Row T er 
Galley-slave 
Steward 
The crew of a ship 

Crew of galley slaves 
Marines, soldiers w r ho serve 

on board of ships 
Supercargo 
Cross-staff 
Quadrant 
Hadley's quadrant 
Aft 
Fore 
The bearing 



Quarantine 

Sea mark 

Large 

To bear off 

To turn the sail to the wind 
side 

It is said of aship that is hur- 
ried aw T ay from her course 
by strong winds, tides, tyc. 

To launch a ship 



GRAMMAR. 



301 



Entrdr com vento frSsco e 

bom no pdrto 
Bdrdo 

Bdrdo, or bdnda 
Navio de alto bdrdo 
Cdga 

Presa or tomadia 
Estar de vergaddlto 
-V&ntos demongao, ougeroes 
Anddr de consSrva 

Dar, ou fazSr hum bdrdo 



Estar a cdpa, ou por-se a 
cap a 



Do Commercio, e do que 
lhe pert&nce. 

Cdnta 

Conta de vSnda 

Fazer huma cdnta 

Pedir cdntas 

Dar a cdnta 

Cdnta corrSnte 

Dinheiro de contddo 

Fundos Publicos 

O que negocSa em comprdr 

e vendSr acgdens 
Balldngo 
Fdrdo 
Banco 
Banqueiro 
Qudbra 

Falido, or quebrddo 
Ajuste, or concerto 
Trdca 
Portaddr 
Langaddr 
LStra de cdmbio 
Negocidr huma tetra de 

cdmbio 
Partida 
Conheciminto 



To bear in the harbour 

Tack 

Broadside 

First rate man of war 

Chace 

Prize, or capture 

To stand for the offing 

Trade winds 

To keep company together, 

to sail under a convoy 
To tack the ship, or tack 

about, or to bring her 

head about 
To lie by at sea, to back the 

sails 



Of Trade, and of Things 
relating to it. 

Account 

Account of sales 

To cast up an account 

To call to an account 

To pay on account 

Account current 

Ready money 

Stocks 

Jobber 

Balance 
Bale 
Bank 
Banker 
Bankruptcy 
Bankrupt 
Bargain 
Barter 
Bearer 
Bidder 

Bill of exchange, a draught 
To negociate a bill of ex- 
change 
Parcel 
Bill of lading 



302 



PORTUGUESE 



Escritura de obrigagau 


Bond, engagement 


Gudrdallvros or o que em 


Book-keeper 


h lima cctsa de negdcio tern 




a seu cargo os livros 




Occupagad, or ?ieg6cio 


Business 


Comprador 


Buyer 


Duikeiro 


Cash 


Pdrte, or carreto 


Carriage 


Caxeiro or o que gudrda a 


A cashier, or cash-keeper 


caixa 




Cento 


Cent 


Certidao 


Certificate 


Cdmbio 


Change, exchange 


Freguez 


Chap,chapman, or customer 


Gdstos 


Charges 


Bardto 


Cheap 


Cdro 


Dear 


Rocibo da. alfdndega 


Clearance, or cocket 


Commissao 


Commission 


Mercancia 


Commodity 


Compromisso 


Compromise 


Consignagao 


Consignment 


Consumo 


Consumption 


Conteudo 


Contents 


Contrdto 


Contract 


Correspondente 


Correspondent 


PrSgo 


Price, rate 


Alfdndega 


Custom-house 


Gudrdas d y alfdndega 


Custom-house officers 


Gudrdas que estao vigidn- 


Tidesmen, or tide waiters 


do at6 que os navios 




esttjao descarregddos 




Feitoria 


Factory, settlement 


Escritdrio 


Counting-house 


Cr6dito 


Credit 


Acredor 


Creditor 


CorrSnte 


Current 


Costume 


Custom 


Contratador 


Dealer 


Trdfego, or negdcio 


Dealing, traffick 


Divida 


Debt 


Deveddr 


Debtor 


Dinheiro desembolgddo 


Disbursement 


Desconto 


Discount 


Extracto, or cdpia 


Docket 



GRAMM A R, 



303 



Depdsito 

Direitos que a alfandega 
lorn a a dar aos export a- 
dores de certas fazendas, 
que ja os tinhao pago na 
supozigao de serem para 
consumo interidr : servin- 
do isto para animar o 
commercio 

Acreddr importuno 

Cdpia 

Corretor 

Corretdrde letras decdmbio 

Asseguraddr, or segurador 

End6sso 

Endossador 

Abarcador 

Levantamdnto de prego 

Entrada or assento no re- 
gist o 

Equivalent e 

Exigencia 

Despeza 

Extracgau, or exportagao 

Extorsao 

Feitdr, or commissario 

Feira 

Fio, or ardme no qual se 
enfiao os papeis num es- 
critdrio 

Quatro, cinco,&c. por cSnto 

Frete 

O quefr6ta hum navio 

Cabeddl or quantia de din- 
heiro destinddo pdra al- 
guma cousa 

Gdnho 

O que gdnha 

Fazendas or effeitos 

Estr6a 

Escritura or lettra 

Entrada 

Importaddr 
RSnda 



Deposit 
Draw-back 



Dun 

Duplicate 

A broker 

Excbange-broker 

Insurer or under-writer 

Endorsement 

Endorser 

Engrosser 

Enbancement 

Entry 

Equivalent 

Exigency 

Expence 

Export or exportation 

Extortion 

Factor 

Fair 

File for papers 



Four, five, &c. per cent. 

Freight 

A freighter 

Fund 



Gain, or profit 

Gainer 

Goods, effects 

Handsel 

Hand-writing 

A custom for imported 

commodities 
Importer 
Income 



304 



PORTUGUESE 



Inter esse [cio 

Communicagad, or comme'r 
Inventdrio 
InsufficiSncia, or fdlta de 

meyos para pagdr 
Factura 
A'rras 

Escritura de arrendam6nto 
Arrendaddr 
Livro de razao 
Empr6stimo 
Dinheiro emprestddo 
Carta 

Sobrescrito da cdrta 
Fechdr huma cdrta com si- 

n€te 
Mala em que o corr6o trdz 

as cartas 
HypotMca 

Acreddr hypothecdrio 
Fiaddr 
PagamSnto 
Fait a depagamenio 
Escrito de divida 
Ddno 
Pacdte 
Serapilheira 
Brabdnte 
Mdco de cartas 
Companheiro de algu6m no 

negocio, or sdcio 
Socieddde or companhia no 

negdcio 
Penhdr 
Contrato do seguro de mer*- 

cancids 
Seguro 

Protestdr hiima letra 
Aceitdr huma letra 
Prot6sto 

Sacdr hiima IStra 
Correo a6nde se Idncao as 

cdrtas 
Corr6o que Uva cdrtas 
P6rte de cdrtas 



Interest 
Intercourse 
Inventory 
Insolvency- 
Invoice 
Jointure 
Lease 
Lessee 

Ledger-book 
Loan 

Money lent 
Letter 

The direction of a letter 
To make and seal up 

letter 
Mail 

Mortgage 

Mortgagee 

Bail 

Payment 

Non-payment 

Note, or promissory note 

Owner 

Pack, a truss 

Pack cloth, wrapper 

Packthread 

Packet of letters 

Partner 

Partnership 

Pawn or pledge 
Policy of insurance 

Insurance 

To protest a bill 

To accept a bill 

Protest 

To draw a bill 

Post-office 

Post-man or letter carrier 
Postage 



GRAMMAR. 



305 



Dinheiro que se pdga aos 
marinheiros por t6rem 
carregddo o navio 

Capitdl 

PSrdas e ddnos 

Importdncia 

Importdncia liquida 

Prome'ssa 

Bens 

Pontualiddde 

C6mpra 

Recibo 

Recdmbio 

Arbitro, or louvddo 

LouvamSnto, or arbitrio 

Regatdo 

Quitagao 

Reme'ssa 

VSnda das cdusas por 
miudo, c6mo fdzem os 
mercaddres de retdUio 

Mercaddr de retdlho 

Riquezas 

VSnda 

Padrdo 

Amdstra 

Sin6te 

Ldcre 

AjustamSnto de c6ntas 

Mercaddr que tern I6ja 

Livro em que o mercaddr de 
16 j a tern suas c6ntas 

Contrabandista 

Faz6nda de contrabdndo 



FazSr contrabdndo 

Mode'lo, or fi6l dos pezos e 

medidas publicas 
Armazim or Almazim 
Sobrescrevinte 
Sobscripgdo 
Tdra 
Faztinda rolm 



X 



Primage 



Principal, or capital 

Losses and damages 

Proceed 

Neat proceed 

Promise 

Property 

Punctuality 

Purchase 

Receipt 

Re-exchange 

Referee or umpire 

Reference 

Regrater 

Release 

Remittance 

Retail 



Retailer 

Riches, wealth 

Sale 

A pattern 

Sample 

Seal 

Sealing-wax 

Settlement of accounts 

Shop-keeper 

Shop-book 

Smuggler 

Contraband, or prohibited 

* goods, goods smuggled, 
or run 

To run, to smuggle pro- 
hibited goods 

Standard measure 

Warehouse 

Subscriber 

Subscription 

Tare 

Trash of goods 



30G 



PORTUGUESE 



Risco 

Juros 

Usurdrio 

Usura 

Mercancias 

Val6r 

Avaria 

Direitos 

Tributo, or contribuigdo 

Sisa 

Siseiro 

Cdes 

Direito que se pdga, por 

desembarcar fazGndas no 

cdes 
Collectdr do mesmo direito, 

ou tributo 
Dizimos 

Dizimaddr, or dizimeiro 
Lduga vidrdda, sem ser da 

China 
Mercaddr de atacddo 
Venda que se faz por par- 

tidas 



Risk 

Interest 

Usurer 

Usury 

Wares 

Worth, or value 

Average 

Duties or custom 

Cess, tribute 

Excise 

Exciseman 

Wharf 

Wharfage 



Wharfinger 

Tithes 

Tithe-gatherer 

Dutch-ware 

Wholesale dealer 
Wholesale 



Da Mo6da, ou Dinheiro 
Portuguez. 
This mark * is prefixed 

* Redl 
D6s r6is 
Vinttm 

Tostdo, ou 5 vint6ms 
4 Tostdens, ou hum crusado 
Crusadondvo, ou 24 vintSns 
8 Tostdens 

Hum quarto de 6uro, ou 12 
tostdens 

* MilrHs, ou 10 tostdens 
16 Tostdens 

Miya mo6da de 6uro 
3,200, ou 32 tostdens 
Mo6da da duro de 4,800 
P6ga de 6,400 
Ddbrao ou 12,800 



Of the Portuguese Coin, 

to the imaginary money. 

A ree, equal to gfcd. 
10 rees, §g£. 
A vintin, IJ^d. 
A testoon, §\d. 
A crusade, 2s. 3d. 
A new crusade, 2s, 8fd. 
8 testoons, 4s. 6d. 
12 testoons, 6s. 9d. 

A milree, 5s. l\d. 
16 testoons, 9s. 
Half moidore, 13s. Gd. 
32 testoons, 1 8s. 
A moidore, 11. 7s. 
Joanese, 11. 16s. 
128 testoons, SI. 12s. 



PROVERBS. 



307 



COLLECCAO A COLLECTION 



DE 



Adagios Portugueses. 



OF 



Portuguese Proverbs. 



A A'GOA o dd, a dgoa 
I6va 



Na dgoa envolta p6sca o 
pescador 

Estd como o peixe rC dgoa 
Trazer a dgoa para o 

moinho 
Levdr dgoa ao mar 
As dgoas estdo bdixas 
O que nao p6de al sir, 

d€ves soffrer 
C6mo c6mo hum aldrve 
MetSr a pdlha na alhdrda 
Alazao tostddo dntes mdrto 

que cancddo 
Hiima disgrdga alcdnga a 

6utra 
Estdr na aldea, e nao v6r 

as cdsas 



Quern trabdlha, tern alfdya 
Fdllo-lhe em alkos, re- 

sp6ndeme em bugdlhos 
Em t£mpo nevddo o diho 

vale hum cavdllo 



WHAT is got over the 
devil's back will be spent 
under his belly ; also 
lightly come, lightly go 

To fish in troubled waters, 
(to make a benefit of 
public troubles) 

He lives in clover 

To bring grist to the mill 

To carry coals to Newcastle 
He or she is at a low ebb 
What can't be cured must 

be endured 
He eats like a thresher 
To cheat, to impose upon 
A dark sorrel horse will die 

before he'll jade 
One mischief draws on an- 
other 
We say, you can't see wood 
for trees : or to be like 
the butcher that looked 
for his knife when he had 
it in his mouth 
He that works has furniture 
I talk of chalk, and you of 

cheese 
Garlick in the foggy wea- 
ther is as good as a horse ; 
it means that garlick is a 
good defence for travel- 
lers against dampness and 
cold weather 
2 



308 PORTUGUESE 

Tito co mo hum dlho 



Sua alma, sua palma 
Na almond a tern a barb a 
qaeda 



Pagdr os dltos de vasio 



Quern dma a beltrdo, dma 

a seu cao 
Cdda qual dma sSu semel- 

hdnte 
Tambem os ameaoddos 

cdmem pdo 

C6?itas de p6rto, e amigos 

de longe 
Tarn bom he Pedro cdmo 

sSu dmo 
Furtdr o carneiro, e dar os 

p6s pello am6r de D6os 

Nem hum dedofaz mao, nem 
huma andorinha verdo 



Levdr pdlhas, e ardlhos 

Na arSa aberta o justo 
pScca 

Be hum argueiro, fazSr 
hum cavalleiro 

Com drte, e com engdno se 
vive m6yo dnno ; com en- 
gdno, e com drte, se vive 
a Sutra parte 

Quern a b6a drvore se 

■■ chiga, bda sdmbra o 
c6bre 

A'sno m6rto, cevdda do 
rdbo 

A h sno que temf6me, cdrdos 
cdme 



As stiff as garlick ; that is 
a healthy, strong, robust 
person 

As you brew, even so bake 

At a sale keep your beard 
on your chin still ; that is, 
let not your beard wag 
too fast in bidding, lest 
you overbid and repent 

To have but little or no 
sense at all 

Love me, love my dog 

Like will to like, or like 

loves like 
Threatened folks eat bread ; 

we say, threatened folks 

live long 
Even reckonings make long 

friends 
Like master, like man 

We say, to steal the goose 

and give the giblets in 

alms 
One swallow does not 

make summer. Una 

hirundo non facit ver, 

says Horace 
To sweep stakes 
That is, it is opportunity 

that makes the thief 
We say, to make mountains 

of mole-hjlls 
That is, all a man's life is a 

cheat 



That is, he that relies on 

good worthy people, 

reaps a benefit 
A day after the fair, or 

after meat, mustard 
We say, hungry dogs will 

eat dirty pudding 



PROV 

*$opa de met nao sefez pdra 

a bdca do dsno 
Mais qu6ro dsno que me 

I6ve, que cavdllo que me 

derrube 
Mais vol ma avinca que 

boa sentenga 
Nad deites azeite no f 6 go 

Da mdo a bdca se p6rde a 



Em bdca cerrdda nao entra 

mdsca 
Quern tern bdca vdi a R6ma 



PSlla bdca mdrre o peixe 

Cad a bofarinheiro louva 

sSus alfinetes 
Quern tern qudtro, e gdsta 

cinco, nao ha mistCr 

bolsa nem bolsinho 
Cd car vdi pella vinlia por 

onde vdi a may, vdi a 

filha 
Matdr ddus coSlhos de 

huma cajaddda 
Q / uem cdnta, seus males 

espdnta 



Deitdr a cdpa a tduro 



Viva el-rey, e da cd a cdpa 



E R B S. 309 

Good things are not fit for 

fools 
Better be an old man's dar- 
ling, than a young man's 

warling 
It is better to agree at any 

rate than go to law 
Do not throw oil into the 

fire 
Much falls between the cup 

and the lip 
A close mouth catches no 

flies 
That is, a man may go any 

where, if he has language 

to speak for himself and 

ask his way 
Much talking brings much 

woe 
Every man thinks his own 

geese swans 
He that hath four and 

spends five, hath no need 

of a purse 
Like father like son 



We say, to kill two birds 
with one stone 

The person who sings 
makes easy his misfor- 
tunes ; that is, singing 
causes him not to reflect 
on it so much as he other- 
wise would 

To throw one's cloak at 
the bull ; that is, ,to ven- 
ture all a man has, to save 
his life 

Let the king live, and give 
me the cloak ; that is 
spoken of persons who, 
under a pretence of au- 
thority, rob and plunder 
other people, and at the 



310 



PORTUGUESE 



Anddr de cdpa cahida 

O cdo com rdiva de sSu 
ddno trdva 



Quern com cdens se Idnga, 
compulgas se levdnta 

A cdme de Idbo dSnte de 
cdo 



Quern faz cdsa na prdga, 
huns dizem que lie alia, 
dutros, que he baixa 



A cavdllo dado nab dllies o 

dente 
Quern quer cavdllo sem 

tdcha, sem elle se dcha 
C6bra bdafdma, e deita-te 

a dormir 
Fazir as cdntas sem a hds- 

peda 

Do contddo cdme o l6bo 



Em cdsa de ladrdo 
fdlles em cdrda 



nao 



Do cduro Ihe sdhem as cor- 
rias 



same time p retend they are 
doing justice to the power 
reposed in their hands 

To be behind-hand in the 
world 

A mad dog bites his own 
master ; there is no trust- 
ing to madmen, or people 
in a rage 

We say, lie with beggars 
and you will get fleas 

That is, to return railing for 
railing ; or, as our mo- 
dern proverb says, give 
him a Rowland for his 
Oliver ; the Latins say, 
par pari refer re 

That is, a man in public bu- 
siness can't please every 
body ; or, as Solon says, 
'tis rare that statesmen 
can all parties please 

Never look in the mouth of 
a gift horse 

'Tis a good horse that never 
stumbles 

When your name is up, you 
may lie a-bed till noon 

To reckon without the hos- 
tess ; or, as we say, the 
host 

The wolf eats of what is 
counted ; that is, thieves 
will steal, though they 
know it will be missed, 
much more if they think 
it will not 

You should not mention a 
halter to any whose rela- 
tions or friends have suf- 
fered by it ; that is, no 
man should be hit in the 
teeth of his disgrace 

The thongs come out of his 
skin ; that is, he pays for it 



PROVERBS, 



311 



Cor tar o vestido confdrme 

o pdnno 
Cria o corvo, tirdrvos-hd o 

olho 



Tdnta culpa tern o ladrao 
c6mo o consentidor 

Dddivas quebrdntao p€n- 
has 



Melhdr he fazer de bdlde 
que estdr deb aide 

Deitdr azeite no f 6 go 



Nao he o d6mo tarn feio 

como o pintad 
Primeiro sao dSntes, que 

parentes 



Ld vdi a lingoa, 6nde o 

dente grita 
Qudndo cuidas meter o 

dente em seguro, topardz 

o duro 



Ddr com a li7igoa nos 

dintes 
Quern nao f alia, nao o ouve 

D6os 

Ventura te dS Deos,filho; 
que sabSr pouco te bdsta 



Cad a qual por si, e Deos 
por tddos 



To cut one's coat according 
to the cloth 

It is said of a person that, 
being received in distress, 
defrauds or grows too 
great for him that enter- 
tained him 

The receiver is as bad as 
the thief 

Gifts break rocks ; that is, 
kindness overcomes the 
hardest hearts; and bribes 
or presents corrupt the 
most resolved 

It is better to work for no- 
thing than to be lazy and 
do nothing at all 

To make bad worse. Ho- 
race says, Oleum addere 
camino 

We say, the lion is not so 
fierce as his picture 

We say, near is my coat, but 
nearerismyskin,<^c. Te- 
rence says, Heus proxi- 
mus sum egomet mihi 

To scratch where it itches 

Harm watch, harm catch. 
Horace says, 
— etfragili qucerens Mi- 

dere dentem 
— Offendet solido 

To contradict one's self, to 
belie . 

A man may hold his tongue 
in an ill time ; also spare to 
speak and spare to speed 

God give you good luck, 
child, for a little learning 
will serve your turn ; be- 
cause it is fortune that 
raises men morethan merit 

Every one for himself, and 
God for all 



312 



PORTUGUESE 



Em bona dias, bdas 6bras 
Para dia de sao cerijo 



Tudo pdde o dinheiro 

O homem propdem, e DSos 

disp6em 
D6rme c6mo hum argandz 
A bom entendeddr pducas 

palavras bastao 
Gdto escaldddo da dgoa 

fria ha m6do 
No escudelldr verds quern 

ie qu6r bem, ou mal 

Esmoldu sdo Matthdus, es- 
mol6u pdra os s£us 

Nao ha melhdr espelho que 
o amigo vttho 



Nem estdpa com tigdens, 
nem molhe'r com vardens 



Falldr sem cuiddr, he atirdr 
sem afrontdr 



Fdlla pduco e bem, tirte 
hdo por alguSm 



QuSm afdma tern perdida, 
mdrto dnda nesta vida 

A quern mdfdma tern, nem 
accompdnhes, nem digas 
bem 

Aproveitaddr de far6los, 
esperdigaddr de farinha 



The better days the better 

deeds 
We say, when two Sundays 

come together, that is 

never 
Money governs the world 
Man proposes, and God 

disposes 
He sleeps like a dormouse 
A word to the wise is enough 

We say, a burnt child dreads 

the lire 
That is, people's affections 

are discovered by their 

liberality 
Charity begins at home 

There is no better looking- 
glass than an old friend ; 
that is, such a one will not 
flatter a man, but tell him 
the truth 

That is, conversation of wo- 
men is dangerous; it is not 
good jesting with edged 
tools 

To let one's tongue run, 
without reflecting on what 
one says, is like shooting 
at random 

Talk little and well, and 
you'll be counted some- 
body ; that is, you'll be 
esteemed 

He who has lost his reputa- 
tion is as good as dead 
w r hilst living 

Do not keep company with, 
nor be fond of, one that 
has an ill name 

That is, one that saves atthe 
spiggot and lets it run out 
at the bung ; also, penny 
wise and pound foolish 



PROVERBS 



313 



Naofdzem bdafarinha 

Quern md afaz nella jdz 
Ag6ra dd pao e mel, e de- 

p6is dard pdo efel 
Lingoa doce como mel, e co- 
raqdo amargoso como f el 
Better o f6rro qudndo estd 
~ quSnte 

Quern com ferro mdta> a 

f€rro mdrre 
Carregddo de f6rro, carre^ 

gddo de me do 



Quern te, faz festa, ndo 
soendo fazer, ou te quer 
engandr, ou te ha mister 

Ndo fies, nem prqfies, nem 
arrendes, vivirds Sntre 
as gentes 

Mijdr claro, dar humafiga 

ao medico 
Se ndo b6be na tav6rna, 

f6lga n6lla 
Achdu fdrma pdra o s6u 

sapdlo 

Nao sejdis fornSiro se 
tendes a cabega de man- 
teiga 



Ao kdmem ousddo a for- 

tuna the da a mdo 
Rdupa defrancezes 

Cahir da frigideira nas 
brasas 



They can't set their horses 
together 

Self do self harm 

After sweet meat comes 
sour sauce 

An honey tongue> an heart 
of gall 

To beat the iron whilst it 
is hot, or to make hay 
whilst the sun shines 

He who kills by the sword 
dies by the sword 

He who is loaded with iron 
is loaded with fear ; that 
is, he who loads himself 
with armourand weapons 
against danger, discovers 
he is much afraid 

He that makes more of you 
than he is wont to do, 
either designs to cheat 
you, or stands in need of 
you 

Do not trust, nor contend, 
nor hire, and you'll live 
among men; that is, you'll 
live peaceably 

Tell the truth and shame the 
devil 

We say, he does not smoke 
but smokes 

He has found a last to his 
shoe ; that is, he has met 
with his match 

Do not undertake to be a 
bakerif yourhead ismade 
of butter ; that is, do not 
take upon you any busi- 
ness you are unfit for 

Fortune favours the bold 

Things left at random, or 
exposed to be pillaged 

To fall out of the frying-pan 
into the fire 



314 



PORTUGUESE 



Dizem osfilhos dosoallwiro, 
o que onvem diz6r a s£us 
]jays do fumeiro 

P6rto vdi ofumo da chtima 

Quern huma viz furta, fiel 
nimaa 

Mai vdi ao fuso qudndo a 
bdrba ndo dnda em cima 



Cdda Urra coin seu uso, 
edda rdca com seu fuso 

Qudntas cabecas, tdntas 
car apneas 

Quern Ihe doer a cabega que 
a aperte 

Se quires saber quern hi o 
villao, mitelke a vara na 
mdo 

Nao ha rdsa sem espinhos 



Anddr, anddr, vir morrer 
d beira 



Quern nao dive, nao teme 
Quern qudndo pdde, nao 

qu6r, qudndo quer, nao 

pdde 
Hdmem honrddo nao ha 

misUr gabddo 
Hdmem grdnde, besta dc 

pdo 



Little pitchers have great 
ears 

We say, there is no smoke 

without some fire 
He who once steals, is never 

trusty ; or, once a thief, 

always a thief 
Alas for the spindle when 

the beard is not over it ! 

By the spindle is meant 

the woman, and by the 

beard is meant the man 
So many countries, so many 

customs 
Several men, several minds 

We say, if any fool finds the 
cap fit him, let him put it 
on 

Set a beggar on horseback, 
and he will ride to the 
devil 

There is no rose without 
thorns, there is no sweet 
without some sweat 

To eat an whole ox and 
faint at the tail. This pro- 
verb is spoken when any 
body falls short of a thing 
after having used all his 
endeavours 

Out of debt out of danger 

It is good to make hay while 
the sun shines 

We say, a good face needs 
no band 

This proverb intimates, that 
things are not to be valued 
by their bulk, but accord- 
ing to their intrinsic worth 
and value ; and'so we say, 
a lark is better than a 
kite 



PROVERBS. 



315 



Debdixo de ma cdpa jdz 
boin bebeddr 



Quern muilo abrdga, pouco 

apbrta 
No agdugue, quern mal 
fdlla, mal ouve 



Quern em mats alto ndda, 
mais presto se afoga 

Hdspede com sol, ha hondr, 
H6spedafor?n6sa, ddnofaz 

d bolsa 
O hdspede e o peixe aos trSs 

diasftde 

Hdrta sem dgoa, cdsa sem 
telhddo,molh6r semamdr, 
marido sem cuidddo, de 
grdga he cdro 



Hdnra ao bom para que te 
honre, e ao mdopdra que 
te nao deshonre 

Hdnra h6 dos dmos, a que 
sefaz aos criddos 

Officio de conselho, h6nra 
sem provHto 



Hdmem apercebido, mSyo 
combatido 



A tattered cloak may cover 
a good drinker ; that is, 
men are not to be judged 
by outward appearance 

All grasp, all lose ; or covet 
all, and lose all 

He that speaks knavishly 
shall hear knavishly. Te- 
rence says, Qui per git ea, 
quce vulf, dicer e, ea t quce 
non vult, audiet 

This is, the highest charges 
are the more liable and 
nearer to the downfall 

First come, first served 

A beautiful hostess, or land- 
lady, is bad for the purse 

Fresh fish, and new come 
guests, smell when they 
are three days old 

That is, a garden without 
water, a house untiled, a 
wife without love, and a 
careless husband, are all 
alike, being all stark 
nought 

Honour a good man, that he 
may honour you ; and an 
ill man, that he may not 
dishonour you 

The honour done to servants 
redounds to their masters 

An office in the council is 
honour without profit ; 
that is, to be of the coun- 
cil of a town, by which 
nothing is got in Portugal 

A man that is prepared, bas 
half the battle over 



316 



DIALOGUES. 



D I A L O G O S 

FAMILIARES. 



FAMILIAR 

DIALOGUES. 



TENHA vm. muiio bons 

dias 
C6mo estd vm. ? ou como 

passa vm. ? 
Bern, nao muito-b0m 9 vdu 

passdndo 
Muiio bempara servir a vm. 
As drdens de vm. 
Fico-lhe muiio obrigddo 
Agradecido 
Cdmo estd, ou pdssa o sen- 

h6r s&u irmdo ? 
Muiio bem, ndo muito bSm 

Elle terd g6sto de ver a vm. 
Nao terH tempo para hir 

a vSlo h6je 
Fdga favor de assentdr-se 
Da hiima cadSira ao senli6r 

Ndo h6 necessdrio 

Tenho que hir afazSr huma 

visita aqui nesta visin- 

hdnga 
Vm. tern pressa 
E'u 16 go voltarei 

Adeos meu senhor 

V6lgo de vSr a vm. com b6a 

saude • 
BSijo as maos de vm. 
Sou criddo de vm. 
S6u muiio seu criddo 



GOOD morrow, sir 

How do you do, sir? 

Well ; not very well ; so, so 

Very well to serve you 

At your service 

I am obliged to you 

I thank you 

How does your brother do ? 

He is very well ; not very 
well 

He will be glad to see you 

I shall have'no time to see 
him to-day 

Be pleased to sit down 

Give a chair to the gentle- 
man 

There's no occasion 

I must go to make a visit in 
the neighbourhood 

You are in haste 

FI1 be back, or return pre- 
sently 

Farewell, sir 

I am glad to see you in good 
health 

I kiss your hand 

I am your servant 

Your most humble servant 



DIALOGUES. 



317 



II. Para fazer huma Visita 
de Manhaa. 

ONDE estd Uu dmo? 

Ainda ddrme ? 

Nao, senhdr, illeestd acor- 

dddo 
Estd Slle ja levantddo ? 
Nao, senhdr, elle ainda 

estd na cdma 
Que vergdnha de estdr ain- 
da na cdma a 6stas hdras ! 
Ontem a ndite fui para a 

cdma tao tdrde, que nao 

me pude levantdr cedo 

esta manhaa 
Que fiz6rab vm c ". depdis 

de cea ? 
Dangdmos, cantdmos, ri- 

mos, e jugdmos 
A que j6go ? 
A'os cantos 
Qudnto me peza de o nao 

tSr sabido ! 
Quern ganhdu ? quern per- 

d€o ? 
Eu ganhei dez mo6das 
AU que hdras jugdrao 

vm ces ? 
At6 duas hdras depots da 

mSya ndite 
A que hdras fdi vm, para a 

cdma ? 
A's trSs, ds trSs hdras e 

meya 
Que hdras sao ? 
Que hdras the parece a vm. 

que sSjao 
ParSceme que ap4nas sao 

dito 
Sim ! dito ! ja d6rao dSz 

Entdo he preciso que me 
levdnte qudnto mais de- 
pr6ssa puder 



II. To visit in the Morn- 
ing. 

WHERE is your master? 

Is he asleep still ? 
No, sir, he is awake 

Is he up? 

No, sir, he is still a-bed 

What a shame 'tis to be a- 
bed at this time a-day 

I went to bed so late last 
night I could not rise 
early this morning 

What did you do after sup- 
per? 

We danced, we sung, we 
laughed, we played 

At what game ? 

We played at piquet 

How grieved am I, I did 
not know it ! 

Who won ? who lost ? 

I won ten moidores 

Till what hour did you 

play ? 
Till two in the morning 

At what o'clock did you go 

to bed ? 
At three, half an hour after 

three 
What's o'clock ? 
What do you think it is ? 

Scarce eight, I believe yet 

How! eight! it has struck 

ten 
Then I must rise with all 

speed 



318 



DIALOGUES. 



III. Para vestir-se 

QUE M estd ahi? 
Que qu6r vm. ? 

Despdxa-te, acende o lume, 

e v6sie-me 
Dd-me a minha camisa 
Eila aqui estd, senhdr 
Nao estd quente, estd mui- 

tofria 
Eu a aquentarei, se vm. 

quizSr 
Nao, nao; trdze-me as 

minhas m€yas de sSda 
Hiima deltas estd rdta 
Da-lhe hum p6nto, concur- 

ta-a 
Dei- a ao que as conc6rta 

Fize'ste-bem 

C/nde estao as minhas 

chinelas 
C/nde estd a minha rdupa 

de chdmbre ? 
Pentea-me 
Dd-me o mfu lengo 
Eis aqui hum lav ado 
Dd-me o que estd na min- 
ha algibeira 
Dei-o d lavandeira, £lle 
estdva suj'o [rdupa ? 
Tr6uxe 6lla ja a minha 
Sim, senhdr, e naofdlta nada 
Trdze-me os meus calgdens 
Que vestido quer vm. para 

hoje ? 
O mesmo de Sntem 
O alfaiate ha de trazSr 
Idgo o seu vestido [h6 
Bdtem d pdrta, v6 Id quern 

H6 o alfaiate 
DHxa-o entrdr 



III. To dress one's self. 

WHO is there ? 

What will you please to 

have ? 
Be quick, make a fire, dress 

me 
Give me my shirt 
Here it is, sir 
Tis not warm, 'tis quite 

cold 
If you please I'll warm it 

No, no ; bring me my silk 

stockings 
One of them is torn 
Stitch it a little, mend it 

I have given it to the stock- 
ing mender 
You have done right 
Where are my slippers ? 

Where is my night gown 

Comb my head 

Give me my handkerchief 

Here is a clean one 

Give me that which is in my 
pocket 

I gave it to the washer-wo- 
man, it was foul 

Has she brought my linen ? 

Yes, there wants nothing 

Bring me my breeches 

What clothes will you wear 
to-day ? 

Those I wore yesterday 

The taylor will bring your 
cloth suit presently 

Somebody knocks, see who 
it is 

It is the tailor 

Let him come in 



DIALOGUES. 



319 



IV. O Senh6r e o Alfaiate. IV. 



The Gentleman and 
the Tailor. 



TRAZEISomtu vestido? 

Sim, senhdr, eilo aqui 
Ha miiito tempo que estdu 

esperdndo por Slle 
Nad pude vir at6 agdra 
Nao estdva acabddo 
Ainda nao estava forrddo 
Quer vm. vestir a casdca 

para vSr se Ihe estd bSm ? 
Vejdmos se estd bemfeita 

T6nho para mim que Ihe 

hdja de agraddr 
Par6ce-me muito comprida 

He costume, agdra de tra- 

z&las compridas 
Abotodi-a 
He miiito apertdda 
Assim dbves&rpara que Ihe 

estSja bem ao cdrpo 
Nao sao as mdngas dema- 

siddamente Idrgas ? 
Nao, senhdr, estao-lhe ad- 

mirdvelminte 
Os calg6ens sao muito aper- 

tddos ? 
E'sta he a mdda de agdra 
Este vestido estd- the bizar- 

ramSnte 
He muito curto, muito com- 

prido, muito grdnde, 

muito pequino 
TSndes feito a vdssa c6n- 

ta? 
Nad, senhdr, nao tive tSm- 

po 
-TrazH-a amanhad, e pa- 

gdrvos hei 



DO you bring my suit of 

clothes? 
Yes, sir, here it is 
You make me wait a great 

while 
I could not come sooner 
It was not finished 
The lining was not sewed 
Will you please to try the 

close coat on ? 
Let us see whether it be 

well made 
I believe it will please you 

It seems to me to be very 

long ' 
They wear them long now 

Button it 

It is too close 

To fit properly, it ought to 

be close 
Are not the sleeves too* 

wide ? 
No, sir, they fit very welt 

The breeches are very nar- 
row 

That is the fashion 

This suit becomes you 
mighty well 

'Tis too short, too long, too 
big, too little 

Have you made your bill ? 

No, sir, I had no time 

Bring it to-morrow, I'll 
pay you 



320 



DIALOGUES, 



V. Paraalmocar. 

TRA'ZE-nos alguma cdu- 

sa para almogdr 
Sim, senhdr, ha linguigas 

e pastelinhos 
Gosta vm. de presunto ? 

Sim, trdze-o ; comer emos 

huma talhdda de"lle 
Estende hum guardandpo 

sobre aqu6lla mesa 
Dd-nos prdtos, fdcas, e 

gdrfos 
Ldva os cdpos 
Dd hum a cadeira ao senhdr 
AssSnte-se vm. assente-se 

ao p6 do lume 
Nao tenhofrio, aqui ficarH 

miiito bem 
Vejdmos se o vinho he bdm 

Da cd aqu6lla garrdfa com 

aquelle c6po 
Fdga favdr de provdr 

aquelle vinho 
C6mo Ihe agrdda ; que diz 

vm. delle ? 
Nao h6 mdo, he muito bdm 
Eis aqui as linguigas, tira 

aquelle prdto 
C6ma vm. linguigas 
J a comi algumas, 6llas sao 

muito bdas 
Dd-me de beber 
A saude de vm. 
Bom proveito fdga a vm. 
Dd de beber ao senhdr 

E'u bebi dinda agdra 

Os pastelinhos 6rao bem 

b6ns 
Estdvao hum pduco mdis 

cozidos que deviao estdr 



To breakfast. 

BRING us something for 
breakfast 

Yes, sir, there are some sau- 
sages aud petty-patees 

Do you choose the gammon 
of bacon ? 

Yes, bring it ; we will eat a 
slice of it 

Lay a napkin on that table 

Give us plates, knives, and 

forks 
Rinse the glasses 
Reach the gentleman a ch air 
Sit down, sir ; sit by the fire 

I am not cold, I shall be 

very well here 
Let us see whether the wine 

be good 
Give me that bottle and a 

glass 
Taste that wine, pray 

How do you like it ? what 

say you to it ? 
It is not bad, it is very good 
Here are the sausages, take 

away this plate 
Eat some sausages, sir 
I have eat some, they are 

very good 
Give me some drink 
Your health, sir 
Much good may it do you 
Give the gentleman some 

drink 
I drank but just now 
The petty-patees were very 

good 
They were baked a little 

too much 



Vm. nao cdme 
TSnho comido tdnto, que 
nao poderH jantdr 



Vm. estct zombdndo, vm. 
nao tern comido ndda 

Tenho comido com muito 
g&sto, tdnto das lingui- 
gas como do presunto 



DIALOGUES. 321 

You do not eat 

I have eat too much, I shall 

not be able to eat any 

dinner 
You only jest, you have eat 

nothing at all 
I have eat very heartily 

both of sausages and 

gammon of bacon 



VL 



Para fallar Portuguez. 



COMO vdi vm. com o seu 

Portuguez ? 
Estd vm. ja muito adian- 

tddo nelle ? 
Ainda me fdlta muito ; 

nao set quasi ndda 
Dizem porem que vm. o 

fdlla muito hem 
Prouv6ra a Deos que assim 

fdsse ! 
Os que dizem isso, estdo 

muito enganddos 
Esteja vm. na certeza que 

assim mo diss6rao 
Pdsso fallar algumas pa- 

Idvras que aprendi de c<$r 
E unicamente o que h6 ne- 

cessdrio para comecar a 

fallar 
comecar nao he bastdnte 

he preciso que vm. acdbe 
Valle vm, s€mpre ou b&m 

ou mdl 
Tenho m6do de dar Srros 

Nao tSnha vm. medo ; a 

lingoa PortuguSza nao 

h6 difficil 
Conheco is so, e tambem que 

iUa he muito engragdda 
Que feliciddde seria a mi- 

nha se $u a soubtsse Mm I 



VI. To speak Portuguese. 

HOW goes on your Por- 
tuguese ? 

Are you much improved in 
it now ? 

Far from it ; I know no- 
thing almost 

It is said, however, you 
speak it very well 

Would to God it were true ! 

Those that say so are much 

mistaken 
I assure you I was told so 

I can say a few words which 
I have learnt by heart 

Only so much as is neces- 
sary to begin to speak 

The beginning is not all, 
you must make an end 

Be always speaking, whe- 
ther well, or ill 

I am afraid to commit blun- 
ders 

Never fear ; the Portuguese 
language is not hard 

I know it ; and that it has 
abundance of graces 

How happy should I be, if 
I were master of it ! 



322 D I A L O 

A applicagao h6 o ujiico 

m&yo para aprend6-la 
Quunto tempo ha que vm. 

aprSnde ? 
Ap&nas ha hum miz 
C6mo se chdma o seu m6s- 

tre? 

Chdma-se 

Ha muito tempo que o con- 

hego 
Elle tern ensinddo a muitos 

dos m6us amigos 
Nao Ihe diz Slle ser preciso 

que fdlle sempre Portu- 

guez ? 
Sim, senhor, assim me diz 

miiitas vezes 
P ois, por que nao f alia vm.? 
Com quern qu€r vm. que eu 

fdlle 
Com os que falldrem com 

vm. 
E'u quizera foliar, mas 

nao me atrSvo 
He preciso que vm. nao 

t6nha mSdo, nem se peje 

dos que o ouvirem falldr 



CUES. 

Application is the only way 

to learn it 
How long have you been 

learning ? 
Scarce a month yet 
What is your master's name ? 

His name is 



I have known him a great 

while 
He has taught several friends 

of mine 
Does not he tell you that 

you must constantly talk 

Portuguese ? 
Yes, sir, he often tells me so 

Why do not you talk then ? 
Who would you have me 

talk with ? 
With those who shall talk 

to you 
I would fain talk, but dare 
" not 
You must not be afraid, 

you must be bold 



VII. Do Tempo. 
QUEUmpofaz? 

O Umpo estd admirdvel 

O tempo estd roim 

Faz frio ? faz cdlma ? 

Naofazfrio, nao faz cdlma 

Chdve ? nao ch6ve ? 

Nao o crSyo 

O v6nto estd mudddo 

Ter6mos chuva 

Hoje nao ha de chovSr 

Chdve, Chdve a cdntaros 

Estd nevdndo 

Trovfy'a 



VII. Of the Weather, 

WHAT sort of weather is 

it? 
It is fine weather 
It is bad weather 
Is it cold ? is it hot ? 
It is not cold, it is not hot 
Does it rain ? doesit not rain ? 
I do not believe it 
The wind is changed 
We shall have rain 
It will not rain to-day 
.It rains, it pours 
It snows 
It thunders 



DIALO 

Cdhe pedra 
Relampaguea 
Fax miiita cdlma 
Geou a noite passdda ? 
Nao, senhor, mas agdra 

estd gedndo 
Parece-me que hd nevo6ir'o 

Vm. nao se engdna, assim 

h6 
Vm. tern hum grdnde ca- 

tarro or defliixo 
Hd quinze dias que o tenho 
Que hdras sao ? - 
He ceido, nao he tdrde 
He tempo de almogdr ? 
Pouco fdlta para sSrem 

hdras de j'antdr 
Quefaremos depots dejan- 

tdr? 
Daremos hum passeyo, or 

iremos passear 
Vdmos ddr huma volta 
Nao vdmos fora com este 

tempo 



GUES. 323 

It hails 

It lightens 

It is very hot 

Has it freezed last night ? 

No, sir, but it freezes now 

There appears to me to be 
a great fog 

You are not mistaken, it is 
very true 

You have caught a violent 
cold 

I have had it this fortnight 

, \Yhat , s o'clock ? 

'Tis early, 'tis not late 

Is it breakfast-time ? 

'Twill be dinner-time im- 
mediately 

What shall we do after din- 
ner? 

We'll take a walk 

Let us take a turn now 
We must not go abroad this 
weather 



VIII. Para perguntar que 
Novas ha. 

Q UE vai de n6vo ? or que 

ndvas hd ? 
Sdbe vm. algiima cousa de 

ndvo ? 
Nao tenho ouvido Jidda de 

novo 
Be que sefdllapella ciddde f 
Nao sefdlla de ndda 
Nao Undes ouvido falldr 

de guSrra ? 
Nao ougo falldr ndda disso 
Por6m fdlla-se de hum 

cerco 
Fallou-se nisso, mas nao 

he verddde 



VIII. To enquire after 

News. 

WHAT news is stirrmg ? 

Do you know any news ? 

I have heard none 

What's the talk of the town? 
There's no talk of any thing- 
Have you heard no talk of 

war ? 
I have heard nothing of it 
There's a talk however of a 

siege 
It was so reported, but it is 

not true 



y2 



324 



Antes pello contrdrio fdl- 

lase de pdz 
Assim o creyo 
Que se diz na corte ? 
Fdlla-se de huma via gem 
Qudndo vos parece que el 

rey partird ? 
Nao se sdbe. Nao se diz 

qudndo 
O'nde, or para 6nde se diz 

que €lle ird ? 
Huns dizem que ird para 

Fldndres, e uutros para 

Alemdnlia 
E que diz a Gazeta f 
E'u nao a li 
He verddde o que se diz do 

Sr. f 

P6is que se diz delle f 
Dizem que estdferido mor- 

talmente 
Muito me pesaria disso; 

6lle he hum homem de bem 
Quern oferio f 
Dous ?narotos que o inves- 

tirao 
Sdbe-se o porque f 

A noticia que cdrre he, que 

deu num delles hum bo- 

fetao 
E'u nao creyo isso ; nem eu 

tao pouco 
Eilo vdi, cedo saberSmos a 

verddde 



DIALOGUES. 

On the contrary there's a 



IX. Para escrever. 

DA'I-ME huma folha de 
pap6l, huma penna, e hu- 
ma pouca de tint a 

Tde ao meu quarto, e acha- 
reis em cima da mesa tudo 
o que vos for preciso 

Nao ha pennas 



talk of peace 
I believe so 

What say they at court ? 
They talk of a voyage 
When do you think the 

king will set out? 
Tis not known, they do not 

say when 
Where do they say hell go ? 

Some say into Flanders, 
others into Germany 

And what says the Gazette? 

1 have not read it 

Is it true what's reported of 

Mr. ? 

What of him ? 

They say he is mortally 

wounded 
I should be sorry for that, 

he's an honest man 
Who wounded him ? 
Two rogues that set upon 

him 
Is it known upon what ac- 
count ? 
The report is, that he gave 

one of them a box on the 

ear 
I don't believe it. Nor I 

neither 
However we shall soon 

know the truth 



IX. To write. 

GIVE me a sheet of paper, 
a pen, and a little ink 

Step to my closet, you'll 
find on the table what- 
ever you want 

There are no pens 



DIALOGUES. 



325 



Ha grdnde quantiddde del- 
las na escrivaninha 

Nao prestao para ndda 

La ha dutras 

.Nao estao aparddas 

O'nde estd o vosso caniv6te ? 

Sab6is v6s apardr p6nnas ? 

E'u apdro'Cis a meu mddo 

E'sta nao estd ma 

Em qudnto acdbo e'sta car- 
ta, fazeime o favor de 
feclidr as 6utras, efazer 
hum mdgo deltas 

Que sSllo qu6r vm. que eu 
Ihe pdnha ? 

S6lla-o com ' o meu sinete, 
or com as minhas drmas 

Com que Idcre quer vm. que 
asfeche ? 

Fechdi-as com o vermelho 
ou com opreto ; seja qudl 
fdr nao impdrta 

Tern vm. posto a data ? 

Par6ce~me que sim, mas 
ainda nao a assinei 

A qudntos estdmos hoje do 
met ? 

J 6uto y a d6z y a quinze, a 
vinte 

Ponde o sobrescrito ? 

O'nde estd a aria f 

V6s nunca tendes area 

Ahi ha alguma no areeiro 

Ahi estd o sSu criddo ; qu&r 
vm. que £lle Uve as car- 
tas ao corrSo ? 

L6va as minhas cartas ao 
correo, e nao te esqu6gas 
de pagdr o pdrte 

Nad tenho dinheiro 

Ahi estd huma ?no6da de 
ouro 

Vdi depr6ssa i e vem l6go 



There are a great many in 
the standish 

They are good for nothing 

There are some others 

They are not made 

Where is your penknife? 

Can you make pens ? 

I make them my own way 

This is not bad 

While I make an end of this 
letter, do me the favour to 
make a packet of the rest 

What seal will you have me 

put to it? 
Seal it with my cypher, or 

coat of arms 
Vfhat wax shall I put to it ? 

Put either red, or black, no 
matter which 

Have you put the date ? 

I believe I have, but I have 
not signed it 

What day of the month is 
this ? 

The eighth, the tenth, fif- 
teenth, twentieth 

Put the address 

Where is the powder? 

Yoti never have powder or 
sand 

There's some in the sand box 

There's your servant, will 
you let him carry the let- 
ters to the post-office ? 

Carry my letters to the post- 
office, and don't forget to 
pay postage 

I have no money 

There's a raoidore 

Go quickly, and return as 
goon as 



326 



DIALOGUES. 



X. Para comprar. 



X. To buy. 



Q TIE qu6r vm. ? 



Qu6ro hum bom pdnnofino 

para hum vestido 
Tenha vm. a bonddde de 

entrdr, e vera o metis b6lo 

pdnno que ha em L6ndres 
HSixe-me ver o melh6r que 

vm. tern 
Aqui tern vm. hum. excel- 
, lenie, que agdra se cos- 

tuma trazer 
He hum bom pdnno, mas a 

cor nao me agrdda 
Ahi tern vm. Sutra peca que 

tern a cor mats cldra 
Agrddame a cor, mas o 

panno nao he fdrte, nao 

tern corpo 
V6ja 6sta p6ga ; vm. nao 

achard em nenhuma 

parte outra taobdacomo 

6lla 
Qudnto pede vm. por edda 

ana ? 

O seu justo prego he 

Sr. nao he meu costume p6r- 

me a regatedr ; fdca-me 

favor de dizer me o Ulti- 
mo preco 
J a disse a vm. que aquelle 

he o seu jiisto preco 
He muito caro, dar the h£i 

a vm.— 
Nao p6sso abater hum 

ceitil 
Vm. nao hd de vender por 

Ssse pr€qo 
F?n< quiz sabSr o ultimo 

$riQQ % e m diss^lho 



WHAT do you want, sir ? 

What would you please 

to have ? 
I want a good fine cloth to 

make me a suit of clothes 
Be pleased to walk in, sir, 

you'll see the finest in 

London 
Shew me the best you have 

There's a very fine one, and 
what's worn at present 

'Tis a good cloth, but I don't 

like the colour 
There's another lighter piece 

I like that colour well, but 

the cloth is not strong, 'tis 

too thin 
Look at this piece, sir, you'll 

not find the like any 

where else 

What do you ask for it an 

ell? 

It is fairly worth 

Sir, I am not used to stand 

haggling; pray tell me 

your lowest price 

I have told you, sir, 'tis 

worth that 
'Tis too dear, I'll give 

you— 
I can't bate a farthing 

You must not charge that 

price 
You asked me the lowest 

price, and I have told you 



H6ra vdmos, corte vm. Id 

dicas anas clSlle 
Asseguro-lhe a vm. como 

hdmem de bem que sou, 

que nao gdnho ndda com 

vm. 
Ahi temvm. cinco moedas 

de duro, dS-me a demasia 
Tenha a bonddde de ddr- 

me dutra em lugdr desta, 

porque nao he de pezo 
Ahi esta dutra 
A Beos, criddo de vm. 



DIALOGUES. 327 

Come, come, cut off two 
ells of it 

I protest, on the word of an 
honest man, I don't get 
any thing by you 



There's five moidores, give 

me the change 
Be pleased, sir, to let me 

have another for this, it 

wants weight 
There's another 
Farewell ; sir, your servant 



XI. Para huma Jornada. XI. For a Journey. 



Q UANTAS Ugoas-hd da- 

qui a N. ? 
Ha Suto l6goas 
N6s nao poderemos chegdr 

Id hoje, h6 muito tdrde 
Nao hi sendo m&yo dia, 

vm ces ainda tern bastdnte, 

tempo 
He a estrdda boa? 
Nao he muito boa pdssao- 

se bosques e rios 
Ha algitm perigo n€lla ? 

Nao ha noticias disso ; he 
estrdda redl em que se 
encontra gente a cdda 
pas so 

Pois nao dizem que ha la- 
droens nos bdsques ? 

Nao ha de que ter medo, 
nem de dia, nem de noite 

For 6nde se vai ? 

Qudndo vm ces chegdrem ao 
pe do outSiro, he preciso, 
que i6mem a mao direita 

Pois nao h6 necessdrio 
subiv hum outSiro P 



HOW many leagues is it 

from this place to N. ? 
It is eight leagues 
We shall not be able to get 

thither to day, it is too late 
It is not more than twelve 

o'clock, you have time 

enough yet 
Is the road good ? 
So, so ; there are woods and 

rivers to pass 
Is there any danger upon 

that road ? 
There's no talk of it, it is a 

highway, where you meet 

people every moment 

Do not they say there ^re 

robbers in the woods ? 
There's nothing to be feared 

either by day or night 
Which way must one take? 
When you come near the 

hill, you must take to the 

right hand 
/ Is it not necessary to ascend 

a hill then ? 



328 



DIALOGUES. 



Nao, Sr. nao ha 6utro 
outeiro senao hiima pe- 
quena ladeira, (or des- 
cida) no bosque 

Ciista a atindr com o ca- 
minho pello meyo dos 
bdsques ? 

Vm c " nao pddem errd-lo 

L6go que vm c " sahirem do 
bdsque, lembrem-se de 
tomdr a mao esquerda 

Vm crs muitos dnnos, fico-lhe 
muito obrigddo 

Vdmos, vdjnos, senhdres, 
tomSmos hum cavdllo 

Onde estd o marqu6z ? 

E lief oi adidnte 

E'lle lid de estdr esperdndo 
por vos l6go ali fora da 
ciddde 

Fiquem-se embdra, sen- 
hores, a Deos 

Fdgao vm c " muito boa Jor- 
nada 



No, sir, there is no other 
hill but a little declivity 
in the wood 

Is it a difficult way through 
the woods? 

You can't lose your way 
As soon as you are out of 

the wood, remember to 

keep to the left hand 
I thank you, sir, and am very 

much obliged to you 
Come, come, gentlemen, 

let's take a horse 
Where is the marquis ? 
He is gone before 
He'll wait for you just out 

of the town 

Farewell, gentlemen, fare- 
well 

I wish you a very good 
journey 



XII. Da Cea e da Pousada. XII. Of Supper and 



COMQUE assim estdmos 

chegddos d estaldgem 
Apeemo-nos, senhores 
P6ga nos cavdllos dtstes 
senhores, e trdta delles 

Vejdmos agdra o que v?n. 
nos hd de ddr para cedr 

Hum cap ad, meya duzia de 
pombos, hiima saldda, 
sets codornizes, e hum a 
duzia do calhdndras 

Qu6rem vm"' mais alguma 
c6usa ? 

J'sto he bastdnle, ddi-nos 
algum vinho que s6ja 
b6m t e huma sobremSsa 



Lodging. 

SO, we are arrived at the 
inn 

Let's alight, gentlemen 

Take these gentlemen's 
horses, and take care of 
them 

Now let's see what you'll 
give us for supper 

A capon, half a dozen of pi- 
geons, a sallad, six quails, 
and a dozen of larks 

Will you have nothing else? 

That's enough, give us some 
good wine, and a dessert 



DIALOGUES. 



329 



Deixem vm c " isso por minha 

Conta, eu Ihes prometo 

quefiquem bem servidos 
Alumia aos senhores 
Ddi-nos de cedr o mdis de- 

pr6ssa que fdr possivel 
Antes que vm ces tSnhao des- 

calgddo as bdtas, estard 

a cea na mesa 
Tende cuidddo que trdgao 

para cima as nossas 

mdlas e pistdlas 
Descalcdi-me as bdtas, e 

despois ireis ver se tern 

dado algumfeno aos ca- 

vdllos 
Levdi-os ao rio, e tende 

cuidddo que Ihes dem 

alguma avea 
E'u terei cuidddo de tudo, 

estSjao vm ces descancddos 
Senhores, a cea estdpromp- 

ta, estd na misa 
N6s vdmos jd 
Vdmoscedr, senhores, para 

nos hirmos deitdr c6do 

Sentemo-nos, senhores, sen- 

temo-nos a misa 
Ddi-nos de bebSr 
A saude de vm c " meus se- 
nhores 
He bom o viiiho ? 
Nao he mdo 
O capao, nao esta bem as- 

sddo 
Ddi-nos humas poucas de 

lardnjas, e huma pouca 

de pinienta 
Porque nao come vm ce destes 

pombos ? 
Eu tenho comido hum p6m- 

bo, e trSs calhdndras 
Dize ao estalaja deiro que 

Ihe queremos faUdr 



Letmealone, I'll please you, 
I warrant you 

Light the gentlemen 
Let's have our supper as 

soon as possible 
Before you have pulled your 

boots off, supper shall be 

upon the table 
Let our portmanteaus and 

pistols be carried up stairs 

Pull off my boots, and then 
you shall go to see whe- 
ther they have given the 
horses any hay 

You shall carry them to the 
river, and take care they 
give them some oats 

I'll take care of everything, 
don't trouble yourself 

Gentlemen, supper is ready, 
it is upon the table 

We'll come presently 

Let's go to supper, gentle- 
men, that we may go to 
bed in good time 

Let us sit down, gentlemen, 
let's sit down at table 

Give us some drink 

To your health, gentlemen 

Is the wine good ? 

It is not bad 

The capon is not done 

enough 
Give us some oranges, and 

a little pepper 

Why don't you eat of these 

pigeons ? 
I have eaten one pigeon and 

three larks 
Tell the landlord we want 

to speak with kim 



330 



DIALOGUES, 



XIII. DoSaltaredoCorrer. 

HORA vdmos, quer vm. 

saltdr ? 
Nao h6 b6m saltdr Idgo 

despdis de corner 
De que mddo de saltdr gosta 

vm. mdis? 
O mats commum he a p&s 

juntos 
Quer vm. que saltemos so 

com hum p6? 
CSmo vm. quiz6r 
Este h6 hum sdlto muito 

grdnde 
Qudntos })6s saltou vm. ? 

Mdis de qudtro 

Aposlo que salto por cima 

daquelle barrdnco 
Vm. sdlta com hum pdo 

comprido 
Demos huma carreira 
Quir vm. que corrdmos a 

pe ou a cavdllo? 
De huma e outra sorte 
Diga vm. ddnde se ha de 

cojnegdr, e dnde se hd de 

acabdr 
ComegSmos a correr da qui 

Correremos ate chegdr a 

6sta druore 
TSnho corrido trSz vSzes 

d6sde o lugdr assinalddo 

at6 a drvore 
Vm. ndo esperoupello sindl 

para principidr a correr 
Aquelle cavdllo correo 

muito bem 
Qudnlas carreiras tern elle 

dddo ? 
Tr$8 ou qudtro 
Vm, tern ganhdda 



XIII. Of Jumping and 
Running. 

COME, will you go to 
jumping ? 

It is not good to jump im- 
mediately after dinner 

What leaping do you like 
best? 

The most usual is with one 
foot close to the other 

Shall we hop with one leg? 

As you please 

This is a very great leap 

How many feet have you 

leap'd? 
More than four 
I lay I leap clearly over that 

ditch 
You jump with a long stick 

Let us run races 

Shall we run on foot or on 

horseback ? 
Both ways 
Appoint the race 

This shall be the starting 

place ■ 

This tree shall be the goal 

I have run three times from 

the starting-place to the 

tree 
You did not stay for the 

signal to start 
That horse has run his race 

very well 
How many heats has he 

run? 
Three or four 
You have won the plate 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 331 



CARTAS 

PE 

COMMERCIO, 



Senhor F. F. 30 de Janeiro 
Londres, de 1827. 

RECEBF as suas de 3 
e 5 do passado, no dia 5 do 
corrente, vindas pelo navio 
F. F. capitao B. B. pelas 
quaes vejo, Vm" pretende 
carregdr as fazendas que 
recommendei ao seu cuidado 
pSla minha ultima, no pri- 
me'iro navio para 6sta. 

Inclusas remeto a Vm ce 
mais algumas amostras, 
porem dezejo que queira 
recomenddr ao tintureiro, 
que as cores sejao vivas e 
firmes. 

Pelo ultimo navio que 
daqui partio Ihe remeti a 
conta de vSnda, da sua 
partida de mSias de seda, 
e das tres cdxas de chapeds, 
pelo navio A ; e achdndo 
Vm ce algumas partidas de 
qualqu6r destes dous g6- 
neros, que Ihe agrddem, as 
pdde ?nandar, pois sao 
agora mui procurddos ; 
deve comtudo ter muito 
cuidado em que sejao da 
ultima modat T^nfio veri* 



LETTERS 

on BUSINESS, or 

MERCANTILE AF- 
FAIRS. 



Mr.F.F. The 30th of Jan. 
London. 1827. 

YOURS of the 3rd and 
oth of last month, came 
to hand on the 5th current 
by the ship F. F. captain 
B. B. ; and therein I take 
notice, that you intend to 
put on board the next good 
ship bound hither, the goods 
I recommended to your 
care in my last. Herewith 
I send you more patterns, 
but I would desire you to 
be solicitous with your 
dyer, that the colours may 
be lively and durable. By 
the last ship I remitted you 
account of sales of the 
parcel of silk stockings, 
and the three boxes of hats, 
by the ship A ; and if you 
meet with a parcel of either, 
or both, to your mind, 
please to send them, such 
articles being now in de- 
mand, but great care must 
be taken of the fashion and 
make. I have taken care 
to secure your twenty pipes 
ST oil for the first ships in 



332 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



ficddo o ajuste das 20pipas 
azeite da safra proxima, 
para partirem pelos pri- 
meiros navios : igualmente 
tenho carregddo no navio 
N. Capitao F. as suas 20 
pipas de vinho Unto ; assim 
como tamb6m as doze e tres 
quartos de brdnco, cuja 
factura remeto inclusa : 
os conhecimentos, Ihos re- 
meter eipelo correio. Heide 
estimdr chegue tudo a 
salvam&nto. H6 qudnto 
por hdra se ?ne offerece a 
dizerlhe ; no entretdnto 
s6u 

De Vm u muito 
Veneraddr e Criddo. 



the season, and put on 
board the ship N. capt. F. 
your twenty pipes of red, 
and twelve pipes and three 
hogsheads of white wine, 
of which the Invoice goes 
herewith, and the bills of 
lading shall be sent by the 
post, and I hope will come 
safe to hand ; which being 
all that is necessary at pre- 
sent, 1 remain, 

Sir, 
Your humble Servant. 



v Senhor Diogo Jones. 

VO U por 6sta avisdr a 
Vm ce que pelo navio Derby, 
Ihe remeti duds saquinhas 
de diamdntes, importdndo 
em pagodas 4,396. 25 fan. 
10 casks, em retdrno dos 
sens fundos em men poder ; 
os quaes fiz registrar nos li- 
vros da companhia em con- 
formiddde com as suas or- 
dems. 

Inclusos achard o conhe- 
cimento, factura e a sua 
conta corrente fechdda, que 
desejo cheguem a salva- 
mento e me alegrarei de 
quefaga grandes intereces. 

Como eu estou para vol- 
tarpara a Eurdpa, d minha 
chegdda a Ldndres, terei 



Mr. James Jones. 

Sir; 
THESE will advise you, 
that by this ship, the Derby, 
I have made the return of 
your stock in my hands, 
viz. two bulses of diamonds, 
amountingtopagodas 4,396, 
25 fan. 10 casks, having 
registered them according 
to your order in the com- 
pany's books ; inclosed, is a 
bill of lading, together with 
invoice, and your account 
current closed, which I 
wish muy come safe to 
you, and turn to a good 
account. As I am return- 
ing to Europe, at my ar- 
rival in London, I shall 
have the honour to see you, 



COMMERCIAL 

a hdnra de o v6r, e the 
darei entao huma relagao 
exacta do commercio da 
India. 
Tenho o gosto de s€r, 
De Vm ct reverente Crd° 
e Venerador. 
Forte de S. Jorge. 
12 de Jan. 1826. 



LETTERS, &c. 333 

and give you an exact ac- 
count of the trade in India. 
I am entirely, 

Sir, 
Your humble Servant. 
Fort St. George, 
Jan. 12, 1826. 



Lisboa,4: de Mar go de 1825. 

Snr. Joao Ferrier, 
Londres. 

ACHO-ME favorecido 
com a siia de 3 do passddo, 
e vej'o, que em execugdo as 
minhas drdems, Vm" tern 
comprddo os quinhentos 
barris de arenques defiimo, 
a ill. por last. Estou c6rto 
que €sse h6 o mendr preco 
por que Vm ce os pode obter, 
e nao Unho a menor duvida 
que hao de corresponds na 
sua qualiddde. 

O meu navio se estd a 
aparelhdr para os ir bus- 
car, e visto elle nao deman- 
ddr mais de ndve pes d'd- 
gua, poderd mesmo carre- 
gdr no seu cdes (como Vm ce 
t6ve a bonddde de me dizer) 
o que jooupard quatro pen- 
nyspor barril, de desp6sas. 
Julgo que elle poderd car- 
regdr sette centos barris, 
ou mais. O capitao visto 
nao ter despezas a fazer, 
nao necessiiard de dinheiro. 

Agradego-lhe muito a sua 
informagdo relativaminte 



Lisbon, 4 March, 1825. 
Mr. John Ferrier, 

London. 
Sir, 

I AM favoured with 
yours of the 3rd of last 
month, and find, in com- 
pliance with my order, you 
have bought the five hun- 
dred barrels of red herrings, 
at III. per last. I make no 
doubt, but that was the low- 
est price you could get them 
for, and the goodness of 
them corresponds. My 
ship is getting ready with 
all speed to go down to 
fetch them, and she may be 
laden at your quay, as she 
draws no more than nine 
feet of water (as you are 
pleased to mention), which 
will save the charge of four- 
pence per barrel; I judge 
she will carry seven hun- 
dred barrels, or more. The 
captain will not have occa- 
sion for any money, so will 
want no supply. I thank 
you for the information 
you gave me in relation to 
the exchange between Lon- 



334 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



ao cdmbio 6ntre Ldndres e 
6sta prdga> mas cdmojulgo 
as reme'ssas sobre o Exche- 
quer hum pSuco arriscddas, 
Vm ce se servird sacdr sobre 
mim ao cdmbio mats van- 
tajdso possivel, ficdndo na 
cerUza, que as suas lettras 
serdo pdgas coin a ponctu- 
aliddde do costume. 
Tenho o gdsto de ser 
Be Vm ce - m t0 . Attento Ven or . 



don and this place, but as I 
look upon the remittance 
of the money hence as 
hazardous in Exchequer 
bills, you will be pleased 
to draw on me at the most 
commodious exchange pos- 
sible, and your bills at the 
usual course, which shall 
meet with all due honour 
from, 

Sir, 
Your humble servant. 



Londres, IS de Mar go 
de 1826. 

Snr. J, Morrice, 

Cadiz. 

TENHO recebido em 
se"u devido tempo as suas 
differentes cartas, assim 
cdmo tambem a minha c6n- 
ta corrente, a qudl tenho 
langddo nos meus livros 
em conformiddde com Vm ce . 

A sua ultima he de 29 
do passddo, e nella me 
mdnda o recibo das trSs 
Mttras, emportdndo em seis 
mil p6gas de oito, que meu 
irmao Joze the remeteu por 
minha cdnta e 6rdem : es- 
p6ro fazer triste negdcio 
com Hlas depdis de hum 
desembdlgo de tdnto tempo, 
e com hum cdmbio tao 
desfavordvel. Acho que os 
limites que dlle Ihe dSu, 
forao muito abdxo do cdm- 
bio, e pr6go da prdta : 
por6m visto eu ter esperddo 



London, March 18, 1826. 

Mr. J. Morrice, 
Cadiz. 
Sir, 

YOUR several letters 
came to hand in due time, 
as did my account current, 
which I have noted in con- 
formity with you ; your 
last to me was of the 29th 
ult., wherein you give 
me receipt of the three 
bills, amounting to six 
thousand pieces of eight, 
which my brother Joseph 
sent to you for my account 
and by my order ; I shall 
make but a sad bargain 
of them, after so long a dis- 
bursement ; besides they 
cost me a dear exchange ; 
I find his limits to you 
were much under the price 
of plate and exchange : 
now since 1 have w T aited all 
this time, and there being 
no probability of their 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 335 



todo este tempo, e nao 
haver probabiliddde de hum 
ou outro baixdr, Vm ce se 
servird remet&r-me o men 
dinheiro, ao cdmbio cor- 
r£nte, para esta prdga, ou 
Amsterdam, como Ihe pare- 
c6r metis conveniSnte aos 
m&us inter esses. 

Se o pre go do cochenilha, 
ou daprdta descSsse tdnto, 
que Vm ce julgdsse ser mdis 
conveniSnte para mim 9 em- 
pregdr o meu dinhHro em 
qualqu6r d6stes dois g6ne- 
ros, do que remet£r-me ISt- 
tras, n6sse cctzo o poderd 
fazer, deichdndo eu isso~ 
inteiraminte d sua dispo- 
sigao, na certeza de que 
tratard dos mSus inter esses, 
com o m€smo disv6lo cdmo 
se fossem sSus proprios. 

Estimaria sab6r da che- 
gdda do cambdy, porque 
poderia sir produzisse al- 
guma muddnga favordvel 
no commercio, e que edda 
hum podSsse fazer iiso dos 
seus capitdes ; pots ao 
presente as circumstancias 
nao convidao a ndda. H6 
qudnto por agora se me 
offerSce a dizSrlhe. No 
entretdnto tenho o gosto de 
ser 

De Vm ce m t0 AttSnto 
Ven w e Criddo. 



falling, be pleased to send 
my money, as the ex- 
change comes, either for 
this place or Amsterdam, 
which you judge will turn 
most to account. If the 
plate or cochineal should 
fall to a price which 
you may conceive will 
answer better than by re- 
mittance at a due ex- 
change, in such case invest 
my money in either of 
them, this I shall leave 
entirely to you, being per- 
suaded you will act in my 
affairs as if they were your 
own. I should be glad 
to hear of the fleet's ar- 
rival ; for, perhaps, it might 
give some favourable turn 
to business, so that one 
could make some use of 
one's money, for at pre- 
sent it does not invite one 
to any thing ; which is all 
from, 

Sir, 
Your humble Servant. 



336 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



Londres, 3 de Abril 
de 1826. 

Sen rti Mills $ C\ 

Porto. 

EST A serve de infor- 
mar a Vm ces que de sexta 
feira a iota dias se hao de 
abrir os livros do Banco de 
Inglaterra, para pagar 
os devidendos vencidos ate 
aquelle dia, em que eu nao 
deicharei de receber o que 
Ihes pertence dos juros re- 
spectivos ate a esse tempo, 
em virtude dos pod e res que 
me conferirao para esse 
fim, e depots de os ter rece- 
bido, Ihos remetrei. 

Deos guarde a Vm c " 
m tos annos. 
De Vm ciS m 10 
Fen or e Crd\ 



London, 3rd of April, 
1826. 

Messieurs Mills & Co. 

Oporto. 

THIS may serve to in- 
form you that the books 
will be opened at the Bank 
of England on Friday 
se'nnight, to pay the divi- 
dends due up to this time 
to the parties concerned, 
when I shall be ready to 
receive whatever belongs 
to you both, with the re- 
spective interests thereon, 
by virtue of your powers 
given to me for that pur- 
pose, and on receipt there- 
of, shall remit the same to 
you, whom God preserve 
many years. 

Your most humble 
Servant. 



Hum Escrito, ou Bilhete 
aberto, a hum Amigo ou 
Vezinho, em qualquer 
ocasiao. 



AO Senr. G. S. que seu 
creado T. M. Ike roga o 
favor, de Ihe enviar pelo 
portador 

de que agora pre- 
cisa, e por que Ihe ficard 
rauito obrigado. 



A short open Note or 
Message, to a friend or 
neighbour ; for any thing, 
upon occasion. 

TO Mr. G. S. that his 
most humble servant, T. 
M. desires the favour of 
him to send by the bearer 

having 
immediate occasion for it, 
and by which he will greatly 
oblige him. 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &e. 337 



Carta, on Instrurnento de 
Procuracao. 

SAIBAM todos qudntos 
este instrurnento, ou carta 
de procuragdo virem, que 
eu, A. B., de Londres, h6- 
mem de ?iegdcio, tenho 
nomeddo e constituido e 
por esta presente nomeo, 
ordeno, cojistituo e /ago o 
senhor B. C. de 
negociante, meo verdadeiro 
e legitimo procuraddr, por 
mini e em meu nome e ao 
■meu uso, pode demanddr, 
arecaddr, e regeber de T. 
B. negociante a soma de 
a mini devida pelo 
ditto T. B. ddndo e por 
esta concedendo ao meu 
ditto procuraddr o meu 
poder plenario e autori- 
dcide de exercitdr, e de usar 
de tod as e taes acgoes e 
outras cousas em direito 
?iecessdrias, para a co- 
brdnga da ditto divida, e em 
meu ndme, de dar, e fazer 
quitagoes ou outras descdr- 
gas, e geralmente de fazer 
e executar na materia so- 
breditta tab plendriamente 
como se eu mesmo fizesse 
ou pudesse fazer, estando 
pessoalmente presente; ra- 
tificdndo, confirmdndo, e 
outorgando toda e qualquer 
cousa que o ditto meu pro- 
curadorlegitimamentefizer 
ou causdr de se fazer n€lla 
por esta presente. Em tes- 
ieniunha do que assi?iei e 



A Letter of Attorney. 



KNCHY all men by these 
presents, that I, A. B., of 
London, merchant, have 
named and constituted, and 
by these presents do name, 
ordain, appoint, and make 
my trusty friend, B. C. of 
merchant, 
my true and lawful attor- 
ney, for me, and in my 
name, and to my use, to 
demand, sue for, recover, 
and receive of T. B. of 

merchant, the 
sum of to me 

due and owing by and from 
the said T. B. g'iving, and 
hereby granting unto my 
said attorney, my full power 
and authority to use and 
exercise all such acts, 
things, and devices in the 
law, as shall be necessary 
for the recovering of the 
said debt, and give acquit- 
tance, or other discharges, 
in my name ; to make and 
give, and generally to do 
and execute on the premi- 
ses, as fully as myself 
might or could do, were I 
personally present : rati- 
fying, confirming and al- 
lowing all and whatsoever 
my said attorney shall 
lawfully do, or cause 
to be done therein, by 
these presents. In wit- 
ness whereof I have here- 
unto set my hand and 



338 COMMERCIAL 

sellei 6sia em aos 20 dias 
do m6z de Mar go de 1826. 
For A. B. 
Assinado e sellado 
didnte de 

T A 1 

M B r Testemunhas, 



LETTERS, &c. 




seal, the 20th of March, 


1826. A. 


B. 


Sealed and delivered 




in the Presence of 




T. A. 




M. B. 





Carta 5 ou o Instrumento de 
Fretamento. 

EST A carta, ou instru- 
mSnto de fretamento con- 
tratddo,feito aos 
dias do mez de do 

anno de do naci- 

mento de ?i6sso Senhor 
Jesus Christo, §c. Entre 
T. B. mestre, debaixo de 
Deos, do navio nomeddo, 
de dozentas e cin- 
coenta ionetddas que ao 
presenle estd surto e ancor- 
ddo no Ho de - de 

huma 'parte, e E. T. M. 
B. L. fyc, homens de nego- 
cio da outra parte : Cer- 
tificao que o ditto m6stre 
tern dado em alugu6l efre- 
tcido o ditto navio aos dit- 
tos hdmens de negdcio e que 
elles os dittos homens de 
negocio tern tornado em 
alugu6l pella vidgem aos 
concertos e as condigoes, 
a saber : o ditto m6sirefaz 
concerto, promeie e ot&rga, 
por elle m£smo, seus testa- 
mentSiros, e administra- 
dores, e com os dittos ho- 
mens de negdcio, e qual- 
quer delles, ou sSus, e a 
qualquer dos seus testamen- 



The Copy of a Charier- 
Party of Affreightment. 

THIS charter party of 
Affreightment, indented, 
made the 
of the month of 
anno domini, 

between T. A. master, 
under God, of the good ship 
or vessel, called the 
of the burthen of 
tons, or thereabouts, now 
riding at anchor, in the 
river of of 

the one part, and E, T, M, 
B, L, &c. merchants, of the 
other part, witnesseth, that 
the said master has granted 
and let the said ship to 
freight unto the said mer- 
chants, and that they the 
said merchantshave accord- 
ingly hired her for the 
voyage, and upon the terms 
and conditions following : 
that is to say, the said mas- 
ter doth covenant, promise, 
and grant for himself, his 
executors, and administra- 
tors, to and. with the said 
merchants, and either of 
them, their and either of 
their executors, administra- 
tors, and assigns, by these 



COMMERCIAL 

tSiros, administrdddres, e 
constituintes, por estes pre- 
sentes ; que o ditto navio 
forte e sao de quilha, e'bem 
provido de mantimentos, 
enxdrcias e gSnte, e aparel- 
hctdo de todas as cousas 
convenientes e necessdrias 
para fazer a viagem adi- 
ante declarada ; com o pri- 
meiro vento favor dvel e 
bdm tempo que Deos per- 
mit tir despots da data da 
presente, patird do pdrto 
de com iodas as 

tdes fazendas e merca- 
dorias que as dittos homens 
de negdcio ou os sens con- 
stituintes, enirementes car- 
regardo ou meter do abdrdo 
ddlle e com elle em direitura 
dard a vela e aplicard ao 
como o vento e 
o iSmpo mats favorecerem 
ao ditto navio na sua via- 
gem ; e em chegdndo tao 
p6rto do ditto lugdr de 
elle o ditto m6stre 
ou os seus constituintes den- 
tro de dias de tra- 

bdlho para se contdrem 
16 go despots de tal sua che- 
gdda, nao somente descare- 
garao, entregarao as dittas 
fazendas e mercadorias me- 
tidas abordo do ditto navio 
ao sdbre ditto, aos 

dittos homens de negdcio, 
aos seusfeitores ou consti- 
tuintes, 6u a alguns ou al~ 
gum delles a salvamSnto e 
bem acondicionddas, salvo 
o risco dos mares, e o tolhi- 
m6nto de principes e gover- 



LETTERS, &c. 339 

presents ; that the said ship, 
strong and sound, and well 
and sufficiently victualled, 
tackled, manned, and ap- 
parelled, with all things fit, 
needful and necessary, for 
the performance of the voy- 
age, hereafter mentioned, 
shall, with the first fair 
wind and weather, which 
God shall send, after the 
date of these presents, de- 
part from the port of 

w^ith all such 
goods and merchandize as 
the said merchants, or their 
assigns, shall in the mean 
time lade and put on board 
of her, and therewith di- 
rectly sail, and apply unto 
as wind and 
weather shall best serve for 
• the said ship to sail, and 
being arrived as near to the 
said place of 

he the said master, or as- 
signs shall and will, within 

working days 
next from and after such 
her arrival to be accounted, 
not only unlade and deli- 
ver the said goods and 
merchandize put on board 
the said ship at 
aforesaid, unto the said 
merchants, their factors, or 
assigns, or some or one of 
them, in safety, and well 
conditioned, the dangers of 
the seas, and restraint of 
princes and rulers excepted, 
but also shall and will re- 
ceive, relade, and take on 
board the said ship, of and 
2 



340 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



nad6res, mas iamb 6m rece- 
berdo, iornardo a carregdr, 
e tomardo abdrdo do ditto 
navio, de e dos dittos ho- 
mens de negdcio, dos s&us 
feitdres ou constiiuintes, ou 
de alguns ou algum delles, 
todas as tdes fazendas £ 
mercadorias que Sites ou 
qualquer delles ali car eg a- 
rdo, ou meter ao abdrdo delle 
ate" o comprimento inteiro 
da cdrga do ditto navio ; 
a saber : tdnto qudnto bem 
se pod6r arrumdr debdixo 
da cub6rta no conve's, e 
adidnte do mastro grdnde, 
salvo o lugar para os man- 
timSntos, enxdrcias e apa- 
rUhos do ditto navio, e os 
dittos dias de 

trabdlho sendo acabddos, 
ou o ditto navio sendo ali 
mais depr€ssa despachddo, 
o que primSiro succeder, 
elle o ditto mestre ou os 
seus constituintes com a 
primeira bda occasido de 
t&mpoe vento favor dvel em 
dereitura navegardo e tor- 
nardo a vir c6m o ditto 
navio e a sua cdrga, do 
ditto pdrto de descaregar, 
e recaregar de 
aqui dentro de 

dids de trabdlho Idgo 
despois da entrdda do ditto 
navio ddda na alfdndega 
desta ditta elle o 

ditto m6stre ou os seus con- 
stituintes descaregar do e 
entregardo as dittas fazen- 
das e mercaddrias carre- 
gddas abdrdo do ditto na- 



from the said merchants, 
their factors, or assigns, or 
some or one of them, all 
such goods and merchan- 
dize, as they or any of them 
shall there please to lade 
and put on board her, to 
the said ship's full and 
complete lading ; that is to 
say, as much as can con- 
veniently be stowed in the 
whole hole, and between 
decks, afore the mainmast, 
room only reserved for the 
said ship's provisions, tackle, 
and apparel, and the said 
working days 
being expired, or the said 
ship there sooner dispatched , 
which first shall happen, he 
the said master, or his 
assigns, shall and will, with 
the then next opportunity 
of wind and weather from 
her said unlading and re- 
lading port of afore- 
said, directly sail, return, 
and come back with the 
said ship and lading unto 
the port of and 
here within work- 
ing days next after the said 
ship shall be entered in the 
custom-house of this said 
he the said mas- 
ter, or his assigns, shall and 
will unlade, and deliver the 
said goods and merchan- 
dizes, laden on board the 
said ship at her lading and 
relading aforesaid, 
unto the said merchants, 
their executors, adminis- 
trators, or assigns, in safety, 



COMiMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 341 



vio ao s4u descarregdr e 
recarregdr sobre 

ditto, nos dittos hdmens de 
negdcio, e os seus testamen- 
tSiros, administraddres, ou 
constituintes, a salvam&nto, 
salvo o risco dos mares e o 
tolkimento- de principes e 
governadores, e assim se 
acabard a ditta destinada 
via gem e os dit- 

tos hdmens de negdcio con- 
certain, prometem, e oidr- 
gam por elles mesmos e 
qualqu6r delles, ou sSus, e 
qualqu6r de sSus testamen- 
teiros, administr adores, e 
constituintes por esta pre- 
sente : que os seus tes- 

tament Sir os, administra- 
ddres, feitdres ou constitu- 
intes nao sdjnSnto descarre- 
gardu e recarregardo o ditto 
navio ao seu pdrto, de des- 
carregdr, e recarregar de 
sobre ditto, 
e despachardo e descar- 
regardo o mdsmo neste 

na maneira e 
forma acima declardda : 
e dentro dos certos dias 
e tempos sobre nomeddos ; 
mas tambSm por intSiro 
de tddo o frete que 
se veneer, para se pagar 
pedir por e durdnte €sta 
presenie destinada via gem; 
bem e verdadeiramente pa- 
gardo ou causardo que se 
pdgue ao ditto mSstre, aos 
seus testament eiros, admi- 
nistraddres ou constitu- 
intes a somma de 
de dinheiro cor- 



and well conditioned, the 
dangers of the seas, and 
restraint of princes and 
rulers, excepted, and so end 
the said intended voyage ; 
and the said merchants do 
covenant, promise, and 
grant, for themselves, and 
either of them, their, and 
either of their executors 
and administrators, to and 
with the said master, his 
executors and administra- 
tors, and assigns, by these 
presents, that their 

executors, administrators, 
factors, or assigns, shall and 
will not only unlade and 
relade the said ship, at 
her unlading and relading 
port of aforesaid, 

and dispatch, and discharge 
the same at this 
in the manner and form as 
above expressed, and with- 
in the respective days and 
times above mentioned, but 
also shall and will, in full of 
all freight to be due, pay- 
able, or demandable, for or 
during this present intended 
voyage, well and duly pay, 
or cause to be paid, unto 
the said master, his execu- 
tors, administrators, or as- 
signs 

the sum of 
of lawful money of 
in the manner and form 
following : that is to say, 
part thereof 
within days after 

the said ship shall be en- 
tered into the custom- 



342 COMMERCIAL 

rente de na manSira 

efdrma seguinte ; a saber : 
parte 
dSlle dSntro em 
dids despdis da entrdda do 
ditto navio ddda na alfan- 
dega de Item 

mdis dSntro em 

dias proximos seguintes, 
e o restdnte do ditto frSte 
intSiro dSntro em 
dias Idgo despdis da des- 
cdrga do ditto navio aqui 
em sobre ditto, 

E acdrdase reciprocamSnte 
por e Sntre dmbas as partes 
por Sties mSsmos, os sens 
particuldres testamentei- 
ros, e administr adores que 
todos os gdstos dos pdrtos 
que se vencerem para pa~ 
gdrse ou pedirse, durdnte 
esta presSnte destindda 
vidgem ; serdo pdgos e sa- 
tisfeitos na maneira e 
fdrma seguinte : a sabSr 

delles, pellos dittos 
hdmens de negocio ou s6us 
testamenteiros ou consti- 
tuintes : Al6m disso, por, 
6sta se conc6rta que poderd 
ser e sSja licito aos, e 
p Silos dittos hdmens de 
negocio, os sSus feitores, 
ou constituintes de retSr o 
ditto navio em detSnga ao 
seu pdrto, descarga e re- 
carga sobre ditta, e tambem 
em .... sobre ditto, tanto 
tempo e tdntos dias que se 
requSirdo, alem dos dias 
cSrtos acima apontddos, 
sdlvo que ndo pdssem 

dies por intSiro ; elles 



LETTERS, Sec. 

house of Item 

more thereof 
within days then 

next following, and the 
remaining part of the said 
whole freight within 
days next after the said 
ship shall be delivered after 
lading here at 
aforesaid; and it is mutually 
agreed by and between the 
said parties to these presents, 
for themselves, their several 
executors and administra- 
tors, that all port charges 
which shall grow due, pay- 
able, or demandable, during 
this present intended voy- 
age, shall be paid and 
satisfied in the manner and 
form following ; that is to 



say, 



thereof by 



the said merchants, their 
executors, factors, or as- 
signs, and the other 
thereof by the said master, 
his executors- or assigns : 
further, it is hereby agreed, 
that it shall and may be 
lawful unto and for the said 
merchants, their factors, or 
assigns, to keep the said 
ship in demurrage at her 
unlading and relading port 
above mentioned, and also 
at aforesaid, over 

and above the respected 
days aforementioned, such 
other time and number of 
days as will be requisite, so 
as the same exceed not 

days in the whole, they 
the said merchants, their 
factors, for each and every 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 343 



os dittos homensdenegdcio, 
os seusfeitdres, constituin- 
tes por cdda hum e cdda 
tdl dia pagdndo ao ditto 
mSstre ou aos sens consti- 
tuintes de dia em dia, cdmo 
mSs?no se veneer para se 
pagdr, qualquer cdusa so- 
breditta em contrario ndo 
obstdnte ; e pello compri- 
mento de tddas, e de cdda, 
huma das cdusas acima 
declarddas, as quaes por 
pdrte e pello que toca ao 
ditto m&stre, aos seus testa- 
menteir os, administr adores 
ou constituintes e cdda hum 
d Sites sao e devem de ser 
avidas, tidas, observddas 
e compridas, o ditto me'stre 
se obriga a si mSsmo, os 
seus testament eiros, e ad- 
ministraddres, juntamente 
com o ditto navio, o seu 
fre'te, enxarcias eaparSlhos 
aos dittos homejis de negd- 
cio, aos sSus testamentei- 
ros, administr adores e con- 
stituinies, e cdda hum 
dilles na soma ou pena de 
dinhSiro corrente de 
para se pagdr bem e ver- 
dadeirdmSnte por 6sta pre- 
sente, e tambem pSllo com- 
primento de tddas e de cdda 
hiima das cdusas sabre 
dittas, os quaes por pdrte 
e pSllo que toca aos dittos 
hdmens de negdcio, aos sSus 
testamenteiros administra- 
ddres, constituintes ou qual- 
quSr dSlles, sao e d6vem de 
s£r guardddasi pdgas, e 
cgmpridaBi os dittos h6» 



such day, paying unto the 
said master, or his assigns 
day by day, 
where the same shall grow- 
due and payable, any thing 
aforesaid to the contrary 
notwithstanding ; and for 
the performance of all and 
singular the premises, which 
on the part and behalf of 
the said master, his execu- 
tors, administrators, and 
assigns, and every of them, 
are and ought to be well 
and truly hold en, observed, 
and performed, the said 
master doth bind and oblige 
himself, his executors, and 
administrators, together 
with the said ship and her 
freight, tackle and apparel 
unto the said merchants, 
their executors, administra- 
tors, and assigris, and every 
of 'them, in the sum or 
penalty of pounds 

of lawful money of 
well and truly to be paid 
by these presents, and like- 
wise for the performance 
of all and singular the 
premises, which on the 
part and behalf of the Said 
merchants, their executors, 
administrators, and assigns, 
or any of them, are and 
ought to be kept, paid and 
performed, the said mer- 
chants do bind and oblige 
themselves, their executors, 
and administrators, jointly 
and severally, together 
with their goods, to be 
laden on board $w mid 



344 COMMERCIAL 

mens de negdcio s6 obrigad 
a si mdsmos, os sius testa- 
menUiros, e administra- 
dores, junta e separdda- 
mhite cdm a suasfazendas 
que se caregarao abordo do 
ditto navio n6sta presente 
destindda vidgem, ao ditto 
mistre aos sens testamen- 
teiros, administraddres e 
constituintes, e a cdda hum 
delles, na semelhdnte soma 
da pSna de de se- 

melhdnte dinheiro corrente 
de para sSr pago 

hem e verdadeiramente por 
6sta presente; em teste- 
munha do que as partes 
sobredittas assindrao e 
setdrao reciprocamente 6s- 
tas depresentes cdrtasfreta- 
mento contratddas, ao dia e 
dnno primSiro acima decla- 
rddo. 

T. B. 
Sellddo e entregue 
diante de 

A. B. 

C. D. 



Apolice de Seguro. 
EM o Nome de Deos, 
Amen, 

tdnto no seu pr6prio ndme, 
c6mo, por, ou em o ndme, 
ou n6mes de t6dos e cada 
pessoa ou pessdas a quern 
o m&smo pertencer, pdssa 
ou poderd pertencer, em 
parte ou em t6do, fax o 
seguro, causa asi mesmo 
e a titles, e a cada hum 
dSUes.; de assegurdrse, per- 



LETTERS, &c. 

ship, this present intended 
voyage, unto the said 
master, his executors, ad- 
ministrators, and assigns, 
and every of them, in the 
like sum and penalty of 

of like lawful money 
of also well and 

truly to be paid by these 
presents. In witness where- 
of, the parties aforesaid to 
these present charter-parties 
indented, have interchange- 
ably put their hands and 
seals the day and year first 
above written. 

T. B. 
Sealed and delivered in 
the presence of 
A. B, 
C. D. 



A Policy of Assurance. 

IN the Name of God, 
Amen, as well 

in his own name, as for and 
in the name and names of 
all and every other person 
and persons to whom the 
same doth, may, or shall 
appertain, in part, or in all, 
doth make assurance, and 
cause himself and them, 
and every of them, to be 
insured, lost, or not lost 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 345 



didos ou nao perdidos 
sdbre qualquer g6nero de fa- 
zendas e mercadorias quaes- 
qu6r, carregddas, 6u para 
se carregdrem, abdrdo do 
b6m navio por nome 

do porte de 
tonelddas, de que h6 m€stre 
debaixo de Deos P. M. ou 
quern qu6r que for por 
mestre do ditto navio, ou o 
m€stre, delle se nomee ou 
nomeard ; principidndo a 
aventura sobre as dittas 
fazSndas e mercadorias de, 
e logo despois de carregdl- 
las abdrdo do ditto navio 
e assim se continuard 
e Jicard at6 que o ditto 
navio cdm as dittas faz&n- 
das e mercadorias qudes- 
qu6r chegar e as 

mSsmas ahi descarregddas 
em salvamento ; e sera 
licito parao ditto navio, 
nesta vidgem, de pardr e 
detSrse em qudesquer p6r- 
tos, ou lugdres sem 

prejuizo a iste Seguro. As 
dittas fazendas e mercado- 
rias por concerto, sao, e se- 
rdo avaliadas em 
Sem que se dS Sutra conta 
deltas mesmas, tocdnte as 
aventuras e riscos com que 
nds os seguradores nos 
contentamos e que tomdmos 
sobre nos ?i6sta vidgem ; 
ellas sao dos mares, das 
ndos de gu6rra, de fogo, 
inimigos, corsarios, lad- 
roes, roubaddres, alijamen-^ 
tos ou fazendas perdidas e 
deitddas no mar, lettras de 



upon any kind 
of goods and merchandize 
whatsoever, laden or to be 
laden aboard the good ship 
called the burthen 

tons, or there- 
abouts ; whereof P. M. is 
master, under God, for this 
present voyage 
or whosoever else shall go 
for master in the said ship, 
or by whatsoever name or 
names the said ship, or 
the master thereof, is or 
shall be named or called ; 
beginniDg the adventure 
upon the said goods and 
merchandise from and im- 
mediately following the 
lading thereof aboard the 
said ship and so 

shall continue and endure 
until the said ship, with 
the said goods and mer- 
chandise whatsoever shall 
be arrived and the 

same there safely landed ; 
and it shall be lawful for 
the said ship in this voyage 
to stop and stay at any 
port or places 
without prejudice to this 
assurance. The said goods 
and merchandise by agree- 
ment, are and shall be 
valued at without 

further account to be given 
for the same, touching the 
adventures and perils which 
we the assurers are con- 
tented to bear, and do take 
upon us in this voyage ; 
they are of the seas, men- 
of- war, fire, enemies. 



346 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



marca, e contra marca, so- 
bresdltos,tomadias no mar, 
citacoe's, tolhimdntos e de- 
t&ncas de t6dos os reys, 
principes e pdvos de nacao, 
condigdo on qualidddequal- 
■que'r, barr atria e contrdstes 
engandsos do m6stre e dos 
marinhgiros, e de tddos os 
dutros perigos ; p6rdas e 
desdstres que ja vierao ou 
que virao ou prejuizo, des~ 
aproveitamSnto ou ddno 
das dittas fazend as e mer- 
cadorias, ou de alguapdrte 
deltas. E se acdso succe- 
d€r algiima pSrda ou des- 
ventura, serd licito aos as- 
seguradores, feitores, ser- 
vos e constituintes de man- 
ddr fazer diligSncias e 
trabalhdr por, em, e dcerca 
da defdza, salvamento, e 
recobram6nto, das dittas 
fazindas e mercadorias, ou 
de algiima parte d€llas sem 
prejuizo dSste seguro, aos 
gdstos do que n6s os asse- 
guradores contribuiremos 
cada hum confdrme a sua 
quantia nelle asscgurdda ; 
e nos os assegurad6res 
estdmos de acdrdo e con- 
certo que 6sta escritnra e 
seguro terd tdnta forca e 
val6r cdmo a mdis autken- 
tica apolice ou escriiura 
de seguro ddntes feiia em 
qualqu6r parte de 

E assim nds 
os asseguraddres sdmos 
contSntes e por Ssta prome- 
fJ?nos e nos obrigdmos 
cada hum por sua propria 



pirates, rovers, thieves, 
jetsons, letters of marque 
and counter-marque, sur- 
prisals, takings of sea, ar- 
rests, restraints, and detain- 
ments of all kings, princes, 
and people of what na- 
tion, conditions, or quality 
soever, baratry of the mas- 
ter 7 and mariners, and of 
all other perils, losses, and 
misfortunes, that have or 
shall come to the hurt, 
detriment, or damage of 
the said goods and mer- 
chandise, or any part there- 
of ; and in case of any loss 
or misfortune, it shall be 
lawful to the assured fac- 
tors, servants, and assigns, 
to sue, labour, and travel, 
for, in, and about the de- 
fence, safeguard, and reco- 
very of the said goods and 
merchandise, or any part 
thereof, without prejudice 
to this assurance, to the 
charges wherof we the as- 
surers will contribute each 
one according to the rate 
and quantity of his sum 
herein assured. And it is 
agreed by us the insurers, 
that this writing and assur- 
ance shall be of as much 
force and effect, as the 
surest policy or writing of 
assurance heretofore made 
in or elsewhere 

in And so we the 

assurers are contented, and 
do hereby promise and bind 
ourselves, each one for his 
own part, our beirs ? execu* 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 347 



pdrte, os ndssos kerdeiros, 
testamentSiros, adminis- 
traddres e constituinf.es 
pello verdadSiro compri- 
minto das cdusas acima 
declarddas, confes'sdndo 
que estdmos pdgos e satis- 
feiios do que se nos d6ve 
dcdnta deste seguro. 

Em testemunha do que 
nds os seguraddres, assi- 
ndmos ao p6 dSste, com as 
quantias assegurddas, &c. 

Eu A. B. s6u contente 
com este seguro por c6m 
livras Ester I. L. em de 
£. 100. 



tors, and assigns, to the 
assured, their executors, 
administrators, and assigns, 
for the true performance 
of the premises, confessing 
ourselves paid the consider- 
ation due unto us for this 
assurance, by 

In witness whereof, we the 
assurers have subscribed 
our names and sums assured 
in 

I A. B. am contented 

with this assurance for one 

hundred pounds. Witness 

my hand the 15th 1 n lnn 

of March, 1826. j *' 1UU 



Conhecimento. 

DIGO eu T. B. de 

m6stre ou capitdo que 
s6u do navio que Deos salve 
por nome que ao 

presdnte estd surto e anco- 
rddo no pdrto de 
para com o favdr de Deos 
seguir a sua vidgem ao 
pdrto de aonde h6 

minha dirSita descdrga, 
que h6 verddde, que recebi, 
e tSnho carregddo dentro 
do ditto navio debdixo de 
cuberta enxuta e bem acon- 
diciondda de 

marcado comamarca de 
f6ra, o qual me obrigo o 
promt? to, levdndome Deos a 
bdm salvamSnto e ditto 
navio ao ditto pdrto, de 
entregdr em n6me do sohre<> 
ditto a KM* 



A Bill of Lading. 

SHIPPED, by the grace 
of God, in good order, and 
well-conditioned, by 

in and upon the 
good ship called the 

whereof is master under 
God for this present 
voyage and now 

riding at anchor in 

and by God's grace 
bound for to say 

being marked and 
numbered as in the margin, 
and are to be delivered in 
like good order, and well- 
conditioned, at the afore- 
said port of the 
danger of the seas only ex- 
cepted, unto Mr. 
or his assigns, he or they 
paying for the said goods 
with primage 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



348 

auzinte a qu&m siuspoderes 
fiver pagdndome de 

fr6te para assim com- 

prir e guarddr, obrigo min- 
ha pessda, e bems e ditto 
navio ; em certesa do qual 
dei tres conhecimentos de 
hum theor, assinddos par 
mint oil por meu escrivdo ; 
hum comprido osdutros nao 
vdl/iao ; feito em 14 de 

Mar go de 182G Annos. 



Igndro o conteudo. 



and average, as is accus- 
tomed. In witness whereof, 
the master and purser of 
the said ship has affirmed 
to three bills of lading, all 
of this tenor and date ; the 
one of which three bills 
being accomplished, the 
other two to stand void. 
And so God send the good 
ship to her desired port in 
safety. , Amen. Dated in 
the 14th of March 
1826. 
Inside and contents un- 
known. 



Instrumento ou Escritura 
de Gompromisso. 

A TODOS qudntos este 
presente Instrumento ou 
escritura de compromisso 
virem, de nds acredores de 
G. M. negociante de 

saude; Cdmoo ditto 
G. M. ao presente fica de- 
vendo e em dereito d6ve a 
nds os acreddres delle ditto 
G. M. vdrias e div6rsas 
sdmmas de dinh£iro, fyc. 
As quaes em rasao de 
muitas dividas e algumas 
dfllas mui grd?ides, que 
tambdm em dir&ito se the 
d£vem a Slle, nao se pdde??i 
arrecaddr sem alguma di- 
lagdo de tempo, e por sdrem 
algumas de'llas irrecuper- 
dveis sem demdnda, elle 
estd por 6ra muito desa- 
bilitddo de fazir paga- 



A Letter of Licence. 



TO all people, to whom 
this present writing shall 
come, we the creditors of 
G. M. of 

merchant, send greeting. 
Whereas the said G. M. at 
this present time, doth stand 
indebted, and doth justly 
owe unto us the said cre- 
ditors of him the said G. M. 
divers and sundry sums of 
money, &c. which, by rea- 
son of many debts, and 
some of them very great, 
that are likewise justly 
owing unto him, and can- 
not be had or recovered 
without some respite of 
time, and some of them not 
without suit, he is very 
much disabled at present 
to make payment unto us 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c 349 



mento a n6s os seus acre- 
ddres da nossa inteira e 
justa divida confdrme a 
sua vontdde e des6jo ; a 
respeitode que, elle nos pede 
com tddo o encarecimento 
que nds os dittos acreddres, 
e cada hum de ndsfossemos 
servidos de ddr e conceder 
a elle o ditto G. M. aos seus 
testamenteiros,administra- 
ddres, ou constituintes, 
tdnta larguesa ou dilagdo 
de tempo pello pagamSnto 
e satisfagdo de nossas di- 
vidas particuldres, que the 
parecer justo, e rasdo pello 
alcdnce e cobrdnga das 
dittas dividas : Asab6r, 
que nos e cdda hum de nos 
ficdssemos contSntes a 
tomdr e receber de nossas 
dividas inteiras em 
para se repartirem em 

partes, para sepagdrem 
em pagam6ntos 

diversos na maneira L e 
fdrma seguinte : AsabSr, o 
primeiro pagamento d6lla 
ha de ser e o resto 

pagdr-se-hd em 
jiroximo pella in- 

teira pdga e satisfagdo 
das dittas* dividas espece- 
jicddas ; E pello mdis 
plendrio comprimento dos 
vdrios pagamentos sobre- 
dittos em tdl maneira e 
forma cdmo acima se limita 
e decldra ; ao verdadSiro 
i?itSnto destas presSntes 
elle o ditto G. M. ao ou 
antes do sera obri- 

gddo a n6s os dittos acr6- 



the said creditors, of our 
whole and just debt, as he 
seems willing and desirous ; 
in consideration whereof, 
he desires us, that we the 
said creditors, and every- 
one of us, would be pleased 
to give and grant unto the 
said G. M. his executors, 
administrators, or assigns, 
such liberty or respite of 
time, for the payment and 
satisfaction of our several 
debts, as he thinks reason- 
able for the obtaining, get- 
ting, and recovering of the 
said debts : viz. That we 
and every one of us would 
be content to take, and ac- 
cept of our whole debts in 
to be divided in 
parts, to be paid 
at several pay- 

ments, in manner and form 
following : viz. The first 
payment thereof to be 

and the residue to be 
paid at next 

in full payment and satis- 
faction of the said several 
debts : and for the more 
full performance of the said 
several payments aforesaid, 
in such manner and form 
as is above limited and de- 
clared, according to the 
true meaning of these pre- 
sents, he the said G. M. 
shall and will, at, or before 
the become bound 

unto us the said creditors 
respectively, by one obliga- 
tion in due form of law to 
be made, including all and 



350 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



do res na mtsma confer* 
middde, por huma obri- 
gacao que sefard na melhor 
forma de der6ito com tddos 
e cada hum dos paga- 
mentos, na maneira acima 
limitdda, em hum certo 
lugdr ou lugdres conveni- 
€ntes de nos os dittos acre- 
dor es nomeddos, e a pena 
de cada huma das obri- 
gacues ha de ser dobrdda 
da somma int6ira, inclusa 
nella mesma, para ser a 
nos e?itr6gue e a cada hum 
de n6s, os ?wssos testamen- 
ts iros, ou constituintes, ao 
ou dntes do prdxi- 

mo seguinte da data d6sta ; 
por esta causa sdibase ; 
que nos os dittos acredores 
aqui a baixo assinddos, e 
cada hum de nds para si 
em particular, e por seus 
testament eiros, adminis- 
tradores e constituintes ao 
respeito do emcima especi- 
ficddo e declarddo, por estes 
presentes, de vontdde prd- 
pria, consentimos, contra- 
tamos, prometemos e con- 
corddmos, ao e com o ditto 
G. J/, ou seus iestamen- 
teiros, administr adores e 
iluintes por estes pre- 
sentes que nos os dittos 
acredores, e cada hum de 
nos, os nossos testamen- 
teiros, administr adores e 
constituintes, aceitaremos 
do ditto G. M. dos seus 
testamenteir os, administr a- 
d6res e constituintes, todas 
e cada huma de ides dividas 



every one of the payments 
in such sort as is above 
limited at some convenient 
place or places by 

each of us the said creditors 
to be nominated and ap- 
pointed, and the penalty 
of every obligation to be 
doubled the whole sum in- 
cluded in the condition of 
the same to be delivered 
unto us, and every one of 
us, our executors or assigns, 
at or before the 
next ensuing the date here- 
of: Know ye, therefore, that 
we the said creditors, whose 
names are here under-writ- 
ten, and every one of us for 
his own part, and for his 
executors, administrators, 
and assigns, for the consi- 
deration above specified 
and expressed, do by these 
presents willingly consent, 
covenant, promise, and 
agree to and with the said 
G. M. his executors, admi- 
nistrators, and assigns, to 
accept of the said G. M. his 
executors, and assigns, all 
and every of the said debts 
and sums of money by the 
said G. M. unto us, and 
every one of us, owing, and 
paying upon such obliga- 
tions, assurance and assur- 
ances, as aforesaid, to be 
paid in such manner and 
sort, and at such days and 
times, as is above limited 
and required. And further, 
that we the said creditors, 
and every of us, our, and 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &e. 351 



e quantias de dinheiro do 
ditto G. M. a nds e cada 
hum de ?i6s, devidas e ven- 
cidas em virtude de tdes 
obrigagoens, segurdnga ou 
segurdngas sobredittas, 
para se pagdrem em tdl 
modo e maniira, e aos tdes 
dias e tempos que acima se 
limit ao e requerem. E alem 
disso, que nds os dittos 
acreddres e cada hum de 
nds, ou ndssos e cada hum 
de ndssos testamenteiros, 
administr adores e consti- 
tuintes, em conformiddde a 
entrega da ditta obrigagdo 
a nds e , a cada hum de 
ndssos testamenteiros, ad- 
ministr adores, e constitu- 
intes, sellaremos, assinare- 
mos, e na melhdr forma e 
direito entregaremos ao 
ditto Gi M. a ndssa gerdl 
e sufficiente descdrga, para 
ser rendida por elle o ditto 
G. M. ou sens testamen- 
teiros, administr adores, e 
constituintes, a data e d 
limitagdo, antes do dia e 
data desta obrigacao ndva; 
em testemunha do que temos 
assinddo e sellddo esia. 

Datdda aos lb de Maio 
de 1826. 



every of our executors, ad- 
ministrators, and assigns, 
respectively, upon the de- 
livery of the said obligation 
to us, and to every of us, 
and every of our executors, 
administrators, and assigns, 
shall and will, at the charge 
of the said G. M. his exe- 
cutors, administrators, and 
assigns, seal, subscribe, and, 
in due form of law, deliver 
to the said G. M. our suffi- 
cient general release, for 
him, his executors, admi- 
nistrators, or assigns, to 
bear date and limitation, 
before the day of the date 
of this new obligation to 
be made for the debt. In 
witness whereof, we have 
hereunto set our hands and 
seals. 

Dated the 15th of May 
1826, &c. 



352 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 



L£tras de Cambio 



Bills of Exchange, 



Londres, por 300 Milreis. 

5 de Junho, 1826. 

A' VIST A desta minha 
primHra IStra de cambio, 
pagard Vm. ao senhor T. 
M. ou ordem a somma de 
trezentos Milreis em din- 
heiro corrSnte de Portugal, 
valdr recebido do senhor T. 
D. como por aviso de 

Seu Venerador e Creddo. 

Ao Senhor T. M. Nego- 
ciante em Lisboa. 

T.M. 



London, for 300 Milreas. 

5th of June, 1826. 

AT sight of this my first 
bill of exchange, please to 
pay to Mr. T. M. or order, 
the sum of three hundred 
Milreas in current money 
of Portugal, value received 
of Mr. T. D. placing it to 
account, as per advice 
from, Sir, 

Yours, H. S. 

To Mr. T. M. Merchant 
in Lisbon. T. M. 



Lisboa, 
7 de Junho, 1826. 



250/. Esterl. 



A QUA RENT A dias 
vista d6sta minha segunda 
letra de cambio (a primeira 
nao sendo pctga) pagard 
Vm. ao Senhor F. G. # 
Companhia,/ ou ordem a 
somma de doz&ntas e cin- 
quenta livras esterlinas em 
mo6da corrente de Ingla- 
terra, valdr recebido do 
Senhor J. D. como por aviso 
de 

Seu Venerador e Creddo. 
H.S. 

Ao Senhor T. B. Nego- 
ciante em Londres. 



Lisbon, for 250/. Sterling. 

7th of June, 1826. 

AT Forty days sight of 
this my second bill of ex- 
change, my first and third 
net being paid, please to 
pay to Mr. F. G. and Com- 
pany, or order, the sum of 
two hundred and fifty 
pounds sterling, in current 
money of England, value 
received of Mr. J. D. and 
place it to account, as per 
advice, from Sir, 

Yours, H. S. 

To Mr. T. B. Merchant 
in London. F. P. 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 353 



Protesto de huma Letra 
de Cambio. 

S A IB AM todos a quern 
esta presente escritura 
tocdr que aos do 

mez de, do anno de 
a requerimento de P. C. 
negociante de eu 

M, N. tabaliao de n6tas 
jurddo e admit ido pella 
auioridade del Rei, fyc. fui 
a cdsa da mordda do senhor 
T. B, sdbre quern a letra de 
cambio acima referida h6 
sacdda, e mostrei a original 
ao ditto T. B. requerendo a 
sua aceitacao d6lla : o qual 
me respondeo que nao acei- 
taria a ditta Utra por 
humas rasdens que escreve- 
ria ao senhor T. P. sacaddr ; 
pella qual rasao eu o ditto 
tabaliao protestei, por esie 
presente proteslo, tdnto 
contra o ditto F. P. o sacaddr 
como tambSm contra o ditto 
T. B. sdbre quern he sacdda, 
demdis contra todas as 
outras pessoas, e?idossa- 
dores, ou outras n6lla in- 
teressddas, por todos os 
cdmbios, recdmbios, ddnos 
e interSsses qudesquer ; em 
pres&nca de H. J. S.' T*. 
chamados por testemunhas 
a este pres6nte dcto, feito 
no meu escritdrio em o dia 
e anno acima declarado. 
M. N. Notario Publico. 



A Protest of a Bill of Ex- 



change. 



KNOW all persons whom 
this present writing may 
concern, that the of 

in the year at 

the request of Mr. P. C. of 
merchant, I, M. N. 
public notary, sworn and 
admitted by authority of his 
most sacred majesty, did go 
to the dwelling-house or 
habitation of Mr. T. B. 
upon whom the above- 
named bill of exchange is 
drawn, and showed the 
original unto the said Mr. 
T. B. demanding his ac- 
ceptance of the same, who 
answered me he should not 
accept the same bill, for 
some reasons he should 
write Mr. F. P. the drawer ; 
wherefore I the said notary 
did protest, and by these 
presents protest, as well 
against the said F. P. the 
drawer, as likewise against 
the said T. B. upon whom 
it is drawn ; as also against 
all other persons, indorsers, 
or others therein concerned, 
for air changes, rechanges, 
damages and interest what- 
soever, in presence of H. J. 
and S. T. called for witnesses 
to this present act, done in 
my office in the day 

and year above mentioned. 
M. N. Notary Public. 



2 A 



354 COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 

Formas de Recibos. Forms of Receipts. 



Dinheiro recebido por 
inteiro. 

Recebi do senhor Thomas 
Crew, sets livras sete shi- 
lins seis penny s, resto de 
todas as contas, com o ditto. 

A.B. 
1 de Janeiro. 



Dinheiro recebido porConta 
de meu Amo. 
Recebi do Sr. Jonas Lee, 
quatro livras e cinco shilins 
por conta de meu amo 
Moises Trust. 

CD. 
22 de Fever eiro 1826. 



Dinheiro recebido a conta. 

Recebi, a 30 de Margo, 
1826, do Sr. Jacinto Cook, 
oinco livras cinco shilins, 
a conta de doze livras e dez 
shilins, por conta de meu 
pai Antonio Truelove, 

E.F. 

30 de Margo 1826. 



Dinheiro recebido a conta 
de Contas que nao estao 
ajustadas. 

Recebi da senhora Mar- 
tha Rich, por maos de Pedro 
Cornet, onze livras d conta. 
G. H. 

24 de Abril 1826. 



Money received in Full. 

Received, 1st January 
1826, of Mr. Thomas Crew, 
six pounds seven shillings 
and sixpence, in full of all 
demands, per 

A. B. 



For another's Use. 

Received, 22nd Febru- 
ary, 1826, of Mr. Jonas Lee, 
four pounds five shillings, 
for the use of my master 
Moses Trust, per 

CD. 



Money received in Part. 

R ecei ved, 30th of March, 
1826, of Mr. James Cook, 
five pounds ten shillings, 
in part of twelve pounds 
ten shillings, for my father, 
Anthony Truelove, per 
E, F. 



Money received on Accounts 
unsettled. 



Received, 24th April, 
1826, of Mrs. Martha Rich, 
by the hands of Peter Cor- 
net, eleven pounds on ac- 
count. G. H. 



COMMERCIAL LETTERS, &c. 355 



Quando hum Rol ou Conta 
se paga por inteiro. 

Recebi, a 15 de Mayo, 
1826, o empdrte (Testa 
conta. 

I.K. 



Quando se paga dinheiro a 
Conta de hum rol. 

Recebi sete livras a 
conta deste rol. 

L. M. 
6 de Junho de 1826. 



When a Bill is paid in 
Full. 

Received, 15th May, 
1826, the full contents here- 
of. 

I.K. 



When a Bill is paid in 
Part. 

Received, 26th June, 
1826, seven pounds in part 
hereof. 

L. M. 



Notas ou Obrigacoens que 
faz hum Homem quando 
toma dinheiro imprestado. 

Londres, 4 de Junho, 1826. 

Eu abaixo firmado pro- 
meto, pagar ao Sr. E. D. 
banqueiro do Ihesouro de sua 
Majestade, do Excise, ou 
d sua ordem, quarenta dias 
despois da data desta obri- 
gagaoqudtro centas e trinta 
livras por valor recebido. 
Christovao Wade. 

£.430 ' 



Promissory Notes for a 
Man's Self. 

London, June 4th, 1826. 

I promise to pay to Mr. 
Edward Draper, cashier of 
his majesty's revenue of 
Excise, or order, forty days 
after date, four hundred 
and thirty pounds, value 
received 

Christopher Wade. 

£.430 



Eu abaixo firmado pro- 
meto pagar ao Sr. Paulo 
Barker ou d sua ordem em 
sendo requerido, trezentas, 
e noventa, e quatro livras 
dous shilins e seis pennys 
por valor recebido hoje 17 
de Julho, 1826. 

Philip Veriham. 

£. 394 2 6 

2 



I promise to pay to Paul 
Barker, esq. or order, on 
demand, three hundred and 
ninety-four pounds, two 
shillings, and six-pence, 
value received this 17th of 
July, 1826. 

Philip Venham. 

£. 394 2 6 

A 2 



356 COMMERCIAL 

E Uaba ixo firmado firo- 
mito pagar ao Sr. J. T. on 
a sua drdem, quarSnta e 
nave livras, e Ires shilins 6 
mezes despdis da data desta 
obrigacao, por valor rece- 
bido emverddde do que asig- 
nei esta 24 de Agosto 1826. 
W> J. 

£. 49 3 0. 



LETTERS, &c. 

I promise to pay to Mr. 
J. T. or order, forty-nine 
pounds three shillings, six 
months after date, value re- 
ceived. Witness my hand 
this 24th of August, 1826. 
W. J. 

£.49 3 0. 



[N. B. Obs6rvese que em 
?iotas ou obrigaqoens s&m- 
pre se decldra a soma rece- 
bida sem a qual nao sao de 
nerihuma forga nem tern 
authoridade.] 



[N. B. Observe in pro- 
missory notes that the 
words " Value received" 
must be inserted, or they 
are of no force.] 



EXTRACTS. 357 

PORTUGUESE 

GRAMMAR. 

PART IV. 

CONTAINING 

SEVERAL USEFUL AND ENTERTAINING PASSAGES, 

COLLECTED FROM THE BEST PORTUGUESE WRITERS. 



JTjNTRE os bons ditos de Souz6ni, poeta Persi- 
ano, se conta, que bebendo com outro po6ta, 
sen amigo, certo licor, se queixava, de que eVa mu- 
ito quente e dizendolhe, Amigo, " pobre de ti que 
daqui a poucos dias te faraS beber no inf6rno agoas 
sulfureas, e ard&ntes, que te abrazarao as entran- 
has" — "Nao importa/' replicou Souzeni ; " bastara 
que me lembre algum clos teus versos, que ellas se 
farao mais frias, que neve." 



Catharina Parthenay, sobrinha da c61ebre Anna 
Parthenay, deu esta bella resposta a Henrique IV. 
" Saiba vossa mag de que &u sou muito pobre para ser 
" sua consorte ; e que no mesmo tempo desc&ndo de 
f< huma familia muito iilustre, para ser sua dama." 



358 PORTUGUESE 

Huma Princeza Catholica, e de rara virtude, v&n- 
do reduzido o Marechal de Saxonia as agon ids da 
morte, disse, que era para sentir o nao se poder re- 
zar hum De profundis pella alma de hum que tinha 
feito can tar tantos Te Deum. 



A Dom Christovao de Moura, Marquez de Cas- 
tello Rodrigo, e Vice-Rey'de Portugal por Dom 
Philipe Terceuo, Indo por huma sala do Paco de 
Lisboa, hum soldado honrado, que tinha bem ser- 
vido na India, lhe dava hum memorial, e pedia, que 
se lembrasse dos seus pap6is, porque havia largo 
t&mpo, que andava pretendendo. Respond&o-lhe 
o Marquez, que havia muita Gente para despachar, 
e nao se podia5 despachar todos com brevidade ; o 
soldado adiantando o passo se atravessou diante sem 
descomposicaS, e fazendo parar o Vice-Rey lhe disse 
com grande conflanca; " Senhor Dom Christovao 
despache Vs. os homens, e deixeaGente." O Mar- 
quez aceitou o memorial, e o despachou no mesmo 
dia. 



Mandando hum Fidalgo em Lisboa abrir em hu- 
ma rua os Alicerces para se faz&rem humas casas, 
sem licenca da camera, passando porallioprocurador 
da cidade, poz pena aos officiaes, que nao trabal- 
hassem na obra sem licenca dos Vereadores ; e os 
officiaes diz&nclo-o ao Fidalgo mandou-lhes elle que 
nao deixassem de trabalhar, e que nao fizessemca- 
so do que dizia aquelle villao ruim ; tornando jo 
procurator da cidade por alii e achando os officiaes 
trabalhando, mandou que dessem com elles no tron- 
co ; e nao faJtando quern lhe contasse o que o Fi- 
dalgo diss^ra, teve-o em olho ; e no tempo que el- 
le hia atravessando pello Rocio para sua casa, sahio- 
Ihe ao caminho a cavallo, e com huma lanca que 
Jevava, dando na sua sombra, lhe disse : 4 ' Porque o 



EXTRACTS. 359 

que dissestes, foi em minha ausencia, dou em vos- 
sa sorobra ; se mo tivesseis ditto no rosto, dera na 
vossa pessda." 



Abou Hanifah, o mais celebre doutdr dos Mus- 
suimanes, tendo recebido huma bofetada, disse ao 
que o tinha insultado : " Eu poderia vingarme, pa- 
gandovos na mesma moeda ; mas nao quero faz&r. 
Poderia accusarvos ao calife : mas nao quero ser ac- 
cusador. Poderia nas minhas oracoens queixarme a 
Deos d£sta affronta ; mas nem isso quero fazer. Por 
fim poderia pedir a D^os, que se quer no dia do juizo 
vos castigasse ; por^m o mesmo senhor me livre de 
semelhante pensamento ; mas antes, se succedesse 
que neste instaate chegasse aquelle formidavel dia ; 
e se a minha intercessao tivessealguma sfficacia para 
com Deos, nao quizera por companheiro senao a 
vos para entrar no Paraiso.'' Que admiravel ex^m- 
plo para os Christaos aprend^rem a perdoar as inju- 
rias ! 



Da Peregrinacao. 

Pass ad as que se dao peregrinando, sao degraos 
para a casa do desengano. Das suas fdntes sahem os 
rios muito pequenos, e crescem correndo, e levao 
mares ao mar. Plomens, que da sua terra na5 sahem, 
saonavios, queaeabaonoestaleiro. Asabedoriacomo 
vinda do ceo, anda neste globo terrestre peregrina ; 
nao he facil achala senao peregrinando ; errando por 
estemundo, se apprende onaScometter erros. Va- 
pores, que na terra eram lodo, apartados della se 
fazam estrellas. Aos homens que querem luzir, 
d6ve a patria servir, como aos planetas o horizonte, 
de berco, para ensayo do seii luzim^nto, longe do 
ponto Ortivo e remontados a mais alta regiao, apura5 
as intluenciasj e duplicao as luzes. Que nome teriao 



3G0 PORTUGUESE 

hoje no m undo Socrates, Pithagoras, e Platao, eou- 
tros sabios cla antiguidade, se a modo de cepos, on 
trdncos, que aonde nascerao fazem raiz e no seu 
primeiro chao apodrecem, nao buscarao foradaPatria 
as noticias, que Ihes fakavao. Nao se ornara Her- 
cules com osdespojos dos Monstros, que dornou, se 
os nao forabuscar pelo mundo ; a sua dilatada viagem 
devem os Argon aulas a conquista do vello de ouro, 
Se nao correra Ulysses remotos climas, fora a Aldea 
de Ithaca de toda a sua gloria o theatro. Homens 
perpetuamente caseiros, sao gallos, que so sabem 
do seu poleiro. Sabios peregrinos, imitao no seu 
cursoas fbntes, que passando por veas de prata, ouro, 
emeraldas, e safliras, tomao, e comsigo levao a flor 
de suas preciosas qualidades. Zombe embora Plu- 
tarco dos que iouvao a peregrinaca5, e diga, que 
se parecem com os que julga'6 as estrellas errantes 
mais nobres, e felices. que as fixas. Nao b4 escola 
mais util para a vida, que as muitas vidas ou modos 
de viver, que na varied ade das Nacoens se observa. 
Yem-se muitas cousas nunca vistas ; aprendem-se 
muitas, que se nao sabiao, faz-se ohomemcapaz de 
toda a casta de negocios, e folga de ver este mundo, 
antes de sahir de!!e. Ate paraos prlncipes, que das 
suas cortes fazem na terra o seu paraiso, bom he que 
peregrinem, para conhecerem o mundo, que elles 
governao. Os commodos, as delicias, os obsequios 
dos subditos, podem dar a conhecer a hum homem, 
que nasceo soberano, mas com este conhecimento, 
nao o fazem digno da soberania : se nao sahira 
Alexandre da sua Macedonia, nao passara dos li- 
mites de regulo e nao chegara a avassallar o mundo. 

Do Tempo fuliiro. 

Tit ate o homem do presente, e nao queira pene- 
trar no future) ; quern de tao longe poem a mira, 
nao pode dar no alvo. Muitas vez< s bom he igno- 



EXTRACTS. 361 

Far o que ha de succeder ; porque se for bem, a di- 
lacao h& tormento ; e se for mao, o trabalho he sem 
proveito. Para futuros, nao ha seguranca. Ao 
Embaixador, que na guerra movlda por Luiz XI. 
Hey de Franca, a Carlos Duque de Borgonha, pro- 
curava attrahir ao Emperador Frederico, com pro- 
messa de se repartlreui com eJie os despojos, e os 
estados, respondeo o dito Emperador com este 
apologo : u Tres cacadores com a esperanca deapan- 
harem hum urso, se comprometterao na reparticao 
deile. Chegados a boca da caverna, sahio a f6ra com 
tao grande impeto, que hum dos cacadores botou a 
fugiv, ou-tro subio a huma arvore, e o outro seestendeo 
no cha5 fingindo-se morto ; chegouse o urso a elle, 
poz-lhe o focinho no nariz, e nos ouvidos, e nao Ihe 
conhecendo folego, uem sinal de vida, o deixou por 
morto. O que estava na arvore, disse ao compan- 
heiro ; homem, que te disse o urso, quando tefallou 
a puridade, com o focinho nos ouvidos ? Disseme 
que era mal feito, dispor da pelie, e carne do urso, 
antes de o verem morto. Com isto o Emperador 
deu a entender ao Embaixador, que era preciso 
apanhar primeiro ao Duque deBorgonha, quedepois 
se trataria da reparticao dos seus estados. Dos suc- 
cessos do tempo futiiro, so Deos tern certeza.'' 



Dos Hi 



COS. 



Em lugares estereis, sem hervas, nem plantas 
produz a natureza o ouro, para mostrar que os 
amadores das riquezas nao tern fe, nem honra. Os 
ricos facinorosos, que ainda que celebrados nas 
historias, sao o opprobrio da sua posteridade, pode- 
riao ter boa fama, se lhes nao facilitara este metal a 
execucao de seus daoados intentos, Em todas as 
idades forao as riquezas antagonistas da virtude ; 
ellas invenUirao os mais enormes delitos ; ellas en- 
sinarao os filhos a tirar a seus pais a vida; en- 



362 PORTUGUESE 

sinarao os poderosos a opprimir os innocentes, ar- 
ruinar as familias, saquear os templos, e despir os 
altares ; ellas induzirao os amigos a que faltassem a 
fe, incitarao os vassallos a negar aos principes a 
obediencia, a os libidinosos derao meyos para violar 
a pudicicia das donzellas, e estragar a honra dos 
maridos : final mente ellas ainda que boas para a 
vida civil, sao causa de todos os males ; e posto que 
os sabios se soubera5 aproveitar dellas, a cobica, 
e o mao uso das mesmas, encherao o mundo todo 
de criminosos. Homens ricos ordinariamente se 
perdem, por terem muito, e saberem pouco ; des- 
prezao o saber, porque Ihes parece, que para todo 
o genero de vida, Ihes basta o ter. A Aristippo 
perguntou Dionysio, porque razao os filosofos fre- 
quentavao as cazas dos ricos, e nao os ricos as dos 
filosofos. Respondeo Aristippo, que os filosofos 
conhecem o que Ihes falta, e os ricos ignorao o de 
que necessitao. Senhores ricos, e filosofos pobres, 
nao podeni fazer cousas grandes, porque a estes Ihes 
falta dinheiro, e aquelles espirito. Dizia Diogenes, 
que muitos ricos sao como as plantas, que nascem 
em desertos, e despenhad^iros, porque dos frutos, 
que ellas dao, nao comem os homens, inas corvos, 
milhafres, e feras ; tambem as riquezas de muitos 
nao sao para sugeitos benemeritos, mas para cho- 
carreiros, espadachins, rufioes, e meretrizes. 



Estado da Lusitania ate ao Tempo em que foi reduzida 
em Provincia Romana, Por A, C. do AmaraL Ex- 
-trahido das Memorias da Academia de Lisboa. 



Hum A historia sincera envergonha-se da gloria 
vaa, que se busca em antiguidades mentirozas : 
Desgosta-se desses sonhos agradaveis, pasto de 
liuma esteril recreacao ; e se saborea so com a ver- 



EXTRACTS. 363 

dade pura. Tal he a sorte deste escrito, derigido a 
fazer prezentes aos Portugueses os verdadeiros cos- 
tumes, e Leis de seus Maiores : rejeita tudo quanto 
a impostura, ou a credulidade moderna Ihe conta 
dos Seculos, que a Providencia quiz esconder-lhe : 
e se contenta com as escassas memorias, que pode 
colher dos raros monumentos antigos que lhe restao. 
Nao tenta entrar pel as espessas trevas dos primeiros 
36 Seculos do mundo, em que nao acha quern o 
encaminhe. Pois que os Hebreos unicos guias 
"Seguros, que introduzem em muitos outros paizes, 
nem hum so passo dao para este que habi tamos ; e 
apenas dao motivo a conjectural', que das Colonias 
sahidas do Oriente para povoar a terra, algumas se 
estenderao ate a esta extremidade ; mas nem donde, 
nem quando viessem o pode colher a historia. 

Nao acha depois dos Hebreos outros, de quern se 
fie, senao os Romanos : e ainda estes pouco lhe 
sabem dizer de hum Paiz ta5 apartado, em quanto 
a ambicao de o senhorear os nao avizinha a elle : 
mal conservao huma obscura tradicao de que a estas 
partes vierao Celtas, lberos, Persas, Lusos, e 
Gregos : de huns apenas ficara resto na derivaca.5 
do nome ; de outros na heranca de alguns costumes. 
A navegacao com que alguns Povos do fundo do 
Mediterraneo comecao a enriquecer, as traz ate 
estas ultimas Costas, e vai logo espalhar pello 
Mundo, a fama das ricas minas, e do fertil torrao 
deste Paiz desconhecido ainda, antes que da quali- 
dade de seus habitantes : nao tarda com tudo a 
mostrar-se esta ; continua a vir em busca dos the- 
souros descobertos a ambicao estrangeira ; e ve 
erguer daqui, quaes feras acossadas nos seus covis, 
homens bravos para defender os bens que a Provi- 
dencia lhes destinara. E esta he a primeira Scena 
que se nos representa no Terreno Lusitano ; hum 
Campo de Batalha, continuada ja com os Fenicios, 
ja com os Carthaginezes ; que depois de disputarem 



364 PORTUGUESE 

por largo tempo com estes Barbaros a sorte das 
armas, os deixao ainda por domar aos Romanos 
quando lhes cedem a conquista de Mr.ndo. Mas 
ao justo motivo da defeza propria succedem depois 
outros, que facilmente poem as armas na ma5 a 
huns homens, a quern a falta do commercio, e de 
artes quasi nao deixa outro meio de enriquecer, que 
a pilhagem ; nome com que muitas das suas guerras 
sao infamadas pelos Povos mais polidos que elles. 
E o mesmo habito de peleijar lhes vai alimentando 
hum natural feroz, que ja os nao deixa accommodar 
com o socego da paz, e que os faz buscar inimigos 
dentro emcaza, quando lhes faltao os de fora. 

Estes vicios, e virtudes de guerra, he" o que de 
principio nelles distinguem os Romanos, na5 os 
vendo senao armados no campo ; e de que nao po- 
dem deixar de dar testemunho estes mesmos vai- 
dosos desprezadores de tudo o que nao he Romano. 
Mas em fim a medida que se lhes chegao mais 
perto, e se envolvem com elles, la vao divisando 
por entre alguns claros, que as armas deixao, a 
forma do seu governo interior. 

Vem que este Terreno, que designao pelo nome 
de Lusitania, he habitado de Povos differentes 
independentes huns dos outros, e governados cada 
hum por suas Leis, costumes particulates ; leis 
raras, e costumes singelos, ainda com a marca da 
Natureza nao contrafeita. 

Como a seguranca propria he quern so forma 
estes corpos, nao largao da liberdade que receberao 
da natureza, mais que o puramente preciso para 
conservar essa mesma seguranca. A guerra a que 
sao dados he que os obriga a criar hum Superior, 
a que jurao fidelidade ; mas .conseguida a paz, 
expira o governo do General, e a obediencia (Jos 
Soldados. 

Se ha que estabeiecer de novo para o bem com- 
niniTi do Sociedade, servem-se do meio usado das 



EXTRACTS. 365 

puras Democracias, Assembleas geraes, em que 
cada pessoa tern o arbitrio de appvovar, ou rejeitar 
o que se propoem : e ainda nesta accao respira o ar 
militar, em que sao criados ; hum bater da espada 
no broquel he o signal de approvacao ; hum susurro 
inquieto o de desapprovar. 

A' simplicidade da Legislacao segue a das 
penas ; sao os reos do crime capital apedrejados, e 
para que o horror do crime se extenda alem ainda 
do castigo, todo o que passa depois da execucao, 
he obrigado a lancar alguma pedra sobre o cadaver 
do justic^ado. 

Nao desmente da parte Legislativa, a do Com«- 
mercio interior ainda pouco sujeito a fraudes ; nao 
os move a contratar a sede insaciavel do ouro, que 
mal conhecem : as mutuas necessidades, a que so 
procurao soccorrer, os ensina a trocar entre si as 
cousas precisas a vida. Estas Ihes dictao tambem 
o que devem conceder ao corpo ; comeres, e bebi- 
das simples, quaes a Natureza as produsia : vesti- 
dos sem mais estudo que o do fim para que os usao ; 
cama sem regalo, nem despeza ; emfim a tudo o 
preciso para a conservacao se accocle com o menos 
apparato que pode ser. 

A esta sobriedade bem propria de si para clar a 
saude, e vigor do corpo, ajuntao o trabalho aturado ; 
os homens o da guerra quasi continua, e nos inter- 
vallos deiia o de exercicios semelhantes a guerra ; 
as mulheres o da cultura dos campos, e de todo o 
trato domestico, que com discreta economia Ihes he 
cedido pelos homens occupados com as armas. E 
se faz memoria dos seus bailes, e cantares, nao sao 
tanto fructo do ocio, como do innocente prazer da 
vida social. 

Deste modo. sobrio, e trabalhado de vida era 
consequencia a raridade de doencas : para alguma, 
que accaso haja, nao he venal a cura, nem o reme- 
dio, nao se teixdo alguem por desobrigado de con- 



366 PORTUGUESE 

correr para hum officio de rigorosa humanidade ; 
he o enfermo exposto em publico ; e os que tern 
sido feridos do mesmo mal ensinao os remedios 
com que conseguirao a saude. 

Nos que habitavao as vizinhanc^s do Mrnho, 
como erao os Gronios, ou Gravios, os Amphilocios, 
e outros, se vem assaz retratados os costumes dos 
Gregos, de quern os Antigos querem que elles 
descendao : Jogos, e certames publicos, cazamen- 
tos, arte de augurar tudo h6 de Gregos. Idolatras 
como seus Maiores, nada conservaoda Religiao pura 
que a Razao lhes mostrara, mais que o reconheci- 
mento de que ha hum. Ente maior que elles, a 
que devem dar culto : porem estragado este natural 
sentimento pela corrupcao do corai^ao, imaginao 
Divindades indignas, a que honrao com hum culto 
igualmente indigno. Se querem dar-lhes gracas 
pello feliz successo de huma batalha, as maos 
direitas doz prizioneiros sao o triste trof£o que lhes 
levantao. Se antes de qualquer acgao procura5 saber 
o seu bom ou mao exito, dentro as entranhas de 
hum inimigo he que vao buscar este fatal segredo : 
se querem fazer religioso hum juramento, he pre- 
ciso que as entranhas quentes de hum horaem, e de 
hum cavallo lhes sirvao de banho, em que depois 
de mettidas as maos, as poem sobre o altar, junto 
ao qual se deve fazer esta ridicula ceremonia. Em- 
fim he sempre sangue o que applaca huns Deoses, 
que estes Idolatras guerreiros formavao a sua seme- 
lhanca. 

Estes sao os poucos vestigios, e quasi apagados, 
que se encontrao dos costumes domesticos dos Lusi- 
tanos, que de ordinario so se viao no campo de ba- 
talha, detendo, ou fazendo retroceder os passos aos 
Conquistadores do mundo. Mal o poderacrer quern 
mede a forca de hum Estado pelo fausto de seus 
habitadores, pela magnificencia de suas obras, e por 
todo o explendor que encanta os sentidos ; quern 



EXTRACTS. 367 

nao avalia quanto pode hum Povo, em que todos os 
individuos sao aptos para a defesada Patria, em que 
ha tantos Soldados como homens endurecidos todos 
no trabalho, e todos animados do amor daliberdade. 

Hum Povo, como este, foi o que sem arte, e sem 
disciplina, em tendo na frente hum homem que o 
soubesse mandar, escarneu por muitas vezes das 
tropas mais bem reguladas, e deu muitos dias de 
magoa, e de deslustre aos soberbos Romanos. Viri- 
ato, Sertorio, e ainda outros de menos nome forao 
instrumentos da gloria Lusitana, que sobrepujando 
a emulacao flcou eternizada nos escritos de seus 
mesmos inimigos, e nos marmores que o tempo 
consumidor nao acabou de gastar. 

Por mais de Seculo e meio andarao os Romanos 
na porfiada lida de subjugar este ultimo pedaco da 
Hespanha que ja contao toda por huma porcao certa 
dos seus dominios: todos os annos lhe nomeao Go- 
vernador : mas por mais que tentem mandar Pretor 
como para Provincia pacifica, a cada passo se vem 
obrigados a lhe mandar Consul armado ; depois de 
terp-i separado o seu Governo do de quasi todo o 
estoda Hespanha. Esedequandoem quandoalgum 
destes Generaes consegue a gloria de a pacificar, e 
sujeitar as Leis Romanas, pouco tempo lhe dura 
verde o louro ; na sua mesma cabeca lhe murcha, 
ou ao mais tarde na de seu successor : ate* que a 
longa experiencia os desengana, que he preciso mu- 
dar de systema ; e que so costumando primeiro os 
Lusitanos a se sujeitar como amigos, he que os po- 
derao insensivelmente ir passando a obedecer como 
Vassalos. 



Sobre a Poena Bucolica dos Poetas Portuguezes. Por 
Joaquim de Foyos. Extrahido das Memorias de Littera- 
tura da Academia de Lisboa, 

Assxm como entre asduas especies de oracio, por 



368 PORTUGUESE 

que o homem tanto excede aos outros animaes, se 
cultivou primeiro o Verso, assim de todas as sortes 
de Poesias parece ter sido primeira a Bucolica. 
Ainda que o genero humano nao nasceo da terra, e 
dos duros troncos das arvores, como iniaginarao 
muitos Poetas, e parece que chegarao a crer alguns 
Filosofos; com tuclo depois do diluvio, espalhados 
os h omens por toda a face da terra, e perdidos pouco 
a pouco os conhecimentos que berdaraodeseusma- 
iores,esoconservavao na Sociedade, he summamente 
provavel, que huma grande parte delles viesse succes- 
sivamente a passar por estes tres generos de vida : 
Selvagem, Pastoral, Agricola. Os muitos Povos, que 
ainda hoje habitao, e se achao na primeira, ou se- 
gunda destas vidas, confirmao a verdade desta con- 
jectura. Mas o homem, vivendo huma vida silvestre 
nos bosques, separado de toda a Sociedade, e sus- 
tentando-se unicamente de caca, e dos fructos espon- 
taneos da terra, nem se acha em circumstancias de 
adiantar os seus conhecimentos, nem tern tempo para 
cultivallos, occupado, e attento todo em buscar 
o necessario fysico, que nao pode achar sem muita 
difficuldade, e trabalho. E ainda que aconteca, que 
por vezes Ihe sobre algum espaco livre destas con- 
tin uas fadigas, satisfeitos todos os seus naturaes 
desejos, e appetites, cancado o corpo, e entorpecidos 
os membros, lhe entorpecerao juntamente as facul- 
dades da alma, desacostumadas a discorrer, e a 
exercitar-se em outros objectos, e se entregara doce- 
mente a o somno. Nao succedera assirn aos Pas- 
tores, que tendo gado, que com seu leite lhes sub- 
ministre o sustento, e com suas pelles o vestido, 
passarao huma boa parte da sua vida quietos, e des- 
cancados, sem mais outro cuidado que o de condu- 
zir, e defender os seus rebanhos, e manadas. Obri- 
gados de necessidades mutuas, e attrahidos do natu- 
ral deleite, que causa a companhia dos que tern as 
mesmas precisoes que nos, e nellas nos podem dar 



EXTRACTS. 369 

algum auxilio, e recebello, se chegaraS, quando o 
permittir a abundancia dos pastos, huns para os 
outros, cornmunicarao entre si os seuspensamentos, 
e desejos, praticarao sobre as cousas que mais ama5, 
e celebrarao a sua felicidade. 

Huma vez juntos os homens, eemocio, contentes, 
e sem cancaco, impossivel he, que nao inventem 
diversos jogos, e toda a sorte de desenfado, erecrea- 
cao para evitar o tedio de huma vida socegada, e 
satisfeita. Entre estes divertimentos nao devia ter 
ultimo lugar a Poesia. As faculdades do homem 
tern huma natural disposicao para ella ; ou a Poesia 
consista na imitacao, como querem Platao, e Aris- 
toteles, ainda que clara e distinctamente nunca nos 
dissessem o que esta imitajcao seja ; ou em huma 
oracao levantada sobre as expressoes vulgares, in- 
vert! da com figuras, e harmoniosamente modulada, 
e compassada com o metro, e com o rhythmo. Em 
qualquer destas cousas que facamos consistir a Poe- 
sia, ou ern todas elias, para todas recebeo o homem 
da Natureza huma admiravel propensao. 

As nossas sensacoes sao nao somente a origem, e 
fundamento de todas as nossas ideas, mas transfor- 
mando-se de diversos modos, sao todos os nossos 
juizos, e raciocinios, as nossas artes, as nossas Scien- 
cios, e, em huma palavra, tudo quanto sabemos, e 
conhecemos. Mas a imitacao he huma sensacao 
facil, e para que esta disposta a conformacaS dos 
nossos orgaos, e das nossas potencias, e por conse- 
quencia huma sensacao, que nos achamos por ex- 
tremo grata, e deleitavel. Deste mesmo principio 
se segue outro, o qual aqui igualmente pertence, e 
vera a ser, que h6 natural ao homem nao so a ora- 
cao, e a harmonia, mas tambem essa mesma oracao 
variada com differentes tropos, e figuras ; isto h6, 
com diversos modos de exprimir as cousas, e os 
pensamentos, ja com a mesma harmonia ; isto he, 
com o rhvthmo, e ja com o metro. 

2B 



370 PORTUGUESE 

Conheeer-se-ha claramente a dependencia que 
estesdous principios tementre si, se considerar-mos, 
que a imitacao, (a qua] eu ja mostrei ser hum exerci- 
cio summamente gostoso ao hornem, e hum nlodo 
facillimo assim de elle appreuder como de commu- 
nicar aos outros os seus sentimentos) huma vez 
feita, e praticada com a oraca5, traz necessaria- 
mente comsigo todas aquellas yariedades da mesma 
oracao, que apontei acima. Daqui vem affirmarem 
agudamente, e com razao justissima os mais celebres 
Filosofos, que quizerao descer a discussoes deste 
genero, que a Poesia era tao antiga, como o genero 
humano. Certamente parece ter nascido logo com 
as primeiras Sociedades, queellesformarao, equando 
elles conservavao ainda muito, assim da rusticidade, 
como da singeleza, e innocencia natural. Do que 
parece, ou claramente provado, ou deduzido com 
assaz probabilidade, que a Poesia nasceo, e se in- 
ventou entre Pastores. Mas em que genero de 
Poesia se exercitarlao estes primeiros homens ? Na5 
sera difficil conhecello, se reflectirmos, qual seria a 
materia que, segundo as circumstancias em que se 
achavao, se Ihes offerecia para os seus cantos. Aris- 
toteles foi de parecer, que dos primeiros inventores 
os que tinhao genio elevado imitavao accoes illus- 
tres, e feitas por person agens grandes, e pelo con- 
trario os que tinhao engenho mais rasteiro, cantavao 
as accoes dos homens vis, em cujo vituperio com- 
punhaS obras ridiculas, assim como os outros se 
exercitavao em hymnos e encomios. 

Porem este erudito, e intelligente Filosofo nao 
fala naquelle lugar da primeira origem da Poesia 
rigorosamente, mas sim do modo com que ella, de- 
pois de inventada, se foi dividindo em diversas es- 
pecies ; porque suppoe tempos em que h6 ja grande 
a disigualdade dos homens ; o que nao tern lugar 
nas primeiras e simplicissimas sociedades de Pas- 
tores. 



EXTRACTS. 371 

He pois summamenteverosi mil, que estes homens 
quizessem imitar aquellas cousas, que com mais 
frequencia se offereciao aos seus sentidos, que satis- 
faziao as suas necessidades, e que constituiao a bem- 
aventuranca da sua socegada vida, e felice estado, 
por que nellas empregavao toda a sua attencao, e 
cuidado. Cantariao pois os seus rebanhos, os mon- 
tes e os valles, em que os apascentavao, os rios, e 
fontes, a que os levavao a beber ; a alva, e serena 
madrugada, que os chamava ao trabalho ; a sesta, 
que os convidava ao descanco ; e os rafeiros, que 
lhes guardavao o gado. Cantariao, como era natu- 
ral, as paixoes e affectos da sua alma ; por6m nao 
afTectos violentos. e desesperados, que nao erao pro- 
prios daquella vida, mas doces e suaves, e que so 
lhes causavao aquella inquietacao, e desasocego, a 
que se nao pudesse seguir fim algum funesto. 

Como estes argumentos sao todos proprios da 
Poesia Bucolica, segue-seligitimamente, que ellafoi 
a primeira, que no Mundo inventarao os homens. 
Sendo pois a Poesia Pastoral a primeira origem de 
toda a erudicao humana, e os primeiros esforcos, 
que fizera5 as faculdades do homem para se puli- 
rem, e cultivarem, justamente me persuadi, que a 
Academia instituida toda para utilidade publica, e 
que alem de outros mais gloriosos, e louvaveis em- 
penhos, tomou a si o de dar a conhecer os princi- 
pios, e progressos da nossa Litteratura, havia de 
levar em gosto que hum Socio seu tratasse dos mere- 
cimentos dos nossos Poetas Bucolicos. Deste tra- 
balho, Senhores r posto que maior que minhas forcas, 
me quiz encarregar, por ser dos mais leves e faceis, 
que ta5 illustre corpo podia eommetter a algum de 
seus membros. 

Vos tratareis verdades sublimes, por extremo re- 
motas, e escondidas a commum comprehensao dos 
homens ; medireis o espaco immenso dos Ceos ; 
poreis Leis aos corpos mais vastos, mais distantes, 



372 PORTUGUESE 

e ate mais rebelcies do Universo ; coin vossas por- 
fiadas investigacoes, e rara sagacidade obrigareis a 
Natureza a que vos descubra, e patentee aquillo 
mesmo, em que ella punha maior estudo em occul- 
tar. Assim para felieidade dos outros homens aug- 
mentareis, e aperfeicoareis os seus conhecimentos ; 
mas sereis mu i to particularmente felices vos, e feliz 
a Patria, em cuja utilidade haveis de empregar os 
vossos talentos, e todos estes trabalhos, e fadigas : 
e ella vo lo sabera agradecer com o premio, que so 
desejao as almas gran des, do louvor e da gloria. Eu, 
gozando-me, e comprazendo-me do vosso alto mere- 
cimento, de que vos quizestes me coubesse tambem 
alguma parte, me contentarei com examinar a pro- 
priedade, e elegancia de huma palavra ; a verdade, 
novidade, e belleza de hum pensamento ; a inno- 
cencia, e sa singeleza de hum Pegureiro ; e isto 
jiropter aquae, rivum, ou quando muito, sub r avals 
arboris altae. 

Mas tornando ao meu assumpto, de que me flze- 
rao desviar os vossos justos louvores, naosao pouco 
relevantes, nem concorrem medianamente para a 
instruccao, e cultura dos homens os trabalhos dos 
Poetas. Negallo seria nao conhecer o modo, por 
que se dilatao, e aperfeicoa5 as nossas faculdades, e 
ignorar inteiramente a Historia dos varios progres- 
ses do entendimento humano. A restauracao das 
letras, com que se desterrou a ignorancia, e bar- 
baridade, a que nos tinhao reduzido as Nacoes 
do Norte, e as continuas irrupcoes dos Sarracenos, 
tem as suas sementes nos Trovadores Provencaes 
e Lombardos, que fructificando felizmente che- 
garao a produzir os dous abalisados engenhos de 
Dante, e Petrarca. Cultivada por estes dous gran- 
des homens, e por alguns mais seus contemporaneos 
a Lingua Toscana, preparou a Italia, e a sua imita- 
9'ao a toda a Europa para hum conhecimento pro- 
fundo da Lingua Latina, e da Grega. Com taes 



EXTRACTS. 373 

disposicoes, e auxilios se instruirao as Nacoes 
Europeas nas Artes, e Sciencias, e ein toda a sorte 
de erudicao daquelles sabios Povos ; e inflammadas 
cada vez mais no desejo de saber, rem levado muitas 
das Artes, e Sciencias dos antigos a hum ponto 
incrivel de perfeicao, &c. 



Analyse e Combinacoesjiloscyficas sobre a Elocucao e Estylo de 
Sa de Miranda, Ferreira, Bemardes, Caminha, e Camoes. 
Pr. Francisco THas. 

Quando entrei nesta composicao, julguei que 
devia tomar hum ponto fixo, clonde viesse dedu- 
zindo a sua analyse, e que o Sa de Miranda devia 
indispensavelmente formar a epoca, donde, segundo 
a ordem do tempo, havia de dimanar todo o seu 
progresso, como de hum escritor, que lancou os 
fundamentos da Poesia Portugueza. ^Ias antes que 
entrasse nesta diligencia, vi que me era de precisa 
necessidade fazer hum a descripcao exacta do estado 
em que se achava a Lingua, quando o Poeta 
Miranda appareceo, e sondar as qualidades princi- 
pals da composicao e estylo daquelle padre da Poesia 
Portugueza, donde passou para Ferreira, para Ber- 
nardes, para Caminha, e ultimamente para Camoes, 
o maior Poeta da Nacao, e o que mais enriqueceo, 
e apurou o nosso Idioma ; discorrendo por aquelles 
pontos, que mais me pareceraS dignos de compara- 
cao no genero Sublime, como mais nobre, e como 
aquelle que mais esforco pede da fantasia humana ; 
fazendo juizo de cada hum dos Poetas da Analyse, 
e hnalmente inclicando as origens donde nascerao as 
expressoes, e formulas combinadas ; no que julge ter 
satisfeito ao Assumpto, que he certamente mais 
difficultoso do que parece. 

Na execucao deste tao trabalhoso arffumento me 
conduzi, segundo as luzes. que pude adquirir ua 



374 PORTUGUESE 

lieao de Aristoteles, Cicero, Longino, Quintiliano, 
e muito mais na de Locke, Condillac, Du Marsais, 
e em especial na do sobretodos sabio Commentario, 
que o grande Voltaire fez as Obras de Pedro Cor- 
neille, onde se vem as regras do gosto na sua maior 
elevacao. 

Todas estas materias sao novas em Portugal, e 
por consequencia nao tive a quern seguir : e apezar 
dos defeitos, posso dizer, 

que aqui vera's presente 

Cousas, que juntas se dchao raramente. Camoes, Lus. 



Introducgao. 

H6 o talento da palavra a mais nobre faculdade 
do ente racional, como instrumento, com que nao 
so expoe as suas id6as, mas ate pinta os mais occultos 
sentimentos do espirito com rasgos ta5 vivos, e 
sublimes, que os faz passar aos coracoes mais izentos 
de interesse. Aquella Filosofia inata ao coraca5 do 
homem, que preside a todas as accoes, que mais o 
elevao, foi quem formou os sinaes representatives 
das suas ideas simplices, e compostas ; e quem, a 
forca de infinitas combinacoes, Ihe fez conceber o 
grande pensamento do transumpto mental consi- 
gnado nas palavras por huma successao de ideas nao 
interrompidas, cujo nexo constitue a pintura eterna 
nao so do fysico, mas, o que he mais prodigioso, do 
moral humano. 

Aquella mesma filosofia, que dirigindo e elevando 
o espirito humano clesde as id£as simplices ate as 
^mplexas, Ihe deo as primeiras nocoes da expressao 
simples he primitiva, como mais adaptada as necessi- 
dades do homem ; a proporcao que Ihe foi am- 
plianclo a esCera dos seus conhecimentos, Ihe foi 
rninistrando expressao complexa, isto he, figurada 
com a qual pinta aos olhos, e da corpo, e vida as 
mais sublimes abstraccoes, que pode conceber o 
entenclimento humanp. 



EXTRACTS. 375 

Deste immenso aggregado de ideas simplices, e 
compostas, como consequencia natural, procedeo a 
vivacidade da expressao, e a riqueza das Linguas, 
que se elevarao ao mais distincto grao de perfeicao, 
segundo o numero de acontecimentos, e revolucoes 
notaveis ; e muito mais segundo o trato frequente 
com as nacoes estranhas, e communicaqao social dos 
povos entre si ; por isso mesmo que das grandes 
crizes procede a effervescencia das paixoes, que 
pondo em movimento, e actividade a massa das 
ideas, gera novos pensamentos, e nova elocu^ao. 

Daqui se infere, que os melhores de todos os 
idiomas devem forcosamente ser os daquelles povos 
que mais revolucoes experimentarao, e que melhcv 
eonhecerao as ieis da Sociedade. Ve-se pois pello 
que nos ensina a historia, que as Nacoes mais puli- 
das e sabias, tanto na linguagem, como nos cos- 
tumes, forao quasi sempre as que situadas junto ao 
mar eonhecerao mais cedo a necessidade da com- 
municacao dos povos estranhos, por meio do Com- 
mercio ; ou aquellas, cujos acontecimentos Ihes 
derao lugar distincto nos anna.es do genero hu- 
mano. 

Por isso vemos, que as Linguas geraes do Malabar, 
Coromandel, e da China regioes maritimas, assim 
como tambem a Arabe, sao as mais bellas, e antigas 
de todas as Linguas da Asia. Os Povos da Grecia, 
que gozando do mais formoso espectaculo da Na- 
tureza, experimentarao tantas, e tao notaveis revo- 
lucoes, inventarao o mais significative), e harmonico 
de todos os Idiomas, onde se achao consignados os 
mais insignes monumentos do g6nio, e donde pro- 
cedeo a magestade da Lingua dos Ronianos, nao 
mais famosos pelas suas conquistas, que pelos es- 
criptos immortaes, com que illustrarao os Seculos. 
O mesmo se deve considerar dos Italianos, Fran- 
cezes, Hespanhoes, e Inglezes, cujos Idiomas tendo 
erigem na Lingua Latina, se tern elevado ao mais 



376 PORTUGUESE 

alto ponto de perfeicao possivel, e nos quaes exis- 
tem monumentos para quern todo o louvor he dimi- 
nuto. 

Mas este concurso de circunstancias parece, que 
ainda nao foi a causa sufficiente da perfeicao das 
Linguas : ainda ali se diviza hum vacuo, que pre- 
ciza ser occupado. Aqui vem a Poesia com toda a 
sua pompa e magestade, desatando or voos, pulindo 
c aperfeicoando os Idiomas, dando a tudo alma, 
e vida, ja elevando-se aos maiores assumptos nos 
louvores do Ente Supremo, e no Panegyrico dos 
grandes homens, persuadindo a imitacao das accoes 
nobres, e dignas dos mais distinctos applausos. Ella 
lhe abre os seus thesouros : ella os enriquece ; ella lhes 
da forca, elegancia, e harmonia, sem o que seriao huns 
cadaveres seccos, e inanimados. Sem a Poesia, nada 
seriao talvez os Gregos, e os Romanos, que tanto 
encherao o mundo com a fama das suas victorias, v 
com a grandeza das suas ac9oes, e muito mais com 
a perfei9ao, com que cultivarao todas as Artes de 
genio, de que tantos, e tao admiraveis testemunhos 
nos deixarao principalmente nos seus escritos, A 
Poesia pois, que tenclo entre os antigos hum carac- 
ter de harmonia muito diverso da Poesia moderna, 
veio pella ignorancia dos Seculos a tal decadencia, 
que pouco faltou par ficar inteiramente ignorada. 

Das reliquias da Lingua Latina, e Grega se 
formarao os Idiomas modernos, com di versa Syn- 
taxe ; e com elles resuscitarao, ou por melhor dizer, 
formarao os Provencaes huma Poesia toda nova na 
disposicao das cesuras, e combinacoes harmonicas. 

Os Italianos restauradores de quasi todas as 
Artes, forao os primeiros, que tratarao a Poesia com 
dignidade, aperfeicoando os metros, e harmonias, que 
os mesmos Provencaes, e Sicilianos tinhao inventado; 
e tanto se applicarao a ella, que ja no decimo quarto 
Seculo era famoso Poeta o celebre Dante, quern 
fixou todas as accentuacoes harmonicas do hende- 



EXTRACTS. 377 

casyllabo, que ficou sendo o mais necessario metro 
da Poesia Italiana, Castelhana, e Portugueza. 

Entraraoos Mouros em Hespanha, e com elles a 
Poesia : porem o desassocego da guerra nao deo 
lugar aos antigos possuidores desta Regiao, tao 
infestada de Nacoes estranhas, a cultivar a Poesia 
seriamente, nem a pulir os seus Idiomas tao cedo 
como os Italianos. Da longa dominacao, que os 
Romanos tiverao em Hespanha se havia nellaintro- 
duzido o uzo da Lingua Latina, que veio a ser vul- 
gar : della, e de varios dialectos barbaros, se forma- 
rao os dous mais bellos, e sonoros Idiomas de Hes- 
panha, e talves da Europa, o Castelhano. e o Por- 
tuguez. 

Estas duas Linguas se forao igualmente aper- 
feicoando, de sorte que a hum mesmo tempo che- 
garao ao seu auge. Com tudo, sendo a Nacao 
Portugueza mais moderna, e occupando muito menos 
espaeo de terreno, que a Castelhana, veio mais cedo 
a produzir monumentos, que assaz distinguira5, e 
acreditarao o seu Idioma. As historias de Joao de 
Barros dadas a luz nomeio do Seculo decimo sexto, 
e traduzidas em todas as Linguas cultas da Europa, 
fizerao mostrar ao Mundo litterario, que a Lingua 
Portugueza era a mais filha da - Latina. Hum 
numero sufficiente de Escritores, que logo depois 
vierao, acabarao de determinar o genio da Lingua, 
cujo caracter he elegancia, e perspicuidade. Sendo 
pois a Lingua Portugueza desde a sua origem mui 
doce e sonora, resultado natural da quantidade 
proporcionada das suas vogaes e consoantes, das 
quaes as primeiras, nao sao tao frequentes e con- 
junctas, que enfraquegao a harmonia, e facao lan- 
guida e pouco notacla, como se ve na Lingua Italiana ; 
nem as segundas com nimia frequencia se atro- 
pellao, e produzem sons rudes e asperos, como nas 
Linguas do Norte. Todas estas felices disposicoes, 
al^m do genio, convid&vao a Nacdo a cultura da 



378 PORTUGUESE 

Poesia para que sempre teve natural inclinacao. 
Deixemos a miuda investigacao destas causas, a 
qual sera mais propria de quern tentar escrever a 
historia de Lingua. Deixemos tambem as Poesias 
anteriores ao Seculo de quinhentos, muitas das 
quaes existem em algumas Bibliothecas antigas, 
como as d' El Rei D. Diniz, na do Convento da 
Ordem de Christo em Thomar, e outras andao em- 
pregadas no celebre Cancioneiro de Resende, col- 
leccao preciosa, dondese podem extrabir as maiores 
luzes a respeito da Natureza, e origem da nossa 
Poesia : e comecando a tratar do auge a que esta 
elevou a Lingua Portugueza; as gracas e numero 
que lhe communicou ; principiaremos a discorrer 
de huma 6poca mais vizinha a nos, e estaseja deter- 
minada pelo N fam6so Sa de Miranda. 

Veja-mos pois os assumptos, que este Poeta tra- 
tou, a qualidade de sua imitacao em geral, o uzo 
que fez do hendecasyllabo, ate ao sen tempo pouco 
ou nada conhecido em Portugal, e em toda a Hes- 
panha ; como tratou, como aperfeicoou o Soneto, 
do qual se deve reputar inventor entre nos, novas 
gracas que accrescentou a nossa Lingua, e como 
finalmente preparou aos Poetas, que Ibe succederao, 
hum novo caminho para se elevarem at6 a immortal 
Lusiada. 

Mas antes que entremos neste exame, vejamos 
primeiro o estado em que o Sa de Miranda, achou o 
Idioma. 

A Nacao Portugueza, que ate ao fim do reinado 
de D. Fernando jazia na ignorancia, occupada uni- 
camente da cultura das suas terras, quanto lhe era 
preciso para o consumo interior do Reino, e para 
entreter huma ligeira sombra de commercio ex- 
terior, continuamente vexado pella tyrannia Ara- 
bica, que infestando os mares, eraeterno obstaculo a 
navega^ao ; vivendo como desterrada na solida5 dos 
campos, sem communicacao, nem policia, fallava 



EXTRACTS. 379 

huma linguagem informe, e grosseira, chea de sons 
rudes, que as Linguas barbaras lhe tinhao commu- 
nicado ; e a pezar de ter huma origem tao pura, 
como a Lingua Latina, donde procedia, so conser- 
vava alguma energfa natural nascida das significa- 
nces primitivas das suas vozes, que, alem de serem 
maculadas de infinitas anomalias, e dissonancias, 
erao privadas de translacoes, que da5 forea e eleva- 
cao a os Idiomas. Chea pois de construcc5es erro- 
neas, de diphtongos asperos, e desinencias rudes, 
pobre de termos, sem idea do nexo, que subsiste 
nas partieulas, sem syntaxe, sem harmonia o seu 
periodo incerto, e desunido vacillara sem caracter. 

A grande revolucao de D. Joao I. fazendo a mais 
viva commocao no genio dos Portuguezes, com ella 
lhe vi^rao novos estimulos de gloria, que eleva o 
espirito ; novas emprezas, novos pensamentos, nova 
forca, nova energia as suas enuneiacoes ; novos 
objectos do discurso, e nova linguagem. Hum 
Latim barbaro ate alii organ o das Leis, e instru- 
mentos publicos, cessou de ser a linguagem do 
Foro. 

Da conquista cle Ceuta nasceo a idea, a grande 
idea dos descubri mentos, que mostrando a necessi- 
dade de cultivar as Mathematicas, e a Astronomia, 
taes quaes existiao naquelles tempos obscuros, 
alargou a esfera da Mechanica, que fazendo novas 
investigacoes sobreaaccao, dos ventos, e resistencia 
das agoas, extrahindo a somraa da combinaeao dos 
movimentos resultantes da accao e reaccao destes 
dous Elementos, alcangou mais perfeito conheci- 
mento das leis dos liquidos, e do equilibrio, e aper- 
feieoou finalmente a Arte de navegar. Novos 
Astros, novos mares e costas, novas ilhas, novos 
mundos enchem de admiracao todo o universo. 



380 PORTUGUESE 

EXTRACTOS POETICOS, 



From the third Canto of the Lasiad of Camoes. 



ESTA'VAS linda Inez posta em sossego, 
De teus annos colhendo o doce fruto, 
Naquelle engano da alma, 16do, e cego, 
Que a fortuna nao deixa durar muito : 
Nos saudosos campos do Mondego, 
De teus formosos olhos nunca enxuto, 
Aos montes ensinando, e as ervfnhas. 
O norne, que no peito escrito tinhas. 

Do teu principe alii te respondiao 

As lembran^as, que na alma lhe moravao, 
Que sempre ante seus olhos te traziao : 
Quando dos teus formosos se apartavao : 
De noite em doces sonhos, que mentiao, 
De dia em pensamentos, que voavao : 
E quanto em fim cuidava, e quanto via, 
E'rao tudo memorias de alegria. 

D'outras bellas senhoras, e princezas, 
Os dezejados talamos engeita, 
Que tudo em fim, tu puro amor desprezas, 
Quando hum gesto, suave te sug^ita : 
Vendo estas namoradas estranh^zas, 
O velho pay sesudo, que respeita, 
O murmurar do povo e a fantasia, 
Do filho, que casarse nao queria. 

Tirar Inez ao mundo determina, 
Por lhe tirar o filho, que tern preso, 
Crendo co'sangue so da morte indina, 
Matar do firme amor o fogo aceso : 
Que furor consentio, que a espada fina, 
Que pode sustentar o grande peso 



EXTRACTS. 381 

Do furor; Mauro, fosse levantada, 
Contra huma fraca dama delicada ? 

Traziao-na os horriferos algozes 
Ante o Rey, ja movido a piedade, 
Mas o povo com falsas, e ferozes 
Razoens, a morte crua o persuade. 
Ella com tristes e piedosas vozes, 
Sahidas so de magoa e saudade 
Do seu Principe e filhos que deixava, 
Que mais que a propria morte a magoava. 

Para o ceo cristalino levantando, 
Com lagrimas os olhos piedosos, 
Os olhos, porque as maos lhe estava atando 
Hum dos duros ministros rigorosos : 
E depois nos meninos atentando, 
Que ta5 queridos tin ha, e tao mimosos, 
Cuja orfandade como mai temia, 
Para o avo cruel assim dizia. 

Se ja nas brutas feras, cuja mente 
Natura fez cruel de nascimento ; 
E nas aves agrestes, que somente 
Nas rapinas aerias tern o intento, 
Compequenas criancas vio a gente, 
Terem tao piedoso sentimento, 
Como coa may de Nino ja mostrarao, 
E cos Irmaos, que Roma edificarao : 

O'tu que tens de humano o gesto, e o peito, 
Se de humano he matar huma donzella 
Fraca, e sem forca so por ter sugeito 
O coracao, a quern soube venc^lla, 
A estas criancinhas tern respeito 
Pois o nao tens a morte escura della, 
Movate a piedade sua, e minha, 
Pois te nao move a culpa, que nao tlnha. 

E se vencendo a Maura resistencia, 
A morte sabes dar com fogo e ferro ? 



382 PORTUGUESE 

Sabe tambem dar vida com clemencia, 
A quern para perdella nao fez erro. 
Mas se te assi merece esta innocencia, 
P6e-me perpetuo e misero desterro, 
Na Scythia fria, ou la na Libia ardente, 
Onde em lagrimas viva eternamente. 

P6e-me onde se use toda a feridade, 
Entre leoens, e tigres ; e verei 
Se nelles achar posso a piedade, 
Que entre peitos humanos nao achei ; 
Alii co' amor intrinseco, e vontade, 
Naquelle por quern morro, criarei 
Estas reliquias suas, que aqui viste, 
Que refrigerio sejao da mai triste. ' 

Queria perdoar-lhe o rey benino, 
Movido das palavras, que o magoao, 
Mas o pertinaz povo, e seu destino, 
(Que desta sorte o quiz) lhe na5 perdoao 
Arrancao das espadas de aeo fino, 
Os que por bom tal feito alii pregoaS : 
Contra huma dama, 6 peitos carniceiros, 
Ferozes vos mostraes, e cavalleiros ? 

Qual contra a linda moca Policena, 
Consolacao extrema da may velha, 
Porque a sombra de Achiles a condena, 
C o ferro o duro Pirro se aparelha : 
Mas ella os olhos, com que o ar serena 
(Bern como paciente, e mansa ovelha) 
Na misera may postos, que endoudece, 
Ao duro sacrificio se ofFerece : 

Taes contra Inez os brutos matadores, 
No colo de alabastro, que sostinha 
As obras, co que amor matou de amores 
A'quelle, que depois a fez ralnha : 
As espadas banhando, e as brancas flores, 
\Que ella dos olhos seus regadas tinha, 



EXTRACTS. 383 

Se incarnicavao fervidos, e irosos, 
No futuro castigo nao cuidosos. 

Bern pucleras, 6 sol, da vista destes, 
Teus rayos apartar aquelle dia, 
Como da seva mesa de Thyestes 
Quando os filhos por mao de Atreu comia : 
Vos 6 concavos valles que pud6stes, 
A voz extrema ouvir da boca fria, 
O nome do seu Pedro, que lhe ouvistes, 
Por muito grande espaco repetistes. 

Assi como a bonina, que cortada 
Antes de tempo foi, Candida e bella, 
S^ndo das maos lascivas mal tratada, 
Da menina, que a trouxe na capella, 
O cheiro traz perdido, e a cor murchada, 
Tal esta morta a pallida donz611a, 
S6cas do rosto as rosas, e perdida 
A branca, e viva cor, co' a doce vida. 

As filhas do Mondego a morte escura, 
Longo tempo chorando memorarao, 
E por memoria eterna em fonte pura, 
As lagrimas choradas transfbrmarao, 
O nome lhe puzerao, que inda dura, 
Dos amores de Inez, que alii passarao ; 
Vede, que fresca fonte rega as flores, 
Que lagrimas' sao agoa, e o nome amores. 

From the fifth Canto of the same. 



Porem ja cincos soes ^rao passados, 
Que dalli nos partiramos, cortando 
Os mares nunca de outrem navegados, 
Prosperamente os ventos assoprando ; 
Quando huma noite estando descuidados, 
Na cortadora proa vigiando, 



384 PORTUGUESE 

Huma nuvem que os ares escurece, 
Sobre nossas cab£cas apparece. 
Tam temerosa vinha, e carregada, 

Que poz nos coracoens hum grande rnedo, 
Bramindo o negro mar de ldnge brada, 
Como se desse em vao n'algum rochedo : 
O' potestade, disse, sublimada, 
Que ameaco divino, ou que segredo, 
Este clima, e este mar nos apresenta, 
Que mor cousa parece, que tormenta ? 

Na5 acabava, quando huma figura, 
Se nos mostra no ar, robusta, e valida, 
De disforme, e grandissima estatura, 
O rosto carregado, a barba esquallida : 
Os olhos, encovados, e a postura 
Medonha, e ma, e a cor terrena, e pallida, 
O boca negra, os dentes amarellos. 

Tam grande era de membros, que bem posso 
Certificarte, que este era o segundo, 
De Rhodes estranhissimo Colosso, 
Que hum dos sete milagres foi do mundo : 
Co' hum torn de voz nos fallahorrendoe grosso, 
Que pareceo sahir do mar profundo, 
Arrepiaose as carnes, e o cabello, 
A mi, e a todos, so de ouvilo, e velo. 

E disse, o'gente ousada mais que quantas 
No mundo cometterao grandes cousas ; 
Tu, que por guerras cruas, taes, e tantas, 
E por trabalhos vaos nunca repousas, 
Pois vedados terminos quebrantas, 
E nave^ar meus longos mares ousas, 
Que eu tan to tempo ha que guardo, e ten no 
Nunca arados de estranho ou proprio lenho ; 

Pois vens ver os segredos escondidos 
Da natureza, e do humido elemento, 
A nenhum grande huma.no concedidos 
De nobre ou de immortal merecimento : 



EXTRACTS. 385 

Ouve os damnos de mi, que apercebidos 
Estao a teu sobejo atrevimento, 
Por todo o largo mar, e pela terra, 
Que inda has-de subjugar com dura gu6rra. 

Sabe que quantas naos esta viagem, 
Que tu fazes, fizerem de atrevidas, 
Inimiga terao esta paragem 
Com ventos, e tormentas desmedidas. 
E da primeira armada, que passagem 
Fize> por estas ondas insoffridas, 
Eu farei de improviso tal castigo, 
Que seja mor o damno que o perigo. 

Aqui esp6ro tomar, se na5 me engano, 
De quem me descubrio alta vinganca ; 
E nao se acabara so nisto o damno 
De vossa pertinace confianca ; 
Antes em vossas n&os vereis cada anno 
(Se h6 verdade o que meu juizo alcanca) 
Naufragios, perdicoes de toda sorte, 
Que o menor mal de todos seja a morte. 

E do primeiro illustre que a ventura 
Com fama alta fizer tocar os Ceos, 
Serei eterna e nova sepultura, 
Por juizos incognitos de Deos : 
Aqui pora da Turca armada dura 
Os soberbos e prosperos tropheos 
Comigo de seus damnos o ameaca 
A destruida Quiloa, com Mombaca, 

Outro tambem vira de honrada fama, 
Liberal, Cavalleiro, e namorado, 
E comsigo trara a formosa Dama, 
Que Amor por gram merce lhe tera dado : 
Triste ventura e negro fado os chama 
Neste terreno meu, que duro, e irado, 
2C 



3SG PORTUGUESE 

Os deixara de hum cru naufragio vivos, 
Para verem trabalhos excessivos. 

Verao morrer com tome os filhos charos, 
Em tanto amor gerados, e nascidos : 
VeraS os Cafres asperos, e avaros, 
Tirar a linda Dama os seus vestidos : 
Os crystallinos membros, e preclaros, 
A* calma, ao frio, ao ar verao despidos ; 
Despois de ter pizado longamente 
Co* os delicados pes a area ardente. 

E veraS mais os olhos que escaparem 
De tanto mal, de tanta desventura, 
Os dous amantes miseros ficarem 
Na f6rvida e implacabil espessura. 
Alii, despois que as pedras abrandarem 
Com lagrimas de dor, de magoa pura, 
Abracados, as almas soltarao 
Da formosa e miserrima prisa5. 

Mais hia por diante o monstro horrendo 
Dizendo nossos fados, quando akado 
Lhe dice eu : quern es tu que esse estupendo 
Corpo, certo me tern maravilhado ? 
A boca, e os olhos negros retorcendo, 
E dando hum espantoso e grande brado, 
Me respondeo com vos pesada e amara, 
Como quern da pergunta lhe pezara : 

Eu sou aquelle occulto e grande Cabo 

A quern chamais vos outros Tcrmentorio ; 
Que nunca a Ptolemeo, Pomponio, Estrabo, 
Plinio, e quantos passarao fui notorio. 
Aqui toda a Africana costa acabo 
Neste meu nunca visto Promontorio, 
Que para o Polo Antarctico se estend 
A quern vossa ousadia tanto offende. 



EXTRACTS. 387 

Fui dos filhos asperrimos da Terra, 
Qual Encelado, Egeo, e o Centimano ; 
Chameime Adamastor, e fui na guerra 
Contra o que vibra os raios de Vulcano : 
Nao que puzesse serra sobre serra, 
Mas conquistando as ondas do Occeano 
Fui Capitao do mar, por onde andava 
A armada de Neptuno, que eu buscava. 

Amores da alta Esposa de Peleo 

Me fizeram tomar tamanha empreza, 

Todas as Deosas desprezei do C6o, 

So por amar das aguas a Princeza : 

Hum dia a vi, co' as filhas de Nereo, 

Sahir nua na praia ; e logo pr&za 

A vontade senti, de tall maneira 

Que inda nao sinto cousa que mais queira. 

Como fosse impossivel alcancalla 
Pela grand6za fea de meu g^sto, 
Determinei por armas de tomalla, 
E a Doris este caso manifesto : 
De m&do a Deosa entao por mi lhe falla ; 
Mas ella co* hum formoso riso honesto 
Respondeo : Qual sera o amor bastante 
De Nympha que sustente o de hum Gigante ? 

Com tudo, por livrarmos o Oceano : 
De tanta guerra, eu buscarei maneira, 
Com que com minha honra escuse o damno : 
Tal resposta me torna a mensageira. 
Eu que cahir nao pude neste engano 
(Que h6 grande dos amantes a cegueira) 
Encheram-me com grandes abond^ncas 
O peito de dezejos, e esperancas. 

Ja nescio, ja da guerra desistindo, 
Huma noite de Doris promettida, 
Me appar^ce de longe o g^sto lindo, 
Da branca Thetis, unicadespida : 



388 PORTUGUESE 

Como doudo corrf, ne longe abrindo 
Os bracos, para aquella que era vida 
Deste corpo ; e comeco os olhos bellos 
A Ihe beijar, as faces, e os cabellos. 

Oh que nao sei de nojo como o conte ! 
Que crendo ter nos bracos quetn amava, 
Abracado me achei co' hum duro m6nte 
De aspero mato, e de espessura brava : 
Estando co' hum penedo fronte afronte, 
Que eu pelo roslo angelico apertava, 
Nao fiquei homem nao, mas mudo, e quedo, 
E junto de hum pen6do outro penedo. 

O' Nympha a mais formosa do Oce&no : 
Ja que minha presenca nao te agrada, 
Que te custava ter-me neste engano, 
Ou fosse monte, nuvem, sonho, ou nada ? 
De aqui me parto irado, e quasi insano, 
Da magoa, e Ha deshonra alii passada, 
A buscar outro mundo, onde nao visse 
Quern de meu pranto, e de meu mal se risse. 

Erao ja neste tempo meus irmaos 

Vencidos, e em miseria extrema postos ; 
E, por mais segurar-se os Deoses vaos, 
Aguns a varios montes sotopostos : 
E como contra o Ceo nao valem maos, 
Eu que chorando andava meus desgostos 
Comecei a sentir do fado imigo, 
Por meus atrevimentos, o castigo. 

Converte-se-me a came em terra dura, 
Em penedos os ossos se flzeram : 
Estes m£mbros que ves, e esta figura, 
Por estas longas aguas se estenderam : 
Emfim minha grandissima estatura 
Neste remoto cabo converteram 
Os Deoses ; e por mais dobradas magoas, 
Me anda Thetis cercando destas agoas. 






EXTRACTS. 389 

Assim contava, e co* hum medonho choro, 
Subito dante os olhos se apartdu ; 
Desfez-se a nuvem negra, e co' hum sonoro 
Bramido muito longe o mar soou. 
Eu, levantando as maos ao sancto c6ro 
Dos Anjos, que ta5 longe nos guiou, 
A Deos pedi, que removesse os duros 
Casos que Adamastor, contou futuros. 



From the second Canto of the same. 



Ouvio-lhe 6stas palavras piedosas 
A formosa Dione, e commovlda, 
De entre as Nymphas se vai, que saudosas 
Ficarao desta subita partida. 
Ja pen^tra as estrellas luminosas ; 
Ja na terceira Esfera recebida 
Avante passa ; e la no sexto C^o 
Para onde estava o Padre se moveo. 

E como hia afFrontada do caminho, 
Tao formosa no g6sto se mostrava, 
Que as estreilas, o C6o, e o ar vizinho 
E tudo quanto a via namorava. 
Dos olhos onde faz seu filho o ninho 
Huns espiritos vivos inspirava, 
Com que os Polos gelados accendfa, 
E tornava de fogo a Esf6ra fria. 

E por mais namorar o Soberano 

Padre, de quern foi sempre amada, e chara, 
Se lhe apresenta assi como ao Troiano 
Na selva Idea j4 se apresentara. 
Se a vfra o cacador, que o vulto humano 
Perdeo, vendo a Diana na agua cldra, 
Nunca os famlntos galgos o mataram ; 
Que primeiro desejos o acabaram, 



390 PORTUGUESE 

Os crespos fios de ouro se espraziam 
Pelo colo, que a neve escurecia : 
Andando, as lacteas tetas lhe tremiam 
Com quern Amor brincava, e na5 se via : 
Da alva pretina chamas lhe sahiam, 
Onde o menfno as almas accendia : 
Pelas lisas columnas lhe trepavam. 
Desejos, que como hira se enrolavam. 

Co' hum delgado cendal as partes cobre, 
De quern vergonha he natural reparo : 
Porem nem tudo esconde, nem descobre 
O v£o dos roxos lirios pouco avaro : 
Mas para que o desejo accenda, e dobre, 
Lhe poe diante aquelle objecto raro. 
Ja se sentem no Ceo, por toda a parte, 
Ci umes em Vulcano, amor em Marte. 

E mostrando no angelico semblante 
Co' o riso huma tristeza nnist«ra,da ; 
Como dama que foi do incauto am^nte 
Em brincos amorosos mal tratada ; 
Que se queixa, e se ri n' hum mesmo instante, 
E se mostra entfe alegre magoada ; 
Desta arte a Deosa, a quern nenhuma igua!a, 
Mais mimosa que triste a o Padre* fala. 



From the first Idyl of Boccage. 



A'foz do Tejo, em bron'ca penedia, 
Minada pelas ondns salitrosas, 
Prisioneiro de amor Tritao gemia. 

Luziao lhe as espadoas escamosas, 
Sustentava o maritimo instrumento, 
O buzio atroador nas maos callosas : 



EXTRACTS. 391 

Conchas da c^r do Uquido Elemento 
Parte do corpo enorme lhe vestiao, 
Igual na ligeireza ao proprio vento : 

Da barba salsas gotas lhe cahia5, 
E nos olhos, que Amor affogueava, 
Em borbotoes as lagrimas ferviao 

Lilia que hum Bosque proximo habitava, 
Lilia a Napea, desdenhosa, e bella, 
Amorosos clamores lhe arrancava : 

Hum dia a vio na praia, e so de vella 
Seu coracao feroz enfeiticado, 
Voou, gemendo, para os olhos della. 

Das entranhas do Pelago salgado, 

Louco de Amores, louco de suadades. 
O queixoso Amador tinha saltado : 

Do Pai, que abafa as negras tempestades, 
Ja, seu voraz tormento era sabido, 
E das outras Equoreas Divindades. 

De aereas esperancas illudido, 
Grao tempo seu espirito saud6so, 
Rastejando a cruel, vagou perdido ; 

Grao tempo glorias vaas sonhou teimoso, 
Antes que desse fructuosa entrada 
A o acre desengano, o peito ancioso. &c. 



FIM. 



T. C. HANSARD, Paternoster- Row Press. 



4 



lSja> 



23 



UBF»"06 



Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proceaj 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologieS 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATI^ 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Township, PA 16066 
(724)779-2111 



LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 





III! 


1111111111111111 




00022&.A3111 



